Stardom FCN/FCJ Guide: User's Manual

User’s
Manual
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ Guide
IM 34P02Q01-01E
IM 34P02Q01-01E
21st Edition
Blank Page
i
Introduction
n About This Manual
This user’s manual (IM 34P02Q01-01E) describes the overview, operation, and maintenance of
the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ. This manual is written for all those who will be using the
Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ.
Other than this manual, detailed descriptions of the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ and its
tools are provided in the help file.
Refer to the help file when using each tool.
n Organization of This Manual

This manual consists of the following chapters:
l PART-A Hardware
This chapter describes the hardware of the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ, including the
names, specifications, locations, and connections for each component unit.
l PART-B Software
This chapter describes the function overview of the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ, as well as
the tools used to perform various settings.
This part is helpful in understanding what kinds of operations can be achieved on the
Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ.
l PART-C Operation and Maintenance

This chapter describes the operation and maintenance of the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ.
l PART-D Other Features and Settings

This chapter describes other topics regarding the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ, including the
licenses and IP address settings.
Media No. IM 34P02Q01-01E 19th Edition : Mar. 2014(YK) IM 34P02Q01-01E 19th Edition : Mar.24,2014-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright © 2002, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii
Safety Precautions
n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
• In order to protect the system controlled by the product and the product itself and ensure
safe operation, observe the safety precautions described in this instruction manual. We
assume no liability for safety if users fail to observe these instructions when operating the
product.
• If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided by
this instrument may be impaired.
• If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the product or for
the product itself, prepare it separately.
• Be sure to use the spare parts approved by Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereafter
simply referred to as YOKOGAWA) when replacing parts or consumables.
• Modification of the product is strictly prohibited.
• The following symbols are used in the product and instruction manual to indicate that there
are precautions for safety:
Indicates that caution is required for operation. This symbol is placed on the product to refer
the user to the instruction manual in order to protect the operator and the equipment against
dangers such as electrical shocks. In the instruction manuals you will find precautions to
avoid physical injury or death of the operator, including electrical shocks.
Identifies a protective grounding terminal. Before using the product, ground the terminal.
Identifies a functional grounding terminal. Before using the product, ground the terminal.
Indicates an AC supply.
Indicates a DC supply.
Indicates that the main switch is ON.
Indicates that the main switch is OFF.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 19th Edition : Mar.24,2014-00

iii
n Notes on Handling Manuals

• Please hand over the user’s manuals to your end users so that they can keep the manuals
on hand for convenient reference.
• Please read the information thoroughly before using the product.
• The purpose of these manuals is not to warrant that the product is well suited to any
particular purpose but rather to describe the functional details of the product.
• No part of the manuals may be transferred or reproduced without prior written consent from
YOKOGAWA.
• YOKOGAWA reserves the right to make improvements in the manuals and product at any
time, without notice or obligation.
• If you have any questions, or you find mistakes or omissions in the manuals, please contact
our sales representative or your local distributor.
n Warning and Disclaimer

The product is provided on an “as is” basis. YOKOGAWA shall have neither liability nor
responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any direct or indirect loss or damage arising
from using the product or any defect of the product that YOKOGAWA can not predict in advance.
n Notes on Hardware
l Appearance and Accessories

Check the following when you receive the product:
• Appearance
• Standard accessories
Contact our sales representative or your local distributor if the product’s coating has come off, it
has been damaged, or there is shortage of required accessories.
l Model and Suffix Codes

The name plate on the product contains the model and suffix codes. Compare them with those in
the general specification to make sure the product is the correct one. If you have any questions,
contact our sales representative or your local distributor.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 1st Edition : Apr.24,2002-00

iv
n Symbol Marks
Throughout this manual, you will find several different types of symbols are used to identify
different sections of text. This section describes these icons.
CAUTION
Identifies instructions that must be observed in order to avoid physical injury and electric
shock or death of the operator.
WARNING
Identifies instructions that must be observed in order to prevent the software or hardware
from being damaged or the system from becoming faulty.
IMPORTANT
Identifies important information required to understand operations or functions.
TIP
Identifies additional information.
SEE ALSO
Identifies a source to be referred to.
Clicking a reference displayed in green can call up its source, while clicking a reference
displayed in black cannot.

v
n Cautions for Safely Applying the Device
l Standard
IMPORTANT
Different standards are applied according to the types of equipment. For details and the newest
information, refer to the hardware general specifications (GS) for each equipment.
Table Compliant Standards

Item Standards
CSA CAN/CSA-C22.2, No.61010-01
EN 61010-1 (*4)
CE Marking Low Voltage
Safety standards (*1)(*2)(*3)(*10) EN 61010-2-201 (*4)
Directive
EN 61010-2-030
EAC Marking CU TR 004 (*17)
EN 55011 Class A Group 1, (emission) (*5)
EN 61000-6-2 (immunity) (*1)(*6)(*7)
CE Marking EMC Directive (*4)
EN 61000-3-2 (*2)
EMC standards (*10) EN 61000-3-3 (*2)(*8)
RCM EN 55011 Class A Group 1 (*5)
KC Marking Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard
EAC Marking CU TR 020 (*17)
Class I Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4
Class 3600:2011
FM Nonincendive (*11)
Class 3611:2004
Class 3810:2005
II 3 G Ex nA nC II C T4 Gc (*14)
II 3 G Ex nA II C T4 Gc (*15)
ATEX Type "n" (*4)(*12)(*13) EN 60079-0:2009
EN 60079-0:2012/A11:2013
Standards for HazardousLocation EN 60079-15:2010
Equipment (*9)(*10) Class I Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.0-M91
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.0.4-04
CSA Non-Incendive (*11)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 157-92
C22.2 No. 213-M1987
TN-078
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
IECEx Type “n” (*1) (*16) IEC 60079-0:2011
IEC 60079-15:2010
*1: For the rack mountable devices, DIN rail mountable devices, and wall mountable devices to meet the Safety Standards and EMC
Standards, the devices must be installed in a lockable metal cabinet. The cabinet must conform to IEC/EN/CSA 61010-2-201 or
provide degrees of protection IP3X or above and IK09 or above.
*2: FCJ is out of support.
*3: For ensuring the FCN hardware to satisfy the safety standards, the dedicated breakers in the power supply side must be installed
and conform to the following specifications.
• [CSA] CSA C22.2 No.5 or UL 489
• [CE Marking] EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-3
*4: NFDR541 is compliant with the standards only when the voltage of 24 V DC or less is applied to its output terminal.
*5: A Class A hardware device is designed for use in the industrial environment. Please use this device in the industrial environment
only.
*6: For lightning surge immunity, a device such a lightning arrester needs to be installed externally. Some module can select a
pressure clamp terminal block with surge absorber. For details, see Terminal Block, GS 34P02Q41-01E.
*7: When using the NFLP121, mount one ferrite core (A1193MN) on the NFLP121 side of the PROFIBUS cable to meet the EMC
standards.
*8: The specified magnitude of the voltage drop determined by the cable wiring length needs be met.
*9: Refer to TI 34P02Q91-01E for the products meeting NI.
*10: For modules conforming to each standards, refer to ”Table List of FCN/FCJ’s Modules and Modules Conforming to Standards”.
*11: To be compliant with these standards, the FCN/FCJ hardware needs to be installed in a lockable metal cabinet.
*12: When FCN/FCJ is used under the ATEX Type “n” environment, the Instruction Manual, IM 34P02Q11-02E “Explosion Protection
of FCN/FCJ Products” is required for safer installation and wiring.
*13: To be compliant with these standards, the FCN/FCJ hardware needs to be installed in a lockable metal cabinet of IP54 or higher
protection rating.
*14 : Applied for NFDR541.
*15 : Applied for products except *14.
*16 : IECEx Type “n” certifivation is only applied to FCN-RTU
*17: FCN-500 is out of support.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr 28,2016-00

vi
In relation to the CE Marking, the manufacturer and the authorised representative for the Product
in the EEA are indicated below:
• Manufacturer:
Yokogawa Electric Corporation (2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, Japan)
• Authorised representative in the EEA:
Yokogawa Europe B.V. (Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, The Netherlands)
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr 28,2016-00

vii
Table List of FCN/FCJ’s Modules and Modules Conforming to Standards (1/4)
Type Model Function
FCJ NFJT100 Autonomous Controller FCJ
Base NFBU200 Base module (long)
module NFBU050 Base module (short)
NFPW441 Power supply module (100 to 120 V AC input)
Power NFPW442 Power supply module (220 to 240 V AC input)
supply
module NFPW444 Power supply module (24 V DC input)
NFPW426 Power supply module (12 V DC input, 24 V DC input)
NFCP501 CPU module for FCN (with 2 Ethernet ports)
CPU NFCP502 CPU module for FCN (with 4 Ethernet ports)
module NFCP100 CPU module for FCN
NFCP050 CPU module for FCN-RTU
SB bus
repeat NFSB100 SB bus repeat module for FCN
module
NFAI141 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Non-Isolated)
NFAV141 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-channel, Non-Isolated)
NFAV142 Analog Input Module (-10 to +10V, 16-channel, Non-Isolated)
Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output,
NFAI841
Non-Isolated)
NFAB841 Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, Non-Isolated)
NFAV542 Analog Output Module (-10 to +10V, 16-channel, Non-Isolated)
Analog NFAI143 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Isolated)
I/O NFAI543 Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Isolated)
Modules NFAV144 Analog Input Module (-10 to +10V, 16-channel, Isolated)
(*1) NFAV544 Analog Output Module (-10 to +10V, 16-channel, Isolated)
NFAT141 TC/mV Input Module (16-channel, Isolated)
NFAR181 RTD Input Module (12-channel, Isolated)
NFAI135 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 8-channel, Isolated channels)
NFAI835 Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA, 4-channel input/4-channel output, Isolated channels)
NFAP135 Pulse Input Module (8-channel, Pulse count, 0 to 10 kHz, Isolated channels)
Frequency Input Module (8-channel, Contact ON/OFF, Voltage pulse, 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, Isolated
NFAF135
channels)
NFDV151 Digital Input Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Isolated)
NFDV157 Digital Input Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp Terminal support only, Isolated)
NFDV161 Digital Input Module (64-channel, 24 V DC)
NFDV141 Digital Input Module (16-channel, 100 V to 120 V AC, Isolated)
Digital I/O NFDV142 Digital Input Module (16-channel, 200 to 220 V AC)
Modules
(*1) NFDV532 Pulse Width Output Module (4-channel : Up Pulse/Down Pulse, 24 V DC, Isolated)
NFDV551 Digital Output Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Isolated)
NFDV557 Digital Output Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp Terminal support only, Isolated)
NFDV561 Digital Output Module (64-channel, 24 V DC)
NFDR541 Relay Output Module (16-channel, 24 to 110 V DC/100 to 240 V AC, Isolated)
NFLC121 CANopen Communication Module (1-port, 10kbps to 1Mbps)
Commu- NFLF111 Foundation Fieldbus communication module (4-port)
nication NFLP121 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (1-port, 9.6kbps to 12Mbps)
Modules NFLR111 RS-232-C Communication Module (2-port, 300 bps to 115.2 kbps)
NFLR121 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module (2-port, 300 bps to 115.2 kbps)
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

viii
Type Model Function
NFTA4S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Analog (16-channel)
NFTT4S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Thermocouple/mV (16-channel)
NFTR8S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for RTD (12-channel)
Pressure NFTB5S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Digital Input (32-channel)
Clamp NFTD5S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Digital Output (32-channel)
Terminal Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Isolated Analog Module and Pulse Module (for NFAI135, NFAP135,
Block NFTI3S
NFAF135: 8-channel, NFAI835: 4-channel input, 4-channel output)
NFTC4S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Digital (16-channel, with dedicated connector, without surge absorber)
NFTC5S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Digital (32-channel, with dedicated connector)
NFTF9S Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Foundation Fieldbus
Terminal TAS40 MIL Connector Terminal Block (40 Pole Plug Types, M3.5)
Block TAS50 MIL Connector Terminal Block (50 Pole Plug Types, M3.5)
NFCB301 SB Bus Cable
Cable KMS40 MIL Connector Cable (40 Pole Plug Types)
KMS50 MIL Connector Cable (50 Pole Plug Types)
SB Bus NFSBT01 SB Bus T-joint
T-joint NFSBT02 SB Bus T-joint with Built-in Terminator
NFDCV01 Dummy Cover for I/O Module Slot
Dummy
NFDCV02 Dummy Cover for Power supply Module Slot
Cover
NFCCC01 MIL Cable Connector Cover

ix
Safty EMC Explosion protection
FM NI CSA NI
Model IECEx
(Non ATEX (Non-
CSA CE EAC CE RCM KC EAC Type “n”
incen- Type “n” Incen-
(*5)
dive) dive)
NFJT100 – – – X X X X X X X –
NFBU200 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFBU050 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFPW441 X X – X – X – X – X –
NFPW442 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFPW444 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFPW426 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFCP501 X X – X X X – – – – –
NFCP502 X X – X X X – – – – –
NFCP100 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFCP050 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFSB100 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFAI141 X X X X X X X XX (*2) X XX (*2) XX (*2)
NFAV141 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFAI841 X X X X X X X XX (*2) X XX (*2) XX (*2)
NFAB841 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFAI143 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFAT141 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFAR181 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFAI135 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFAP135 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFAF135 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFDV151 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFDV157 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFDV161 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFDV141 X X X X X X X  –  –
NFDV142 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFDV532 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFDV551 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFDV557 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFDV561 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFDR541 X XX (*4) X XX (*4) X X X XX (*3) XX (*4) XX (*3) –
NFLC121 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFLF111 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFLP121 X X X X X X X – – – –
NFLR111 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFLR121 X X X X X X X X X X –

x
Safty EMC Explosion protection
FM NI CSA NI
Model IECEx
(Non ATEX (Non-
CSA CE EAC CE RCM KC EAC Type “n”
incen- Type “n” Incen-
(*5)
dive) dive)
NFTA4S X X X X X X X X X X X
NFTT4S X X X X X X X X X X –
NFTR8S X X X X X X X X X X X
NFTB5S X X X X X X X X X X X
NFTD5S X X X X X X X X X X X
NFTI3S X X X X X X X X X X X
NFTC4S X X X X X X X X X X –
NFTC5S X X X X X X X X X X –
NFTF9S X X X X X X X X X X –
TAS40 X X X X X X X X X X X
TAS50 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFCB301 X X X X X X X X X X –
KMS40 X X X X X X X X X X X
KMS50 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFSBT01 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFSBT02 X X X X X X X X X X –
NFDCV01 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFDCV02 X X X X X X X X X X X
NFCCC01 X X X X X X X X X X X
X: Conforming
XX: Conforming conditionally
–: Not conforming yet
*1: To use modules as hazardous location equipment (non-incendive), use the specified pressure-clamp terminal blocks or MIL con-
nector cables (KMS40 and KMS50) / MIL connector terminal blocks (TAS40 and TAS50) .
*2: I/O modules with suffix code “with HART communication” do not conform to the explosion-proof standards.
*3: The relay output module (NFDR541) does not conform to explosion-proof standards (Non-Incendive) for use at 100 to 240 V AC.
*4: The relay output module (NFDR541) conforms to safety standards (CE), EMC standards (CE) and explosion-proof standards
(ATEX Type “n”) only when the voltage of 24 VDC or less is applied to its output terminal.
*5 : IECEx Type “n” certifivation is only applied to FCN-RTU

xi
l Installation method
Please follow the following guidance on how to use this device so that to guarantee the
satisfactory safety and performance.
• Close the cabinet door of the device.
• Confirm that all the empty slots in the cabinet are covered by dummy cover (NFDCV01/
NFDCV02).
• Confirm that all cables are firmly fixed with the screws.
• Install the rack type devices in the cabinet and lock the cabinet doors for safety.
• Prepare a special breaker in the same room of the device so that it can cut the power supply
when abnormality occurs. Use this breaker to shutdown equipment devices power supply
when device abnormality occurs.
l Requirements for Installation

When installing the devices, the requirements for the device should be satisfied.
Install the device under the following conditions:
Installation height: Altitude up to 2000m (FCN-500, FCN-100, FCJ), 3000m (FCN-RTU) (*3).
Installation category based on IEC1010: II (*1)
Pollution degree based on IEC1010: 2 (*2)
*1: Installation category is the specification of the impulse withstanding voltage which is called as overvoltage category.
II indicates an electrical device.
*2: Pollution degree is the level of foreign body adhesion such as the solid, liquid, and gas which decrease withstanding voltage. 2
means general indoor atmosphere.
*3: It depends on additional I/O modules.
l Wiring Power Cable
CAUTION
Connect the power cables according to the procedure in this document.
Power cables must conform to the safety standards of the country where the device is installed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about power cables, refer to A1.16.1 “Power Supply Wiring” (FCN) and A3.3
“FCJ Power Supply and Grounding” (FCJ).

xii
l Earth Wiring
CAUTION
Ground the device following the procedure in this document to prevent from electric shock and to
minimize the noise.
SEE
ALSO For more information about earth wiring, see the following:
• A1.16.2 “Wiring the Ground” (FCN-500/FCN-100)
• A2.9.2 “Wiring the Ground” (FCN-RTU)
• A3.3.3 “Grounding”(FCJ)
• FCN/FCJ Installation Guide (TI 34P02Q91-01E)
l Battery
CAUTION
• Must use Yokogawa designated batteries.
• Mounting and changing batteries must follow the procedure in this document.
SEE
ALSO For Battery, refer to C7.3.1 “FCN CPU Module/FCJ Batteries.”
l I/O Devices
CAUTION
To ensure this system compliance with the CSA safety standards, all devices connected to this
system shall be CSA certified devices.

xiii
l Maintenance
CAUTION
• When the device becomes dusty, use a vacuum cleaner or a soft cloth to clean it.
• During maintenance, put up wrist strap, and take other ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
measures.
l Cards, Cables, Connectors
CAUTION
When power is ON, Do not install or remove the cards, cables, connectors not listed in this
manual.
n Drawing Conventions
Some drawings may be partially emphasized, simplified, or omitted, for the convenience of
description.
Some screen images depicted in the manual may have different display positions or character
types (e.g., the upper / lower case). Also note that some of the images contained in this manual
are display examples.

xiv
Copyright and Trademark Notices

n All Rights Reserved
The copyrights of the programs and online manual contained in the DVD-ROM are reserved.
The online manual is protected by the PDF security from modification, however, it can be output
via a printer. Printing out the online manual is only allowed for the purpose of using the product.
When using the printed information of the online manual, check if the version is the most recent
one by referring to the DVD-ROM’s version.
No part of the online manual may be transferred, sold, distributed (including delivery via a
commercial PC network or the like), or registered or recorded on video tapes.
n Trademark Acknowledgments
• STARDOM and FAST/TOOLS are trademarks of YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows, are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX Corporation.
• Java and Java Powered logo are either a registered trademark or trademarks of Oracle
and/or its affiliates.

• “FOUNDATION” in “FOUNDATION fieldbus” is a registered trademark of Fieldbus
Foundation.
• FlashFX® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX® Copyright 1998-2014 Datalight, Inc.
U.S.Patent Office 5,860,082/6,260,156
FlashFX® Pro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance Nitro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2014 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved
• All other company and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
• We do not use TM or ® mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in this
manual.

xv
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ Guide
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition
CONTENTS
Introduction...............................................................................................................i
Safety Precautions...................................................................................................ii
Copyright and Trademark Notices..................................................................... xiv
PART-A Hardware................................................................... A-i

A1. Autonomous Controller FCN-500, FCN-100.........................................A1-1
A1.1 Structure and Names of Each Component Unit....................................................A1-1
A1.2 Base Module.................................................................................................... A1-5
A1.3 Power Supply Module.................................................................................... A1-9
A1.4 CPU Module................................................................................................... A1-13
A1.4.1 CPU Module for FCN-500 (NFCP501, NFCP502).........................A1-13
A1.4.2 CPU Module for FCN-100 (NFCP100)...........................................A1-18
A1.4.3 FCN/FCJ System Crad (for FCN-100, FCJ)...................................A1-21
A1.5 SB Bus Repeat Module................................................................................. A1-23
A1.6 I/O Modules.................................................................................................... A1-25
A1.6.1 Analog I/O Module (Specification)..................................................A1-30
A1.6.2 Digital I/O Module (Specification)...................................................A1-42
A1.6.3 Serial Communication Module (Specification)...............................A1-46
A1.7 I/O Module Signal Connection..................................................................... A1-48
A1.8 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks................................................................ A1-49
A1.9 Analog I/O Module Signal Connection....................................................... A1-51
A1.9.1 Analog Input Module for 16 Channels (NFAI141, NFAI143, NFAV141,
NFAV142, NFAV144)......................................................................A1-55
A1.9.2 Analog I/O Module for 8 Channels (NFAI841, NFAB841)..............A1-59
A1.9.3 Analog Output Module for 16 Channels (NFAV542, NFAI543, NFAV544)
........................................................................................................A1-63
A1.9.4 Thermocouple/mV Input Module for 16 Channels (NFAT141).......A1-65
A1.9.5 RTD Input Module for 12 Channels (NFAR181).............................A1-67
A1.9.6 Analog Input Module for 8 Channels (NFAI135).............................A1-69
A1.9.7 Analog I/O Module for 4 Channels (NFAI835)................................A1-71
A1.9.8 Pulse Input Module for 8 Channels (NFAP135).............................A1-73
A1.9.9 Frequency Input Module (NFAF135)..............................................A1-75
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

xvi
A1.10 Digital I/O Module Signal Connection......................................................... A1-77
A1.10.1 Digital Input Module, 32 Channel/24 V DC (NFDV151).................A1-81
A1.10.3 Digital Input Module, 16 Channel (NFDV141, NFDV142)..............A1-84
A1.10.4 Pulse Width Output Module (NFDV532)........................................A1-85
A1.10.5 Digital Output Module, 32 Channel/24 V DC (NFDV551)..............A1-87
A1.10.9 Relay Output Module, 16 Channel (NFDR541)..............................A1-94
A1.11 Communication Module Signal Connection.............................................. A1-95
A1.11.1 Signal Cable Connection to RS-232-C Communication Module...A1-95
A1.11.2 Signal Cable Connection to RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module
........................................................................................................A1-99
A1.11.3 CANopen Communication Module Signal Connection............... A1-103
A1.11.4 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module Signal Connection...... A1-104
A1.12 FCN-500, FCN-100 Installation.................................................................. A1-105
A1.12.1 FCN-500, FCN-100 Installation Specification............................. A1-106
A1.13 FCN-500, FCN-100 Power Supply Equipment.......................................... A1-113
A1.13.1 Power Supply System...................................................................A1-113
A1.13.2 Supplied Power Source................................................................A1-114
A1.13.3 Field Power Supply.......................................................................A1-116
A1.14 Grounding for FCN-500, FCN-100............................................................. A1-118
A1.15 Installation and Attachment....................................................................... A1-119
A1.15.1 Installing the Base Module............................................................A1-119
A1.15.2 Installing Other Modules on to the Base Module......................... A1-124
A1.16 Wiring........................................................................................................... A1-127
A1.16.1 Power Supply Wiring................................................................... A1-127
A1.16.2 Wiring the Ground........................................................................ A1-131
A1.16.3 Connecting the Signal Cable....................................................... A1-132
A1.16.4 Communication Cables............................................................... A1-138
A2. Low Power Autonomous Controller FCN-RTU....................................A2-1
A2.1 Structure and Names of Each Component Unit.......................................... A2-1
A2.2 Base Module.................................................................................................... A2-3
A2.3 Power Supply Module (NFPW426,NFPW444).............................................. A2-6
A2.4 CPU Module for FCN-RTU (NFCP050)........................................................ A2-12
A2.5 I/O Modules.................................................................................................... A2-27
A2.6 FCN-RTU Installation Environment............................................................ A2-31

xv
A2.7 FCN-RTU Power Supply Equipment........................................................... A2-35
A2.7.1 Power Supply System.....................................................................A2-35
A2.7.2 Supplied Power Source..................................................................A2-36
A2.7.3 Field Power Supply.........................................................................A2-38
A2.7.4 Grounding for FCN-RTU.................................................................A2-40
A2.8 Installation and Attachment......................................................................... A2-42
A2.8.1 Installing the Base Module..............................................................A2-43
A2.8.2 Installing Other Modules on to the Base Module............................A2-44
A2.9 Wiring............................................................................................................. A2-46
A2.9.1 Power Supply Wiring......................................................................A2-47
A2.9.2 Wiring the Ground...........................................................................A2-49
A2.9.3 Connecting the Signal Cable..........................................................A2-50
A2.9.4 Communication Cables..................................................................A2-50
A3. Autonomous Controller FCJ..................................................................A3-1
A3.1 Structure and Names of Each Component Unit.......................................... A3-1
A3.2 Installation....................................................................................................... A3-8
A3.2.1 FCJ Installation Specifications..........................................................A3-8
A3.3 FCJ Power Supply and Grounding..............................................................A3-11
A3.3.1 FCJ Power Supply..........................................................................A3-11
A3.3.2 Power Supply for Digital Outputs....................................................A3-12
A3.3.3 Grounding.......................................................................................A3-12
A3.4 Installing the FCJ.......................................................................................... A3-14
A3.5 Wiring............................................................................................................. A3-19
A3.5.1 Connection Terminals.....................................................................A3-19
A3.5.2 Cables for Pressure Clamp Terminals............................................A3-20
A3.5.3 Connecting the Power Supply........................................................A3-22
A3.5.4 Field Signal Connection..................................................................A3-23
A3.5.5 Communication Cables..................................................................A3-25

xviii
PART-B Software.................................................................... B-i

B1. Overview...................................................................................................B1-1
B1.1 Functional Overview....................................................................................... B1-2
B1.2 Configuration.................................................................................................. B1-3
B1.2.1 System Configuration.......................................................................B1-3
B1.2.2 Configuration of FCN/FCJ Development Environment....................B1-6
B1.2.3 FCN/FCJ Software Configuration.....................................................B1-7
B1.2.4 Hardware Configuration of FCN/FCJ CPU Modules........................B1-8
B1.2.5 Making FCN Hardware Dual-Redundant.......................................B1-10
B1.2.6 FCN/FCJ Control Network..............................................................B1-12
B1.2.7 Connection to Display Unit.............................................................B1-16
B1.2.8 Connecting FCN/FCJ OPC Server for Windows............................B1-18
B1.3 Procedure for Building Systems................................................................. B1-19
B1.3.1 Initial Settings of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.....................B1-20
B1.3.2 Creation of Control Applications.....................................................B1-22
B1.3.3 Precautions on the Creation of Control Applications......................B1-24
B1.4 Development Environment Setup............................................................... B1-25
B1.4.1 Installation.......................................................................................B1-26
B1.5 Operation Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.......................... B1-27
B1.6 Resource Configurator................................................................................. B1-30
B1.6.1 Functional Overview of Resource Configurator.............................B1-30
B1.6.2 Starting Resource Configurator......................................................B1-31
B1.6.3 Operation of Resource Configurator..............................................B1-31
B1.6.4 Resource Configuration Editor.......................................................B1-31
B1.7 Logic Designer.............................................................................................. B1-33
B1.7.1 Functional Overview.......................................................................B1-33
B1.7.2 Starting Logic Designer..................................................................B1-33
B1.7.3 Operation of Logic Designer...........................................................B1-33
B1.8 FCN/FCJ Simulator....................................................................................... B1-34
B1.8.1 Function Specifications...................................................................B1-34
B1.8.2 Starting FCN/FCJ Simulator...........................................................B1-37
B1.8.3 Operation of FCN/FCJ Simulator....................................................B1-37
B1.9 FCN-RTU Ethernet Power Saving Function............................................... B1-38
B1.9.1 Ethernet Operating Status..............................................................B1-38
B1.9.2 Transition Methods.........................................................................B1-39
B1.9.3 Operations when Starting and Shutting Down the System............B1-41
B1.10 I/O Processing............................................................................................... B1-42
B1.10.1 Device Labels and Device Label Variables....................................B1-42
B1.10.2 Timing of I/O Data Update..............................................................B1-44
B1.10.3 Disconnecting I/O Modules.............................................................B1-45
B1.10.4 Time Synchronization Function......................................................B1-46

xv
B1.11 License........................................................................................................... B1-49
B1.12 Messages....................................................................................................... B1-51
B1.13 System Flags/Interface Flags...................................................................... B1-52
B1.13.1 Functions of Interface Flags...........................................................B1-53
B1.14 Online Help.................................................................................................... B1-55
B2. Advanced Settings Using Web Browser..............................................B2-1
B2.1 Screen Organization ...................................................................................... B2-2
B2.2 Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers..................................... B2-3
B2.2.1 Setting up Web Browser...................................................................B2-3
B2.2.2 Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers...........................B2-3
B2.3 Maintenance Homepage................................................................................ B2-4
B2.4 Maintenance Menu.......................................................................................... B2-6
B2.4.1 System Setting Files.........................................................................B2-8
B2.4.2 Editing System Setting Files.............................................................B2-9
B2.4.3 Displaying System Setting Files.....................................................B2-10
B2.4.4 Initializing System Setting Files......................................................B2-11
B2.4.5 Reboot.............................................................................................B2-12
B2.4.6 Setting Date and Time....................................................................B2-13
B2.4.7 Saving Retain Data.........................................................................B2-14
B2.4.8 Displaying Log Files........................................................................B2-15
B2.4.9 Displaying Resource Configuration................................................B2-16
B2.4.10 Displaying CPU status (only FCN-500, FCN-100, FCJ).................B2-18
B2.4.11 Downloading Backup Tools............................................................B2-19
B3. Online Download.....................................................................................B3-1
B3.1 Outline of Online Download Function.......................................................... B3-1
B3.2 Operation Environment.................................................................................. B3-2
B3.3 Details of Online Download Function........................................................... B3-4
B3.4 Precautions in Use of Online Download.....................................................B3-11
B3.5 Online Download Procedure....................................................................... B3-15

xx
PART-C Operation and Maintenance.................................... C-i

C1. Operation of the FCN/FCJ......................................................................C1-1
C1.1 FCN/FCJ Power On and Off Procedures and Operation............................ C1-1
C1.1.1 Power On Procedure....................................................................... C1-1
C1.1.2 Power Off Procedure....................................................................... C1-2
C1.1.3 Reboot.............................................................................................. C1-3
C1.1.4 Operation during Power Failure....................................................... C1-3
C1.2 Backup and Restore Operations................................................................... C1-4
C2. Duplex CPU Module (FCN-500)..............................................................C2-1
C2.1 Operation using Duplex CPU Modules......................................................... C2-1
C2.2 Control Right of Duplex CPU Modules......................................................... C2-2
C2.3 All Program Copy (APC)................................................................................. C2-3
C2.4 Replacing CPU Modules ............................................................................... C2-7
C2.5 Initializing the Control Right Information..................................................... C2-9
C2.6 Precautions.................................................................................................... C2-10
C3. Duplex CPU Module (FCN-100)..............................................................C3-1
C3.1 Operation using Duplex CPU Modules......................................................... C3-1
C3.2 Control Right of Duplex CPU Modules......................................................... C3-2
C3.3 All Program Copy (APC)................................................................................. C3-3
C3.4 Replacing CPU Modules ............................................................................... C3-8
C3.5 Replacing FCN/FCJ System Cards ............................................................ C3-10
C3.6 Initializing the Control Right Information....................................................C3-11
C3.7 Precautions.................................................................................................... C3-12
C4. I/O Module Operation..............................................................................C4-1
C4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... C4-1
C4.2 Operation When an I/O Module Malfunctions ............................................. C4-2
C4.2.1 Output Fallback Operation............................................................... C4-2
C4.2.2 Operations of Other Functions When an I/O Module Malfunctions .C4-3
C4.3 Recovery Operations from Error Status...................................................... C4-4
C4.3.1 Recovery Operations from CPU Errors........................................... C4-4
C4.3.2 Restart Operation............................................................................. C4-4
C5. Operation of the Control Application....................................................C5-1
C6. Operation of FCN-RTU I/O......................................................................C6-1
C6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... C6-1
C7. Maintaining Hardware.............................................................................C7-1

xv
C7.1 Periodic Inspection......................................................................................... C7-2
C7.2 Maintenance and Replacement Operations................................................. C7-3
C7.2.1 Precautions for Operation................................................................ C7-3
C7.2.2 Replacing FCN Modules.................................................................. C7-4
C7.2.3 Disabling FCN-RTU Ethernet Power Saving Function.................... C7-7
C7.2.4 Replacing a Malfunctioning FCJ...................................................... C7-8
C7.3 Parts with Limited Lifespan........................................................................... C7-9
C7.3.1 FCN CPU Module/FCJ Batteries..................................................... C7-9
C7.3.2 FCN Power Supply Module........................................................... C7-24
C7.3.3 FCN I/O Module (NFDR541)......................................................... C7-24

xxii
PART-D Other Features and Settings................................... D-i

D1. License.....................................................................................................D1-1
D1.1 Types of Licenses........................................................................................... D1-1
D1.2 License Issuance Procedure......................................................................... D1-1
D1.3 Key Code.......................................................................................................... D1-1
D1.4 License ID........................................................................................................ D1-2
D1.5 Issuing a License ........................................................................................... D1-3
D2. Setting the IP Address............................................................................D2-1
D2.1 Creating the Hosts File................................................................................... D2-1
D2.2 IP Address Assignment Rules....................................................................... D2-2
D2.2.1 Control Network Single Configuration............................................. D2-3
D2.2.2 Control Network Duplexed Configuration........................................ D2-5
D2.2.3 Configuration consisting of Control Network (Single) connected with
Other Networks................................................................................ D2-7
D2.2.4 Configuration consisting of Control Network (Duplexed) connected
with Other Networks......................................................................... D2-9
D2.3 VDS IP Address Setting Procedure..............................................................D2-11
D2.3.1 IP Address Setting Procedure (When the Control Network is used as
Single).............................................................................................D2-11
D2.3.2 IP Address Setting Procedure (When Duplexing the Control Network)
....................................................................................................... D2-14
D2.4 IP Address Settings on Other Devices....................................................... D2-16
D2.5 Settings when Connecting a Router to the Control Network................... D2-17
D3. Backup/Restore of all data (R3.30 or later)...........................................D3-1
D3.1 Backup of all data (FCN-500 and FCN-RTU)................................................ D3-2
D3.2 Restore of all data (FCN-500 and FCN-RTU)................................................ D3-6
D3.3 Upgrading CPU Module Version (FCN-500 and FCN-RTU)........................ D3-9
D3.4 Backup of all data to SD card (FCN-500).....................................................D3-11
D3.5 Restore of all data from SD card (FCN-500)............................................... D3-15
D3.6 Upgrading CPU Module Version from SD card (FCN-500)....................... D3-17
D3.7 Backup of all data (FCN-100 and FCJ)........................................................ D3-19
D3.8 Restore of all data (FCN-100 and FCJ)....................................................... D3-23
D3.9 Upgrading FCN/FCJ System Card Version (FCN-100 and FCJ).............. D3-26
Appendix 1. Backup/Restore (R3.20 or before)..................................... App.1-1
Appendix 1.1 Backup..............................................................................................App.1-1
Appendix 1.2 Restore..............................................................................................App.1-5
Revision Information................................................................................................i

A-i
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ Guide
PART-A Hardware
This chapter describes the hardware overview of the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ.
Followings are the Autonomous Controller FCN/FCJ hardware:
• FCN-500 and FCN-100 autonomous controllers are modular type controllers
consisting of CPU modules, I/O modules, and others which can be added.
• FCN-RTU low power autonomous controllers are modular type controllers consisting
of low power consumption CPU modules, wide voltage range power supply module,
and others which can be added.
• FCJ autonomous controllers are all-in-one type controllers with a built-in I/O
interface.
IMPORTANT
Notation in this document:
• The term “FCN” refers to the module consisting type autonomous controllers.
• The term “FCN-500” refers to the autonomous controllers with NFCP501/NFCP502 CPU
module.
• The term “FCN-100” refers to the autonomous controllers with NFCP100 CPU module.
• The term “FCN-RTU” refers to the low power autonomous controllers with NFCP050 CPU
module.
• The term “FCJ” refers to the all-in-one type autonomous controllers.

Blank Page
<A1. Autonomous Controller FCN-500, FCN-100> A1-1
A1. Autonomous Controller FCN-500,

FCN-100
This section describes the hardware of the Autonomous Controller FCN-500, FCN-100 (Field
Control Node.)
A1.1 Structure and Names of Each Component Unit

The FCN-500 and FCN-100 is comprised of the following modules:
• Base module (This is the module to which other modules such as the power supply,
CPU, and I/O modules are installed)
• Power supply module (This is the module that supplies power to all other modules.
One power supply module is required for each unit, two are required for dual-
redundant configuration.)
• CPU module (This is the module that has CPU functions. One CPU module is
required for the main control unit, two are required for dual-redundant configuration.)
• I/O modules (This is the module that has I/O functions.)
• SB bus repeat module (This is the module that expands the SB bus, which is the
internal communication bus on backboard. This unit is required when designing an
extension unit. This module may be used as a dual-redundant configuration.)
The FCN-500 and FCN-100 is capable of expanding a maximum of two extension units on
the control unit.
Power supply module
CPU module
Control unit SB bus repeat module
Base module
extension unit T-joint

SB bus cable
extension unit
A010101E.ai
Figure Component Units of the Autonomous Controller FCN-500, FCN-100
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28, 2016-00

n Maximum Number of I/O Modules

The FCN-500 and FCN-100 can be used to configure a system that matches the requirements
by combining control units and extension units.
Table Maximum I/O Module Configurations
Base Module Unit Configuration Standard Duplexed (*1)
Control unit only Max. 8 modules Max. 6 modules
Base module (NFBU200) With 1 extension unit Max. 16 modules Max. 12 modules
With 2 extension unit Max. 25 modules Max. 20 modules
Base module (NFBU050) Control unit (*2) Max. 3 modules Not applicable (*3)
*1: When CPU and SB bus repeat modules are duplexed
*2: SB bus repeat modules cannot be mounted on NFBU050.
*3: Neither power supply nor CPU modules can be duplexed on NFBU050.

l Installation Example
[Control unit: Single configuration] [Control unit: Dual-redundant configuration]
Ethernet Ethernet
PWM
PWM
PWM
DMY
CPU
CPU
CPU
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
Unit:1 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Unit:1 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
[One control unit, two expansion units [One control unit, two expansion units
Single configuration (One CPU, Dual-redundant configuration (Two CPU’s,
one SB bus, one power supply)] two SB buses, two power supplies)]
Ethernet NFSB Ethernet
NFSB
NFSB
PWM
PWM
PWM
CPU
DMY
CPU
CPU
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
NFSB
NFSB
NFSB
PWM
PWM
PWM
DMY
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
NFSB
NFSB
PWM
PWM
NFSB
PWM
DMY
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
[Base module (NFBU050)]
Ethernet
Code Module
PWM Power supply module
CPU CPU module
PWM
IOM I/O module

CPU
IOM
IOM
IOM
NFSB SB bus repeat module
Slot 1 2 3 4 5
DMY Dummy cover for power supply module slot
A010102E.ai
Figure Installation Example of Autonomous Control FCN-500, FCN-100 Modules

n External View
l When Attaching to 19-inch Rack
21.3 440 Unit : mm
170.8
152.4 18.4
482.6 17.6
8.45 465.7
132.5
37.7 57.1
A010103E.ai
Figure External View for FCN-500, FCN-100 (When Using NFBU200)
l When Attaching to DIN Rail

1.25 18 401.5 18 Unit : mm
165.3 7
30.5 1
444 16 CENTER OF
19 440.2 DIN RAIL
63.25 (67.75)
(45.5)35.5(50)
68
131
63
A010104E.ai
Unit : mm
283 152.5
5 273 16.1
19.7 243.6 3.6
131
110
66.5
10.5
A010105E.ai

A1.2 Base Module

The base module is used to install various function modules (power supply modules,
CPU modules, SB bus repeat modules, and I/O modules) to form the control unit and
expansion unit.
n Functions
Number of
Number of
Mountable Number of Mountable SB bus(Internal
Model Usage Mountable
Power Spply SB Bus Repeat Modules Backboard Bus)
I/O Modules
Modules
Control unit 8 (*1) 2 (SB Bus Duplex)

1 or
NFBU200 1 (SB Bus Single) Duplex
Extension unit 9 (*2) 2 (when duplex)
0 (No SB Bus Extension)
NFBU050 Control unit 3 (*3) 1 None Single
*1: Two from the ten slots are exclusive for at least one CPU module in the control unit.
*2: One from the ten slots is exclusive for at least one SB bus repeat module in the extension unit.
*3: Two from the five slots are exclusive for one CPU module. No SB bus repeat modules can be mounted.
IMPORTANT
Always install dummy covers for slots that are open in the unit.
n Specification
Table Base Module Specification
Item Specification
Model name NFBU200-S0 NFBU200-S1 NFBU050-S1
Mass 1.9 kg 1.0 kg 0.53 kg
Dimensions (W/H/D) 482.6 x 132.5 x 40.5 mm 440 x 131 x 42.3 mm 283 x 131 x 24.2 mm
Installation type 19-inch rack installation DIN rail installation
Self-
5V 0.4 A (max) 0.025 A
Current consumption
consumption Self-
24 V None
consumption
Functional insulation between the 19-inch rack/DIN rail and base module.
Insulation
(*1)
*1: When installed on the 19-inch rack, the supplied insulated bushings must be used.

n External View
21.3 440 Unit : mm
40.5
482.6
17.6 18.4
8.45 465.7
132.5
57.1
37.7
A010201E.ai
Figure Base Module NFBU200 [Installed on Panel (19-inch rack)]
1.25 18 401.5 18 Unit : mm
35 7
444
1.9 440.2 16
131
A010202E.ai
Figure Base Module NFBU200 [Installed on DIN Rails]
Unit : mm
283 24.2
273 20.6
243.6 16.1
131
110
66.5
10.5
A010203E.ai
Figure Base Module NFBU050

n Settings (NFBU200 Only)

The base module has the following items that must be set:
• Unit number
• Duplex setting of CPU modules
l Unit Number Setting (SW1)

SW1 next to the P1 slot must be set according to the silk screen-printed diagram that
corresponds to the unit number to be used. (Default factory setting: Unit 1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3

(Default factory setting)
A010204E.ai
Figure Unit Number Settings (SW1)
l Duplex CPU Module Setting (SW2)

When duplex CPU modules are used in a control unit, SW2 next to Slot2 must be set to [CPU x
2] according to the silk screen-printed diagram.
The switch must be set to [Other] at all other times (when the module is set to Single CPU or
expansion unit). (Default factory setting: Other)
[CPU x 2] [Other]
(Default factory
setting)
A010205E.ai
Figure Duplex CPU Module Setting (SW2)
IMPORTANT
When the module is set to [CPU x 2], install the CPU modules to Slot3 and Slot4. If I/O modules
are installed in Slot3 or Slot4, the CPU module cannot be controlled properly. It also may cause
errors in the control or standby operation of the CPU module if the CPU module is installed when
the unit is set to [Other].
TIP
・ If the FCN-500 is used in the duplex CPU configuration, set SW2 to [CPU × 2]. And check [CPU module
configuration] - [General] tab - [Configure CPU Duplex (NFCP500)] on the resource configurator.
・ If the FCN-100 is used in the duplex CPU configuration, set SW2 to [CPU × 2]. And prepare a system
card that license has been registered in the “FCN basic software license for duplexed CPU”. Refer to “D1.
license“

P1 P2 Slot-1 Slot-2 Slot-3
SW1
SW2
12345678
1234
TM1
CN11 TM2 CN12 CN9 CN10 CN1
Unit number setting (SW1)
Duplexed settings of the CPU module (SW2)

A010206E.ai
Figure Base Module Settings

A1.3 Power Supply Module

The power supply module is installed on base module, and supplies stable power to each
module.
It may be used for a duplexed configuration on base module NFBU200.
It is equipped with an input terminal for analog field power (24V DC) and power is supplied
through the base module to each I/O module via this terminal. As for digital output
modules, some I/O modules require this type of field power (24V DC). In this case, power
must be supplied to each I/O module terminal (For details, see the specification of each
I/O module.)
SEE
ALSO For more information about field power, refer to A1.13.3 “Field Power Supply” .
IMPORTANT
Power supply module NFPW426 cannot be used for FCN-500 and FCN-100.

n Specification
Table Power Supply Module Specification
Item Specification
Model name NFPW441 NFPW442 NFPW444
Rated input voltage 100 to 120 V AC 220 to 240 V AC 24 V DC
Input voltage range 80 to 132 V AC (rms) 170 to 264 V AC (rms) 21.6 to 31.2 V DC
Input frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz (Rating: 50/60 Hz) -
Input current Max. 1.4 A Max. 0.7 A Max. 3.3 A
Fuse rating 3.15 A 3.15 A 6.3 A
Max. 80 A for 5 ms Max. 90 A for 5 ms
Rush current Max. 20 A
Input or less or less
Leak current Max. 1 mA -
Insulation withstand
3000 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute
voltage
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ (at 500 V DC)
Power
supply Instantaneous power
failure sense delay 10 ms (80%) 2 ms (90%)
time
Rated output voltage +5.1 V DC
Rated output current 0 to 7.8 A (*1)
Peak current 11.8 A
Total output 40 W (peak 60W)
Output Max. 300 ms
Startup time after
power-on Max. 100 ms (during instantaneous power failure of 200 ms during
rated input)
Overvoltage protection Max. 7V
Overcurrent protection Min. 105% (Shutdown after 4 to 14 seconds later)
Rated input voltage 24 V DC ± 10%
Input Input current Max. 4 A
Analog
field Fuse rating 6.3 A
power Rated output voltage Input voltage minus matching-diode drop
supply
Output Rated output current 4A
Overvoltage protection 35 V
Duplex configuration Possible (when installed on base module NFBU200)
Weight 0.6 kg
Dimensions (W/H/D) 49.7 x 130 x 146.5 mm
*1: XXX.

n External View
146.45
49.7 132.95
SYS
POWER
FLD
+5V
+24V CHECK
GND
130
A010302E.ai
Figure Power Supply Module
n Terminals/LED’s
Table Power Supply Terminals (NFPW441, NFPW442)
Pin No Signal name Function
1 FLD24 V DC+ 24 V analog field power supply (+)
2 FLD24 V DC- 24 V analog field power supply (-)
3 G( ) Ground of line filter
4 L Power input L
5 N Power input N
Table Power Supply Terminals (NFPW444)

1 FLD 24V DC+ 24 V analog field power supply (+)
2 FLD 24V DC- 24 V analog field power supply (-)
4 + Power input +
5 - Power input -
Table Check Terminals

1 +5 V-CHK 5 V system power supply check
2 +24 V-CHK 24 V analog field power supply check
3 GND Signal ground

Table LED Displays
Display LED Display color Description
SYS-POWER Green Lights: 5 V system power being supplied
FLD-POWER Green Lights: 24 V analog field power being supplied
NFPW441-10
SYS
POWER Status lamp
FLD
+5V
+24V CHECK Check terminal
GND
MAINT
FLD
24V DC=
+
Power supply terminal

L
N
100-120
V AC~
Tabs for the locks of the protective cover

A010307E.ai
Figure Power Supply Module Terminals

A1.4 CPU Module

One CPU module is mounted in each control unit, or two for a duplexed CPU
configuration. The CPU module runs a real-time operating system, supports
programming languages compliant to the IEC 61131-3 international standard, and FCN-
100 serves as a Java virtual machine.
A1.4.1 CPU Module for FCN-500 (NFCP501, NFCP502)
n Specification
Table CPU Module Specification
Item Specification
Model name NFCP501 NFCP502
CPU Atom E3815 1.46 GHz
Main 256 MB with ECC functions
Memory
Static RAM 2 MB with ECC, backed up by battery
Secondary memory 1 GB on-board flash memory
External media SD card 1 slot : SDHC (4 to 32GB) Class 10
RS-232-C: 1 port
Serial Port (*2)
D-Sub 9pin (male) (*1)
Communication method Full/Half duplex (software settings)
Synchronization method Asynchronous
0.3, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6,
Communication speeds
115.2 kbps
Ethernet: 2 ports Ethernet: 4 ports
Network interface
RJ-45 modular jack RJ-45 modular jack
1000, 100, 10 Mbps (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
10BASE-T)
I/O interface SB bus (duplex)
RAS function WDT, temperature monitoring, etc.
Battery (*3) 1000 mAh graphite fluoride lithium battery
CPU status display (3LED), LAN status display,
Display
SD LED (1LED), EXEC LED (1LED)
RESET switch, SHUT DOWN switch,
Switches
FUNC switch, EXEC switch
Protection CPU cover (with the hole for a wire lock)
Power Supply voltage 5 VDC ± 5%
supply Current dissipation Max. 1200 mA Max. 1700 mA
Duplex configuration Possible
Weight 0.9 kg
Size
Occupying slots 2
*1: Connectors are fastened using inch screw threads (No. 4-40 UNC).
*2: A serial port cannot be used when CPU modules are configured in redundancy.
*3: With battery exhaustion detection function

n External View
Communication
Display LED Status LED
(HRDY, RDY, CTRL) (LINK, ACT) CPU cover
RESET switch
NFCP501-S05 S1 NFCP501-S05 S1
SHUTDOWN switch
HRDY RDY CTRL HRDY RDY CTRL
SERIAL SERIAL
Serial port 1
RESET
EXEC LED SHUT
DOWN
FUNC switch EXEC LED
0 FUNC
EXEC switch
EXEC BATTERY
SD
NETWORK NETWORK
SD card slot 2 2
SD
LED SD LED
Ethernet port 2
1 1
Ethernet port 1 CN1
Battery Case
SD LED Wire Lock Hole A010404E.ai
Figure NFCP501 CPU Module (Left: mounted CPU cover, Middle: removed CPU cover)
Communication
Display LED Status LED
(HRDY, RDY, CTRL) (LINK, ACT) CPU cover
RESET switch
SHUTDOWN switch
HRDY RDY CTRL HRDY RDY CTRL
Serial port 1 SERIAL SERIAL
RESET
EXEC LED
SHUT
DOWN
0 FUNC
EXEC switch NETWORK NETWORK
4 EXEC 4
BATTERY
Ethernet port 4 3 3
Ethernet port 3 SD
SD card slot 2 2
SD
SD LED
Ethernet port 2 LED
1 1
Ethernet port 1 CN1
Battery Case
SD LED Wire Lock Hole A010405E.ai
Figure NFCP502 CPU Module (Left: mounted CPU cover, Middle: removed CPU cover)

n Terminals/LEDs/Switches
l Terminals/LEDs
Table Serial Port (D-SUB 9pin Male)
1 CD Data channel receiving carrier detection
2 RD Receiving data
3 SD Transmission data
4 ER Data terminal ready
5 SG Signal ground
6 DR Data set ready
7 RS Transmission request
8 CS Transmission enabled
9 - Not used
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Figure Pin Position (Front View)
Table Network Interface (RJ45 Type Modular Jack)

1 Transmission data (+) -
2 Transmission data (-) -
3 Receiving data (+) -
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
6 Receiving data (-) -
7 Not used -
8 Not used -
Table Operation Status Display LEDs

Name Color Description
HRDY Green Lights when the hardware is normal.
RDY Green Lights when the system is normal.
CTRL Green Lights when the control actions are carried out normally.
SEE
ALSO The displays of the CPU operation status display LEDs are different depending on the status, such as during
startup or in duplex configuration. For details on the CPU operation status display LEDs, see B1.5, “Operation
Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.”
Table RJ45 Modular Connector LEDs

Mame Color Description
LINK Green Lights when the connection to a hub is normal.
ACT Orange Blinks when the transmission/reception is on.

Table SD LED
Lights when the memory card is mounted.
SD Green
Blinks when the memory card is accessed.
Table EXEC LED

Lights when the maintenance function error
EXEC Green
Blinks when the maintenance function is executed
l RESET Switch
This switch is used to restart the CPU module.
l SHUT DOWN Switch

This switch is used to terminate the CPU module operation safely.
l FUNC Switch
This switch is used to backup and restore the data by SD card, select the maintenance function.
Table FUNC Switch
Position Function Description

0 No operation EXEC switch is invalid.
1 Unmount Push EXEC switch, SD LED goes out and it can remove SD card safely.
2 -
Push EXEC switch, the FCN basic software and setting information on FCN-500
3 Backup
is saved on SD card. It can perform during operation of FCN-500.
Push EXEC switch, the Log data is saved on SD card.
4 Log save
Two or more log data can be saved on one SD card.
5 -
Push EXEC switch, the FCN basic software and setting information saved on SD
6 Restore
card is restored to FCN-500.
Version Push EXEC switch, FCN basic software on FCN-500 is upgraded by the software
7
upgrade stored in SD card. The setting information on FCN-500 are not changed.
8 -
9 (Reserved) Disable
Table Backup and Restore
Function Basic software Setting information Application Retain data Log data
Backup X X X X X
Log save X X X
Restore X X X X
Version upgrade X
l EXEC Switch
This switch is used to backup and restore the data by SD card execute function.

n Protection
l CPU cover (with the hole for a wire lock)

The switch, SD card and or battery on the right-hand side of the CPU module can be protected
by a front CPU cover.
The CPU module is protected from unauthorized access by locking the hole of the module lower
part. This function fills mechanical sealing of an OIML D-31(Edition 2008) standard based on a
pipeline or a wellhead market customer demand.
• Recommended wire diameter: 1 mm
• Depending on the fixed position of the wire, in some cases you can remove the CPU cover.
When fixing, make sure that the CPU cover does not come off.
n Bundled Licenses
l Controller Software Licenses

The combination of application portfolio licenses can be specified in NFCP501/NFCP502 CPU
module suffix code as shown in the following table. Licenses can not be added later on.
Table Suffix code indicating license combination
Suffix Code of model
NFCP501/NFCP502 Software Media
Software
-S -W (Model)
Standard type Extend type
FCN/FCJ Basic Software  
Software License for Duplexed Field Network Module   NT203AJ
PAS Portfolio - 
FA-M3 Communication Portfolio  
MELSEC Communication Portfolio  
Application
Portfolio SYSMAC Communication Portfolio  
NT205AJ
Modbus Communication Portfolio  
DNP3 (Communication Portfolio  
Gas Flow Calculation Portfolio - 

A1.4.2 CPU Module for FCN-100 (NFCP100)
n Specification
Item Specification
Model name NFCP100-S0
CPU MMX-Pentium 166 MHz
Main 128 MB with ECC functions (*1)
Memory
Static RAM 1 MB with ECC, backed up by battery (*2)
System card 1 slot (*3)
RS-232-C: 1 port
Serial Port (*5)
D-Sub 9pin (male) (*4)
Communication method Full duplex
Synchronization method Asynchronous
0.3, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6,
115.2 kbps
100/10 Mbps (100BASETX, 10BASE-T) Ethernet
Network interface
2-port RJ-45 modular jack
I/O interface SB bus (duplex)
RAS function WDT, temperature monitoring, etc.
Battery Li battery, 2700 mAH
Display CPU status display (3LED), LAN status display
Switches Reset, shutdown
Power Supply voltage 5 VDC ± 5%
supply Current dissipation Max. 1800mA
Duplex configuration Possible (*6)
Weight 0.7 kg
Size
Occupying slots 2
*1: 128 MB for S2 (Style 2) or later, 32 MB for S1 (Style 1).
*2: 1 MB for S3 (Style 3) or later, 512 KB for S1 (Style 1) or S2 (Style 2).
*3: Please use a couple of FCN/FCJ system cards of the same type to make the CPU module dual-redundant.
By default factory setting, flow controls are disabled.
Flow controls can be enabled by editing “COM Port Setting File” on “FCX Maintenance Menu.”
For more information, refer to the Help of “FCX Maintenance Menu.”
*5: A serial port cannot be used when CPU modules are configured in redundancy.
*6: In case of duplexed CPU, the S1 and the S2/S3 cannot be combined. The S2 and the S3 can be combined; however, it functions
within S2.

n External View
Reset switch
Shutdown switch
Display LED (from left)
HRDY
RDY
CTRL
System card ejection button
NFCP100-S00 S1
HRDY RDY CTRL
RESET SYSTEM
MEDIA
CPU MODULE
MODEL NFCP100
SUFFIX –OO STYLE S1
SHUT NO. 011E07002B
DOWN MAC ADDRESS:00006482C001
00006482C002
N200
NETWORK
SERIAL
Made in Japan
System card
Serial port MAC address
Communication Status LED (from top)
LINK
ACT
Network interface
A010402E.ai
Figure CPU Module
l Terminals/LEDs
2 RD Receiving data
5 SG Signal ground
6 DR Data set ready
9 - Not used
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1

Table Network Interface (RJ45 Type Modular Jack)
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
7 Not used -
8 Not used -

Lights when the control actions are carried out
CTRL Green
normally.
SEE
ALSO The displays of the CPU operation status display LEDs are different depending on the status, such as during
startup or in duplex configuration. For details on the CPU operation status display LEDs, see B1.5, “Operation
Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.”

ACT Orange Lights when the transmission/reception is on.
l Reset Switch
l Shutdown Switch
l FCN/FCJ System Card

This is used to install FCN/FCJ system cards.
IMPORTANT
Do not install or remove FCN/FCJ system cards while the power of the module is on.

A1.4.3 FCN/FCJ System Crad (for FCN-100, FCJ)

The FCN/FCJ system card contains all information necessary for FCN-100 or FCJ
operation.
Some of the main information stored in the system card are as follows:
• OS and various drivers
• Control engine
• Control application
• Network setting information
• I/O setting information
• Java runtime environment
• Java application
The FCN/FCJ system card is used by installing it in the dedicated slot of the FCN-100 or
FCJ.
IMPORTANT
• Do not install or remove FCN/FCJ system cards while the power of the module is on.
• Avoid touching the terminal area.
• Avoid heat, moisture, and direct sunlight.
• Do not apply shock.
• Do not remove during operation.
n External View
42.80±0.10
FCN/FCJ
SYSTEM CARD
MODEL NT225AA
35.40±0.15
SUFFIX -0
REV.
NO.
(Top) YOKOGAWA  Made in Japan

[Label]
A010407E.ai
Figure System Card

n FCN/FCJ System Card Installation/Removal Procedures

Follow the procedures below to install or remove the FCN/FCJ system card.
l Installation Procedures for the FCN/FCJ System Card

1. Align the triangle on the upper right of the front of the FCN/FCJ system card with the triangle
on the system card insertion slot. Insert the card.
2. Push the FCN/FCJ system card slowly until the system card ejection button is about the
same height at the FCN/FCJ system card itself.
l Removal Procedures for the FCN/FCJ System Card

1. Press the system card ejection button slowly.
2. When the system card ejection button is pressed, the FCN/FCJ system card is ejected.
Remove the system card slowly.
NFCP100-S00 S1
HRDY RDY CTRL
System card insertion slot
SYSTEM
RESET
CARD
Install by aligning the

▲ marks.
SHUT
DOWN
NETWORK
2 SERIAL
FCN/FCJ
SYSTEM CARD
MODEL NT225AA
1 SUFFIX -0
REV. R1.00.00
NO. -AA0A0000
Made in Japan
A010408E.ai
Figure Installing the FCN/FCJ System Card into the NFCP100
RESET
SYSTEM
CARD System card insertion slot
SERIAL
2
Install by aligning the
SHUT
DOWN ▲ marks together.
NETWORK
1
2
FCN/FCJ
1 SYSTEM CARD
MODEL NT225AA
SUFFIX -0
REV. R1.00.00
NO. -AA0A0000
Made in Japan
A010409E.ai
Figure Installing the FCN/FCJ System Card
IMPORTANT
Insert or remove the FCN/FCJ system card when the CPU module is turned off.

A1.5 SB Bus Repeat Module

The SB bus repeat module is used to extend the SB bus within the control unit to the
expansion unit.
To use the SB bus in duplex, two SB bus repeat modules must be installed for each unit.
Each SB bus repeat module is connected using special cables via special T - joint.
IMPORTANT
SB bus repeat module (NFSB100) cannot be used on FCN-RTU.
n Specification
Table SB Bus Repeat Module Specification
Item Specification
Model NFSB100
Transmission method Serial communication
Baud rate 128 Mbps
Transmission distance Max. 8 m per train
Extension units Max. 2 units (3 units including a control unit)
Duplex configuration Possible
Power Supply voltage 5 V DC ± 5%
supply Current dissipation Max. 500 mA
Weight 0.2 kg
Size
Occupying slots 1
Slot No. 10 (for single SB bus)
Slots to be installed in
Slot Nos. 9 and 10 (for duplexed SB bus)
n External View
Operation Status Display LEDs
STATUS
SND
RCV
A010503E.ai
Figure SB Bus Repeat Module (T-joint attached: no terminating resistor)

Operation Status Display LEDs
STATUS : Normal hardware status
SND : Sending
RCV : Receiving
A010504E.ai
Figure SB Bus Repeat Module (T-joint attached: with terminating resistor)
n LEDs/T-joint
l LED
STATUS Green Lights when the hardware is normal.
SND Green Lights when the transmission is on.
RCV Green Lights when the reception is on.
l T-joint
There are two types of splitters for the SB bus repeat module. One type is with no terminating
resistor (NFSBT01) and one is with a terminating resistor (NFSBT02).
A T-joint with terminating resistor (NFSBT02) must be used for the SB bus repeat Module
installed in the control unit and the last expansion unit.
The T-joint without terminating resistor (NFSBT01) must be installed on the second Expansion
unit and is used to connect the first control unit and the third expansion unit when the unit
configuration is in three units.

A1.6 I/O Modules

I/O modules are signal converters used to convert the analog or digital signals from the
field into a data format that can be processed by the control application. They are also
used to output the data processed by the control application to the field.
I/O modules can be classified into the following types:
• Analog I/O module
• Digital I/O module
• Communication module
Table Combinations of I/O Modules and Terminal Blocks (1/2)
Model Terminal MIL
Module name
name block connector
Analog I/O Modules
NFAI141 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAV141 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAV142 Analog Input Module (-10 V to +10V, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA Input, 4 to 20 mA Output,
NFAI841 NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output, Non-Isolated)
Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V Input, 4 to 20 mA Output,
NFAB841 NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output, Non-Isolated)
NFAV542 Analog Output Module (-10 V to +10 V, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAI143 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAI543 Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAV144 Analog Input Module (-10 V to +10V, 16-Channel, Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAV544 Analog Output Module (-10 V to +10 V, 16-Channel, Isolated) NFTA4S MIL 40 pins
NFAT141 Thermocouple/mV Input Module (*1) (16-Channel, Isolated) NFTT4S MIL 40 pins (*1)
NFAR181 RTD Input Module (12-Channel, Isolated) NFTR8S –
NFAI135 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 8-Channel, Isolated Channels) NFTI3S MIL 40 pins
NFAI835 Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA, 4-Channel Input/4-Channel Output, Isolated Channels) NFTI3S MIL 40 pins
NFAP135 Pulse Input Module (8-Channel, Pulse Count, 0 to 10 kHz, Isolated Channels) NFTI3S MIL 40 pins
Frequency Input Module (8-channel, Contact ON/OFF, Voltage pulse, 0.1 Hz to 10
NFAF135 NFTI3S MIL 40 pins
kHz, Isolated channels)
Digital I/O Modules
NFDV151 Digital Input Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC) NFTB5S MIL 50 pins
NFDV157 Digital Input Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp Terminal Support Only) NFTC5S –
NFDV161 Digital Input Module (64-Channel, 24 V DC) – MIL 50 pins x 2
NFDV141 Digital Input Module (16-Channel, 100 - 120 V AC) NFTC4S-5 –
NFDV142 Digital Input Module (16-Channel, 200 - 220 V AC) NFTC4S-6 –
NFDV532 Pulse Width Output Module (4-channel : Up Pulse/Down Pulse, 24 V DC, Isolated) NFTD5S MIL50 pins
NFDV551 Digital Output Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC) NFTD5S MIL 50 pins
NFDV557 Digital Output Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp Terminal Support Only) NFTC5S –
NFDV561 Digital Output Module (64-Channel, 24 V DC) – MIL 50 pins x 2
NFDR541 Relay Output Module (16-Channel, 24 to 110 V DC,100 to 240 V AC) NFTC4S-7 –

Table Combinations of I/O Modules and Terminal Blocks (2/2)
Model Terminal MIL
Module name
name block connector
Communication Modules
NFLC121 CANopen Communication Module (1-port, 10kbps to 1Mbps) – –
NFLF111 Foundation Fieldbus communication module (4-port) NFTF9S –
NFLP121 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (1-port, 9.6kbps to 12Mbps) – –
NFLR111 RS-232-C Communication Module (2-port, 300 bps to 115.2 kbps) – –
NFLR121 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module (2-port, 300 bps to 115.2 kbps) – –
*1: When a MIL connector cable is connected, the NFAT141 serves as a mV input module and no thermocouple signal can be con-
nected.
Note: A MIL cable connector cover (NFCCC01) is provided for the connection via a MIL connector.
n External View
Status display LEDs Communication State
STATUS Display LEDs
ACT RCV
DX SND
STATUS ACT DX
CN1
General Example of RS-232-C RS-422/RS-485

Connector Connection Communication Module Communication Module
A010602E.ai
Figure I/O Module
SEE
ALSO The appearance varies depending on the I/O module. For the individual external view of each I/O module, see
“Analog I/O Module” (GS 34P02Q31-01E), “Digital I/O Module” (GS 34P02Q35-01E), “Serial Communication
Module”(GS 34P02Q36-01E), “CANopen Communication Module” GS 34P02Q58-01E), or “PROFIBUS-DP
Communication Module” (GS 34P02Q57-01E).

n Terminals/LEDs
STATUS Green Lights when the hardware is normal
ACT Green Lights when input/output actions are carried out
DX Green (Not used)
Table Communication State Display LED

RCV (1/2) Green Reception in progress
SND (1/2) Green Transmission in progress
NFLRxxx-S00 S1
1 2
1 2
A010626E.ai
Figure LED of NFLRxxx
SEE
ALSO Communication Status Display LED varies depending on each communication module.
For details, see “Serial Communication Module” (GS 34P02Q36-01E), “CANopen Communication Module” (GS
34P02Q58-01E), “PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module” (GS 34P02Q57-01E).

n Setting Elements
The transmitter power supply of the current input and current input/output modules can be
enabled or disabled by the pin settings depending on the transmitter type.
l NFAI141, NFAI143 Settings

Use setting pins S1 to S16 located on the printed circuit board on the right side of the NFAI141,
NFAI143 current Input module.
Table Setting Pins for the NFAI141, NFAI143 Current Input Module
Transmitter power Transmitter power
supply Remark supply Remark
Setting pin Setting Setting
display pins Enabled Disabled Channel Pin Enabled Disabled Channel
(2-wire type) (4-wire type) No. (2-wire type) (4-wire type) No.
S1 to S16 S1 1 2 2 3 1 S5 1 2 2 3 5
1 2 3 S2 4 5 5 6 2 S6 4 5 5 6 6
4 5 6
S3 1 2 2 3 3 S7 1 2 2 3 7
S4 4 5 5 6 4 S8 4 5 5 6 8
S9 1 2 2 3 9 S13 1 2 2 3 13
S10 4 5 5 6 10 S14 4 5 5 6 14
S11 1 2 2 3 11 S15 1 2 2 3 15
S12 4 5 5 6 12 S16 4 5 5 6 16
● Enabling the power supply (2-wire type)

Odd-number 1 2 3
channel
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8 Even-number 4 5 6
channel
PIN SETTING
● Disabling the power supply (4-wire type)

9 13
Odd-number 1 2 3
10 14
channel
11 15
12 16
Even-number 4 5 6
channel
A010604E.ai
Figure NFAI141, NFAI143 Current Input Module Settings

l NFAI841 Settings
Use setting pins S1 to S8 located on the printed circuit board on the right side of the NFAI841
current I/O module.
Table Setting Pins for the NFAI841 Current I/O Module
Transmitter power
supply Remark
Setting pin Setting
display pins Enabled Disabled
Channel No.
(2-wire type) (4-wire type)
S1 to S8 S1 1 2 2 3 1 ● Enabling the power supply (2-wire type)

Odd-number 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 5 6 channel
S2 2
4 5 6
S3 1 2 2 3 3 Even-number 4 5 6
channel
S4 4 5 5 6 4
● Disabling the power supply (4-wire type)
S5 1 2 2 3 5 Odd-number 1 2 3
channel
S6 4 5 5 6 6
Even-number 4 5 6
S7 1 2 2 3 7 channel
S8 4 5 5 6 8
A010605E.ai
1
2
3
4
PIN SETTING
5
6
7
8
A010606E.ai
Figure NFAI841 Current I/O Module Settings

A1.6.1 Analog I/O Module (Specification)

The specification of the Analog I/O module is shown below.
l Current/Voltage Input Module (Non-Isolated Type)

Table Current/Voltage Input Module (Non-Isolated Type)
Items Specifications
Model NFAI141 (*3)(*4) NFAV141 NFAV142
16, non-isolated
Number of input channels 16, non-isolated 16, non-isolated
(differential input)
1 to 5 V (allowable common
Input signal 4 to 20 mA -10 to 10 V
mode voltage 1 V or less)
Allowable input current/voltage 27 mA ± 7.5 V ± 13 V
Overcurrent protection Provided — —
Power ON 250 Ω (*1) 1 MΩ or more 1 MΩ or more
Input resistance
Power OFF 500 kΩ or more 340 kΩ or more 660 kΩ or more
Accuracy ± 0.1% of full scale
Data refresh cycle 10 ms
Input step response time 100 ms
22.8 to 26.4 V (output
Transmitter power supply — —
current limit: 27 mA) (*2)
Setting of 2-wire or 4-wire For each channel by setting
— —
transmitter pin
Temperature drift Max. ± 0.01%/ °C
310 mA (5 V DC) 350 mA (5 V DC) 350 mA (5 V DC)
Maximum current consumption
450 mA (24 V DC) — —
Weight 0.2 kg 0.2 kg 0.2 kg
External connection Pressure clamp terminal, MIL connector cable
*1: A voltage drop by up to 3 V may occur due to the internal protection circuit.
*2: Depends on the actual voltage applied by analog field power supply (24 V DC) via base module.
*3: When this I/O module is used with 2-wire transmitter, 24 V DC needs to be supplied to an analog field power supply terminal of
the power supply module.
*4: A Zener barrier is not allowed to be connected with this module. Use an isolation barrier when the module is used in intrinsically
safe application.

l Current/Voltage I/O Module (Non-Isolated Type)
Table Current/Voltage I/O Module (Non-Isolated Type)
Model NFAI841 (*5)(*6) NFAB841 (*5)
8-channel input/8-channel output, 8-channel input/8-channel output,
Number of I/O channels
non-isolated non-isolated (differential input)
Input: 1 to 5 V
(allowable common
I/O signal Input: 4 to 20 mA Output: 4 to 20 mA Output: 4 to 20 mA
mode voltage ± 1 V
or less)
Allowable input current/voltage 25 mA — ± 7.5 V —
Overcurrent protection Provided — — —
Power ON 250 Ω (*1) — 1 MΩ or more —
Input resistance
Power OFF 500 kΩ or more — 340 kΩ or more —
Allowable load resistance — 0 to 750 Ω (*3) — 0 to 750 Ω
Circuit-open detection — 0.65 mA or less — 0.65 mA or less
Accuracy ± 0.1% of full scale ± 0.3% of full scale ± 0.1% of full scale ± 0.3% of full scale
Output step response time 40 ms
Set for each channel Set for each channel
Output fallback (*4) — —
(*3) (*3)
22.8 to 26.4 V
Transmitter power supply —
(output current limit: 27 mA)(*2)
Setting of 2-wire or 4-wire
For each channel by setting pin —
transmitter
Temperature drift Max. ± 0.01 %/ °C
310 mA (5 V DC) 310 mA (5 V DC)
500 mA (24 V DC) 250 mA (24 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
*1: A voltage drop by up to 3 V may occur due to the internal protection circuit.
*3: To be selected from the following where the fallback detection time is 4 seconds:
- HOLD (holds the current state [level] when the fallback action is triggered).
- SETV (sets the output to the preset level when the fallback action is triggered).
- NO (performs no fallback action).
*4: Whether to enable output fallback actions is to be selected for each module. When enabling them, select HOLD or SETV for
each channel.
*5: When this I/O module is used, 24 V DC needs to be supplied to an analog field power supply terminal of the power supply
module.
safe application.

l Current Input Modules (Isolated)
Table Current Input Modules (Isolated)
Model NFAI143 (*1)(*3)
Number of input channels 16-channel input, isolated
Input signal 4 to 20 mA
Allowable input voltage 24 mA
Overcurrent protection Provided
Withstanding voltage Between input and system: 1500 V AC for 1 minute (*2)
Power ON 250 Ω
Input resistance
Power OFF 500 kΩ or more
Transmitter power supply 24.0 to 25.5 V (output current limit:25 mA)
Setting of 2-wire or 4-wire
For each channel by setting pin
transmitter
230 mA (5 V DC)
540 mA (24 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
module.
*2: The withstanding voltage for using MIL connector cable depends on the electrical specifications of its cable. If you are using
KMS40 cable, withstanding voltage of between input and system is 500 V AC for 1 minute.
safe application.

l Current Output Modules (Isolated)
Table Current Output Modules (Isolated)
Model NFAI543 (*3)
Number of output channels 16-channel output, isolated
Output signal 4 to 20 mA
Between output and system: 1500 V AC for 1 minute
Withstanding voltage
(*4)
Allowable load resistance 0 to 750 Ω
Circuit-open detection 0.65 mA or less
Output fallback (*2) Set for each channel (*1)
Temperature drift Max. ± 0.01%/°C
Maximum current 230 mA (5 V DC)
consumption 540 mA (24 V DC)
Weight 0.4 kg
*1: HOLD: To hold output in which fallback is detected.
SETV: To output a specified value when fallback is detected.
*2: Select fallback [Yes/No] for each module.
If [Yes] is selected for fallback, set [HOLD/SETV] for each channel.
Fallback detection time: 4 seconds
module.
l Voltage Input Module (Isolated)

This module inputs -10 V to +10 V DC.
Table Voltage Input Module (Isolated)
Model NFAV144
Number of input channels 16, isolated
Input signal 1 to 5 V -10 to +10 V (*1)
Switching input signals 1 to 5 V / -10 to +10 V: Set for channels all together
Allowable input voltage -30 to +30 V
Power ON 1 MΩ
Input resistance
Power OFF 200 kΩ
Maximum current consumption 500 mA (5 V DC)
Weight 0.2 kg
*1: Specifying “-10 to +10 V” as the input signal enables you to set the input range on a channel basis using the resource
configurator.

l Voltage Output Module (Isolated)
This module outputs -10 V to +10 V DC.
Table Voltage Output Module (Isolated)
Model NFAV544
Number of output channels 16, isolated
Output signal -10 to +10 V
Allowable load resistance More than 5 kΩ
Weight 0.2 kg
l Voltage Output Module (Non-Isolated Type)

Table Voltage Output Module (Non-Isolated Type)
Model NFAV542
Number of output channels 16, non-isolated
Output signal -10 to 10 V
Allowable load resistance More than 10 kΩ
Weight 0.2 kg

l Thermocouple Input/Temperature-Measuring Resistor Input Module (Isolated
Type)
Table Thermocouple Input/Temperature-Measuring Resistor Input Module (Isolated Type)
Model NFAT141 (*6) NFAR181
Number of input channels 16, isolated 12, isolated
TC: JIS C1602 : 1995, IEC60584-1989
RTD: JIS C1604 : 1997, IEC60751-1995
Type J, K, E, B(*1), R, S, T, N
Pt100 (3-wire type)
JIS C1602 : 1981, IEC60584-1977
JIS C1604 : 1989, IEC60751-1986
Input signal Type J, K, E, B(*1), R, S, T
Pt100 (3-wire type)
IEC60584 : 1977
JIS C1604 : 1989
Type N
JPt100 (3-wire type)
mV: -100 to 150 mV, -20 to 80 mV
TC/mV can be set individually for CH1 to
Switching input signals —
CH16.
Allowable input voltage ±5V ±5V
Between input and system: 1500 V AC for Between input and system: 1500 V AC for
1 minute (*7) 1 minute
Power ON 2 MΩ or more
Input resistance
Power OFF 2 MΩ or more
Thermocouple inputs:
± 0.03% of full scale (for -20 to 80 mV)
Accuracy ± 0.03% of full scale (for 0 to 400 Ω)
mV inputs:
± 0.032% of full scale (for -100 to 150 mV)
Allowable total resistance of
1000 Ω or less 40 Ω or less (wiring resistance per wire)(*2)
signal source plus wiring
Effect of allowable signal
± 20 µV —
source resistance (1000 Ω)
Cold junction compensation
Within ±1°C (*3, 4) —
accuracy
Measurement current — 1 mA
Thermocouple inputs: Max. ±30 ppm/°C
Temperature drift Max. ±30 ppm/°C
mV inputs: Max.±32 ppm/°C
Data refresh cycle 1sec
All channels can be set together.
Burn-out Setting: Not available/available (UP/DOWN)
detection time: 60 seconds
Maximum current consumption 450 mA (5 V DC) 450 mA (5 V DC)
Weight 0.2 kg
Pressure clamp terminal, MIL connector
External connection Pressure clamp terminal
cable (*5)
*1: Type B dose not carry out temperature compensation and can not measure under 44°C
*2: Each wiring resistance should be equal.
*3: This accuracy changes due to the installation condition.
If measured temperature is lower than 0°C, multiply the above value by the following coefficient (K):
Thermoelectromotive force per degree at 0 °C
K=
Thermoelectromotive force per degree at measured temperature
A010618E.ai
*4: Cold junction compensation accuracy varies depending on the temperature environment of pressure clamp terminal.
Table Specifications for Node only
Temperature Environment Cold Junction Compensation accuracy
-20 to 15 °C ± 2 °C
15 to 45 °C ± 1 °C
45 to 70 °C ± 2 °C
*5: Use a MIL connector cable for only mV input.
*6: The NFAT141 thermocouple input module imposes limitations in installation. For more information, refer to “A1.15.2 Installing
Other Modules or to the Base Module.”

l Current Input/Current I/O Module (Isolated Channels)
Table Current Input/Current I/O Modules (Isolated Channels)
Model NFAI135 (*5)(*7) NFAI835 (*5)(*7)
4-channel input/4-channel output, isolated
Number of I/O channels 8-channel input, isolated channels
channels
I/O signal 4 to 20 mA Input: 4 to 20 mA Output: 4 to 20 mA
Allowable input current 25 mA 25 mA —
Overcurrent protection Provided Provided —
Between input/output and system: 500 V AC for 1 minute, between channel: 500 V AC
Withstanding voltage (*6)
for 1 minute
Power ON 250 Ω (*1)
Input resistance
Power OFF 500 kΩ or more
Allowable load resistance — — 0 to 750 Ω
Circuit-open detection — — 0.65 mA or less
Inputs: Outputs:
Accuracy 0.1% of full scale
0.1% of full scale 0.3% of full scale
Input step response time 100 ms 100 ms —
Output step response time — — 100 ms
Set for each
Output fallback (*4) — —
channel(*3)
Transmitter power supply 20.2 to 29.3 V (*2) 20.2 to 29.3 V(*2) —
360 mA (5 V DC) 360 mA (5 V DC)
450 mA (24 V DC) 450 mA (24 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
*1: A voltage drop by up to 0.8 V may occur due to the internal protection circuit.
module.
safe application.

l Pulse Input Module (Isolated Channels)
Table Pulse Input Module (Isolated Channels)
Model NFAP135 (*5)
Number of input channels 8, isolated channels
2-wire type: Contact ON/OFF, voltage pulse,
Input signal (*1) current pulse (possible to supply transmitter power)
3-wire type: Power-supply-type voltage pulse
Input frequency 0 to 10 kHz (*2)
Between input and system: 500 V AC for 1 minute, between channels: 500 V
Withstanding voltage (*6)
AC for 1 minute
Minimum input pulse width 40 µs
Contact input
Open/close levels of relay contact and transistor contact
Open: 100 kΩ or more, Close: 200 Ω or less
Contact capacity
When supplying 12 V DC: 15 V DC 15 mA or more
Input signal level When supplying 24 V DC: 30 V DC 30 mA or more
Voltage/current pulse input (Current input is converted to voltage.)
VH-VL (voltage swing): 3 V or greater
where VH: 3 to 24 V
VL: Ranges from -1 to 8 V
Signal source resistance: 1 kΩ or less
Shunt resistance Select from OFF/200/500/1000 Ω. (Open when power is OFF) (*1)
Pull-up resistance 68 kΩ (12 V DC or 24 V DC)
Filter function Can select a filter that eliminates chattering (*3).
Can select 24 V DC/12 V DC.
Transmitter power supply
Limiter value 12 V DC 10 %: 40 mA, 24 V DC 10 %: 30 mA (*4)
300 mA (5 V DC)
400 mA (24 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
*1: Connection methods and other parameters (transmitter power supply and shunt resistance) depend on the input mode.
For details, refer to example of connection methods and other settings in the input mode.
*2: 0 to 800 Hz for an open-collector contact input.
*3: The maximum input frequency is lower than specified when the filter for eliminating chattering is used.
module.

Table Connections and settings in input mode for pulse input module (NFAP135)
Transmitter
Shunt resistance
No. Input mode (*1) Connection power supply
12 V 24 V OFF 200 Ω 500 Ω 1000 Ω
Dry contact pulse
1 INB-INC    – – –
(open-collector contact) (*2)
2 Dry contact pulse (relay contact) INA-INB  – – – – 
3 Voltage pulse INB-INC    – – –
2-wire transmitter current pulse
4 INA-INB   –  (*3) –
(4 to 20 mA)
5 3-wire transmitter voltage pulse INA-INB-INC    – – –
*1: Five input modes are available. Select an appropriate transmitter power supply and shunt resistor according to the input mode.
Refer to examples of connections and settings for input modes.
*2: Maximum input frequency is 800 Hz when dry contact pulse (open-collector contact) input mode is selected.
*3: When a 500V shunt resistor is selected, note the limitations below:
• No module may be installed next to the pulse input module (NFAP135).
• Use the pulse input module (NFAP135) with up to four inputs.
Examples of connections and settings depending on the pulse input mode (NFAP135):
(In the following diagrams, SW1 is a switch for enabling/disabling input resistance RL, and SW2
is for enabling/disabling chattering eliminating filter FIL.)
1. An example of connecting a dry contact pulse (open-collector contact)
12/24 V
INA
68 kΩ
INB
SW1 SW2
RL FIL
INC
A010620E.ai
SW1 (RL): OFF

SW2 (FIL): ON when necessary
2. An example of connecting a dry contact pulse (relay contact)
INA 12 V
INB
SW1 SW2
RL(1 kΩ) FIL

INC
A010621E.ai
SW1 (RL: 1 kV): ON


3. An example of connecting a voltage pulse
12/24 V
INA
Transmitter
INB
SW1 SW2
RL FIL
INC
A010622E.ai
SW1 (RL): OFF

4. An example of connecting a 4-20 mA current pulse from a two-wire transmitter

Transmitter
INA 12/24 V
INB
SW1 SW2
RL FIL
INC
A010623E.ai
SW1 (RL): Either 200 V or 500 V(*1) to be used

*1: If a 500 V shunt resistor is used, note the installation limitations specified.
5. An example of connecting a voltage pulse from a three-wire transmitter

Transmitter
INA 12/24 V
INB
SW1 SW2
RL FIL
INC
A010624E.ai
SW1 (RL): OFF


l Frequency Input Module(Isolated Channels)
Table Frequency Input Module (Isolated Channels)
Model NFAF135
Number of input channels 8, isolated channels
Input signal (*1) Contact ON/OFF, voltage pulse (rectangular wave)
Input frequency 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz (*2)
Frequency accuracy 0.1 % of reading
Withstanding voltage (*3) Between input and system: 500 V AC for 1 minute, between channels: 500 V AC for 1
minute
Minimum input pulse width 40 μs
Input signal level Contact input
Open/close levels of relay contact and transistor contact
Open: 100 kΩ or more, Close: 200 Ω or less
Contact capacity
Voltage pulse input
VH-VL (swing value): 3 V or more
VH (high level): 3 to 24 V DC
VL (low level): -1 to 8 V DC
Signal source resistance: 1 kΩ or less
Shunt resistance Select from OFF/1000 Ω. (Open when power is OFF) (*1)
Pull-up resistance 68 kΩ (12 V DC or 24 V DC)
Data refresh cycle 10ms
Field power supply Can select 24 V DC/12 V DC.
Limiter value 12 V DC ±10 %: 40 mA,
24 V DC ±10 %: 30 mA (*4)
Maximum current consumption 300 mA (5 V DC), 400 mA (24 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
External connection Pressure clamp terminal, MIL connector cable (*3)
*1: For details, refer to example of connection methods and other settings in the input mode.
*2: 0.1 to 800 Hz for an open-collector contact input.
When this I/O module is used, 24 V DC needs to be supplied to an analog field power supply terminal of the power supply
module.
Table Connections and settings in input mode for Frequency input module (NFAF135)
Transmitter power Shunt resistance
No. Input mode (*1) Connection supply
12V 24V OFF 1000Ω
1 Dry contact pulse (open-collector contact) (*2) INB-INC X X X –
2 Dry contact pulse (relay contact) INA-INB X – – X
3 Voltage pulse NB-INC X X X –
*1: Three input modes are available. Select an appropriate transmitter power supply and shunt resistor according to the input
mode.
Refer to examples of connections and settings for input modes.
*2: 0.1 to 800 Hz when dry contact pulse (open-collector contact) input mode is selected.

Examples of connections and settings depending on the input mode (NFAF135):
(In the following diagrams, SW1 is a switch for enabling/disabling shunt resistance RL.)
1. An example of connecting a dry contact pulse (open-collector contact)
12/24 V
INA
68 kΩ
INB
SW1
RL
INC
A010627E.ai
SW1 (RL): OFF
2. An example of connecting a dry contact pulse (relay contact)
INA 12 V
INB
SW1
RL
INC (1 kΩ)
A010628E.ai
SW1 (RL: 1 kΩ): ON
3. An example of connecting a voltage pulse
12/24 V
INA
Transmitter
INB
SW1
RL
INC
A010629E.ai
SW1 (RL): OFF

A1.6.2 Digital I/O Module (Specification)

The specification of the digital I/O module is shown below.
l Input Module
Table Input Module
Item Specifications
Model NFDV151 NFDV157 NFDV161
Number of input channels 32 32 64
Rated input voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC
Input ON voltage 18 to 26.4 V DC 18 to 26.4 V DC 20 to 26.4 V DC
Input OFF voltage 5.0 V DC or less 5.0 V DC or less 5.0 V DC or less
Input current (at rated input voltage) 4.1 mA ± 20 % / channel 4.1 mA ± 20 % / channel 2.5 mA ± 20 % / channel
Instantaneous allowable maximum
30.0 V DC 30.0 V DC 30.0 V DC
input voltage
Between input signal and system: 2000 V AC for 1 minute (*2)
Withstanding voltage Between commons: 500 V AC for 1 minute, common minus (-) side every
16-channel
Functions
Status input Function for detecting Function for detecting Function for detecting
ON/OFF status ON/OFF status ON/OFF status
Pushbutton input Function for counting the — Function for counting the
push-button edge push-button edge (*1)
Input response time 8 ms or less (for status input)
Minimum ON detection time 20 ms (for pushbutton input)
Maximum ON/OFF cycle 25 Hz (for pushbutton input)
Maximum current consumption 500 mA (5 V DC) 350 mA (5 V DC) 550 mA (5 V DC)
Pressure clamp terminal,
External connection Pressure clamp terminal MIL connector cable
MIL connector cable
*1: Push button input is possible only for input channels from 1 to 32.
*2: The withstanding voltage for using MIL connector cable depends on the electrical specifications of its cable.

l AC Input Module
Table AC Input Module
Item Specifications
Model NFDV141 NFDV142
Number of input channels 16 16
Rated input voltage (*1) 100 to 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz 200 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Input ON voltage (peak value) 80 V AC (113 V) to 132 V AC (187 V) 160 V AC (226 V) to 264 V AC (373 V)
Input OFF voltage (peak value) 20 V AC (28 V) or less 40 V AC (56 V) or less
Input current (TYP) 4.7 mA (@120 V/60 Hz) / channel 6.2 mA (@240 V/60 Hz) / channel
Input current (MAX) 7 mA / channel 9.3 mA / channel
Between input signal and system: 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Between commons: 1350 V AC for 1 minute, common side every 8-channel
Functions
Status input Function for detecting ON/OFF status
Pushbutton input Function for counting the push-button edge
Minimum ON detection time 200 ms (for pushbutton input)
Maximum ON/OFF cycle 2.5 Hz (for pushbutton input)
Maximum current consumption 500 mA (5 V DC) 500 mA (5 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg 0.3 kg
External connection Pressure clamp terminal Pressure clamp terminal
*1: Input a sine wave for AC signals.
Note: AC input signals to the same common should be the same phase.
l Pulse Width Output Module

The Pulse Width Output Module outputs 4-channel pulse signals.
Item Specifications
Model NFDV532
Number of output channels 4-channel : Up Pulse/Down Pulse
Rated applied voltage 24 V DC
Load voltage (*1) 24 V DC, 25 mA
Field power supply voltage range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Output ON voltage maximum value 2 V DC
Leak current maximum value when
0.1 mA
output OFF
Output format Current sink
Maximum load current (*2) 100 mA/channel, 26.4 V
Withstanding voltage Between output signal and system : 2000 V AC for 1 minute (*5)
HOLD: Reset all the output channels after outputting all pulse signals
when a fallback is detected.
Output fallback(*3)(*4) OFF : Resets all the output channels immediately to off when the
fallback action is triggered.
NO : Performs no fallback action.
Pulse output accuracy 2 ms Min., 2 ms increments (error: ±1 ms Max.)
550 mA (5 V DC)
25 mA (24 V DC, field power supply)
Weight 0.2 kg
*1: An external field power supply (24 V DC) is required for each module.
*2: Connect a spark killer diode when driving DC relay.
*3: The fallback detection time is 4 seconds.
*4: HOLD, OFF, or NO should be chosen for all channels commonly.

l Output Module
Table Output Module
Item Specifications
Model NFDV551 NFDV557 NFDV561
Number of output channels 32 32 64
Rated applied voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC
Load voltage (*1) 24 V DC, 50 mA 24 V DC, 50 mA 24 V DC, 100 mA
Field power supply voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V 20.4 to 26.4 V 20.4 to 26.4 V
range
Output ON voltage maximum
2 V DC 2 V DC 2 V DC
value
Leak current maximum value
0.1 mA 0.1 mA 0.1 mA
when output OFF
Output format Current sink Current sink Current sink
Maximum load current (*2) 100 mA/channel, 26.4 V 100 mA/channel, 26.4 V 100 mA/channel, 26.4 V
Between output signal and system: 2000 V AC for 1 minute (*5)
Between commons: 500 V AC for 1 minute, common minus (–) side every 16-channel
Functions
Status output ON/OFF status output ON/OFF status output ON/OFF status output
function function function
HOLD: Holds the current states when the fallback action is triggered.
Output fallback (*3) (*4) OFF: Resets all the output channels to off when the fallback action is triggered.
NO: Performs no fallback action.
Output response time 3 ms or less (for status output)
700 mA (5 V DC) 550 mA (5 V DC) 780 mA (5 V DC)
Maximum current consumption 60 mA (24 V DC, field power 60 mA (24 V DC, field power 120 mA (24 V DC, field
supply) supply) power supply)
Pressure clamp terminal,
External connection Pressure clamp terminal MIL connector cable
MIL connector cable
*1: An external field power supply (24 V DC) is required for each module.

l Relay Output Module
Table Relay Output Module
Item Specifications
Model NFDR541
Number of output channels 16
24 to 110 V DC,
Rated applied voltage (*1)
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60Hz
Resistive load:
24 V DC: 2.0 A/channel, 48 V DC: 1.0 A/channel, 110 V DC: 0.4 A/channel
100 V AC: 2.0 A/channel, 220 V AC: 2.0 A/channel
Maximum load current (*2)
Inductive load:
24 V DC: 0.6 A/channel, 48 V DC: 0.3 A/channel, 110 V DC: 0.1 A/channel
100 V AC: 1.0 A/channel, 220 V AC: 1.0 A/channel
Between output signal and system: 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Between commons: 1350 kV AC for 1 minute, common side every 8-channel
Functions
Status output ON/OFF status output function
HOLD: Holds the current states when the fallback action is triggered.
OFF: Resets all the output channels to off when the fallback action is
Output fallback (*3) (*4)
triggered.
Output response time 12 ms or less (for status output)
Weight 0.3 kg
External connection Pressure clamp terminal
*1: NFDR541 is compliant with the CE marking and ATEX Type “n” standards only when the voltage of 24 V DC or less is applied to
its output terminal.
*2: Maximum 8 A is allowed per common. Connect a spark killer diode when driving DC relay.
*3: Fallback detection time is 4 seconds.
Note: The signals connected the same common should be the same phase when applying AC voltage.

A1.6.3 Serial Communication Module (Specification)

The specification of the serial communication module is shown below.
l Serial Communication Module

Table Serial Communication Module
Item Specifications
Model NFLR111 NFLR121
Interface RS-232-C (2 ports) RS-422/RS-485 (2 ports)
How connected Point-to-point Multipoint
How communicates Half-duplex/Full-duplex (*1)
How synchronizes Start-stop synchronization
Communication speed 0.3, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 76.8, 115.2 kbps
Transmission code ASCII/binary
Character length 7/8 bits
Stop bit 1/2 bits
Parity check None/even/odd
Transmission distance Maximum 15 m Maximum 1200 m (total extended length)
Clamped with terminal block’s M4 screws
Wiring connection (*2) D-sub 9-pin (female x 2) (*3)
(5 poles x 2) (*4)
Current consumption 500 mA
*1: Only half-duplex communication is supported when communication of NFLR121 is done through a two-wiring system.
*2: For connection terminals and cables, refer to “ A1.16.4 Communication Cables.”
*3: Connectors are fastened using metric screw threads (M2.6).
RS-232-C interface uses CD line (for input signal monitor) and CS line (for transmission of flow controls). Wiring of these signal
lines is necessary.
*4: Comes with two terminator of 120 ohm.
Note: A total of up to eight NFLR111/NFLR121 serial communication modules can be installed for each FCN-500 and FCN-100.

l CANopen Communication Module
Table CANopen Communication Module
Item Specifications
Model NFLC121
Interface CANopen
Connection method CiA 301 compliant
Number of ports 1
Isolation Between signals and system
Connector D-sub 9-pin (male) (*1)
Communication speed 10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 kbps
Maximum transmission distance CiA 301 compliant
Maximum Current consumption 700mA (5V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
*1: The cables and terminators must comply with CiA 301.
Note: A total of up to eight NFLF111/NFLC121/NFLP121 communication modules can be installed for each FCN-500 and FCN-100.
l PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module

Table PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
Item Specifications
Model NFLP121
Interface PROFIBUS-DP
Connection method EIA-RS485-Compliant
Number of ports 1
Isolation Between signal and system
Connector D-sub 9-pin (female) (*1)
Communication speed 9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500, 3000, 6000, 12000 kbps
Maximum transmission distance 1.2km/segment (9600bps)
Maximum Current consumption 700mA (5V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg
*1: The cables and terminators must comply with PROFIBUS-DP standards (PROFIBUS Specifications IEC61158-2 type3).
Note: A total of up to eight NFLF111/NFLC121/NFLP121 communication modules can be installed for each FCN-500 and FCN-100.

A1.7 I/O Module Signal Connection

I/O modules can be connected directly to field devices via terminals. It can also be
connected using MIL connector cables supplied by the user.
This section describes the combinations of terminal connections for the pressure clamp
terminal blocks and connection cables supplied as accessories of I/O modules, as well as
terminal connection diagrams.
l Signal Cable Connection Variations

I/O modules can be connected directly to field devices via terminals. It can also be connected
using MIL connector cables supplied by the user.
The connection method to use can be selected depending on the purpose, for example, wiring
space saving or the standardization of installation procedure.
MIL cable connector cover
MIL connector cable
Pressure clamp terminal block
Field wiring
I/O module
A010701E.ai
Figure Variations on Signal Cable Connections

A1.8 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks

Wiring to the field devices is performed by attaching a pressure clamp terminal block or
MIL connector cable to the I/O module. The I/O module may also be directly wired to the
field device when a pressure clamp terminal block is used.
n Pressure Clamp Terminal Block Types

The following types are available according to usage purposes.
Table Pressure clamp Terminal Blocks
Model Connecting Connecting Connecting
Application Weight Specifications
Name Channels Module Name Cable
- Pressure clamp terminal
NFAI141, NFAV141,
NFAV142, NFAI841,
NFTA4S Analog 16 NFAB841, NFAV542, – 0.2kg
NFAV544, NFAI143,
NFAI543
NFTT4S Analog Thermocouple/mV 16 NFAT141 – 0.3kg Can select
NFTR8S Analog RTD 12 NFAR181 – 0.2kg either with
surge absorber
NFAI135, NFAI835, or without
NFTI3S Isolated Analog Module 8 – 0.2kg
NFAP135 , NFAF135 absorber.
NFTB5S Digital input 32 NFDV151 – 0.2kg
4 : Up pulse/
NFDV532
NFTD5S Digital output Down pulse – 0.2kg
32 NFDV551
NFDV141,
NFTC4S Digital input/output 16 – 0.1kg
NFDV142, NFDR541 Without surge
absorber.
0.3kg
NFTC5S Digital input/output 32 NFDV157, NFDV557 –
(with module)
n Shape of Pressure Clamp Terminal Block

The shape and external view of pressure clamp terminals are shown below.
Pressure clamp terminal block Dedicated pressure clamp
terminal block
NFTA4S NFTC4S
NFTT4S NFTC5S
NFTR8S
NFTB5S
NFTD5S
NFTI3S
A010802E.ai
Figure Shape of Pressure clamp Terminal Blocks
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr..28,2016-00

l Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)
The pressure clamp terminal for the NFAT141 thermocouple/mV input module has
embedded thermistors in the input terminal area and is used to provide reference junction
compensation.
4 thermistors
Custom terminal block
Thermistor*
Aluminum board to
equilibrate temperature *The thermistor is not
visible from the outside
A010803E.ai
Figure Structure of the RJC Terminal Area

A1.9 Analog I/O Module Signal Connection

I/O signal cables can be connected to analog I/O modules by pressure clamp terminals.
They can also be connected to the analog I/O module via MIL connector cables.
This section explains the I/O channel numbers using connection diagrams and tables.
l Pressure Clamp Terminals

The terminal numbers of pressure clamp terminals are arranged from A1 to A18 facing the
terminal and counting from the top of the left column. B1 to B18 are arranged from the top of the
right column.
Single use
A1 B1
A18 B18
A010901E.ai
Figure Pressure Clamp Terminal Number Arrangement
l MIL Connector
The alignment of pin numbers of a MIL connector is as shown below:
40 39
MIL connector pin numbers

(40 pins)
2 1
A010902E.ai
Figure MIL Connector Pin Numbers

n Example of Correspondence between I/O Channels and Pressure

Clamp Terminals or MIL Connector Pin
The following figure shows an example of the correspondence between I/O channel numbers
and pin numbers of pressure clamp terminals and MIL connector. The connection diagram and
tables on the following pages are for pressure clamp terminals, but the correspondence with MIL
connectors are shown below.
MIL Connector Pressure clamp terminal
CH1 40 39 CH1 A1 B1
CH2 CH2
38 37 A2 B2
36 35 A3 B3
34 33 A4 B4
32 31 A5 B5
30 29 A6 B6
28 27 A7 B7
26 25 A8 B8
24 23 A9 B9
22 21 A10 B10
20 19 A11 B11
18 17 A12 B12
16 15 A13 B13
14 13 A14 B14
CH15 12 11 CH15 A15 B15
CH16 CH16
10 9 A16 B16
8 7 A17 B17
6 5 A18 B18
4 3
2 1
: NC (Not used)
A010903J.ai
Figure Example of Correspondence between I/O Channels and Pressure Clamp Terminals or MIL
Connector Pin
IMPORTANT
The connection diagrams on the following pages are for “pressure clamp terminals,” and the
diagrams for “MIL connectors” are omitted. The tables contain information for both types.
Basically, the correspondence shown above is used.

n MIL Cables (Straight Type) and General-purpose Terminal Blocks

When MIL cables (straight type) and general-purpose terminal blocks are used for input/output
modules, the connectors of the input/output modules correspond to terminal numbers of the
general-purpose terminal blocks as shown below. For customer-supplied MIL cables and
terminal blocks, refer to the respective specifications carefully.
*1: Equivalent to MIL cables (KMS40-0□□) and general purpose terminal block (TAS40-0N) made by yokogawa. For details of these
cables, refer to GS 34P02Q43-01E, “MIL Connector Terminal Blocks, MIL Connector Cables.”
Pin No. of MIL Connectors and

Terminal No. of General-purpose
Terminal Blocks (MIL 40-pin)
Terminal No. of
Input/Output Module Pin No. of MIL
General-purpose
MIL 40-pin Connector
Terminal Block
40 1 A1
39
2 B1
MIL Cable
(straight type) 3 A2
4 B2
General-purpose
2 : MIL Pin No.
Terminal Block
B1 : Terminal Block No.
37 A19
40 : MIL Pin No.
1 : MIL Pin No. B20 : Terminal Block No. 38 B19
A1 : Terminal Block No. 39 : MIL Pin No. 39 A20
A20 : Terminal Block No.
40 B20
A010904E.ai
Figure Correspondence between the Signal Lines of MIL (40-pin) Connectors and Those of General-
purpose Terminal Blocks

n Cable Connection to the Analog I/O Modules

The terminals used to connect the signal cable vary for the devices being connected, depending
on the analog I/O module used. Use the following table to connect the proper signal cable to the
terminal.
Table Cable Connection to I/O Modules
I/O module Cable
I/O type
format connection pin
NFAI141 (*1) INA 2-wire transmitter input + Current input -
NFAI143 2-wire transmitter input - Current input + –
NFAI841 INB
(Setting pin: 2-wire input) (Setting pin: 4-wire input)
INA 2-wire transmitter input + –
NFAI135 (*1)
INB 2-wire transmitter input - Current input + –
NFAI835
INC – Current input -
Temperature-measuring
INA
resistor input A
NFAR181 (*2) INB – –
resistor input B
INC
resistor input B
INA 2-wire power supply (+) – 3-wire power supply
NFAP135 INB 2-wire power signal (-) 2-wire (voltage, contact) + 3-wire +
INC – 2-wire (voltage, contact) - 3-wire -
INA 2-wire power supply (+) – –
NFAF135 INB 2-wire power signal (-) 2-wire (voltage, contact) + –
INC – 2-wire (voltage, contact) - –
 indicates channel number.
*1: When the NFAI141, NFAI143, NFAI841, NFAI135, or NFAI835 are OFF or malfunctioning, the current input look is in open status.
Do not share the current signals will other receiving devices.
*2: Be sure to set the same wiring resistance for A and C.

A1.9.1 Analog Input Module for 16 Channels (NFAI141,

NFAI143, NFAV141, NFAV142, NFAV144)
l NFAI141, NFAI143 (4 to 20 mA Input)
Pressure clamp terminal
CH1 A1 B1
CH2
A2 B2
A3 B3
CH1
A4 B4
2-wire transmitter input +
A5 B5 IN1A
If power supply to transmitters
A6 B6
(2-wire) is set to be available
A7 B7 (using the setting pin of the
A8 B8 main unit).
(Reference: A1.6 I/O modules)
A9 B9 IN1B
2-wire transmitter input -
A10 B10
A11 B11
CH1
A12 B12 Current
input -
A13 B13 IN1A If power supply to transmitters
A14 B14 (4-wire) is set to be unavailable
CH15 A15 B15 (using the setting pin of the
Power Current
CH16 main unit).
A16 B16 supply input +
IN1B (Reference: A1.6 I/O modules)
A17 B17
A18 B18
: NC (Not used)
A010905E.ai A010906E.ai
Figure External Connections Figure Input Signal Connection Method for NFAI141
for NFAI141, NFAI143 and NFAI143
Table Pin Assignments for NFAI141, NFAI143

MIL connector Pressure clamp terminal
CH No.
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
CH1 40 IN1A 39 IN1B A1 IN1A B1 IN1B
- 8 NC 7 NC A17 NC B17 NC
4 NC 3 NC
2 Reserved 1 Reserved

• MIL Connector (Pin No./Signal Name) • Pressure clamp terminal (Terminal
No./Signal Name)
Signal Pin No. Signal
name name
IN1A 40 39 IN1B Signal Terminal No. Signal
IN2A 38 37 IN2B name name
IN3A 36 35 IN3B IN1A A1 B1 IN1B
IN12A 18 17 IN12B IN10A A10 B10 IN10B
IN13A 16 15 IN13B IN11A A11 B11 IN11B
IN14A 14 13 IN14B IN12A A12 B12 IN12B
IN15A 12 11 IN15B IN13A A13 B13 IN13B
IN16A 10 9 IN16B IN14A A14 B14 IN14B
N.C. 8 7 N.C. IN15A A15 B15 IN15B
N.C. 6 5 N.C. IN16A A16 B16 IN16B
N.C. 4 3 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
Reserved 2 1 Reserved N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
A010907E.ai A010908E.ai
• General-purpose Terminal Blocks (Terminal No./Signal Name) (*1)

Reserved
IN16A
IN15A
IN14A
IN13A
IN12A
IN10A
IN11A
IN9A
IN8A
IN7A
IN6A
IN5A
IN4A
IN3A
IN2A
IN1A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Terminal No. B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20
Terminal No. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN16B
IN15B
IN14B
IN13B
IN12B
IN11B
IN10B
IN9B
IN8B
IN7B
IN6B
IN5B
IN4B
IN3B
IN2B
IN1B
A010909E.ai
*1: Correspondence between terminal numbers and signal names are examples of connections using MIL cables (straight type).

l NFAV141 (1 to 5 V Input), NFAV142, NFAV144 (-10 to +10 V Input)
CH1 A1 B1
CH2
A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
CH15 A15 B15
CH16
A16 B16
A17 B17 : NC (Not used)
A18 B18
A010910E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAV141, NFAV142 and NFAV144
Table Pin Assignments for NFAV141, NFAV142 and NFAV144

CH No.
CH1 40 IN1+ 39 IN1- A1 IN1+ B1 IN1-
CH2 38 IN2+ 37 IN2- A2 IN2+ B2 IN2-
CH3 36 IN3+ 35 IN3- A3 IN3+ B3 IN3-
CH4 34 IN4+ 33 IN4- A4 IN4+ B4 IN4-
CH5 32 IN5+ 31 IN5- A5 IN5+ B5 IN5-
CH6 30 IN6+ 29 IN6- A6 IN6+ B6 IN6-
CH7 28 IN7+ 27 IN7- A7 IN7+ B7 IN7-
CH8 26 IN8+ 25 IN8- A8 IN8+ B8 IN8-
CH9 24 IN9+ 23 IN9- A9 IN9+ B9 IN9-
CH10 22 IN10+ 21 IN10- A10 IN10+ B10 IN10-
CH11 20 IN11+ 19 IN11- A11 IN11+ B11 IN11-
CH12 18 IN12+ 17 IN12- A12 IN12+ B12 IN12-
CH13 16 IN13+ 15 IN13- A13 IN13+ B13 IN13-
CH14 14 IN14+ 13 IN14- A14 IN14+ B14 IN14-
CH15 12 IN15+ 11 IN15- A15 IN15+ B15 IN15-
CH16 10 IN16+ 9 IN16- A16 IN16+ B16 IN16-
4 NC 3 NC

• MIL Connector • Pressure clamp terminal
(Pin No./Signal Name) (Terminal No./Signal Name)
Signal Pin No. Signal Signal Terminal No. Signal
name name name name
IN1+ 40 39 IN1- IN1+ A1 B1 IN1-
IN2+ 38 37 IN2- IN2+ A2 B2 IN2-
IN3+ 36 35 IN3- IN3+ A3 B3 IN3-
IN4+ 34 33 IN4- IN4+ A4 B4 IN4-
IN5+ 32 31 IN5- IN5+ A5 B5 IN5-
IN6+ 30 29 IN6- IN6+ A6 B6 IN6-
IN7+ 28 27 IN7- IN7+ A7 B7 IN7-
IN8+ 26 25 IN8- IN8+ A8 B8 IN8-
IN9+ 24 23 IN9- IN9+ A9 B9 IN9-
IN10+ 22 21 IN10- IN10+ A10 B10 IN10-
IN11+ 20 19 IN11- IN11+ A11 B11 IN11-
IN12+ 18 17 IN12- IN12+ A12 B12 IN12-
IN13+ 16 15 IN13- IN13+ A13 B13 IN13-
IN14+ 14 13 IN14- IN14+ A14 B14 IN14-
IN15+ 12 11 IN15- IN15+ A15 B15 IN15-
IN16+ 10 9 IN16- IN16+ A16 B16 IN16-
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010912E.ai
Reserved 2 1 Reserved
A010911E.ai

Reserved
IN16+
IN15+
IN14+
IN13+
IN12+
IN10+
IN11+
IN9+
IN8+
IN7+
IN6+
IN5+
IN4+
IN3+
IN2+
IN1+
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN16–
IN15–
IN14–
IN13–
IN12–
IN11–
IN10–
IN9–
IN8–
IN7–
IN6–
IN5–
IN4–
IN3–
IN2–
IN1–
A010913E.ai

A1.9.2 Analog I/O Module for 8 Channels (NFAI841, NFAB841)

l NFAI841 (4 to 20 mA, 8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output)
CH1 A1 B1
CH2
A2 B2
CH1
A3 B3
2-wire transmitter input +
IN A4 B4 IN1A
If power supply to transmitters
A5 B5
(2-wire) is set to be available
A6 B6 (using the setting pin of the
main unit).
A7 B7
(Reference: A1.6 I/O modules)
CH8 A8 B8 IN1B
CH9 2-wire transmitter input -
A9 B9
CH10
A10 B10
A11 B11 CH1
Current
OUT A12 B12 input -
A13 B13 IN1A If power supply to transmitters
(4-wire) is set to be unavailable
A14 B14
(using the setting pin of the
A15 B15 Power Current main unit).
CH16 supply input +
A16 B16 IN1B (Reference: A1.6 l/O modules)
A17 B17
A18 B18
: NC (Not used)
A010914E.ai A010915E.ai
Figure External Connections for Figure Input Signal Connection Method for NFAI841
NFAI841
Table Pin Assignments for NFAI841

CH No.
CH9 24 OUT1+ 23 OUT1- A9 OUT1+ B9 OUT1-
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
OUT1+ 24 23 OUT1- OUT1+ A9 B9 OUT1-
OUT2+ 22 21 OUT2- OUT2+ A10 B10 OUT2-
OUT3+ 20 19 OUT3- OUT3+ A11 B11 OUT3-
OUT4+ 18 17 OUT4- OUT4+ A12 B12 OUT4-
OUT5+ 16 15 OUT5- OUT5+ A13 B13 OUT5-
OUT6+ 14 13 OUT6- OUT6+ A14 B14 OUT6-
OUT7+ 12 11 OUT7- OUT7+ A15 B15 OUT7-
OUT8+ 10 9 OUT8- OUT8+ A16 B16 OUT8-
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010917E.ai
A010916E.ai

Reserved
OUT8+
OUT7+
OUT6+
OUT5+
OUT4+
OUT3+
OUT2+
OUT1+
IN8A
IN7A
IN6A
IN5A
IN4A
IN3A
IN2A
IN1A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
OUT8–
OUT7–
OUT6–
OUT5–
OUT4–
OUT3–
OUT2–
OUT1–
IN8B
IN7B
IN6B
IN5B
IN4B
IN3B
IN2B
IN1B
A010918E.ai

l NFAB841 (1 to 5 V 8-Channel Input, 4 to 20 mA 8-Channel Output)
CH1 A1 B1
CH2
A2 B2
A3 B3
IN A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
CH8 A8 B8
CH9 A9 B9
CH10
A10 B10
A11 B11
OUT A12 B12

A13 B13
A14 B14
A15 B15
CH16
A16 B16
A18 B18
A010919E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAB841
Table Pin Assignments for NFAB841

CH No.
CH1 40 IN1+ 39 IN1- A1 IN1+ B1 IN1-
CH2 38 IN2+ 37 IN2- A2 IN2+ B2 IN2-
CH3 36 IN3+ 35 IN3- A3 IN3+ B3 IN3-
CH4 34 IN4+ 33 IN4- A4 IN4+ B4 IN4-
CH5 32 IN5+ 31 IN5- A5 IN5+ B5 IN5-
CH6 30 IN6+ 29 IN6- A6 IN6+ B6 IN6-
CH7 28 IN7+ 27 IN7- A7 IN7+ B7 IN7-
CH8 26 IN8+ 25 IN8- A8 IN8+ B8 IN8-
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
IN1+ 40 39 IN1- IN1+ A1 B1 IN1-
IN2+ 38 37 IN2- IN2+ A2 B2 IN2-
IN3+ 36 35 IN3- IN3+ A3 B3 IN3-
IN4+ 34 33 IN4- IN4+ A4 B4 IN4-
IN5+ 32 31 IN5- IN5+ A5 B5 IN5-
IN6+ 30 29 IN6- IN6+ A6 B6 IN6-
IN7+ 28 27 IN7- IN7+ A7 B7 IN7-
IN8+ 26 25 IN8- IN8+ A8 B8 IN8-
OUT2+ 22 21 OUT2- OUT2+ A10 B10 OUT2-
OUT3+ 20 19 OUT3- OUT3+ A11 B11 OUT3-
OUT4+ 18 17 OUT4- OUT4+ A12 B12 OUT4-
OUT5+ 16 15 OUT5- OUT5+ A13 B13 OUT5-
OUT6+ 14 13 OUT6- OUT6+ A14 B14 OUT6-
OUT7+ 12 11 OUT7- OUT7+ A15 B15 OUT7-
OUT8+ 10 9 OUT8- OUT8+ A16 B16 OUT8-
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010921E.ai
A010920E.ai

Reserved
OUT8+
OUT7+
OUT6+
OUT5+
OUT4+
OUT3+
OUT2+
OUT1+
IN8+
IN7+
IN6+
IN5+
IN4+
IN3+
IN2+
IN1+
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
OUT8–
OUT7–
OUT6–
OUT5–
OUT4–
OUT3–
OUT2–
OUT1–
IN8–
IN7–
IN6–
IN5–
IN4–
IN3–
IN2–
IN1–
A010922E.ai

A1.9.3 Analog Output Module for 16 Channels (NFAV542,

NFAI543, NFAV544)
l NFAV542, NFAV544 (-10 to +10 V 16-Channel Output), NFAI543 (4 to 20 mA 16-
Channel Output)
CH1 A1 B1
CH2
A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
CH15 A15 B15
CH16
A16 B16
A18 B18
A010923E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAV542, NFAI543 and NFAV544
Table Pin Assignments for NFAV542, NFAI543 and NFAV544

CH No.
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
OUT10+ 22 21 OUT10- OUT10+ A10 B10 OUT10-
OUT11+ 20 19 OUT11- OUT11+ A11 B11 OUT11-
OUT12+ 18 17 OUT12- OUT12+ A12 B12 OUT12-
OUT13+ 16 15 OUT13- OUT13+ A13 B13 OUT13-
OUT14+ 14 13 OUT14- OUT14+ A14 B14 OUT14-
OUT15+ 12 11 OUT15- OUT15+ A15 B15 OUT15-
OUT16+ 10 9 OUT16- OUT16+ A16 B16 OUT16-
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010925E.ai
A010924E.ai

Reserved
OUT16+
OUT15+
OUT14+
OUT13+
OUT12+
OUT10+
OUT11+
OUT9+
OUT8+
OUT7+
OUT6+
OUT5+
OUT4+
OUT3+
OUT2+
OUT1+
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
OUT16–
OUT15–
OUT14–
OUT13–
OUT12–
OUT11–
OUT10–
OUT9–
OUT8–
OUT7–
OUT6–
OUT5–
OUT4–
OUT3–
OUT2–
OUT1–
A010926E.ai

A1.9.4 Thermocouple/mV Input Module for 16 Channels

(NFAT141)
l NFAT141 (TC/mV input for 16 channels, isolated)
CH1 A1 B1
CH2
A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9 RJC
A10 B10
RJC
A11 B11
A12 B12 RJC
A13 B13 RJC

A14 B14
CH15 A15 B15
CH16 * RJCs are integrated within
A16 B16 the connector
A17 B17
: NC (Not used)
A18 B18
A010927E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAT141
Table Pin Assignments for NFAT141

MIL connector (*1) Pressure clamp terminal
CH No.
CH1 40 IN1+ 39 IN1- A1 IN1+ B1 IN1-
CH2 38 IN2+ 37 IN2- A2 IN2+ B2 IN2-
CH3 36 IN3+ 35 IN3- A3 IN3+ B3 IN3-
CH4 34 IN4+ 33 IN4- A4 IN4+ B4 IN4-
CH5 32 IN5+ 31 IN5- A5 IN5+ B5 IN5-
CH6 30 IN6+ 29 IN6- A6 IN6+ B6 IN6-
CH7 28 IN7+ 27 IN7- A7 IN7+ B7 IN7-
CH8 26 IN8+ 25 IN8- A8 IN8+ B8 IN8-
CH9 24 IN9+ 23 IN9- A9 IN9+ B9 IN9-
CH10 22 IN10+ 21 IN10- A10 IN10+ B10 IN10-
CH11 20 IN11+ 19 IN11- A11 IN11+ B11 IN11-
CH12 18 IN12+ 17 IN12- A12 IN12+ B12 IN12-
CH13 16 IN13+ 15 IN13- A13 IN13+ B13 IN13-
CH14 14 IN14+ 13 IN14- A14 IN14+ B14 IN14-
CH15 12 IN15+ 11 IN15- A15 IN15+ B15 IN15-
CH16 10 IN16+ 9 IN16- A16 IN16+ B16 IN16-
4 NC 3 NC
*1: Applied only when mV input is used.
Note: Be sure to set the allowable signal source resistance/allowable wiring resistance including the external wire resistance to 1000 Ω
or less. When the burnout detection settings are enabled, a 3 µV offset error is generated per 10 Ω.

name name name name
IN1+ 40 39 IN1- IN1+ A1 B1 IN1-
IN2+ 38 37 IN2- IN2+ A2 B2 IN2-
IN3+ 36 35 IN3- IN3+ A3 B3 IN3-
IN4+ 34 33 IN4- IN4+ A4 B4 IN4-
IN5+ 32 31 IN5- IN5+ A5 B5 IN5-
IN6+ 30 29 IN6- IN6+ A6 B6 IN6-
IN7+ 28 27 IN7- IN7+ A7 B7 IN7-
IN8+ 26 25 IN8- IN8+ A8 B8 IN8-
IN9+ 24 23 IN9- IN9+ A9 B9 IN9-
IN10+ 22 21 IN10- IN10+ A10 B10 IN10-
IN11+ 20 19 IN11- IN11+ A11 B11 IN11-
IN12+ 18 17 IN12- IN12+ A12 B12 IN12-
IN13+ 16 15 IN13- IN13+ A13 B13 IN13-
IN14+ 14 13 IN14- IN14+ A14 B14 IN14-
IN15+ 12 11 IN15- IN15+ A15 B15 IN15-
IN16+ 10 9 IN16- IN16+ A16 B16 IN16-
Reserved 4 3 Reserved A010929E.ai
A010928E.ai
Note: When a MILL connector cable is connected,

only the mV Input Module can be used.

Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
IN16+
IN15+
IN14+
IN13+
IN12+
IN10+
IN11+
IN9+
IN8+
IN7+
IN6+
IN5+
IN4+
IN3+
IN2+
IN1+
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
IN16–
IN15–
IN14–
IN13–
IN12–
IN11–
IN10–
IN9–
IN8–
IN7–
IN6–
IN5–
IN4–
IN3–
IN2–
IN1–
A010930E.ai
Note: When a MIL connector cable is connected, only the mV Input Module can be used.

A1.9.5 RTD Input Module for 12 Channels (NFAR181)

l NFAR181 (RTD input for 12 channels, isolated)
A1 B1
CH1
Pressure clamp terminal A2 B2
CH2 A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
A15 B15
A16 B16
CH11
A17 B17
CH12 A18 B18
A010931E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAR181
Table Pin Assignments for NFAR181

CH No.
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
CH1 A1 IN1A B1 IN1C
CH1/CH2 A2 IN1B B2 IN2B
CH2 A3 IN2A B3 IN2C
CH3 A4 IN3A B4 IN3C
CH4 A6 IN4A B6 IN4C
CH5 A7 IN5A B7 IN5C
CH6 A9 IN6A B9 IN6C
CH7 A10 IN7A B10 IN7C
Note: Be sure to set the allowable wiring resistance to 40 Ω per wire or less. When the burnout detection settings are enabled,
a 36 m Ω offset error is generated per 40 Ω.

• Pressure clamp terminal (Terminal No./Signal Name)
Signal Terminal No. Signal
name name
IN1A A1 B1 IN1C
IN1B A2 B2 IN2B
IN2A A3 B3 IN2C
IN3A A4 B4 IN3C
IN3B A5 B5 IN4B
IN4A A6 B6 IN4C
IN5A A7 B7 IN5C
IN5B A8 B8 IN6B
IN6A A9 B9 IN6C
IN7A A10 B10 IN7C
IN7B A11 B11 IN8B
IN8A A12 B12 IN8C
IN9A A13 B13 IN9C
IN9B A14 B14 IN10B
IN10A A15 B15 IN10C
IN11A A16 B16 IN11C
IN11B A17 B17 IN12B
IN12A A18 B18 IN12C
A010933E.ai

A1.9.6 Analog Input Module for 8 Channels (NFAI135)

l NFAI135 (4 to 20 mA input for 8 channels, isolated channels)
Pressure clamp terminal CH1
IN1A A1 B1 2-wire transmitter input +

CH1 IN1B IN1A
IN1C A2 B2
If this module supplies
IN2A A3 B3
power to transmitters
CH2 IN2B
IN2C A4 B4 (2-wire).
A5 B5
IN1B
A6 B6 2-wire transmitter input -
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9 IN1C
A10 B10
CH1
A11 B11
IN1A
A12 B12
IN7A A13 B13
CH7 IN7B Power
IN7C
A14 B14
supply Current input +
IN8A A15 B15 IN1B
CH8 IN8B
If this module does not
IN8C
A16 B16
supply power to
A17 B17
transmitters (4-wire).
A18 B18 Current input -
IN1C
: NC (Not used)
A010933E.ai A010934E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAI135 Figure Input Signal Connection Method for NFAI135

CH No.
40 IN1A 39 NC A1 IN1A B1 NC
CH1
38 IN1B 37 IN1C A2 IN1B B2 IN1C
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
IN1A 40 39 N.C. IN1A A1 B1 N.C.
IN1B 38 37 IN1C IN1B A2 B2 IN1C
IN2A 36 35 N.C. IN2A A3 B3 N.C.
IN3A 32 31 N.C. IN3A A5 B5 N.C.
IN4A 28 27 N.C. IN4A A7 B7 N.C.
IN5A 24 23 N.C. IN5A A9 B9 N.C.
IN6A 20 19 N.C. IN6A A11 B11 N.C.
IN7A 16 15 N.C. IN7A A13 B13 N.C.
IN8A 12 11 N.C. IN8A A15 B15 N.C.
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010936E.ai
A010935E.ai

Reserved
IN8B
IN8A
IN7B
IN7A
IN6B
IN6A
IN5B
IN5A
IN4B
IN4A
IN3B
IN3A
IN2B
IN2A
IN1B
IN1A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN8C
N.C.
IN7C
N.C.
IN6C
N.C.
IN5C
N.C.
IN4C
N.C.
IN3C
N.C.
IN2C
N.C.
IN1C
N.C.
A010937E.ai

A1.9.7 Analog I/O Module for 4 Channels (NFAI835)

l NFAI835 (4 to 20 mA I/O for 4 channels each, isolated channels)
Pressure clamp terminal CH1
IN1A A1 B1 2-wire transmitter input +

CH IN1 IN1B IN1A
IN1C A2 B2
If this module supplies
IN2A A3 B3
CH IN2 IN2B power to transmitters
IN2C A4 B4 (2-wire).
A5 B5
IN1B
A6 B6 2-wire transmitter input -
IN4A A7 B7
CH IN4 IN4B
IN4C A8 B8
A9 B9 IN1C
CH OUT1 OUT1+
OUT1-
A10 B10
CH1
A11 B11
IN1A
A12 B12
A13 B13
CH OUT3 OUT3+ Power
OUT3- A14 B14
supply Current input +
A15 B15 IN1B
CH OUT4 OUT4+
OUT4-
A16 B16 If this module does not
A17 B17 supply power to
transmitters (4-wire).
A18 B18 Current input -
IN1C
: NC (Not used)
A010938E.ai A010939E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAI835 Figure Input Signal Connection Method for NFAI835

Pressure clamp terminal MIL connector
A1 IN1A B1 NC 40 IN1A 39 NC
A2 IN1B B2 IN1C 38 IN1B 37 IN1C
A9 NC B9 NC 24 NC 23 NC
A10 OUT1+ B10 OUT1- 22 OUT1+ 21 OUT1-
A12 OUT2+ B12 OUT2- 18 OUT2+ 17 OUT2-
A14 OUT3+ B14 OUT3- 14 OUT3+ 13 OUT3-
A16 OUT4+ B16 OUT4- 10 OUT4+ 9 OUT4-
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
IN1A 40 39 N.C. IN1A A1 B1 N.C.
IN2A 36 35 N.C. IN2A A3 B3 N.C.
IN3A 32 31 N.C. IN3A A5 B5 N.C.
IN4A 28 27 N.C. IN4A A7 B7 N.C.
N.C. 24 23 N.C. N.C. A9 B9 N.C.
OUT1+ 22 21 OUT1- OUT1+ A10 B10 OUT1-
N.C. 20 19 N.C. N.C. A11 B11 N.C.
OUT2+ 18 17 OUT2- OUT2+ A12 B12 OUT2-
N.C. 16 15 N.C. N.C. A13 B13 N.C.
OUT3+ 14 13 OUT3- OUT3+ A14 B14 OUT3-
N.C. 12 11 N.C. N.C. A15 B15 N.C.
OUT4+ 10 9 OUT4- OUT4+ A16 B16 OUT4-
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010941E.ai
A010940E.ai

Reserved
OUT4+
OUT3+
OUT2+
OUT1+
IN4B
IN4A
IN3B
IN3A
IN2B
IN2A
IN1B
IN1A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
OUT4–
N.C.
OUT3–
N.C.
OUT2–
N.C.
OUT1–
N.C.
IN4C
N.C.
IN3C
N.C.
IN2C
N.C.
IN1C
N.C.
A010942E.ai

A1.9.8 Pulse Input Module for 8 Channels (NFAP135)

l NFAP135 (Pulse input for 8 channels, isolated channels)
IN1A A1 B1
CH1IN1B
A2 B2
Pressure clamp terminal IN1C
IN2A A3 B3
CH2 IN2B
IN2C A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
IN7A A13 B13
CH7 IN7B
IN7C
A14 B14
IN8A A15 B15
CH8 IN8B
IN8C
A16 B16
A17 B17
: NC (Not used)
A18 B18
A010943E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAP135
Note: For external connections, refer to “A1.6.1 Analog I/O Module (Specification)”: “ Pulse Input Module (Individually Insulated Type)”
and “Examples of connections and settings depending on the input mode:.”
Table Pin Assignments for NFAP135

CH No.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
- A17 NC B17 NC 8 NC 7 NC
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
IN1A 40 39 N.C. IN1A A1 B1 N.C.
IN2A 36 35 N.C. IN2A A3 B3 N.C.
IN3A 32 31 N.C. IN3A A5 B5 N.C.
IN4A 28 27 N.C. IN4A A7 B7 N.C.
IN5A 24 23 N.C. IN5A A9 B9 N.C.
IN6A 20 19 N.C. IN6A A11 B11 N.C.
IN7A 16 15 N.C. IN7A A13 B13 N.C.
IN8A 12 11 N.C. IN8A A15 B15 N.C.
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010945E.ai
A010944E.ai

Reserved
IN8B
IN8A
IN7B
IN7A
IN6B
IN6A
IN5B
IN5A
IN4B
IN4A
IN3B
IN3A
IN2B
IN2A
IN1B
IN1A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN8C
N.C.
IN7C
N.C.
IN6C
N.C.
IN5C
N.C.
IN4C
N.C.
IN3C
N.C.
IN2C
N.C.
IN1C
N.C.
A010946E.ai

A1.9.9 Frequency Input Module (NFAF135)

l NFAF135 (Frequency input for 8 channels, isolated channels)
IN1A A1 B1
CH1IN1B
A2 B2
Pressure clamp terminal IN1C
IN2A A3 B3
CH2 IN2B
IN2C A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
IN7A A13 B13
CH7 IN7B
IN7C
A14 B14
IN8A A15 B15
CH8 IN8B
IN8C
A16 B16
A17 B17
: NC (Not used)
A18 B18
A010943E.ai
Figure External Connections for NFAF135
Note: For external connections, refer to “A1.6.1 Analog I/O Module (Specification)”: “ Frequency Input Module (Individually Insulated
Type)” and “Examples of connections and settings depending on the input mode:.”
Table Pin Assignments for NFAF135

CH No.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
4 NC 3 NC

name name name name
IN1A 40 39 N.C. IN1A A1 B1 N.C.
IN2A 36 35 N.C. IN2A A3 B3 N.C.
IN3A 32 31 N.C. IN3A A5 B5 N.C.
IN4A 28 27 N.C. IN4A A7 B7 N.C.
IN5A 24 23 N.C. IN5A A9 B9 N.C.
IN6A 20 19 N.C. IN6A A11 B11 N.C.
IN7A 16 15 N.C. IN7A A13 B13 N.C.
IN8A 12 11 N.C. IN8A A15 B15 N.C.
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. A010945E.ai
A010944E.ai

Reserved
IN8B
IN8A
IN7B
IN7A
IN6B
IN6A
IN5B
IN5A
IN4B
IN4A
IN3B
IN3A
IN2B
IN2A
IN1B
IN1A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN8C
N.C.
IN7C
N.C.
IN6C
N.C.
IN5C
N.C.
IN4C
N.C.
IN3C
N.C.
IN2C
N.C.
IN1C
N.C.
A010946E.ai

A1.10 Digital I/O Module Signal Connection

I/O signal cables can be connected to digital I/O modules by using pressure clamp
terminals. They can also be connected to the digital I/O module via MIL connector cables.
This section explains the I/O channel numbers using connection diagrams and tables.
l Pressure Clamp Terminals

The terminals of pressure clamp terminals are arranged from A1 to A18 facing the terminal and
counting from the top of the left column. B1 to B18 are arranged from the top of the right column.
Pressure clamp terminal block Dedicated pressure clamp
terminal block
STATUS ACT DX
A1 B1
Pin numbers are the same
A18 B18
A011001E.ai
Figure Terminal Numbers for Pressure clamp Terminals

l MIL Connectors
The following shows the pin number arrangements of the MIL connectors. The MIL connector for
digital I/O has 50 pins.
50 49 50 49
CN1 CN2
50 49
MIL connector pin numbers

(50 pins)
2 1
2 1 2 1
50-pin MIL connector 2-row 50-pin MIL connector
A011002E.ai
Figure MIL Connector Pin Number

n Example of Correspondence between Pressure clamp Terminals and

MIL Connector Pin Numbers
The following figure shows an example of the correspondence between I/O channel numbers
and pin numbers of pressure clamp terminals and MIL connector. The connection diagram and
tables on the following pages are for pressure clamp terminals only, but the correspondence with
MIL connectors are shown below.
Pressure clamp terminal MIL Connector
17 17
1 A1 B1 1 50 49
18 18
2 A2 B2 2 48 47
A3 B3 46 45
A4 B4 44 43
A5 B5 42 41
A6 B6 40 39
A7 B7 38 37
A8 B8 36 35
A9 B9 34 33
A10 B10 32 31
A11 B11 30 29
A12 B12 28 27
A13 B13 26 25
A14 B14 24 23
31 31
15 A15 B15 15 22 21
32 32
16 A16 B16 16 20 19
COMB COMB
COMA A17 B17 COMA 18 17
COMB
A18 B18 COMA 16 15
COMB
COMA 14 13
COMB
COMA 12 11
10 9
: NC (Not used)
8 7
6 5
4 3
Reserved
Reserved 2 1
A011003E.ai
Figure Example of Correspondence between I/O Channels and Pressure Clamp Terminals or MIL
Connector Pin

n MIL Cables (Straight Type) and General-purpose Terminal Blocks

When MIL cables (straight type) and general-purpose terminal blocks are used for input/output
modules, the connectors of the input/output modules correspond to terminal numbers of the
general-purpose terminal blocks as shown below. For customer-supplied MIL cables and
terminal blocks, refer to the respective specifications carefully.
*1: Equivalent to MIL cables (KMS50-0□□) and general purpose terminal block(TAS50-0N) made by yokogawa. For details of these
cables, refer to GS 34P02Q43-01E, “MIL Connector Terminal Blocks, MIL Connector Cables.”
Pin No. of MIL Connectors and

Terminal No. of General-purpose
Terminal Blocks (MIL 50-pin)
Terminal No. of
Pin No. of MIL
MIL50-pin General-purpose
Connector
Terminal Block
50
1 A1
49
2 B1
MIL Cable 3 A2
(straight type)
4 B2
2 : MIL Pin No. General-purpose

B1 : Terminal Block Terminal Block
No. 47 A24
50 : MIL Pin No.
1 : MIL Pin No. B25 : Terminal Block No. 48 B24
A1 : Terminal Block
49 : MIL Pin No. 49 A25
No.
A25 : Terminal Block No. 50 B25
A011028E.ai
Figure Correspondence between the Signal Lines of MIL (50-pin) Connectors and Those of General-
purpose Terminal Blocks
n Precaution for Wiring Work
CAUTION
Do not perform wiring while power is on.
NFDV141, NFDV142, and NFDR541 have 100 V AC or 200 V AC of voltage applied to the signal
wires. There is risk of receiving an electric shock. Turn off all power before performing wiring
work.

A1.10.1 Digital Input Module, 32 Channel/24 V DC (NFDV151)

Dedicated Pressure Clamps
17
1 A1 B1
18
2 A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
A15 B15
16 32
A16 B16 DC24V
DC24V
A17 B17
A18 B18 ?Terminal A17: Common A : NC (Not used)
B17:Common B
A011004E.ai
Figure Example of External Connections for NFDV151
Table Pin Assignments for NFDV151

Pin No. Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Signal name Pin No. Signal name
A1 50 IN1 49 IN17 IN1 B1 IN17
A2 48 IN2 47 IN18 IN2 B2 IN18
A3 46 IN3 45 IN19 IN3 B3 IN19
A4 44 IN4 43 IN20 IN4 B4 IN20
A5 42 IN5 41 IN21 IN5 B5 IN21
A6 40 IN6 39 IN22 IN6 B6 IN22
A7 38 IN7 37 IN23 IN7 B7 IN23
A8 36 IN8 35 IN24 IN8 B8 IN24
A9 34 IN9 33 IN25 IN9 B9 IN25
A10 32 IN10 31 IN26 IN10 B10 IN26
A11 30 IN11 29 IN27 IN11 B11 IN27
A12 28 IN12 27 IN28 IN12 B12 IN28
A13 26 IN13 25 IN29 IN13 B13 IN29
A14 24 IN14 23 IN30 IN14 B14 IN30
A15 22 IN15 21 IN31 IN15 B15 IN31
A16 20 IN16 19 IN32 IN16 B16 IN32
A17 18 COM1-16 17 COM17-32 COM1-16 (*2) B17 COM17-32 (*2)
A18 16 COM1-16 15 COM17-32 NC B18 NC
14 COM1-16 13 COM17-32
12 COM1-16 11 COM17-32
10, 8 NC 9, 7 NC
6, 4 NC (*1) 5, 3 NC (*1)
*1: For the purpose of maintaining the insulation distance, use the pin-less specification for pins 3, 4, 5, and 6 on the external cable
side’s MIL connectors.
*2: When using pressure clamp terminals with surge absorber (NFTB5S-10), A17 and B17 are shorted.

name name name name
IN1 50 49 IN17 OUT1 A1 B1 OUT17
IN2 48 47 IN18 OUT2 A2 B2 OUT18
IN3 46 45 IN19 OUT3 A3 B3 OUT19
IN4 44 43 IN20 OUT4 A4 B4 OUT20
IN5 42 41 IN21 OUT5 A5 B5 OUT21
IN6 40 39 IN22 OUT6 A6 B6 OUT22
IN7 38 37 IN23 OUT7 A7 B7 OUT23
IN8 36 35 IN24 OUT8 A8 B8 OUT24
IN9 34 33 IN25 OUT9 A9 B9 OUT25
IN10 32 31 IN26 OUT10 A10 B10 OUT26
IN11 30 29 IN27 OUT11 A11 B11 OUT27
IN12 28 27 IN28 OUT12 A12 B12 OUT28
IN13 26 25 IN29 OUT13 A13 B13 OUT29
IN14 24 23 IN30 OUT14 A14 B14 OUT30
IN15 22 21 IN31 OUT15 A15 B15 OUT31
IN16 20 19 IN32 OUT16 A16 B16 OUT32
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32 COM1-16 A17 B17 COM17-32
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 24 V DC A18 B18 24 V DC
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32 A011006E.ai
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32
N.C. 10 9 N.C.
N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
A011005E.ai
• General-purpose Terminal Blocks (Terminal No./Signal Name) (*1) (NFDV151)

COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
Reserved
IN16
IN15
IN14
IN13
IN12
IN10
IN11
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN9
IN8
IN7
IN6
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
Signal Name
Terminal No. B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
Terminal No. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
IN32
IN31
IN30
IN29
IN28
IN27
IN26
IN25
IN24
IN23
IN22
IN21
IN20
IN19
IN18
IN17
A011007E.ai
Note: For the method of external wiring, please refer to pressure clamp terminal section.


The NFDV157 has only dedicated Pressure clamps.
17
1 A1 B1
18
2 A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
A15 B15
16 32
A16 B16 DC24V
DC24V
A17 B17
A18 B18 Terminal A17: Common A : NC (Not used)
B17: Common B
A011008E.ai
Table Pin Assignments for NFDV157 (No MIL connection available)

Pressure clamp terminal (Dedicated)
A1 IN1 B1 IN17
A2 IN2 B2 IN18
A3 IN3 B3 IN19
A4 IN4 B4 IN20
A5 IN5 B5 IN21
A6 IN6 B6 IN22
A7 IN7 B7 IN23
A8 IN8 B8 IN24
A9 IN9 B9 IN25
A10 IN10 B10 IN26
A11 IN11 B11 IN27
A12 IN12 B12 IN28
A13 IN13 B13 IN29
A14 IN14 B14 IN30
A15 IN15 B15 IN31
A16 IN16 B16 IN32
A17 COM1-16 B17 COM17-32
A18 NC B18 NC

A1.10.3 Digital Input Module, 16 Channel (NFDV141, NFDV142)

NFDV141 is 100 to 120 V AC input. NFDV142 is 200 to 240 V AC input.
Switch
1 A1 B1
2 A2 B2
A3 B3
To B1 B8 A4 B4 8-point batch common
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
8 A8 B8
A9 B9
10 A10 B10
11 A11 B11
A12 B12
To B10 B17 A13 B13 8-point batch common
A14 B14
A15 B15
17 A17 B17
A18 B18 Terminal B1 to B8 : Common A
B10 to B17 : Common B
A011009E.ai
Figure Example of External Connections for NFDV141 and NFDV142
Table Pin Assignments for NFDV141 and NFDV142 (No MIL connection available)
A1 IN1 B1 COM1-8
A2 IN2 B2 COM1-8
A3 IN3 B3 COM1-8
A4 IN4 B4 COM1-8
A5 IN5 B5 COM1-8
A6 IN6 B6 COM1-8
A7 IN7 B7 COM1-8
A8 IN8 B8 COM1-8
A9 NC B9 NC
A10 IN9 B10 COM9-16
A11 IN10 B11 COM9-16
A12 IN11 B12 COM9-16
A13 IN12 B13 COM9-16
A14 IN13 B14 COM9-16
A15 IN14 B15 COM9-16
A16 IN15 B16 COM9-16
A17 IN16 B17 COM9-16
A18 NC B18 NC

A1.10.4 Pulse Width Output Module (NFDV532)

1 A1 B1
2 A2 B2
3 A3 B3
4 A4 B4
5 A5 B5
6 A6 B6
7 A7 B7
8 A8 B8
A9 B9
: Indicates load A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
A15 B15
A16 B16
A17 B17
DC24V Terminal A17: Common
A011010E.ai

50 UP1 49 N.C. A1 UP1 B1 N.C.
48 DOWN1 47 N.C. A2 DOWN1 B2 N.C.
46 UP2 45 N.C. A3 UP2 B3 N.C.
42 UP3 41 N.C. A5 UP3 B5 N.C.
38 UP4 37 N.C. A7 UP4 B7 N.C.
34 N.C. 33 N.C. A9 N.C. B9 N.C.
32 N.C. 31 N.C. A10 N.C. B10 N.C.
30 N.C. 29 N.C. A11 N.C. B11 N.C.
28 N.C. 27 N.C. A12 N.C. B12 N.C.
26 N.C. 25 N.C. A13 N.C. B13 N.C.
24 N.C. 23 N.C. A14 N.C. B14 N.C.
22 N.C. 21 N.C. A15 N.C. B15 N.C.
20 N.C. 19 N.C. A16 N.C. B16 N.C.
18 COM 17 N.C. A17 COM(*2) B17 N.C.
16 COM 15 N.C. A18 24VDC B18 N.C.
14 COM 13 N.C.
12 COM 11 N.C.
10, 8 24VDC 9, 7 N.C.
6, 4 N.C. (*1) 5, 3 N.C. (*1)
*1: For the purpose of maintaining insulation distance, use the pin-less specification for pins 3, 4, 5, and 6 on the external cable
side’s MIL connector.
*2: When using pressure clamp terminals with surge absorber (NFTD5S-10), A17 and B17, A18 and B18 are shorted.

Signal Pin No. Signal Signal Pin No. Signal
name name name name
UP1 50 49 N.C. UP1 A1 B1 N.C.
DOWN1 48 47 N.C. DOWN1 A2 B2 N.C.
UP2 46 45 N.C. UP2 A3 B3 N.C.
UP3 42 41 N.C. UP3 A5 B5 N.C.
UP4 38 37 N.C. UP4 A7 B7 N.C.
N.C. 34 33 N.C. N.C. A9 B9 N.C.
N.C. 32 31 N.C. N.C. A10 B10 N.C.
N.C. 30 29 N.C. N.C. A11 B11 N.C.
N.C. 28 27 N.C. N.C. A12 B12 N.C.
N.C. 26 25 N.C. N.C. A13 B13 N.C.
N.C. 24 23 N.C. N.C. A14 B14 N.C.
N.C. 22 21 N.C. N.C. A15 B15 N.C.
N.C. 20 19 N.C. N.C. A16 B16 N.C.
COM 18 17 N.C. COM A17 B17 N.C.
COM 16 15 N.C. 24VDC A18 B18 N.C.
COM 14 13 N.C. A011012E.ai
COM 12 11 N.C.
24VDC 10 9 N.C.
24VDC 8 7 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
A011011E.ai

Reserved
DOWN4
DOWN3
DOWN2
DOWN1
24VDC
24VDC
COM
COM
COM
COM
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
UP4
UP3
UP2
UP1
Signal Name
Terminal No. B1 B2 B3 B4 A5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 A12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
A011013E.ai

A1.10.5 Digital Output Module, 32 Channel/24 V DC (NFDV551)

Dedicated Pressure Clamps 17
1 A1 B1
18
2 A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
: Indicates load
A13 B13
A14 B14
31
15 A15 B15
32
16 A16 B16
A17 B17 Terminal A17: Common A
A18 B18 DC24 V B17: Common B
DC24 V
A011014E.ai

50 OUT1 49 OUT17 A1 OUT1 B1 OUT17
32 OUT10 31 OUT26 A10 OUT10 B10 OUT26
30 OUT11 29 OUT27 A11 OUT11 B11 OUT27
28 OUT12 27 OUT28 A12 OUT12 B12 OUT28
26 OUT13 25 OUT29 A13 OUT13 B13 OUT29
24 OUT14 23 OUT30 A14 OUT14 B14 OUT30
22 OUT15 21 OUT31 A15 OUT15 B15 OUT31
20 OUT16 19 OUT32 A16 OUT16 B16 OUT32
18 COM1-16 17 COM17-32 A17 COM1-16 (*2) B17 COM17-32 (*2)
16 COM1-16 15 COM17-32 A18 24VDC B18 24VDC
14 COM1-16 13 COM17-32
12 COM1-16 11 COM17-32
10, 8 24VDC 9, 7 24VDC
6, 4 NC (*1) 5, 3 NC (*1)
*1: For the purpose of maintaining insulation distance, use the pin-less specification for pins 3, 4, 5, and 6 on the external cable
side’s MIL connector.
*2: When using pressure clamp terminals with surge absorber (NFTD5S-10), A17 and B17, A18 and B18 are shorted.

name name name name
OUT1 50 49 OUT17 OUT1 A1 B1 OUT17
OUT10 32 31 OUT26 OUT10 A10 B10 OUT26
OUT11 30 29 OUT27 OUT11 A11 B11 OUT27
OUT12 28 27 OUT28 OUT12 A12 B12 OUT28
OUT13 26 25 OUT29 OUT13 A13 B13 OUT29
OUT14 24 23 OUT30 OUT14 A14 B14 OUT30
OUT15 22 21 OUT31 OUT15 A15 B15 OUT31
OUT16 20 19 OUT32 OUT16 A16 B16 OUT32
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32 COM1-16 A17 B17 COM17-32
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 24 V DC A18 B18 24 V DC
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32 A011016E.ai
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32
24 V DC 10 9 24 V DC
24 V DC 8 7 24 V DC
N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
A011015E.ai

COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
Reserved
24 V DC
24 V DC
OUT16
OUT15
OUT14
OUT13
OUT12
OUT10
OUT11
OUT9
OUT8
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
OUT4
OUT3
OUT2
OUT1
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
OUT19
OUT18
OUT17
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
24 V DC
24 V DC
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
OUT32
OUT31
OUT30
OUT29
OUT28
OUT27
OUT26
OUT25
OUT24
OUT23
OUT22
OUT21
OUT20
A011017E.ai


The NFDV557 has only dedicated Pressure clamps.
Dedicated Pressure Clamps 17
1 A1 B1
18
2 A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
A8 B8
A9 B9
A10 B10
A11 B11
A12 B12
: Indicates load
A13 B13
A14 B14
31
15 A15 B15
32
16 A16 B16
A17 B17 Terminal A17: Common A
A18 B18 DC24 V B17: Common B
DC24 V
A011018E.ai
Table Pin Assignments for NFDV557 (No MIL connection available)

Pressure clamp terminal (Dedicated)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. 0 pt
A1 OUT1 B1 OUT17
A2 OUT2 B2 OUT18
A3 OUT3 B3 OUT19
A4 OUT4 B4 OUT20
A5 OUT5 B5 OUT21
A6 OUT6 B6 OUT22
A7 OUT7 B7 OUT23
A8 OUT8 B8 OUT24
A9 OUT9 B9 OUT25
A10 OUT10 B10 OUT26
A11 OUT11 B11 OUT27
A12 OUT12 B12 OUT28
A13 OUT13 B13 OUT29
A14 OUT14 B14 OUT30
A15 OUT15 B15 OUT31
A16 OUT16 B16 OUT32
A17 COM1-16 B17 COM17-32
A18 24VDC B18 24VDC


MIL 50 pins x 2 rows CN1 CN2
33
17 49
1 50 49 50 49 34
18 50
2 48 47 48 47 35
3 46 45 46 45
44 43 44 43
42 41 42 41
40 39 40 39
38 37 38 37
36 35 36 35
34 33 34 33
32 31 32 31
30 29 30 29
28 27 28 27
26 25 26 25
24 23 24 23 47
31
15 22 21 22 21 63
32 48
16 20 19 20 19 64
18 17 18 17
16 15 16 15
14 13 14 13
12 11 12 11
10 9 10 9
DC24V 8 7 8 7
: NC (Not used) DC24V
6 5 6 5
4 3 4 3
Terminals CN1, CN2
2 1 2 1 [11 18] : Common
Reserved Reserved
A011019E.ai

MIL connector (CN1) MIL connector (CN2)
50 IN1 49 IN17 50 IN33 49 IN49
48 IN2 47 IN18 48 IN34 47 IN50
46 IN3 45 IN19 46 IN35 45 IN51
44 IN4 43 IN20 44 IN36 43 IN52
42 IN5 41 IN21 42 IN37 41 IN53
40 IN6 39 IN22 40 IN38 39 IN54
38 IN7 37 IN23 38 IN39 37 IN55
36 IN8 35 IN24 36 IN40 35 IN56
34 IN9 33 IN25 34 IN41 33 IN57
32 IN10 31 IN26 32 IN42 31 IN58
30 IN11 29 IN27 30 IN43 29 IN59
28 IN12 27 IN28 28 IN44 27 IN60
26 IN13 25 IN29 26 IN45 25 IN61
24 IN14 23 IN30 24 IN46 23 IN62
22 IN15 21 IN31 22 IN47 21 IN63
20 IN16 19 IN32 20 IN48 19 IN64
18 COM1-16 17 COM17-32 18 COM33-48 17 COM49-64
16 COM1-16 15 COM17-32 16 COM33-48 15 COM49-64
14 COM1-16 13 COM17-32 14 COM33-48 13 COM49-64
12 COM1-16 11 COM17-32 12 COM33-48 11 COM49-64
10, 8 NC 9, 7 NC 10, 8 NC 9, 7 NC
6, 4 NC (*1) 5, 3 NC (*1) 6, 4 NC (*1) 5, 3 NC (*1)
2 Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 1 Reserved
*1: For the purpose of maintaining insulation distance, use the pin-less specification for pins 3, 4, 5 and 6 on the external cable side’s
MIL connector.

• MIL Connector (Pin No./Signal Name)
[CN1] [CN2]
name name name name
IN1 50 49 IN17 IN33 50 49 IN49
IN2 48 47 IN18 IN34 48 47 IN50
IN3 46 45 IN19 IN35 46 45 IN51
IN4 44 43 IN20 IN36 44 43 IN52
IN5 42 41 IN21 IN37 42 41 IN53
IN6 40 39 IN22 IN38 40 39 IN54
IN7 38 37 IN23 IN39 38 37 IN55
IN8 36 35 IN24 IN40 36 35 IN56
IN9 34 33 IN25 IN41 34 33 IN57
IN10 32 31 IN26 IN42 32 31 IN58
IN11 30 29 IN27 IN43 30 29 IN59
IN12 28 27 IN28 IN44 28 27 IN60
IN13 26 25 IN29 IN45 26 25 IN61
IN14 24 23 IN30 IN46 24 23 IN62
IN15 22 21 IN31 IN47 22 21 IN63
IN16 20 19 IN32 IN48 20 19 IN64
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32 COM33-48 18 17 COM49-64
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 COM33-48 16 15 COM49-64
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32 COM33-48 14 13 COM49-64
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32 COM33-48 12 11 COM49-64
N.C. 10 9 N.C. N.C. 10 9 N.C.
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. N.C. 4 3 N.C.
Reserved 2 1 Reserved Reserved 2 1 Reserved
A011020E.ai

[CN1]
COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
Reserved
IN16
IN15
IN14
IN13
IN12
IN10
IN11
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
IN9
IN8
IN7
IN6
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
IN32
IN31
IN30
IN29
IN28
IN27
IN26
IN25
IN24
IN23
IN22
IN21
IN20
IN19
IN18
IN17
A011021E.ai
[CN2]
COM33–48
COM33–48
COM33–48
COM33–48
Reserved
IN48
IN47
IN46
IN45
IN44
IN43
IN42
IN41
IN40
IN39
IN38
IN37
IN36
IN35
IN34
IN33
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
COM49–64
COM49–64
COM49–64
COM49–64
IN64
IN63
IN62
IN61
IN60
IN59
IN58
IN57
IN56
IN55
IN54
IN53
IN52
IN51
IN50
IN49
A011022E.a


MIL 50 pins x 2 rows CN1 CN2
17 33
50 49 50 49 49
1 34
18 50
2 48 47 48 47 35
3 46 45 46 45
44 43 44 43
42 41 42 41
40 39 40 39
38 37 38 37
36 35 36 35
: Indicates load 34 33 34 33
32 31 32 31
30 29 30 29
28 27 28 27
26 25 26 25
24 23 24 23 47
31 63
15 22 21 22 21 48
32 64
16 20 19 20 19
18 17 18 17
16 15 16 15
14 13 14 13
DC24V 12 11 12 11
10 9 10 9
8 7 8 7
6 5 6 5
: NC (Not used) 4 3 4 3
Terminals CN1, CN2
2 1 2 1 [11 18] : Common
Reserved Reserved
A011023E.ai

MIL connector (CN1) MIL connector (CN2)
50 OUT1 49 OUT17 50 OUT33 49 OUT49
48 OUT2 47 OUT18 48 OUT34 47 OUT50
46 OUT3 45 OUT19 46 OUT35 45 OUT51
44 OUT4 43 OUT20 44 OUT36 43 OUT52
42 OUT5 41 OUT21 42 OUT37 41 OUT53
40 OUT6 39 OUT22 40 OUT38 39 OUT54
38 OUT7 37 OUT23 38 OUT39 37 OUT55
36 OUT8 35 OUT24 36 OUT40 35 OUT56
34 OUT9 33 OUT25 34 OUT41 33 OUT57
32 OUT10 31 OUT26 32 OUT42 31 OUT58
30 OUT11 29 OUT27 30 OUT43 29 OUT59
28 OUT12 27 OUT28 28 OUT44 27 OUT60
26 OUT13 25 OUT29 26 OUT45 25 OUT61
24 OUT14 23 OUT30 24 OUT46 23 OUT62
22 OUT15 21 OUT31 22 OUT47 21 OUT63
20 OUT16 19 OUT32 20 OUT48 19 OUT64
18 COM1-16 17 COM17-32 18 COM33-48 17 COM49-64
16 COM1-16 15 COM17-32 16 COM33-48 15 COM49-64
14 COM1-16 13 COM17-32 14 COM33-48 13 COM49-64
12 COM1-16 11 COM17-32 12 COM33-48 11 COM49-64
10, 8 24V DC 9, 7 24V DC 10, 8 24V DC 9, 7 24V DC
6, 4 NC (*1) 5, 3 NC (*1) 6, 4 NC (*1) 5, 3 NC (*1)
2 Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 1 Reserved
*1: For the purpose of maintaining insulation distance, use the pin-less specification for pins 3, 4, 5 and 6 on the external cable side’s
the MIL connector.

• MIL Connector(Pin No./Signal Name)
[CN1] [CN2]
name name name name
OUT1 50 49 OUT17 OUT33 50 49 OUT49
OUT2 48 47 OUT18 OUT34 48 47 OUT50
OUT3 46 45 OUT19 OUT35 46 45 OUT51
OUT4 44 43 OUT20 OUT36 44 43 OUT52
OUT5 42 41 OUT21 OUT37 42 41 OUT53
OUT6 40 39 OUT22 OUT38 40 39 OUT54
OUT7 38 37 OUT23 OUT39 38 37 OUT55
OUT8 36 35 OUT24 OUT40 36 35 OUT56
OUT9 34 33 OUT25 OUT41 34 33 OUT57
OUT10 32 31 OUT26 OUT42 32 31 OUT58
OUT11 30 29 OUT27 OUT43 30 29 OUT59
OUT12 28 27 OUT28 OUT44 28 27 OUT60
OUT13 26 25 OUT29 OUT45 26 25 OUT61
OUT14 24 23 OUT30 OUT46 24 23 OUT62
OUT15 22 21 OUT31 OUT47 22 21 OUT63
OUT16 20 19 OUT32 OUT48 20 19 OUT64
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32 COM33-48 18 17 COM49-64
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 COM33-48 16 15 COM49-64
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32 COM33-48 14 13 COM49-64
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32 COM33-48 12 11 COM49-64
24 V DC 10 9 24 V DC 24 V DC 10 9 24 V DC
24 V DC 8 7 24 V DC 24 V DC 8 7 24 V DC
N.C. 6 5 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C. N.C. 4 3 N.C.
Reserved 2 1 Reserved Reserved 2 1 Reserved
A011024E.ai

[CN1]
COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
COM1–16
Reserved
24 V DC
24 V DC
OUT16
OUT15
OUT14
OUT13
OUT12
OUT10
OUT11
OUT9
OUT8
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
OUT4
OUT3
OUT2
OUT1
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
OUT24
OUT23
OUT22
OUT21
OUT20
OUT19
OUT18
OUT17
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
24 V DC
24 V DC
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
COM17–32
OUT32
OUT31
OUT30
OUT29
OUT28
OUT27
OUT26
OUT25
A011025E.ai
[CN2]
COM33–48
COM33–48
COM33–48
COM33–48
Reserved
24 V DC
24 V DC
OUT48
OUT47
OUT46
OUT45
OUT44
OUT43
OUT42
OUT41
OUT40
OUT39
OUT38
OUT37
OUT36
OUT35
OUT34
OUT33
N.C.
N.C.
Signal Name
Signal Name
OUT64
OUT63
OUT62
OUT61
OUT60
OUT59
OUT58
OUT57
OUT56
OUT55
OUT54
OUT53
OUT52
OUT51
OUT50
OUT49
Reserved
N.C.
N.C.
24 V DC
24 V DC
COM49–64
COM49–64
COM49–64
COM49–64
A011026E.ai

A1.10.9 Relay Output Module, 16 Channel (NFDR541)

The following is an example a load being externally connected.
1 A1 B1
2 A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4 8-point batch common
To B1~B8
A5 B5
A6 B6
: Indicates load
A7 B7
8 A8 B8
A9 B9
10 A10 B10
11 A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13 8-point batch common
To B10~B17
A14 B14
A15 B15
A16 B16
: NC (Not used)
17 A17 B17
A18 B18 Terminals B1 to B8 : Common
B10 to B17: Common
A011027E.ai
Figure Example of External Connections of NFDR541
Table Pin Assignments for NFDR541

A1 OUT1 B1 COM1-8
A2 OUT2 B2 COM1-8
A3 OUT3 B3 COM1-8
A4 OUT4 B4 COM1-8
A5 OUT5 B5 COM1-8
A6 OUT6 B6 COM1-8
A7 OUT7 B7 COM1-8
A8 OUT8 B8 COM1-8
A9 NC B9 NC
A10 OUT9 B10 COM9-16
A11 OUT10 B11 COM9-16
A12 OUT11 B12 COM9-16
A13 OUT12 B13 COM9-16
A14 OUT13 B14 COM9-16
A15 OUT14 B15 COM9-16
A16 OUT15 B16 COM9-16
A17 OUT16 B17 COM9-16
A18 NC B18 NC

A1.11 Communication Module Signal Connection

This section explains how to connect signal cables to the communication modules shown
below.
• RS-232-C Communication Module NFLR111
• RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module NFLR121
• CANopen Communication Module NFLC121
• PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module NFLP121
A1.11.1 Signal Cable Connection to RS-232-C Communication

Module
A011107E.ai
Figure Signal Cable Connector of RS-232-C Communication Module
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
A011108E.ai
Figure Pin No. of Connectors on the D-sub 9-pin Module
l Connector Pin Position

Table Connector Pin Position (D-sub 9-pin, female) (*1)
Pin No Abbreviation Signal Name Function
1 CD Carrier Detect Data channel reception Carrier detection
2 RD Received Data Data reception
3 SD Send Data Data transmission
4 ER Equipment Ready Data equipment ready
5 SG Signal Ground Signal grounding
6 DR Dataset Ready Dataset ready
7 RS Request to Send Request for transmission
8 CS Clear to Send Transmission is allowed
9 - - N.C.
*1: Connectors are fastened using metric screw threads (M2.6).

l Cables
Yokogawa Electric Corporation provides communication cables in the range shown in the table
below. Any necessary cables other than these should be prepared by the user.
Table Cables (Examples) for NFLR111 RS-232-C Communication Modules (*1) (*2)
Model Name Function
RS-232-C modem cable for connecting RS circuit isolation equipment
AKB131
9 to 25 pins for start-stop synchronization communication
RS-232-C null modem cable for connecting RS circuit isolation
AKB132
equipment 9 to 25 pins for start-stop synchronization communication
RS-232-C null modem cable 9 to 9 pins (male) for start-stop
AKB133
synchronization communication
RS-232-C modem cable 9 to 25 pins for start-stop synchronization
AKB135
communication
RS-232-C null modem cable 9 to 25 pins for start-stop synchronization
AKB136
communication
*1: For cables, refer to TI 34P02Q91-01E (“FCN/FCJ Installation Guide”).
*2: For specifications of cables, refer to GS 33Q06R10-31E (“Cables”).
ALR111 cables can be used for NFLR111.

l Internal Connection of The RS-232-C Communication Cable
AKB131 AKB132
CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2
PIN No. PIN No. PIN No. PIN No.
SD SD SD SD
2 3 2 3
RD RD RD RD
3 2 3 2
RS RS RS RS
4 7 4 7
CS CS CS CS
5 8 5 8
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
SG SG SG SG
7 5 7 5
CD CD CD CD
8 1 8 1
ER ER ER ER
20 4 20 4
FG FG
1 1
Connector shell Connector shell
Shield NFLR side Shield NFLR side
External equipment side External equipment side
CN1 AKB133 CN2 CN1 AKB135 CN2

PIN No. PIN No. PIN No. PIN No.
CD CD SD SD
2 3
1 1
RD RD
RD RD 3 2
2 2
SD SD RS RS
4 7
3 3
CS CS
ER ER 5 8
4 4
SG SG DR DR
6 6
5 5
SG SG
DR DR 7 5
6 6
RS RS CD CD
8 1
7 7
ER ER
CS CS 20 4
8 8 FG
1
Connector shell Connector shell
FA-M3 NFLR Shield NFLR side
External equipment side
YEWMAC500 side D-sub 9pin
D-sub 9(male)
CN1
AKB136 CN2
PIN No. PIN No.
SD SD
2 3
RD RD
3 2
RS RS
4 7
CS CS
5 8
DR DR
6 6
SG SG
7 5
CD CD
8 1
ER ER
20 4
FG
1
Connector shell
Shield
External equipment side NFLR side
A011109E.ai
Figure Internal Connection of the RS-232-C Communication Cable

n NFLR111 FG Connection
The NFLR111 communication module isolates the RS-232-C interface circuit functionally.
This prevents noise from entering the NFLR111 from the external equipment, thereby improving
noise resistance. To use this function effectively, satisfy the following requirements:
IMPORTANT
• Always ground the FG terminal at the partner terminal, with grounding resistance up to 100
ohms.
• Connect the FG and SG (pin No. 7 on the D-sub25 pin, pin No. 5 on the D-sub 9 pin RS-
232-C circuit) together at the partner terminal.
• Ground the cable shielding wires at the partner terminal.
(When using AKB133 cable, connect the end of the cable with the red mark to the partner
terminal.)
• If the signal cable is prepared by users, make the sure the cable is the type of twisted pair
cable in which a signal wire and a ground wire are paired.

A1.11.2 Signal Cable Connection to RS-422/RS-485

Communication Module
A011110E.ai
Figure Terminal Symbols for RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module
l Interface Terminal
Table Interface Terminal (M4 Terminal)
Terminal Symbol Signal Name Function
Data transmission
TX+ Send Data
(common mode signal)
Data transmission
TX- Send Data
(reverse phase signal)
Data reception
RX+ Received Data
(common mode signal)
Data reception
RX- Received Data
(reverse phase signal)
SG Signal Ground Signal grounding
l Cables
Yokogawa Electric Corporation provides communication cables in the range shown in the table
below. Any necessary cables other than these should be prepared by the user.
Table Cables (Examples) for NFLR121 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Modules (*1) (*2)
Model Name Function
AKB161 Dedicated cable between NFLR121 and FA500, up to 100 m
AKB162 Dedicated cable between NFLR121 and FA-M3, up to 100 m
*1: For cables, refer to TI 34P02Q91-01E (“FCN/FCJ Installation Guide”).
*2: For cables, refer to GS 33Y06L10-31E (“Cables”).
ACM12 cables can be used for NFLR121.

n NFLR121 External Connection

When connecting Model NFLR121 with external equipment, two methods for 1 to 1 and 1 to n (n:
up to 31) are available. The figure below shows the configuration.
Connection of model
NFLR121 with System configuration
external equipment
NFLR121
1:1
External
equipment
NFLR121
1:n
(n:up to 31 pieces
of equipment)
External External External
equipment equipment equipment
A011111E.ai
Figure System Configuration When Connecting Model NFLR121 with External Equipment
n NFLR121 FG Connection
Set up the RS-422/RS-485 shield as shown below.
Grounding for the FG must be grounding (with resistance up to 100 ohm) on the connected
side (external equipment side). The cable shield between Model NFLR121 and the external
equipment side must be connected to the FG on the external equipment side, not to the FG on
Model NFLR121.
The cable shield is connected to External equipment
NFLR121 the FG on the subsystem side.
SG SG
FG
AKB161 or AKB162 cable
FG
Grounding (100 ohm or less)

A011112E.ai
Figure NFLR121 FG Connection

n Connection with External Equipment

Four-wire and two-wire types are provided for the connection of Model NFLR121 with external
equipment. Each type has 1 to 1 and 1 to n connections.
l 1 to 1 Connection in 4-wire Type

NFLR121 External equipment
TX+ TX+
R2
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
R1 R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
FG
R1: Termination resistance of 120 ohm (comes with the NFLR121)

R2: According to the instruction on the external equipment side
A011113E.ai
Figure 1 to 1 Connection in 4-wire Type
l 1 to 1 Connection in 2-wire Type

TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
R1 R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
FG

A011114E.ai
Figure 1 to 1 Connection in 2-wire Type

l 1 to n Connection in 4-wire Type
TX+ TX+
TX+ TX+
TX- TX- R2
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX+ RX+
R1 RX- RX- R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
SG SG
FG FG
FG

A011115E.ai
Figure 1 to n Connection in 4-wire Type
l 1 to n Connection in 2-wire Type

TX+ TX+
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX+ RX+
R1 RX- RX- R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
SG SG
FG FG
FG

A011116E.ai
Figure 1 to n Connection in 2-wire Type

A1.11.3 CANopen Communication Module Signal Connection
A011117E.ai
Figure Signal Cable Connector of CANopen Communication Module
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
A011118E.ai
Figure Pin No. of D-sub 9-pin Connectors on the Module

Connectors (D-sub 9-pin, male) (*1)
Pin No. Signal Name Function
1 - Not used
2 CAN_L CAN_L
3 CAN_GND CAN ground
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 - Not used
7 CAN_H CAN_H
8 - Not used
9 - Not used
*1: Connectors are fastened using inch screw threads (No.4-40UNC).
l Cables
The cables must comply with CiA 301.
l Terminating resistor
The terminators must comply with CiA 301.
Note: A terminating resistor is not contained in CANopen Communication Module NFLC121. Prepare an external terminating resistor.

A1.11.4 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module Signal

Connection
A011119E.ai
Figure Signal Cable Connector of PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
A011120E.ai
Figure Pin No. of D-sub 9-pin Connectors on the Module

Connectors (D-sub 9-pin, female) (*1)
Pin No. Signal Name Function
1 Shield Shield
2 - Not used
3 RxD/TxD-P Data reception/transmission
4 - Not used
5 DGND Ground
6 VP +5V
7 - Not used
8 RxD/TxD-N Data reception/transmission
9 - Not used
*1: Connectors are fastened using inch screw threads (No.4-40UNC).
l Cables
The cables must comply with PROFIBUS-DP standards (PROFIBUS Specifications IEC61158-2
type3).
l Terminating resistor
The terminators must comply with PROFIBUS-DP standards (PROFIBUS Specifications
IEC61158-2 type3).

A1.12 FCN-500, FCN-100 Installation

The following describes details and various operation procedures for FCN-500 and FCN-
100 hardware system design and construction necessary for stable FCN-500 and FCN-100
operation.
• Installation environment
• Power supply systems and equipment
• Wiring (Noise reduction grounding systems, wire routing)
Perform FCN-500 and FCN-100 installation following the steps below.

1. Install base module
2. Install power supply module, CPU module, I/O module, SB bus repeat module, and dummy
cover
3. Install grounding cable, power supply cable, and signal cable
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition :Apr.. 28,2016-00

A1.12.1 FCN-500, FCN-100 Installation Specification

The conditions of the installation location must be appropriate for stable operation of the
system.
The table below shows the conditions required for installation location (and some
conditions for transportation and storage) of the FCN-500 and FCN-100.
Table FCN-500, FCN-100 Installation Environment Specification

Specification
NFCP501-□0□ NFCP501-□1□
Item NFCP502-□0□ NFCP502-□1□ Related standard
NFCP100 NFBU050
NFPW441 NFBU200
NFPW442 NFPW444
Ambient Operation 0 to +55 °C (*1) -20 to +70 °C (*1)(*2)
temperature Transportation/storage -40 to 85 °C (*3)
Ambient Operation 5 to 95% RH (No condensation)
humidity Transportation/storage 5 to 95% RH (No condensation)
Allowable rate Operation Within ± 10 °C/h JEIDA29 Class B
of temperature
change Transportation/storage Within ± 20 °C/h
Dust 0.3 mg/m3
Protection class IP20 IEC529
ANSI/ISA S71.04 Class G2 (standard)
Resistance to corrosive gas ANSI/ISA S71.04
(ANSI/ISA S71.04 Class G3, option)
0.15 mm P-P (5 to 58 Hz)
Resistance to vibration IEC68-2-6
1 G (58 to 150Hz)
15 G 11 ms
Resistance to shock (during power-off, for sine half-waves in IEC68-2-27
XYZ-directions)
Altitude 2000m or less
Electric field 3 V/m or less (26 MHz to 1 GHz)
Magnetic field 30 A/m (AC) or less, 400 A/m (DC) or less
Noise
4 kV or less (contact discharge),
Electrostatic discharge
8 kV or less (air discharge)
Apply the grounding system which is defined
Grounding by the rules and standards of the country or the
region.
Cooling Natural air cooling
Installation 19-inch rack installation, DIN rail installation
*1: The ambient temperature is rated at the air intake under modules.
*2: It depends on additional I/O modules. Refer to “A1.6 I/O MODULE” for details
*3: System clock on NFCP100 may be reset if the temperature falls below -10°C.

IMPORTANT
• For the rack-mountable devices, DIN rail-mountable devices, and wall-mountable devices to
meet the Safety Standards and EMC Standards, the devices must be installed in a lockable
metal cabinet. The cabinet must conform to IEC/EN/CSA 61010-2-201 or provide degrees
of protection IP3X or above and IK09 or above.
• The temperature specification during operation indicates the criterion of the temperature
at the air intake of the bottom portion of modules. Do not block ventilation holes, as it may
hinder the air-cooling capabilities of the unit. When installing the FCN in a cabinet, note that
the temperature specification is not in respect to the ambient temperature of the cabinet.
Provide cooling fans in the cabinet if needed.
• Avoid exposing the FCN to direct sunlight.
• Prevent condensation under any circumstance.
• The dust level of the room should not exceed 0.3 mg/m3. Under any circumstance, avoid
iron flakes, carbon particles, or any other type of dust that are conductive.
• Avoid existence of corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulfide, sulfurous acid gas, chlorine,
and ammonia.
• For vibration at the installation location, see also “FCN-500, FCN-100 Vibration Criteria”
within this Chapter.
• For radio device noise to the FCN-500 and FCN-100, see “Radio Device Noise to FCN-500,
FCN-100” within this Chapter.

Table Installation Limitations of FCN-500, FCN-100’s Modules (1/2)
Temperatureemp. Altitude
Type Model Description
[°C] [m]
NFBU200 Base Module (long) -20 to +70
Base module
NFBU050 Base Module (short) -20 to +70
NFPW441 Power Supply Module (100 - 120 V AC input) 0 to +55
Power supply NFPW442 Power Supply Module (220 - 240 V AC input) 0 to +55
module -20 to +70
NFPW444 Power Supply Module (24 V DC input)
(*5)
NFCP100 CPU Module for FCN 0 to +55
NFCP501 CPU Module for FCN (Ethernet 2 ports) -
-□0□ Standard type 0 to +55
CPU module -□1□ With Extended Temperature Range option -20 to +70
NFCP502 CPU Module for FCN (Ethernet 4 ports) -
-□0□ Standard type 0 to +55
-□1□ With Extended Temperature Range option -20 to +70
SB bus repeat NFSB100 SB bus repeat module for FCN 0 to +55
NFAI141 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Non-Isolated) -20 to +70
NFAV141 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-channel, Non-Isolated) 0 to +55
NFAV142 Analog Input Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-channel, Non-Isolated) 0 to +55
Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel -20 to +70
NFAI841
input/8-channel output, Non-Isolated) (*6)
Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V input: differential input, 4 to 20 mA
NFAB841 0 to +55
output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, Non-Isolated)
NFAV542 Analog Output Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-channel, Non-Isolated) 0 to +55
NFAI143 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Isolated) -20 to +70
-20 to +70
NFAI543 Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Isolated)
(*6)
-20 to +70
NFAV144 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-channel, Isolated)
(*2)
NFAV544 Analog Output Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-channel, Isolated) 0 to +55
Analog I/O NFAT141 TC/mV Input Module (16-channel, Isolated) 0 to +55
Modules NFAR181 RTD Input Module (12-channel, Isolated) - 2000
-S□0
Basic type 0 to +55
-S□1
-S□4 -20 to +70
with Extended Temperature Range
-S□5 (*4)
NFAI135 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 8-channel, Isolated channels) -20 to +70
Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA, 4-channel input/4-channel output, -20 to +70
NFAI835
Isolated channels) (*6)
Pulse Input Module (8-channel, Pulse count, 0 to 10 kHz, Isolated
NFAP135 -
channels)
-S□0
Basic type 0 to +55
-S□1
-S□4 -20 to +70
-S□5 (*4)
Frequency Input Module (8-channel, 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, Isolated
NFAF135 0 to +55
channels)
NFDV151 Digital Input Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Isolated) -20 to +70
Digital Input Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp
NFDV157 0 to +55
Terminal support only, Isolated)
NFDV161 Digital Input Module (64-channel, 24 V DC) 0 to +55
NFDV141 Digital Input Module (16-channel, 100 V - 120 V AC, Isolated) 0 to +55
NFDV142 Digital Input Module (16-channel, 200 - 240 V AC) 0 to +55
Digital I/O Pulse Width Output Module (4-channel : Up Pulse/Down Pulse,
Modules NFDV532 0 to +55
24 V DC, Isolated)
NFDV551 Digital Output Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Isolated) -20 to +70
Digital Output Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp
NFDV557 0 to +55
Terminal support only, Isolated)
NFDV561 Digital Output Module (64-channel, 24 V DC) 0 to +55
Relay Output Module (16-channel, 24 to 110 V DC/100 to 240 V -20 to +70
NFDR541
AC, Isolated) (*2) (*3)

Table Installation Limitations of FCN-500, FCN-100’s Modules (2/2)
Temperatureemp. Altitude
[°C] [m]
Turboma- NFGS813 Servo Module 0 to +55
chinery I/O
Modules (*1) NFGP813 High Speed Protection Module 0 to +55
NFLC121 CANopen Communication Module (1-port, 10 kbps to 1 Mbps) 0 to +55
NFLF111 Foundation fieldbus Communication Module (4-port) -
-S□0
Basic type 0 to +55
-S□1
Communica- -S□4 -20 to +70
tion Modules -S□5 (*4)
PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (1-port, 9.6 kbps to 12
NFLP121 0 to +55
Mbps)
NFLR111 RS-232-C Communication Module(2-port, 300 bps to 115.2 kbps) 0 to +55
RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module(2-port, 300 bps to 115.2
NFLR121 -20 to +70
kbps)
NFTA4S For Analog (16-channel) -20 to +70
NFTT4S for Thermocouple/mV (16-channel) 0 to +55
NFTR8S for RTD (12-channel) -20 to +70
NFTB5S for Digital Input (32-channel) -20 to +70
Pressure 2000
Clamp Terminal NFTD5S for Digital Output (32-channel) -20 to +70
Block NFTI3S for Isolated Analog Module (for NFAI135, NFAP135, NFAI835) -20 to +70
NFTC5S for Digital (32-channel, with dedicated connector) -20 to +70
Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Digital (16-channel, with dedi-
NFTC4S 0 to +55
cated connector, without surge absorber)
NFTF9S for Foundation fieldbus -20 to +70
TAS40 MIL Connector Terminal Block (40 Pole Plug Types, M3.5) -20 to +70
Terminal Block
TAS50 MIL Connector Terminal Block (50 Pole Plug Types, M3.5) -20 to +70
NFCB301 SB Bus Cable 0 to +55
Cable KMS40 MIL Connector Cable (40 Pole Plug Types) -20 to +70
KMS50 MIL Connector Cable (50 Pole Plug Types) -20 to +70
NFSBT01 SB Bus T-joint 0 to +55
SB Bus T-joint
NFSBT02 SB Bus T-joint with Built-in Terminator 0 to +55
NFDCV01 Dummy Cover for I/O Module Slot -20 to +70
Dummy Cover NFDCV02 Dummy Cover for Power supply Module Slot -20 to +70
NFCCC01 MIL Cable Connector Cover -20 to +70
*1: For Turbomachinery I/O Modules, refer to GS 34P02Q04-01E Turbomachinery Contoroller Overview.
*2: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, a blank slot on one side is required to NFAV144 and NFDR541 modules.
See “Figure Installation Examples of using NFAV144” in the following page.”
*3: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, available channels of NFDR541 are up to eight.
*4: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, NFAR181, NFAP135 and NFLF111 modules cannot be installed in next
slot of the NFAI841.”
*5: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, NFPW444 module is restricted to 75% of rated output current.
*6: NFAI841, NFAI543 and NFAI835 modules are restricted to the external load and module installation. Refer to “Table Module
Arrangement and Restrictions on Installation” in the following page.”

l Limitations of Installation for using in the wide temperature range
(-20 to +70 °C) environments
Main components of FCN-500 (NFCP501/NFCP502-□1□, NFPW444, NFBU050, NFBU200) can
operate in the wide temperature range (-20 to +70 °C) environments.
The I/O Modules which are marked up on table “Installation Limitations of FCN-500, FCN-100’s
Modules” can operate in the wide temperature range environments.
70 ºC 70 ºC
65 ºC 65 ºC
55 ºC 55 ºC
Ambient Ambient
Temp. I/O modules Temp. I/O modules
( Operation ) with suffix code -S0,-S1 ( Operation ) Wide Temperature model
（-20~70℃)
Altitude Altitude
0 ºC 0 ºC
-20 ºC -20 ºC
2000 m 2000 m F21E.ai
All the I/O Modules Operation Range Wide Temperature I/O Modules Operation Range
Figure Suffix code vs Ambient Temperature and Altitude of I/O modules
l I/O Module Arrangement and Restriction for using ambiement temperature is

higher than 55°C
Table Module Arrangement and Restrictions on Installation
(when ambient temperature is higher than 55°C)
Model Left-side Right-side Limitations
NFAI841 (*1) (*1) External load (Analog Output): 200-750Ω
 N.A.
N.A. 
NFAI543 N.A. N.A. External load (Analog Output): 0-400Ω
N.A. (*1) Up to 12 channels
External load (Analog Output): 0-400Ω,
NFDR541  N.A. Required a vacant slot on one side
N.A.  Up to 8 channels
NFAI835  N.A. External load (Analog Output): 200-750Ω
  External load (Analog Output): 200-500Ω
NFAV144  N.A. Required a vacant slot on one side
N.A. 
NFPW444 N.A. or N.A. or Up to 75% of rated output current
NFPW444 NFPW444 or
NFCP501/
NFCP502
: Any module (arbitrary)　　 N.A.: Blank or Not allowed

*1: Except NFAI841
Vacant Slot
Vacant Slot
NFAV144
NFAV144
NFAV144
PWM
PWM
PWM
CPU
CPU
CPU
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Slot 1 2 3 4 5
F20E.ai
Figure Installation Example of using NFAV144

l Pulse Input Module with extend temp. option (NFAP135-S4, -S5)’s Ambient
Temperature and Installation Requirement depend on Input Mode
There are some conditions depending on using Input mode and ambient temperature.
Table Input Mode, Ambient Temp. (operating) and Installation Requirement of NFAP135-S4, -S5
Ambient
Input Mode (*1) Installation Requirement
Temp. [°C]
When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C,
Voltage pulse -20 to +70
ensure space on both side (*2)
Dry contact pulse -20 to +65
ensure space on both side(*2)
with 200Ω When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C,
2-wire transmitter -20 to +65
shunt resistance ensure space on both side (*2)
current pulse
(4 to 20 mA) with 500Ω Ensure space on one side (*2)
-20 to +55
shunt resistance Or use within 4 points or less
3-wire transmitter voltage pulse -20 to +65
ensure space on both side(*2)
*1: Refer to “Pulse Input Module” in A1.6.1 Analog I/O Module (Specification) for details.
*2: See Figure Installation Examples of NFAP135
Vacant Slot
Vacant Slot
Vacant Slot
NFAP135
NFAP135
PWM
PWM
CPU
CPU
IOM
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Slot 1 2 3 4 5
F23E.ai
Figure Installation Examples of using NFAP135

n FCN-500, FCN-100 Vibration Criteria

Ensure that if the frequency of vibration at the installation location is 58 Hz or less, the total
amplitude is maintained less than 0.15 mm. If the vibration frequency is greater than 58 Hz, find
a location that will meet the following condition:
Acceleration (m/s2) = 2π2 x A x F 2 x 10-3 < 9.8 (=1G)
where
A: Total amplitude (mm)
F: Frequency (Hz)
The range of allowable total amplitudes is shown below.
mm
0.2
0.15
Total amplitude
0.1
Allowable range
0.05
0
10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150Hz
Vibration frequency
A011102E.ai
Figure Allowable Vibration Range
n Radio Device Noise to the FCN-500, FCN-100

The following shows general requirements when using a radio device such as transceivers;
however, as a general rule, close the cabinet door when using a radio device:
• Transceivers that have 3 W of output power or less should be at least 1 m away.
Transceivers that have 10 W of output power or less should be at least 2 m away.
• Radio devices that have 1 W of output power or less including cellular phones and cordless
phones should be at least 1 m away.
IMPORTANT
When using the NFLP121, mount one ferrite core (A1193MN) on the NFLP121 side of the
PROFIBUS cable to meet the EMC standards.

A1.13 FCN-500, FCN-100 Power Supply

Equipment
Proper power equipment must be used for stable system operation. This section
describes the following:
• Power supply system
• Power supply specifications
• Field power supply specifications
A1.13.1 Power Supply System

This section describes the power supply system for the FCN-500 and FCN-100.
l System Separation
Power supply system for FCN should be separated from other systems. For example, the power
supply system for the I/O signal circuit should be isolated by an insulation transformer.
l Installation of Breakers, Switches, etc.

Power supply module of FCN (NFPW44x) has no switch. An external breaker or an external
switch should be installed for maintenance and safety.
IMPORTANT
To make the power supply system for FCN conform to the safety standards, use a breaker or a
switch that conforms to the safety standards.

A1.13.2 Supplied Power Source

The following items must be taken into consideration for stable FCN-500 and FCN-100 operation.
l Warping of the Supplied Power Source

Power failure may be detected even if the effective value is the same when the peak of the
input voltage waveform is decreased, resulting in the high value of the wave to be chipped.
This may be caused by the output impedance of the supply source or a drop of voltage due to
the impedance of wiring. If the input voltage that meets the following condition is supplied, the
rated instantaneous power failure sense delay time may not be maintained, which may cause
instantaneous power failure. Therefore, a solution so that stable power can be supplied by the
power source must be applied.
Peak value of the input voltage Lower limit of Input voltage 2 0.99
A: Ideal input voltage wave with no distortion
B: Distorted input voltage wave

Peak value B
Peak value A
A: Ideal input voltage wave with no distortion

B: Distorted input voltage wave
A011201E.ai
Figure Distortion of Input Voltage Waveform
l Inrush Current
An input current much larger than normal will flow when the power supply is turned on. Refer to
the specification of the power supply module for inrush currents to each power supply module.
Make sure that the supplied power and protection devices can withstand this inrush current.
TIP
The peak values and waveforms of the current are affected by the impedance of the input system. These change
depending on the system structure (when comprised of multiple devices) and the power supply line condition.
Generally, the inrush current when the system is comprised of multiple devices will be less than the total sum of
the inrush current of each device.

l Output Capacity
The output capacity of the power supply device is determine by calculating the maximum electric
power of the system, but the peak value of the current will be 2 to 5 times more of the effective
value. The effects and inrush current by this current waveform, as well as excess for future
device expansion must be carefully considered.
l Power Consumption Calculation

Refer to the power supply module specification for the maximum value of the power
consumption. Take consideration of the expansion and changes of devices. In general, the
maximum value should be used.
TIP
The actual power consumption varies depending on what modules are installed and how many.
• The maximum current consumption of a unit, IMAX, can be obtained by the following equation:
IMAX = IBASE + ICPU + II/O
where
IBASE = current consumption of the base module
ICPU = current consumption of the CPU module (or of CPU modules if duplexed)
II/O = current consumption of the input/output modules installed
• The power consumption of a unit, Q (VA), can then be obtained by the following equation:
Q = (5.1 3 IMAX)/(E x F)
where
E = efficiency of the power supply module
F = power factor of the power supply module
• Although the efficiency and power factor of the power supply module varies with the conditions, the
following appropriate values can be used as guidelines:
E = 0.75
F = 0.5 (with no power-factor-correcting device)
WARNING
• A power failure may break down the file system when the file is written in the FCN/FCJ sys-
tem card by the Java application. (While the control application is operating, a power failure
will not break down the FCN/FCJ system card.)
Note that InfoEnergy and InfoWell Logger also contain Java applications.
• When a power failure is detected and a restart is performed, control will be stopped for a
duration longer than the power failure.
• To avoid these problems, use an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) for the power supply.

A1.13.3 Field Power Supply

Field power supply is 24V DC power that is required for the interface circuit of field signals on I/O
modules. It is necessary to supply field power separately from system power supply.
The following I/O modules require field power supply.
l Analog I/O Module

• NFAI141 Current input, 16 points, non-isolated (*1)
• NFAI143 Current input, 16 points, isolated
• NFAI135 Current input, 8 points, isolated channels
• NFAI841 Current I/O, 8/8 points, non-isolated
• NFAB841 Voltage input/current output, 8/8 points, non-isolated
• NFAI543 Current output, 16 points, isolated
• NFAI835 Current input/current output, 4/4 points, isolated channels
• NFAP135 Pulse input, 8 points
• NFAF135 Frequency input, 8 points
*1: When this I/O module is used with 2-wire transmitter, field power supply is required.
l Digital Output Module

• NFDV557 Digital output, 32 points
• NFDV532 Pulse width output, 4 channels
IMPORTANT
Analog I/O modules and digital I/O modules require different field power supply systems.
Field Power
power supply Base module
input module Field power supply (for analog I/O module, 24V DC)
24V DC for
analog I/O
module System power supply (5V DC)
Power Circuit
input for
power
100V AC
generation
200V AC
Digital Analog Analog
24V DC output I/O I/O
module module module
Field power supply

(for digital output module, 24V DC)
A011202E.ai
Figure Field Power Supply and System Power Supply

n Field Power Supply for Analog I/O Modules

Field power for analog I/O modules is supplied to each analog I/O module via base modules.
IMPORTANT
• Supply the appropriate power by calculating the 24V DC current consumption based on the
specification of each I/O module. However, the power supply must be within the range of the
power supply module specification (Max. 4 A).
• The I/O module terminal voltage is lower than the supplied voltage of the power supply
module terminal. Adjust the supply voltage so as to match the specification of the field
devices to be connected, taking the lowered voltage into consideration (see the specification
of each module).
n Field Power Supply for Digital Output Modules

Field power supply for digital output modules is supplied field power directly to each terminal of
the module. Supply the appropriate power by calculating the 24V DC current consumption based
on the specification of each module.
TIP
Power is supplied by using different power supply systems between analog system and digital system to avoid
interferences such as noises. When every 16 points are isolated among digital output signals, the power supply
must also be isolated.

A1.14 Grounding for FCN-500, FCN-100

When the FCN is installed in a cabinet (with a 19-inch rack), instrument panel, or the like,
it is functionally insulated by the insulation bushings (accessories of only NFBU200)
or a DIN rail attachment. To maintain this insulation, the following instructions must be
followed.
• Ground the FCN separately from the grounding of other devices, motor control
circuits, and electric control circuits.
• Perform the grounding system which is defined by the rules and standards of the
country or the region on the FG terminal of the base module.
• Perform the grounding system which is defined by the rules and standards of the
country or the region on the protective grounding terminal.
• Perform the grounding system which is defined by the rules and standards of
the country or the region on the G terminal of the power supply module (line filter
grounding).
• Perform the grounding of the base module and the power supply module at one
point.
SEE
ALSO For the specification of the grounding wire, see A1.16.2, “Wiring the Ground.”
Insulation bushing (*4)

Base module
FG
Field power supplyfor

analog I/O module (24V DC)
System power supply
( 5V DC)
SG
NFPW4** (*1)
Digital I/O (DI) (*3)

FG
NFCP100 (*2)
Digital I/O (DO)

NFPW4**
NFCP100
Analog I/O
Analog I/O
Circuit Circuit
Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit
I/F I/F
Power supply (*1)
Grounding bar
Power supply
AC/DC
AC/DC
Rack (*4)
Cabinet
AC L
LOAD
The grounding which is defined by the rules

and standards of the country or the region. Field device Field power supply Field power supply
for digital output for digital input
*1: Base module NFBU050 has only one power supply module on it.
*2: Base module NFBU050 has only one CPU module on it.
*3: Base module NFBU050 has up to three I/O modules on it.
*4: Install base module NFBU050 in the cabinet insulating the panel or the DIN rail from the rack using insulation bushings.
A011401E.ai

A1.15 Installation and Attachment

This section describes the installation procedures, attachment procedures, and
precautions for each module when attaching the FCN to cabinets (19-inch racks), control
panels, etc.
1. Installing the base module
2. Installing other modules
3. Ground wiring, power wiring
4. Field signal wiring
A1.15.1 Installing the Base Module

The FCN is designed to be attached to 19-inch racks, DIN rails, and general-purpose control
panels. Note the following when installing an FCN to cabinets, control panels, etc.
n Installation Direction
The FCN is designed to be cooled by natural air. Install an FCN so that the ventilation air flows
upward from its bottom to its top as shown below.
Up
100 mm or Air flow

more
100 mm or
Air flow
more
Down
A011501E.ai
Figure Installing the FCN Base Module

IMPORTANT
• Be sure to turn off the power before installing or removing the FCN base module. If the FCN
power supply is installed in duplex, turn off the power for both power supply modules.
• Do not install the unit blocking the ventilation holes on the top and bottom.
• To prevent the cooling air current from being blocked, be sure to place the unit at least 100
mm away from other devices.
• Do not expose to direct sunlight.
• If installing an expansion unit to a 19-inch rack directly beneath the FCN, be sure to leave a
space of 2U or more.
• All access to the FCN is performed from the front. Secure a space between 100 and 150
mm from the front panel of the unit to the cabinet door to provide enough space for the
cables. (The bending radius will differ depending on the material of the cable. Verify the
specification of the wire.)
• Secure a space on the front side of the FCN’s CPU module for installing or removing the
system card, SD card, Battery Unit.
SEE
ALSO For the size of the system card, refer to A1.4.1 “FCN/FCJ System Card” in this document.
TIP
To push the system card ejection button, use a tool which is 4 millimeters or less in diameter (such a tip is hard
enough to resist from bending).
n Installing to a 19-Inch Rack

When installing the base module of the FCN to a 19-inch rack or general-purpose control panel,
install the supplied insulation bushings sandwiching the base module as shown in the diagram.
Attach the base module to the 19-inch rack (cabinet) using the screws supplied.
Insulation bushing installation

procedures
Bracket
Insulation bushing
A011502E.ai
Figure Installing the FCN Base Module to a 19-inch Rack

n Precaution of Installing DIN Rails to Panel

There is the possibility that DIN rail may be deformed due to the controller’s weight and cable’s
tension.
Please screw DIN rail to the panel in at least two positions where attachments on the back side
(supplied DIN rail attachments) are placed.
Supplied DIN rail attachment
Attachment on back side
NFBU200 NFBU050
A011503E.ai
Figure Installing the DIN Rail to the Panel
n Installing to DIN Rails

l Base Module NFBU200
Follow the procedures below to install the base module NFBU200 (DIN rail type) to DIN rails
using the attachments on the back side.
1. Hook the tab on the upper area of the DIN rail as shown in the diagram.
2. Push in the base module.
Attaching to the DIN rail
B
[1] Hook
DIN rail
A
[2] Push in
Side view of the unit

[1] Hook
[1] Hook
[2] Push in A011504E.ai
Figure Installing the FCN Base Module NFBU200 to the DIN Rail
Follow the procedures below to install the base module NFBU050 to DIN rails.
1. Snap the supplied DIN Rail Attachment to the DIN rail. (See figure below) Attach one on
each side.
2. Attach NFBU050 by aligning the screws of the attachment to the installation holes on the left
and right of FCN unit.
3. Tighten the screws and secure NFBU050 to the DIN rail.
Pay attention not to drop nuts.
Supplied DIN rail
attachment
[1] Hook the nail on the attachment
Upside [2]
to the bottom of the DIN rail.
[2] Hook the top nail by pulling the
attachment upwards.
[3] Bring it down slightly while hooking
DIN rail
both nails of the installed jig.
Downside [3]
The downside has the deeper

notch than the upside.
[1]
A011505E.ai
Figure Installing the Attachment to the DIN Rail
DIN Rail
A011506E.ai
Figure Installing Base Module NFBU050 on the DIN Rail
WARNING
Attach the supplied DIN Rail Attachment correctly; if attached upside down, it might get out of
place.
TIP
Use a DIN rail that complies with the DIN 46277.
Install the base module NFBU050 to DIN rails upright as shown above.

n Panel Installation Procedures

Follow the procedures below to install FCN with Short base module.
1. Refer to the dimension diagram and create four holes to screw tapped M4 or M5 screws to a
depth of 8 mm.
2. Secure the unit at four locations using the M4 or M5 screws.
243.6 mm
110 mm
A020804E.ai
Figure FCN with Short base module Installation Screw Hole Interval Dimension Diagram

A1.15.2 Installing Other Modules on to the Base Module

This section describes the procedure for installing the power supply, CPU, I/O, and SB bus
repeat modules onto a base module.
IMPORTANT
It is necessary to configure a base module (NFBU200 only) before installing each module. For
setting procedures of a base module, refer to A1.2 “Base Module.”
n Installation Position of Each Module.

This section describes the positioning of the modules during installation to the base module.
Slot numbers Slot numbers
P1 P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P 1 2 3 4 5

A011507E.ai A011508E.ai
Figure Module Slot Numbers (NFBU200) Figure Module Slot Numbers (NFBU050)
Table Installation Position Allowed for Each Module in FCN-500, FCN-100 with Single Power Supply,
Single CPU, and Single SB Bus (NFBU200)
Module Allowed position Remarks
Power supply module P1 or P2 Normally installed into P2.
CPU module (*1) Slot1 - 2 Occupies 2 slots per module.
SB bus repeat module Slot10
I/O module Slot1 to 10 (*2) (*3)
Table Installation Position Allowed for Each Module in FCN-500, FCN-100 with Duplex Power Supply,
Duplex CPU, and Duplex SB Bus (NFBU200)
Power supply module P1 and P2 -
CPU module (*1) Slot1 - 2, 3 - 4 Occupies 2 slots per module.
SB bus repeat module Slot9, 10 -
I/O module Slot1 to 10 (*2) (*3)
Table Installation Position Allowed for Each Module in FCN-500, FCN-100 (NFBU050)
Power supply module P -
CPU module Slot1 - 2 -
I/O module Slot3 to 5 (*3)
*1: The CPU module can only be installed in a control unit.
*2: The I/O module can be installed in slots in which neither the CPU module nor the SB bus repeat module is installed.
*3: Some I/O modules have limits for the installation. See the next page for details.

n RESTRICTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
l Limitations of Installation for NFAT141 (the combination of Thermocouple

input and Pressure clamp terminal)
To keep the cold junction compensation accuracy (GS 34P02Q31-01E), make sure to meet the
following conditions. The pressure clamp terminal should not be affected by radiated heat.
• Do not install a heat-radiating unit beneath the NFAT141 installed unit.
• Do not install NFAT141 in a place where airflow impinges directly.
• Do not install NFAT141 next to the CPU modules (NFCP100), power supply modules
(NFPW44x).
• The installable modules next to the NFAT141 are as follows. When installing other than
following I/O modules, make an empty slot (one or more) in each side.
Installable modules: NFAT141, NFAR181, NFAV141, NFAV142, NFAV144, NFAV542
l NFLR111/NFLR121 (Serial Communication Module)

A total of up to eight NFLR111/NFLR121 Serial Communication Modules can be installed for
each FCN-500 or FCN-100.
l Limitations of Installation for I/O Modules

When you install the following I/O modules, ensure that the required power volume does not
exceed the rated power output of the power supply module. For the amount of power supply that
each I/O module requires (5 V DC and 24 V DC), refer to the applicable general specifications.

n Installing Modules
The following describes installation and removal procedures of modules to the base module.
Base module
Screws
Module
A011509E.ai
Figure Attaching Modules to the Base Module
l Installation Procedures
1. Attach the module to the base module using screws.
2. Use a torque of approximately 0.5 Nm for the tightening torque of the screws.
3. Attach the external connection cables and pressure clamp terminal block.
l Removal Procedures
1. Remove the external connection cables and pressure clamp terminal block.
2. Remove the screws that hold the module.
3. Pull out the module forward from the Base unit.
IMPORTANT
• Install I/O Module Dummy Covers (Model name: NFDCV01) on open I/O module slots.
• Install Power Supply Module Dummy Covers (Model name: NFDCV02) on open power
supply module slots.

A1.16 Wiring
IMPORTANT
Do not bend or press the power cable or the signal cable if the ambient temperature is minus 20
degrees Celsius or below.
Cables with the temperature rating of an ambient temperature plus 10 °C or more must be used.
A1.16.1 Power Supply Wiring

The following describes the power supply wiring for a power supply module that has finished be-
ing installed.
n Wiring Specification and Terminal Preparation

For the wire terminals, use crimp-on terminal lugs with insulation sleeve. Be sure to use ring
tongue terminal and crimping tools of the same brand.
l Applicable Cables
Insulated cables for industrial equipment such as;
• 600 V polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (IV); JIS C3307
• Polyvinyl chloride insulated wires for electrical apparatus (KIV); JIS C3316
• 600 V grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (HIV); JIS C3317
• Heatproof vinyl insulated wires VW-1 (UL1015/UL1007)
l Recommend Sizes
0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG 20 to 14)

l Terminal Preparation
Use ring tongue terminal for M4 terminals, with the outer diameter of the lug tip (outer terminal
diameter) not exceeding 8.5 mm, and with an insulation sleeve.
Insulation sleeve
internal diameter
Hole diameter
Outer terminal diameter Terminal length
A011601E.ai
Figure Ring Tongue Terminal
Table Example of Ring Tongue Terminal Specification

Conductor nominal Insulation
Outer terminal Terminal
cross-sectional Screw used Hole diameter sleeve internal
diameter length
area (mm) (mm) diameter
(mm) (mm)
(mm2) (mm)
0.5 to 1.65
4 4.3 or more 8.0 or less Approx. 20.0 3.6 or larger
(AWG 20 to 16)
1.04 to 2.63 (AWG
16 to 14)

n Connecting Power Supply

Follow the procedures below to connect the power supply cable.
1. Detach the protective cover for the terminals on the power supply module as follows:
• You will find a locking tab at the bottom of the protective cover (circled area in figure). Push
the lock up to unlock the tab.
• Pull gently to remove the cover.
2. Connect the power cable to the terminals labeled L and N. Where necessary, connect a 24
V DC power supply cable to terminals under FLD 24 VDC=. Tighten the terminal screws
(Phillips head M4) at a torque of 1.2 Nm.
3. Connect the grounding cable to the G terminal.
4. Replace the protective cover on the power supply connection terminal after wiring is
complete.
IMPORTANT
• It is recommended to install a switch or circuit breaker on the power wiring so that the power
can be turned on and off individually during maintenance.
• It is also recommended to install a noise filter to improve power supply quality.
A011602E.ai
Figure Locking Tab of Protective Terminal Cover

NFPW441-10
SYS
POWER
FLD
+5 V
+24 V CHECK
GND
MAINT
FLD
24 V DC=
+
N
100-120
V AC~
A011603E.ai
Figure Example of Power Supply Cable Connection

A1.16.2 Wiring the Ground

Grounding must be applied to the grounding system which is defined by the rules and standards
of the country or the region.
IMPORTANT
Ground only the specified, dedicated grounding terminal.
To avoid electric shocks and minimize the influences of external noise, FCN must be grounded
to the protective grounding system which complies with the safety standards, the electrical
installations standard, and the power distribution system of the country or the region.
l Applicable Cables
l Recommend Sizes
2 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 14 to 13)
Round crimping terminal M4: External dimensions must be within 8.5 mm with insulation covers.
l Cable Connection
Connect the ground cable to the FG terminal (M4 screws) on the bottom left of the base module.
Secure the M4 screws at a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm.
Connect the ground

cable to the unit
A011604E.ai
Figure Grounding the FCN Base Module

A1.16.3 Connecting the Signal Cable

The signal cable can be connected in the following ways:
• Direct connection using pressure clamp terminals
• Connection using MIL connectors
MIL connector cable
Pressure clamp terminal block
Field wiring
I/O module
A011605E.ai
Figure Variations on Signal Cable Connections
IMPORTANT
• Ensure that any signal wires that will have a high voltage applied are at least 1 cm away
from other wires.
• It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for analog I/O signals to prevent
inductive noise. For effective noise prevention, use twisted pair cables with a twist pitch of
50 mm or less. The cable shield must be grounded. For digital I/O signals, shielded cables
are recommended.
• For resistance temperature detector signals, ensure that the wiring resistances of the three
wires for each detector are equal.
• Fix the cables to cable clamps or the like in order to prevent the weight of the cables being
applied to the terminals.

n Direct Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals

Each I/O module has a male connector on its front panel as the I/O interface. A pressure clamp
terminal block is plugged into that connector for use.
l Signal Wires for Pressure Clamp Terminals
Cable
Core Length of exposed wire
A011606E.ai
Figure Signal Cable
l Applicable Cables
• Control cables (vinyl insulated vinyl sheath cable) (CVV); JIS C3401
l Recommended Size
Without sleeve: 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG20 to 14)
With sleeve: 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG20 to 16)
l Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals (When Not Using Sleeves)

Table Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals without Sleeve
Insulation
Cable Size Stripping Remarks
Length
0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 For terminals on NFTA4S, NFTT4S, NFTR8S,
11 mm
(AWG20 to 14) NFTB5S, NFTD5S, and NFTI3S modules
1.25 mm2 to 2 mm2
13 mm For terminals on NFTC4S and NFTC5S modules
(AWG16 to 14)

l Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals (When Using Sleeves)
Figure Sleeve for Pressure Clamp Terminals and Applicable Cables
Sleeve with insulation cover Sleeve with no insulation cover
d1 d2 d1 d2
L2 L1
L1
A011607E.ai
Table Sleeve for Pressure Clamp Terminals and Applicable Cables

(for NFTA4S, NFTB5S, NFTD5S, NFTI3S, NFTR8S and NFTT4S)
When using sleeves with insulation cover When using sleeves with no insulation cover
Cable Length of Sleeve dimensions Widemuller Length of Sleeve dimensions Widemuller
Thickness exposed Model exposed Model
wire L1 L2 d1 d2 Number wire L1 d1 d2 Number
0.5 mm2
11 mm 16 mm 10 mm 1.0 mm 2.6 mm H0.5/16 11 mm 10 mm 1.0 mm 2.1 mm H0.5/10
0.75 mm2 11 mm 16 mm 10 mm 1.2 mm 2.8 mm H0.75/16 11 mm 10 mm 1.2 mm 2.3 mm H0.75/10
1.0 mm2
11 mm 16 mm 10 mm 1.4 mm 3.0 mm H1/16 11 mm 10 mm 1.4 mm 2.5 mm H1/10
1.25 to1.5 mm 2
Table Sleeve for Pressure Clamp Terminals and Applicable Cables (for NFTC4S and NFTC5S)
1.25 to1.5 mm 2
13 mm 18 mm 12 mm 1.7 mm 3.5 mm H1.5/18 D 13 mm 12 mm 1.7 mm 2.8 mm H1.5/12
IMPORTANT
• Use the same manufacturer for sleeves and tools.
• Use sleeve tools that match the wire thickness.
• Insert the wire to be connected completely into the pressure clamp terminal and attach it
securely.
• It recommended to use a driver (flat blade screwdriver with tip thickness 0.6 mm, axis radius
3.5 mm) that complies with the DIN 5264B standard when connecting cables.
• The tightening torque is 0.5 Nm.
• Secure the cable to cable clamps, etc. so that the weight of the cable applied to the terminal
is minimized.
• Strip the cable for a length so that the core wire slightly extends from the metal tube of the
sleeve. If this causes the length of the metal tube of the sleeve to be slightly shorter than the
stripping length, this is no problem.

TIP
The inside of pressure clamp terminals is designed as shown below:
A011608E.ai
Figure Inside the Pressure Clamp Terminal
l Installing the Pressure Clamp Terminal Block to the I/O Module

After the signal cable has been connected, a pressure clamp terminal block must be installed to
the I/O module. The pressure clamp terminal block must be secured using M3 screws.
A011609E.ai
Figure Installing the Pressure Clamp Terminal Block to the I/O Module

n Connecting the MIL Connector Cables

MIL connector cables (KMS40, KMS50) can be connected directly without the installation of
pressure clamp terminal blocks to the I/O module. MIL connector cables are also sold separately.
To prevent MIL cables from disconnection, a MIL cable connector cover (NFCCC01) is available.
l Applicable Connectors and Cables/Wires

The cable used is a 40-pin or 50-pin female connector (see I/O Module Compatibility Table)
that complies with the MIL-C-83503 standard. The cables and wires must also comply with the
connector specification.
Table Applicable Connectors and Cables
Connector type Applicable wire size
Press-fitting pin terminal type female
AWG 20 to AWG 28, or 0.5 mm2 to 0.08 mm2
connector (*1)
AWG 28 or 0.08 mm2, 1.27 pitch flat cable or
Pressure welding type female connector
equivalent, AWG 28 or 0.08 mm2 circular
(*2)
attachment cable
*1: Special solderless socket contact is used. Hoods cannot be used.
*2: Strain-relief is used (recommended).
For analog signals, use shielded twisted pair cables.

For digital I/O signals, shielded cables are recommended.
IMPORTANT
For a 50-pin MIL connector, use a model with two incorrect insertion prevention keys.

l Connection
Connection is made by aligning the MIL connector and incorrect insertion prevention key on the
I/O module. Then install the MIL connector cover (NFCCC01) to secure the cable (excluding
NFDV161 and 561).
For NFDV161 or 561, the cable is locked using the connector lock lever.
MIL connector (MIL 50 pins)
A011610E.ai
Figure Connecting the MIL Connector Cable (Securing the Cable Using MIL Cable Connector Cover)
CN1 CN2
Connector lock lever
A011611E.ai
Figure Connecting the MIL Connector Cable (Securing the Cable Using Connector Lock Lever)

A1.16.4 Communication Cables
n Control Network
Connect the control network cable to the connector in the front of the CPU module. Use cables
that comply with the 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T standard. When using the control network in
single, connect the cable to the Network Interface 1.
IMPORTANT
When not using the Network Interface 2, leave the connector cover for dust protection on to
prevent any damage to the connector.
n SB Bus Cable
The SB bus repeat modules for expansion units are connected using SB bus cables.
Connect the cables following the procedures below:
1. Connect the cable connector to the T-joint connector on the SB bus repeat module.
2. Secure the connector by turning the screws on the connector shell.
3. The tightening torque of the screws should be approximately 0.45 Nm.
SEE
ALSO When a SB bus repeat module malfunctions, see C.6.2.2, “Replacing FCN Modules” for on-line replacement
procedures.

n RS-232-C Communication Cable
l Cable Connection
If RS-232-C communication cables are connected to CPU modules or RS-232-C communication
modules, connect the cables that conform to the respective connector types. Then, fasten the
cables using screws.
IMPORTANT
• The CPU module’s serial ports are D-SUB 9 pins (male). Connectors are fastened using
inch screw threads (No. 4-40 UNC).
• RS-232-C communication module’s serial ports are D-SUB 9 pins (female). Connectors are
fastened using metric screw threads (M2.6).
SEE
ALSO For the cables for NFLR111 (RS-232-C communication module), refer to “A1.11.1 Signal Cable Connection to
RS-232-C Communication Module.”

n RS-422/RS-485 Communication Cable

If users supply the communication cables for RS-422/RS-485, use cables that conform to the
following standards:
l Applicable Cables
Shielded twisted pair cables (cables for RS-422/RS-485 communication are recommended)
l Recommend Size
0.5 mm2 to 1.25 mm2 (AWG 20 to 16)
(1.25 mm2 is recommended)
Use a ring tongue terminal for M4 terminals, with the outer diameter of the lug tip (outer terminal
Insulation sleeve
internal diameter
Hole diameter
A011612E.ai

diameter length
(mm) (mm)
(mm2) (mm)
0.5 to 1.65
(AWG 20 to 16)
l Tightening Torque
Tightening torque: to be fixed at 1.2 Nm or less

<A2. Low Power Autonomous Controller FCN-RTU> A2-1
A2. Low Power Autonomous Controller

FCN-RTU
This section describes the hardware of the Low Power Autonomous Controller FCN-RTU
(Field Control Node – Remote Terminal Unit).
A2.1 Structure and Names of Each Component

Unit
FCN-RTU consists of the following modules:
• Base module (NFBU050,NFBU200)
• Power supply module (NFPW426,NFPW444)
• CPU (with built-in I/Os) module (NFCP050)
• Additional I/O module (up to three (NFBU050) or eight (NFBU200) modules can be
mounted on a base module)
Power supply module
CPU module
Additional I/O modules

Base module
A020101E.ai
Figure Components for the Low Power Autonomous Controller FCN-RTU
l Examples of Configuration
PWM
PWM
PWM
CPU
CPU
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
Unit:1 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Unit:1 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A020102E.ai A020104E.ai
Abbreviation Description
CPU CPU (with built-in I/Os) module
IOM Additional I/O module
Figure Installation Example of Low Power Autonomous Controller FCN-RTU Modules

n External View
l When Attaching to DIN RAil

Unit: mm
283
5 273 3.6
19.7 243.6 16.1
131
110
66.5
10.5
A020103E.ai
Figure External View for FCN-RTU (When Using NFBU050)
1.25 18 401.5 18 Unit : mm
165.3 7
30.5 1
444 16 CENTER OF
19 440.2 DIN RAIL
63.25 (67.75)
(45.5)35.5(50)
68
131
63
A020105E.ai
l When Attaching to 19-inch Rack

21.3 440 Unit : mm
170.8
152.4 18.4
482.6 17.6
8.45 465.7
132.5
37.7 57.1
A020106E.ai

A2.2 Base Module

A base module is a chassis on which various function modules such as CPU, power sup-
ply, and additional I/O modules are mounted to configure a control unit.
n Functions
Number of Mountable Number of Mountable SB bus (Internal
Model Usage
I/O Modules Power Spply Modules Backboard Bus)
NFBU200 Control unit 8 (*1) 1 or 2 (when duplex) non
NFBU050 Control unit 3 (*2) 1 non
*1: Two from the ten slots are exclusive for at least one CPU module.
*2: Two from the five slots are exclusive for one CPU module.
IMPORTANT
• Dummy cover (NFDCV01 and NFDCV02) must be installed in every unused slot.
n Specification
Table Base Module Specification
Item Specification
Model NFBU050-S1 NFBU200-S0 NFBU200-S1
Dimensions (W×H×D) 283×131×24.2 mm 482×132.5× 40.5 mm 440×131× 42.3 mm
Mounting DIN rail-mounted 19-inch rack-mounted DIN rail-mounted
Maximum 5V Self-consumption 0.025 A 0.4 A(max)
power
consumption 24 V Self-consumption 0
n External View
SEE
ALSO For the external view, refer to “■ External View ” in “A1.2 Base Module ”

n Settings (NFBU200 Only)

The base module has the following items that must be set:
• Unit number
• Duplex setting of CPU modules
l Unit Number Setting (SW1)

The switch must be set to [Unit1] at all other times (Default factory setting: Unit 1).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[Unit 1]
(Default factory setting)
A020204E.ai
Figure Unit Number Settings (SW1)
l Duplex CPU Module Setting (SW2)

The switch must be set to [Other] at all other times (Default factory setting: Other).
[Other]
(Default factory
setting)
A020205E.ai
Figure Duplex CPU Module Setting (SW2)
P1 P2 Slot-1 Slot-2 Slot-3
SW1
SW2
12345678
1234
TM1
CN11 TM2 CN12 CN9 CN10 CN1
Unit number setting (SW1)
Duplexed settings of the CPU module (SW2)

A020206E.ai
Figure Base Module Settings

n SG-FG Short-Circuit Setting

SEE
ALSO For the external view, refer to “■ SG-FG Short-Circuit Setting” in “A1.2 Base Module ”
SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) are connected by a short bar between two termi-
nals (TM1 and TM2, from top) on base module (default factory setting).
According to system requirement, SG and FG could be separated by removing the short bar (see
the figure shown below).
SG-FG short-circuit setting

(Default factory setting) A020202E.ai
SG-FG short-circuit setting

(Default factory setting) A020207E.ai
Figure SG-FG Short-circuit Setting

A2.3 Power Supply Module (NFPW426,NFPW444)

The power supply module is installed on base module, and supplies stable power to each
module.
NFPW426 power supply module has output functions (5 V DC power supply, 24 V DC ana-
log field power supply for additional I/O modules).
NFPW444 power supply module may be used for a duplexed configuration on base mod-
ule NFBU200.
It is equipped with an input terminal for analog field power (24V DC) and power is sup-
plied through the base module to each I/O module via this terminal. As for digital output
modules, some I/O modules require this type of field power (24V DC). In this case, power
must be supplied to each I/O module terminal (For details, see the specification of each
I/O module.)
WARNING
Power supply module NFPW426 cannot be used for NFBU200.
SEE
ALSO For more information about field power, refer to A2.7.3 “Field Power Supply.”

n Specification
Table Power Supply Module Specification
Item Specification
Model NFPW426 NFPW444
Rated input voltage 12 V DC, 24 V DC 24 V DC
Input voltage range 10 to 30 V DC 21.6 to 31.2 V DC
Input current Max. 4 A Max. 3.3 A
Fuse rating 6.3 A 6.3 A
Input Max. 4.3 A for 200 ms, 12 V DC input
Rush current Max. 20 A
Max. 9.2 A for 200 ms, 24 V DC input
Withstanding voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ at 500 V DC 50 MΩ at 500 V DC
Insensitive momentary
2 ms (100%) 2 ms (90%)
Power powerfailure time
supply Rated output voltage +5.1 V DC +5.1 V DC
Rated output current 0 to 2.4 A 0 to 7.8 A (*1)
Peak current 2.52 A 11.8 A
Total output 12 W 40 W (60W peak)
Output Max. 300 ms
Max. 100 ms (during nstantaneous
Startup time after power-on Max. 300 ms
power failure of 200 ms during rated
input)
Overvoltage protection Max. 7 V Max. 7 V
Min. 105% (Shutdown after 4 to 14
Overcurrent protection Min. 105% (auto recovery)
seconds later)
Rated input voltage - 24 V DC ± 10%
Input Input current - Max. 4 A
Fuse rating - 6.3 A
Input voltage minus matching-diode
Rated output voltage 24 V DC
Analog drop
field Rated output current 0 to 0.54 A 4 A (*2)
power
supply Peak current 0.57 A -
Output Total output 13 W -
Startup time after power-on Max. 300 ms -
Overvoltage protection Max. 36 V 35 V
Overcurrent protection Min. 105% (auto recovery) -
Possible (when installed on base mod-
Duplex configuration Impossible
ule NFBU200)
Dimension (W×H×D) 49.7 × 130 × 146.5 mm 49.7 × 130 × 146.5 mm
*1: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, the rated output current is limited to 75% (0 to 5.85 A).
*2: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, the rated output current is limited to 75% (3 A).

n External View
Unit: mm
146.5
49.7 133 13.5
130
A020301E.ai
Figure Power Supply Module
n Terminals/LEDs
Pin No. Name Signal
1 + 24 V DC analog field power supply enable (+) (*1) (*2)
2 - 24 V DC analog field power supply enable (-) (*1) (*2)
4 + Power input (+)
5 - Power input (-)
*1: To drive analog field power supply function, supply the same voltage at 24 V DC analog field power supply enable (+) and (-)
(connect Pin No. 5 to Pin No. 2, and connect Pin No. 4 to Pin No. 1).
*2: When analog I/O modules such as NFAB841 are installed, an analog field power supply is needed.
Otherwise do not connect these pins to save the power consumption.

Pin No. Name Signal
1 + 24 V DC analog field power supply (+) (*1)
2 - 24 V DC analog field power supply (-) (*1)
4 + Power input (+)
5 - Power input (-)
*1: When analog I/O modules such as NFAB841 are installed, an analog field power supply is needed.
Table Check Terminals

Pin No. Name Signal
1 +5 V-CHK Checking of 5 V system power
2 +24 V-CHK Checking of 24 V field power supply
3 GND -CHK Signal grounding

Table LED Displays
SYS-POWER Green Lights when the 5 V system power output is on.
FLD-POWER Green Lights when the 24 V field power supply is on.
NFPW426-10 NFPW444-10
SYS SYS
POWER Status lamp POWER
FLD FLD
Check terminal
+5V +5V
+24V CHECK +24V CHECK
GND GND
TM FLD
TM
24VDC
1 1
2 2
FLD 3
3
ENA
Power supply terminal

4 4
5 5
SYS SYS
12VDC 12VDC
/24VDC /24VDC
Tabs for the locks of the protective cover

A020302E.ai
Figure Power Supply Module Terminals

n Operations
The simple functional block diagram of the power supply module (NFPW426) is shown below.
Field Power
Enable Power Supply Module Base Module
(FLDENA) (NFPW426) (NFBU050)
Analog Field Power Supply Function

1+
Analog Field Power Supply
24 V DC
2- 24 V DC (for Additional I/O modules)
Connect Generator
if necessary
Ground of
System Power Supply
Noises Filter
3 Function
4+ System Power Supply

5 V DC
Power Input 5 V DC
Generator
5-
SG
Power Source
10 to 30 V DC To FG
A020303E.ai
Figure Simple Functional Block Diagram of Power Supply Module
l System Power Supply Function

System power supply (5 V DC) is generated from power source input (10 to 30 V DC) and sup-
plied to CPU module and additional I/O modules via base module.
l Analog Field Power Supply Function

This module has a function to generate analog field power supply (24 V DC) from power source
input (10 to 30 V DC) and to supply the generated power supply to additional I/O modules. Ac-
cording to system requirements (such as using additional analog I/O modules), this function
could be activated. (Do not activate this function unless necessary, or increase power consump-
tion wastefully.)
To activate this function, supply the same voltage as power source input at 24 V DC analog field
power supply enable terminals, pin No.1 (+) and 2 (-). Examples of wiring are shown next.

TM TM TM
1 1 1
2 2 2
FLD 3 FLD 3 FLD 3

ENA ENA ENA
4 4 4
5 5 5
SYS SYS SYS
12VDC 12VDC 12VDC
/24VDC /24VDC /24VDC
Wiring Wiring not to use analog field Wiring to use analog field
power supply function power supply function
A020304E.ai
Figure Examples of Wiring
WARNING
Do not supply the opposite pole voltage, or a breakdown occurs. Check connection before
power-on.

A2.4 CPU Module for FCN-RTU (NFCP050)

One CPU module is mounted in each control unit. The CPU module runs a real-time oper-
ating system, supports programming languages compliant with IEC 61131-3 international
standard, and serves as a Java virtual machine.
Especailly, this CPU module has built-in I/Os and built-in software licenses.
n Specification
Item Specification
Model NFCP050-S□
CPU SH-4A(SH7730) 256 MHz
Main 128 MB with ECC (*4)
Memory
System 128 MB on-board flash memory (*6)
3 RS-232 ports (SERIAL: 1, 2, 3), non-isolated, RJ45 modular jacks (*7)
Serial Port (*1)
1 RS-422/RS-485 port (SERIAL: 4), non-isolated, RJ45 modular jack
RS-232: Full/Half duplex (software settings)
Communication method
RS-422/RS-485: Full/Half duplex (DIP switch settings)
Synchronization Asynchronous
SERIAL:
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps
1, 4
Baud rate
SERIAL:
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, or 38.4 kbps
2, 3
Terminating resistance RS-422/RS-485: 120 Ω built-in, ON/OFF (DIP switch settings)
1 Ethernet port, 100/10 Mbps or 100BASE-TX, RJ45 modular jack,
Network Interface NETWORK
with Network power switch (ON/OFF)
16 DI channels, 8 DO channels, 12 AI channels (1-5 V),
Built-in I/O (*2) 2 AO channels (4-20 mA, required for external power supply), 2 PI channels, 1 AI chan-
nel (0-32 V)
I/O interface SB bus (single)
RAS features Watchdog timer, temperature monitor, etc.
Battery (*3) 2700mAH lithium battery
3 LEDs for CPU status indication,
Display 2 LEDs for LAN status indication,
2 LEDs for Serial port status indication
Switches RESET, SHUTDOWN, ON/OFF (NETWORK)
Supply voltage 5 V DC ± 5%
Power sup-
ply Power consump-
1.16 to 2.30 W
tion
Duplex configuration Impossible
Weight 0.57 kg
Dimensions
65.8 × 130 × 142.5 mm
Size (W×H×D)
Occupying slots 2
*1: For connecting to these serial ports, prepare specially made cables following the table shown below.
*2: MIL 40-pin × 2 (KMS40 cable and TAS40 terminal block can be used.)
*3: With battery exhaustion detection function
*4: 128 MB with ECC for S2 (Style 2) or later, 64 MB without ECC for S1 (Style 1).
*5: 1 MB with ECC for S2 (Style 2) or later, 1 MB without ECC for S1 (Style 1).
*7: By default factory setting, flow controls are disabled.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Mar.28,2016-00

n External View
Reset switch NFCP050-S00 S2
HRDY RDY CTRL
Shutdown switch
RESET
SHUT
Serial port 4 DOWN
SERIAL
RS-422/
4 RS-485
CN1 CN2
Serial port 3
3 RS-232
Serial port 2
RCV 2 RS-232
Serial port 1
SND 1 RS-232
ON/OFF (DI/O) (AI/O)

Network power switch
NETWORK ON/OFF
Network interface NETWORK
Built-in I/O
LINK & ACT MAC address
(AI/O, PI) channels
Built-in I/O
(DI/O) channels
A020401E.ai
Figure CPU Module

l Built-in RS-232 Serial Port Terminals

Table Pin Assignment of RS-232 Serial Ports
Conversion to D-sub
Connector
RJ45 D-sub
Pin RS-232 Signal Name D-sub
9pin
No. 9pin Male
Female
(Straight
(Crosso-
Cable)
ver Cable)
DCD
1 1 1
(Data Carrier Detect)
2 DSR (Data Set Ready) 6 4
3 RXD (Received Data) 2 3
4 RTS (Request To Send) 7 8
5 TXD (Transmitted Data) 3 2
6 CTS (Clear To Send) 8 7
DTR
7 4 6
(Data Terminal Ready)
8 GND (Common Ground) 5 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A020402E.ai
Figure Front View of RJ45 Connector for RS-232 Serial Ports
l Built-in RS-422/RS-485 Serial Port Terminals

Table Pin Assignment of RS-422/RS-485 Serial Port
RJ45
Pin Half Duplex (2-wire) Full Duplex (4-wire)
No.
1 DATA+ TX+
2 DATA- TX-
3 RX+
4
5
6 RX-
7
8 GND GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A020403E.ai
Figure Front View of RJ45 Connector for RS-422/RS-485 Serial Port

l Network Interface Terminals
Table Pin Assignment of RJ45 Type Modular Jack for Network Interface
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
7 Not used -
8 Not used -
l Operation Status LEDs

Table Operation Status LEDs
Green Lights when the system is normal.
RDY
Red Blinks when built-in I/Os are failed.
SEE
ALSO The displays of the CPU operation status display LEDs are different depending on the status, such as during star-
tup or in duplex configuration. For details on the CPU operation status display LEDs, see B1.5, “Operation Status
of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.”
l Network Status LEDs

NETWORK
Green Lights on when the network interface is enabled.
ON/OFF
Lights when the LINK has been established. Blinks
LINK & ACT Green
when the transmission/reception is on.
l Serial Port Status LEDs

Receive
Green Reception in progress
(RCV)
Send (SND) Green Transmission in progress
Note: Not implemented by S1 (Style 1)
l Reset Switch

l Shutdown Switch
l Network ON/OFF Switch

This switch is used to turn on and off the network interface.
SEE
ALSO For details, see B1.9, “FCN-RTU Ethernet Power Saving Function.”
n Bundled Licenses
l Controller Software Licenses

The combination of application portfolio licenses can be specified in CPU module (NFCP050)
suffix code as shown in the following table. Licenses can not be added later on.
Table Suffix code indicating license combination
Suffix codes of model NFCP050
Software Media
Software -S0□ -S1□
(Model)
Standard type Extend type
FCN/FCJ Basic Software for Single CPU
 
(With Java function) NT203AJ
PAS Portfolio  
Modbus Communication
 
Portfolio
DNP3 Communication Portfolio  
Application Web Application Portfolio – 
Portfolio NT205AJ
E-mail Application Portfolio –  (*1)
Graphic Portfolio (InfoWell) – 
Logging Portfolio (InfoWell) – 
Gas Flow Calculation Portfolio –  (*1)
*1: Not supported by S1 (Style 1).

n Serial Ports
SEE
ALSO For external connection, refer to A1.11.2 “Signal Cable Connection to RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module.”
l Connection
To connect serial port with other devices, make adequate cable which has RJ45 connection one
side. Cable’s material is selected appropriately according to installation and operation require-
ments (temperature range).
l Hardware Setting for RS-485 (SERIAL 4)

In use of RS-485 (SERIAL 4), set these switch on side body of module according to conditions.
• Disabling or enabilng internal termination resistor (120 Ω each) for TX and RX
Switch Name Position Function

OFF Disabling internal termination resistor (120Ω) for TX
TX
ON Enabling internal termination resistor (120Ω) for TX (factory default)
OFF Disabling internal termination resistor (120Ω) for RX
RX
ON Enabling internal termination resistor (120Ω) for RX (factory default)
• Choice between half duplex or full duplex
Switch Name Position Function

HALF (2-WIRE) Half duplex (factory default)
DUPLEX
FULL (4-WIRE) Full duplex
OFF
TX ON
TERMINATOR
OFF
RX ON
HALF(2-WIRE)
DUPLEX FULL(4-WIRE)
SERIAL 4
RS-422/RS-485
OFF
TX ON
TERMINATOR
OFF
RX ON
HALF(2-WIRE)
DUPLEX FULL(4-WIRE)
SERIAL 4
RS-422/RS-485
A020404E.ai
Figure Hardware Settings for RS-485 (SERIAL 4)
TIP
When the port is not used, it should be covered.

n Built-in I/Os
l Specifications
Table Built-in Analog Inputs (1 to 5 V DC)
Item Specification
Input points 12
1 to 5 V differential, non-isolated
Input signals
Allowable common mode voltage range ±1 V DC
Maximum absolute input voltage range ±7.5 V
During power-on 1 MΩ or more
Input impedance
During power-off 340 kΩ or more
Allowable signal source resistance 500 Ω or less
Accuracy ±0.3% of full scale
Temperature drift Max. ±0.01%/°C
A/D resolution 15 bits/1-5 V
Normal mode noise rejection ratio 37 dB or more (with power supply frequency at 50/60 Hz)
Table Built-in Analog Outputs

Item Specification
Output points 2
Output signals 4 to 20 mA DC, non-isolated
Allowable load resistance 0 to 250 Ω (12 V), 0 to 750 Ω (24V)
Accuracy ±0.5% of full scale
Temperature drift Max. ±0.01%/°C
D/A resolution 13 bits/4-20 mA
Step response time 100 ms
HOLD: Holds the current level when the fallback action is triggered.
Output fallback (*2) (*3) SETV: Sets the output to the preset level when the fallback action is
triggered.
Output ripple 50 mVp-p (250 Ω load)
Output open detection Provided
*1: To use AO, connect a power supply (12 or 24 V) to Vin and Com terminals.
*3: Fallback functions can be enabled in common.
When enabling them, HOLD or SETV can be set for each channel.
Table Built-in Digital Inputs

Item Specification
Input points 16, non-isolated
Rated input voltage 3.3 V DC, voltage-free contact
Input “on” voltage 1.2 V DC or less
Input “off” voltage 2.5 V DC or more
Source current 1 mA
Input response time 25 ms
Function: Status inputs On/off status detection Rise/fall

Table Built-in Digital Outputs
Item Specification
Output points 8, non-isolated
Rated load voltage 12 V DC, 24V DC
Maximum “on” voltage 2 V DC
Maximum output-off leak current 0.1 mA
Output type Current sink
100 mA/point, 13.2 V
Maximum load
100 mA/point, 26.4 V
Output response time 15 ms
Function: Status outputs On/off status outputs
HOLD: Holds the current status when the fallback action is triggered.
Output fallback (*1) (*2) OFF: Resets all the output channels to off when the fallback action
is triggered.
*2: Fallback functions can be enabled in common.
When enabling them, HOLD or OFF can be set in common.
Table Built-in Pulse Inputs

Item Specification
Input points 2, non-isolated
Input signals Voltage-free contact pulse, voltage pulse
Absolute maximum input voltage 26.4 V DC
Input frequency 0 to 10 kHz
Minimum input pulse width 40 μs
VH-VL (voltage swing): 3 V or greater
where VH: 3 to 24 V
Input signal level
VL: Ranges from -1 to 8 V
Signal source resistance: 1 kΩ or less
Pull-up resistance None
Filter function Can select a filter that eliminates chattering (*1).
*1: The maximum input frequency is lower than specified when the filter for eliminating chattering is used.
Table Built-in Analog Input (0 to 32 V DC) (*1)

Item Specification
Input points 1
0 to 32 V differential, non-isolated
Input signals
Allowable common mode voltage range ±1 V DC
Maximum absolute input voltage range ±36 V
During power-on 1 MΩ or more
Input impedance
During power-off 56 kΩ or more
Allowable signal source resistance 500 Ω or less
Accuracy ±100 mV, ±0.3% of full scale
Temperature drift Max. ±6.4 mV/°C, ±0.02%/°C
*1: The signal name is BAT+/-.

l Signal Connection
Using two sets of external MIL Connector Terminal Blocks (TAS40) and MIL Connector Cable
(KMS40), field signals are connected to built-in I/Os of CPU module. (Refer to the follwing fig-
ures.)
1. Remove connector cover attached to main body.
2. Attach two MIL connector cables in the correct direction.
3. Connect shield line of MIL connector cable with FG terminal of under built-in I/O’s connector.
(See “Figure Connecting Shield Lines of MIL Connector Cables.”)
4. Attach connector cover on to fix the Connector Cables.
SEE
ALSO For the terminal arrangement of KMS40 and TAS40, refer to “l Terminal Arrangement.”
MIL connector MIL connector cable

Terminal block
MIL connector MIL connector cable

Terminal block
A020406E.ai
Figure Attaching MIL Connector Cables

NFCP050-S00 S1
HRDYRDY CTRL
RESET
SHUT
DOWN
SERIAL
RS-422/
4 RS-485
CN1 CN2
3 RS-232
2 RS-232
1 RS-232
ON/OFF (DI/O) (AI/O)
NETWORK
A020407E.ai
Figure Connecting Shield Lines of MIL Connector Cables
Isolation covering inside diameter
Lug thickness
Hole diameter
C
Lug outside diameter Lug length
A020904E.ai
Figure Solderless Lug of Shield Line
Table Solderless Lug Dimensions

Isolation
Nominal Lug out-
Screw Hole covering Lug
cross side Lug length Dimension
used diameter inside thickness
sectional diameter (mm) “C” (mm)
(mm) (mm) diameter (mm)
area (mm)
(mm)
1.25 mm2 3 3.2 or more 8 or less – – 5.5 or more 1 or less

l Terminal Arrangement
CN1 (DI/O) CN2 (AI/O, PI)
signal signal signal signal

Pin No. Pin No.
name name name name
N.C. 40 39 N.C. BAT+ 40 39 BAT-
DI1 38 37 DO1 AI1+ 38 37 AI1-
DI2 36 35 DO2 AI2+ 36 35 AI2-
DI3 34 33 DO3 AI3+ 34 33 AI3-
DI4 32 31 DO4 AI4+ 32 31 AI4-
DI5 30 29 DO5 AI5+ 30 29 AI5-
DI6 28 27 DO6 AI6+ 28 27 AI6-
DI7 26 25 DO7 AI7+ 26 25 AI7-
DI8 24 23 DO8 AI8+ 24 23 AI8-
DI9 22 21 COM AI9+ 22 21 AI9-
DI10 20 19 COM AI10+ 20 19 AI10-
DI11 18 17 COM AI11+ 18 17 AI11-
DI12 16 15 COM AI12+ 16 15 AI12-
DI13 14 13 N.C. N.C. 14 13 N.C.
DI14 12 11 N.C. PI1+ 12 11 PI1-
DI15 10 9 N.C. PI2+ 10 9 PI2-
DI16 8 7 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
COM 6 5 N.C. AO1+ 6 5 AO1-
COM 4 3 N.C. AO2+ 4 3 AO2-
N.C. 2 1 N.C. Vin 2 1 Com
Vin: Power supply (12 or 24 V) input terminal (+) for built-in AO

Com: Power supply (12 or 24 V) input terminal (-) for built-in AO
A020408E.ai
Figure Pin Assignment of Built-in I/O (MIL)

COM
COM
DI16
DI15
DI14
DI13
DI12
DI11
DI10
N.C.
N.C.
DI9
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
Signal Name DI1

Terminal No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Terminal No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
Signal Name
COM
COM
COM
COM
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
DO8
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
AO2+
AO1+
AI12+
AI11+
AI10+
BAT+
PI2+
PI1+
N.C.
AI9+
AI8+
AI7+
AI6+
AI5+
AI4+
AI3+
AI2+
AI1+
N.C.
Vin
Signal Name
Terminal No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Terminal No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
Signal Name
Com
N.C.
N.C.
AI1-
AO2-
PI2-
PI1-
AI7-
AI6-
AI5-
AI4-
AI3-
AI2-
AO1-
AI8-
AI12-
AI13-
AI10-
AI9-
BAT-
A020409E.ai
Correspondence between terminal numbers and signal names are examples of connectors using MIL cables (straight type).
Figure General-purpose Terminal Blocks (terminal No./Signal Name)

l Analog Inputs (1 to 5 V DC)
12 V DC/24 V DC
CPU module
Built-in I/O
+
4 to 20 mA
-
660 kΩ
AIn+
250 Ω 660 kΩ
AIn-
39 kΩ 340 kΩ 340 kΩ
n:1 to 12 SG
A020410E.ai
Figure Simple Block Diagram of AI Circuit and Examples of Connection (1 to 5 V DC)
l Analog Outputs
In case of using Analog Outputs (4 to 20 mA), 12 V DC or 24 V DC must be supplied to the termi-
nals (Vin and Com) of CN2. According to specifications of connected device, select appropriate
voltage within maximum voltage value.
CPU module
Built-in I/O
12 V DC/24 V DC
Vin
Com
AOn+
4 to 20 mA
AOn- SG
n:1, 2
A020411E.ai
Figure Simple Block Diagram of AO Circuit and Examples of Connection

l Digital Inputs
Use COM terminal of Pin No.4 and 6 for return of digital inputs (DI1 to DI16)
CPU module
3.3 V DC Internal Built-in I/O
Pull-up
1 kΩ
DI n
COM SG
Dry contact input
n : 1,2, to ,16
A020412E.ai
Figure Simple Block Diagram of DI Circuit and Examples of Connection
l Digital Outputs
• Use COM Pin No. 15, 17, 19, and 21 for return of digital outputs (DO1 to DO8).
Use different COM to avoid convergence.
• There is no protection circuit internally.
Pay attention to the connections without load. According to requirement, protecting circuits,
such as fuses, may need to be mounted.
CPU module
Built-in I/O
DO n
LOAD
12 V DC/24 V DC
to 100 mA/point
COM
n : 1,2, to ,8
A020413E.ai
Figure Simple Block Diagram of DO Circuit and Examples of Connection

l Pulse Inputs
• In case of dry contact pulse input, external pull up (resister and power) is needed. Accord-
ing to requirements, select values of resistance and voltage.
• Filtering function is available for eliminate chattering. It is selected by software configuration
on Resource Configrator.
External CPU module

Pull-up Built-in I/O
PI n+
Filter
PI n- SG
Dry contact pulse input
n: 1, 2
CPU module
Built-in I/O
PI n+
Filter
PI n- SG
Voltage pulse input
n: 1, 2
A020414E.ai
Figure Simple Block Diagram of PI Circuit and Examples of Connection

l Analog Input (0 to 32 V DC)
This analog input is useful for battery voltage monitoring.
CPU module
Built-in I/O
1 MΩ
BAT+
1 MΩ
BAT–
+ – 39 kΩ 56 kΩ 56 kΩ
Battery SG
A020415E.ai
Figure Simple Block Diagram of AI Circuit and Examples of Connection (0 to 32 V DC)

A2.5 I/O Modules

n Installation Limitations
An autonomous controller FCN-RTU supports the following I/O modules and up to eight of them
can be mounted on it. For details of I/O modules, refer to “A1. Autonomous Controller FCN.”
Table List of FCN-RTU’s Modules and Descriptions (1/2)
Explosion
Temp. Temp. Protection
(-40to+70°C) (-20to+70°C) FM NI HART
Altitude Altitude ATEX IECEx Option
(3000m) (2000m) Type Type
“n” “n”
CSA NI
NFBU050 Base Module (short)    
Base module
NFBU200 Base Module (long) N.A.   
Power supply NFPW426 Power Supply Module (12 V DC input, 24 V DC input)     (*1)
module NFPW444 Power Supply Module (24 V DC input) N.A.  (*8)  
CPU module NFCP050 CPU Module for FCN-RTU    
Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 8-channel, Isolated
NFAI135 N.A.  (*9)  N.A. 
channels)
Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, Non-  
NFAI141 N.A.  (*9)  (*3)
Isolated) (*3) (*3)
Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel,
NFAI143 N.A.  (*9)   
Isolated)
NFAI543 Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-channel,
N.A.  (*10)   
(*11) Isolated)
Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-channel, Non-
NFAV141 N.A. N.A.  N.A. N.A.
Isolated)
NFAV144 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-channel, Isolated) N.A.  (*5)  N.A. N.A.
Analog I/O
Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA input, 4 to 20 mA
Modules (*2)  
NFAI841 output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, Non- N.A.  (*9) (*10) (*3)
(*3) (*3)
Isolated)
Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V input: differential input,
NFAB841 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, N.A. N.A.  N.A. N.A.
Non-Isolated)
NFAT141 TC/mV Input Module (16-channel, Isolated) N.A. N.A.  N.A. N.A.
NFAR181 RTD Input Module (12-channel, Isolated)  (*4) (*7)  (*4) (*7)   N.A.
Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA, 4-channel input/4-
NFAI835 N.A.  (*9) (*10)   
channel output, Isolated channels)
Pulse Input Module (8-channel, Pulse count, 0 to 10  (*4) (*7)
NFAP135  (*4) (*7)  N.A. N.A.
kHz, Isolated channels) (*9)
NFDV151 Digital Input Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Isolated) N.A.    N.A.
Digital Input Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Pressure
NFDV157 N.A. N.A.  N.A. N.A.
Clamp Terminal support only, Isolated)
Digital I/O NFDV551 Digital Output Module (32-channel, 24 V DC, Isolated) N.A.    N.A.
Modules (*2)
Digital Output Module (32-channel, 24 V DC,
NFDV557 N.A. N.A.  N.A. N.A.
Pressure Clamp Terminal support only, Isolated)
NFDR541 Relay Output Module (16-channel, 24 to 110 V
N.A.  (*5) (*6)  N.A. N.A.
(*12) DC/100 to 240 V AC, Isolated)
CANopen Communication Module
NFLC121 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
(1-port, 10 kbps to 1 Mbps)
Communication
NFLF111 Foundation fieldbus Communication Module (4-port)  (*4) (*7)  (*4) (*7)  N.A. N.A.
Modules
PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
NFLP121 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
(1-port, 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps)
IM 34P02Q01-01E 20th Edition : May 29,2015-00

Table List of FCN-RTU’s Modules and Descriptions (2/2)
Explosion
Temp. Temp. Protection
(-40to+70°C) (-20to+70°C) FM NI HART
Altitude Altitude ATEX IECEx Option
Type Type
(3000m) (2000m) “n” “n”
CSA NI
NFTA4S For Analog (16-channel) N.A.   
NFTT4S for Thermocouple/mV (16-channel) N.A. N.A.  N.A.
NFTR8S for RTD (12-channel)    
Pressure NFTB5S for Digital Input (32-channel) N.A.   
Clamp Terminal NFTD5S for Digital Output (32-channel) N.A.   
Block
for Isolated Analog Module (for NFAI135, NFAP135,
NFTI3S    
NFAI835)
NFTC5S for Digital (32-channel, with dedicated connector) N.A.   N.A. (*1)
NFTF9S for Foundation fieldbus    N.A.

MIL Connector Terminal Block (40 Pole Plug Types,
TAS40    N.A.
M3.5)
Terminal Block
MIL Connector Terminal Block (50 Pole Plug Types,
TAS50 N.A.   N.A.
M3.5)
KMS40 MIL Connector Cable (40 Pole Plug Types)    N.A.
Cable
KMS50 MIL Connector Cable (50 Pole Plug Types) N.A.   N.A.
Note: All the modules in this list are available in the temperature range 0 to +55°C.
: Available ( or conforming ) N.A.: Not available ( or Not applicable)
*1: Unconcerned
*2: To use I/O modules as hazardous location equipment (non-incendive), use the specified pressure-clamp terminal blocks or
TAS40/TAS50 (MIL connecter terminal blocks) and KMS40/KMS50 (MIL connector cables).
*3: I/O modules with suffix code –H* “with HART communication” conform to only ATEX Type “n”standards (does not conform
to FM-NI,CSA-NI, IECEx )
*4: Use I/O module with suffix codes –S4 or –S5 (with Extended Temperature Range (-40 to +70°C) option )
Refer to “Limitations of Installation for using in the wide temperature range (-40 to +70°C) and high altitude (2000 to 3000m)
environments.”
*5: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, a blank slot on one side is required to NFAV144 module. See “Figure
Installation Examples of using NFAV144” in the following page.
*6: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, available channels of NFDR541 are up to eight.
*7: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, NFAR181, NFAP135 and NFLF111 modules cannot be installed in next
slot of the NFAI841.
*8: When ambient temperature is higher than 55°C, NFPW444 module is restricted to 75% of rated output current.
*9: In the case of the use of combination with NFPW426, only one module can be used.
*10: NFAI841, NFAI543 and NFAI835 modules are restricted to the external load and module installation. Refer to “Table Module
Arrangement and Restrictions on Installation” in the following page.
*11: The combination of NFAI543 and NFPW426 is not allowed. Use NFPW444 module.
*12: Maximum 8 A is allowed per common.

Table Module Arrangement and Restrictions on Installation

(when ambient temperature is higher than 55°C)
Model Left-side Right-side Limitations

NFAI841 (*1) (*1) External load (Analog Output): 200-750Ω
 N.A.
N.A. 
NFAI543 N.A. N.A. External load (Analog Output): 0-400Ω
N.A. (*1) Up to 12 channels
External load (Analog Output): 0-400Ω,
NFDR541  N.A. Required a vacant slot on one side
N.A.  Up to 8 channels
NFAI835  N.A. External load (Analog Output): 200-750Ω
  External load (Analog Output): 200-500Ω
NFAV144  N.A. Required a vacant slot on one side
N.A. 
NFPW444 N.A. or N.A. or Up to 75% of rated output current
NFPW444 NFPW444 or
NFCP050
: Any module (arbitrary)　　 N.A.: Blank or Not allowed
*1: Except NFAI841
Vacant Slot
Vacant Slot
NFAV144
NFAV144
NFAV144
PWM
PWM
PWM
CPU
CPU
CPU
IOM
IOM
IOM
IOM
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Slot 1 2 3 4 5
F20E.ai
Figure Installation Example of using NFAV144
l Limitations of I/O Modules Installation by power supply module

(NFPW426,NFPW444)
Ensure that the required power consumption does not exceed the rated power output of the
power supply module. For each I/O module’s power consumption (5V DC and 24V DC), refer to
the corresponding General Speciﬁcations.
l Installation Requirements for NFAT141 (the combination of Thermocouple

input and Pressure clamp terminal)
To keep the accuracy of reference junction compensation (GS 34P02Q31-01E), the pressure
clamp terminal should not be affected by radiated heat. Please make sure to meet the following
conditions:
• Do not install a heat-radiating unit beneath the NFAT141 installed unit.
• Do not install NFAT141 in the place where airﬂow affects directly.
• The following modules can be installed next to NFAT141:
NFAT141, NFAR181, NFAV141
When installing other I/O modules, make a vacant slot (one or more) in each side.

l Limitations of Installation for I/O Modules
When installing I/O modules, ensure that total power consumption does not exceed the rated
power output of the power supply module. For each I/O module power consumption (5 V DC and
24 V DC), refer to the applicable general specifications.
Examples:
• The digital I/O module NFDV551 need to be checked for current consumption of 5 V DC.
• The analog I/O module NFAI141, NFAI841, NFAB841, NFAI835, NFAP135 and NFAF135
need to be checked for current consumption both of 5 V DC and 24 V DC.

A2.6 FCN-RTU Installation Environment

n FCN-RTU Installation Specificaition, Precautions
The conditions of the installation location must be appropriate for stable operation of the system.
The table below shows the conditions required for installation location (and some conditions for
transportation and storage) of an FCN-RTU.
Table FCN-RTU Installation Environment Specification
Item Specification
Ambient tempera- Operation -40 to +70 °C (*1)
ture Transportation/storage -40 to +85 °C
Operation 5 to 95 %RH (no condensation)
Ambient humidity
Transportation/storage 5 to 95 %RH (no condensation)
Rate of change in Operation Within ±10 °C/h
temperature Transportation/storage Within ±20 °C/h
Dust 0.3 mg/m3 or less
Protection class IP20
ANSI/ISA S71.04 Class G2 (Standard) (ANSI/ISA S71.04 Class G3,
Resistance to corrosive gases
option)
0.15 mm P-P (5 to 58 Hz)
Resistance to vibration
1 G (58 to 150 Hz)
Resistance to shock 15 G, 11 ms (during power-off, for sine half-waves in XYZ-directions)
Altitude 3000 m or less (*1)
Noise Magnetic field 30 A/m (AC) or less, 400 A/m (DC) or less
Electrostatic discharge 4 kV or less contact discharge, 8 kV or less aerial discharge
Apply the grounding system which is defined by the rules and standards
Grounding
of the country or the region.
*1: It depends on additional I/O modules. Refer to “A2.5 I/O MODULE” for details.

IMPORTANT
• The unit must be placed in a lockable metal cabinet to comply with standards (Safety, EMC, etc.).
hinder the air-cooling capabilities of the unit. When installing FCN-RTU in a cabinet, note
that the temperature specification is not in respect to the ambient temperature of the cabi-
net.
• Avoid exposing FCN-RTU to direct sunlight.
and ammonia.
• For vibration at the installation location, see also “FCN-RTU Vibration Criteria” within this
Chapter.
• For radio device noise to FCN-RTU, see “Radio Device Noise to FCN-RTU” within this
Chapter.
l Limitations of Installation for using in the wide temperature range (-40 to +70
°C) and high altitude (up to 3000 m) environments
Main components of FCN-RTU (NFCP050, NFPW426, NFBU050) can operate in the wide
temperature range (-40 to +70 °C) and high altitude (up to 3000 m) environments.
The I/O Modules which are marked up on table “List of FCN-RTU’s Modules and Descriptions”
can operate in the wide temperature range and high altitude environments by selecting suffix
code –S4 or –S5 (with Extended Temperature range -40 to +70 °C option).
In case of using other I/O modules, the specifications of ambient temperature and altitude are
shown as follows.
Ambient temperature (operation) : 0 to +55 °C, -20 to +70 °C Altitude : 2000 m or lower
I/O modules Derating
with suffix code -S4 or -S5 - 0.5 ºC / 100 m
70 ºC 70 ºC
65 ºC 65 ºC
55 ºC 55 ºC
Ambient Ambient
Temp. I/O modules Temp. I/O modules
( Operation ) with suffix code -S0,-S1 ( Operation ) marked up on the table
（-20~70℃)
Altitude Altitude
0 ºC 0 ºC
I/O modules
with suffix code -S4,-S5
-20 ºC -20 ºC
-40 ºC -40 ºC
2000 m 3000 m 2000 m 3000 m
F19E.ai
All the I/O Modules Operation Range Marked I/O Modules Operation Range
Figure Suffix code vs Ambient Temperature and Altitude of I/O modules

l Pulse Input Module with extend temp. option (NFAP135-S4, -S5)’s Ambient
Temperature and Installation Requirement depend on Input Mode
There are some conditions depending on using Input mode and ambient temperature.
Table Input Mode, Ambient Temp. (operating) and Installation Requirement of NFAP135-S4, -S5
Ambient Temp. Range
Input Mode (*1) Range type Installation Requirement
(at 2000 m)
(*2)
-40 to +70 °C 1 Ensure space on both side (*3)
Voltage pulse
-40 to +55 °C 3 No restriction
-40 to +65 °C 2 Ensure space on both side(*3)
Dry contact pulse
with 200Ω -40 to +65 °C 2 Ensure space on both side (*3)
2-wire transmitter shunt resistance -40 to +55 °C 3 No restriction
current pulse
(4 to 20 mA) with 500Ω Ensure space on one side
-40 to +55 °C 3
shunt resistance Or use within 4 points or less
-40 to +65 °C 2 Ensure space on both side(*3)
3-wire transmitter voltage pulse
*1: Refer to “Pulse Input Module” in A1.6.1 Analog I/O Module (Specification) for details.
*2: See Figure Ambient Temperature Range of NFAP135-S4, -S5
*3: See Figure Installation Examples of NFAP135
Derating
Type 1: -40 to +70 °C @ 2000 m
- 0.5 °C / 100 m
70 ºC
65 ºC
Type 2: -40 to +65 °C @ 2000 m
55 ºC
Ambient
Temp.
Type 3: -40 to +55 °C @ 2000 m
( Operation )
Altitude
0 °C
-40 °C
2000 m 3000 m
A020602E.ai
Figure Ambient Temperature Range of NFAP135-S4, -S5

Vacant Slot
Vacant Slot
Vacant Slot
NFAP135
NFAP135
PWM
PWM
CPU
CPU
IOM
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 Slot 1 2 3 4 5
A020603E.ai
Figure Installation Examples of using NFAP135

l FCN-RTU Vibration Criteria
Ensure that if the frequency of vibration at the installation location is 58 Hz or less, the total am-
plitude is maintained less than 0.15 mm. If the vibration frequency is greater than 58 Hz, find a
location that will meet the following condition:
Acceleration (m/s2) = 2�2 x A x F2 x 10-3 < 9.8 (=1G)
where
F: Frequency (Hz)
mm
0.2
0.15
Total amplitude
0.1
Allowable range
0.05
0
10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150Hz
Vibration frequency
A020604E.ai
l Radio Device Noise to FCN-RTU

The following shows general requirements when using a radio device such as transceivers; how-
ever, as a general rule, close the cabinet door when using a radio device:
IMPORTANT
When using the NFCP050/NFLP121, mount ferrite cores as shown below in order to meet the
EMC standards.
• NFCP050 (CPU module) : Mount two ferrite cores “A1193MN” to Ethernet cable of the
NFCP050 side.
• NFLP121 (PROFIBUS-DP Communication module) : Mount one ferrite core “A1193MN” to
PROFIBUS-DP cable of the NFLP121 side.

A2.7 FCN-RTU Power Supply Equipment

Proper power equipment must be used for stable system operation. This section de-
scribes the following:
• Power supply system
• Power supply specifications
• Field power supply specifications
• Grounding
A2.7.1 Power Supply System

This section describes the power supply system for an FCN-RTU.
l System Separation
Power supply system for FCN-RTU should be separated from other systems. For example, the
power supply system for the I/O signal circuit should be isolated by an insulation transformer.
l Installation of Breakers, Switches, etc.

Power supply module of FCN-RTU (NFPW444, NFPW426) has no switch. An external breaker
or an external switch should be installed for maintenance and safety.
IMPORTANT
To make the power supply system for FCN-RTU conform to the safety standards, use a breaker
or a switch that conforms to the safety standards.

A2.7.2 Supplied Power Source

The following items must be considered for stable FCN-RTU operation.
l Inrush Current
An input current much larger than normal will flow when the power supply is turned on. Refer
to the specification of the power supply module for inrush currents to the power supply module.
Make sure that the supplied power and protection devices can withstand this inrush current.
TIP
The peak values and waveforms of the current are affected by the impedance of the input system. These change
depending on the system structure (when comprised of multiple devices) and the power supply line condition.
Generally, the inrush current when the system is comprised of multiple devices will be less than the total sum of
the inrush current of each device.
l Power Consumption Guidelines

Table Current Consumption of NFCP050 (without analog field power supply for built-in AO)
NETWORK
(Ethernet)
not used used
SERIAL+ not used 0.26 A 0.39 A
DI/O+AI/O (built-in I/Os:
DI, DO, AI, AO, PI) used 0.35 A 0.48 A
l Output Capacity
The output capacity of the power supply device is determine by calculating the maximum electric
power of the system, but the peak value of the current will be 2 to 5 times more of the effective
value. The effects and inrush current by this current waveform, as well as excess for future de-
vice expansion must be carefully considered.
l Power Consumption Calculation

Refer to the power supply module specification for the maximum value of the power consump-
tion. Take consideration of the expansion and changes of devices. In general, the maximum
value should be used.
The actual power consumption varies depending on what modules are installed and how many.
Estimating modules that can be installed and operate
• The maximum current consumption of a unit at 5 V DC (IMAX@5VDC) and at 24 V DC (IMAX@24VDC)
can be obtained by the following equations respectively:
IMAX@5VDC = IBASE@5VDC + ICPU@5VDC + II/O@5VDC
IMAX@24VDC = II/O@24VDC
(Base module and CPU module make no current consumption at 24 V DC)
where
IBASE = current consumption of the base module (NFBU050 or NFBU200)
ICPU (*1) = current consumption of the CPU module (NFCP050)
II/O = current consumption of the additional input/output modules installed
*1: Current consumption of NFCP050 (without analog field power supply for built-in AO) in the table shown above
• Total power consumption must meet the specification of the power supply module.

Estimating power that is supplied to the unit
• The power consumption of a unit, Q (W), can then be obtained by the following equation:
Q = (5.1 × IMAX@5VDC + 24 × IMAX@24VDC) / 0.8
l Example
Estimating power consumption for an unit consisting of NFPW426, NFBU050, NFCP050 (us-
ing all serial ports, the active network interface and all built-in I/Os), NFAI841, NFDV151 and
NFDV551.
• Power consumption at 5 V DC, Q@5VDC (W), can be obtained by the following equation:
Q@5VDC = 5.1 × (INFBU050 + INFCP050 + INFAI841@5VDC + INFDV151 + INFDV551 ) = 10.3
where
INFBU050 = 0.025 (A)
INFCP050 = 0.48 (A)
INFAI841@5VDC = 0.3 (A)
INFDV151 = 0.5 (A)
INFDV551 = 0.7 (A)
• Power consumption at 24 V DC, Q@24VDC (W), can be obtained by the following equation:
Q@24VDC = 24 × INFAI841@24VDC = 12
where
INFAI841@24VDC = 0.5 (A)
• As the maximum allowable power of NFPW426 at 5 V DC is 12 W and the maximum power
at 24 V DC is 13 W, the system of configuration shown above can be operated.
Estimating power that is supplied to unit
• The power that is to be supplied to power supply module, Q (W), can be obtained by the fol-
lowing equation:
Q = (10.3 + 12) / 0.8 = 27.9
thus
Regular current consumption at 12 V DC input = 2.4 (A)
Regular current consumption at 24 V DC input = 1.2 (A)
WARNING

A2.7.3 Field Power Supply

Field power supply is 24V DC power that is required for the interface circuit of field sig-
nals on I/O modules. It is necessary to supply field power separately from system power
supply.
NFPW426 supports 24 V DC output for Analog I/O modules.
The following I/O modules require field power supply.
l Analog I/O Module

• NFAI141 Current input, 16 points, non-isolated (*1)
• NFAI143 Current input, 16 points, isolated
• NFAI135 Current input, 8 points, isolated channels
• NFAI841 Current I/O, 8/8 points, non-isolated
• NFAB841 Voltage input/current output, 8/8 points, non-isolated
• NFAI543 Current output, 16 points, isolated
• NFAI835 Current input/current output, 4/4 points, isolated channels
• NFAP135 Pulse input, 8 points
*1: When this I/O module is used with 2-wire transmitter, field power supply is required.
l Digital Output Module

IMPORTANT
Analog I/O modules and digital I/O modules require different field power supply systems.

Power
supply Base module
module
Field power supply (for analog I/O module, 24V DC)
System power supply (5V DC)

Power Circuit
input for
power
generation
12/24 V DC
CPU Digital Analog
module output I/O
NFPW426 built-in AO module module
Field power supply

Field Power
power supply Base module
input module Field power supply (for analog I/O module, 24V DC)
24V DC for
analog I/O
module System power supply (5V DC)
Power Circuit
input for
power
24V DC
generation
CPU Digital Analog
module output I/O
NFPW444 built-in AO module module
Field power supply

A020701E.ai
Figure Field Power Supply and System Power Supply
n Field Power Supply for Analog I/O Modules

Field power for analog I/O modules is supplied to each analog I/O module via base modules.
n Field Power Supply for Digital Output Modules

Field power supply for digital output modules is supplied field power directly to each terminal of
the module. Supply the appropriate power by calculating the 24V DC current consumption based
on the specification of each module.
TIP
Power is supplied by using different power supply systems between analog system and digital system to avoid
interferences such as noises. When every 16 points are isolated among digital output signals, the power supply
must also be isolated.

A2.7.4 Grounding for FCN-RTU

When an FCN-RTU is installed in a cabinet, instrument panel, or the like, it is functionally
insulated by a DIN rail attachment. To maintain this insulation, the following instructions
must be followed.
• Ground the FCN-RTU separately from the grounding of other devices, motor control
circuits, and electric control circuits.
• Perform the grounding which is defined by the rules and standards of the country or
the region on the FG terminal of the base module.
• Perform the grounding which is defined by the rules and standards of the country or
the region on the G terminal of the power supply module (line filter grounding).
• Perform the grounding of the base module and the power supply module at one
point.
SEE
ALSO For the specification of the grounding wire, see A2.9.2, “Wiring the Ground.”
Base module
FG
Short bar
Analog field power supply 24 V

System power supply 5 V
SG
Circuit
FG
Digital I/O (DO)
Digital I/O (DI)

Analog I/O
NFCP050
Circuit Circuit
NFPW4**
Analog
Analog
Output
Output
Digital
Digital
Pulse
Input
Input
Input
Circuit
Enable
I/F I/F
Grounding bar
Rack
Cabinet
+
-
LOAD
LOAD
Battery or Battery monitoring

external DC input
power supply
Voltage Power Current Pulse Pushbutton Field power Field power Field power
The grounding which is defined by the rules Field device
output supply input output switch supply for supply for supply for
and standards of the country or the region.
device for device device digital digital digital input
analog output output
output
A020702E.ai
*1: Install base module NFBU050 in the cabinet insulating the panel or the DIN rail from the rack using insulation bushings.
Figure Grounding for FCN-RTU (NFBU050)

Base module
FG
Field power supplyfor

analog I/O module (24V DC)
System power supply
( 5V DC)
SG
Digital I/O (DI) (*2)

FG
(*2)
Digital I/O (DO)

NFPW444
NFPW444
NFCP050 (*1)
Analog I/O
Analog I/O
Analog I/O
Circuit Circuit
NFCP100
Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit
I/F I/F
Grounding bar
Power supply
Power supply
AC/DC
AC/DC
Cabinet
AC L
LOAD
N
The grounding which is defined by the rules

and standards of the country or the region. Field device Field power supply Field power supply
for digital output for digital input
*1: For more detail of NFCP050, see figure grounding for FCN-RTU (NFBU050)
*2: Base module NFBU200 has up to eight I/O modules on it.
A020703E.ai
Figure Grounding for FCN-RTU (NFBU200)

A2.8 Installation and Attachment

This section describes the installation procedures, attachment procedures, and precau-
tions for each module when attaching FCN-RTU to cabinets, control panels, etc.
1. Installing the base module
2. Installing other modules

A2.8.1 Installing the Base Module

FCN-RTU is designed to be attached to 19-inch racks, DIN rails, and general-purpose
control panels. Note the following when installing an FCN-RTU to cabinets, and control
panels, etc.
SEE
ALSO For the Installing the base module, refer to A1.15.1 “Installing the Base Module” in this document.
n Installation Direction
FCN-RTU is designed to be cooled by natural air. Install an FCN-RTU so that the ventilation air
flows upward from its bottom to its top as shown below.
Up
100 mm or Air flow

more
100 mm or
Air flow
more
Down
A020801E.ai
Figure Installing FCN-RTU Base Module
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to turn off the power before installing or removing FCN-RTU base module.
• To prevent the cooling air current from being blocked, be sure to place the unit at least 100
mm away from other devices.
• All access to FCN-RTU is performed from the front. Secure a space between 100 and
150 mm from the front panel of the unit to the cabinet door to provide enough space for the
cables. (The bending radius will differ depending on the material of the cable. Verify the
specification of the wire.)

A2.8.2 Installing Other Modules on to the Base Module

This section describes the procedure for installing the power supply , CPU, and I/O mod-
ules onto a base module.
n Installation Position of Each Module

The following describes the positioning of the modules during installation to the base module.
Slot numbers Slot numbers
P1 P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P 1 2 3 4 5
A020804E.ai
A020805E.ai
Figure Module Slot Numbers (NFBU200) Figure Module Slot Numbers (NFBU050)
Table Installation Position Allowed for Each Module in FCN-RTU with Single Power Supply (NFBU200)
Power supply module P1 or P2 Normally installed into P2.
CPU module Slot1 - 2 Occupies 2 slots per module.
Table Installation Position Allowed for Each Module in FCN-RTU with Duplex Power Supply (NFBU200)
Power supply module P1 and P2 -
CPU module Slot1 - 2, Occupies 2 slots per module.
Table Installation Position Allowed for Each Module in FCN-RTU (NFBU050)

Power supply module P -
CPU module Slot1 - 2 Occupies 2 slots per module.
*1: Some I/O modules have limits for the installation. See the next page for details.

n Installing Modules
The following describes installation and removal procedures of modules to the base module.
A020806E.ai
Figure Attaching Modules to the Base Module
l Installation Procedures
1. Attach the module to the base module using screws.
2. Use a torque of approximately 0.5 Nm for the tightening torque of the screws.
3. Attach the external connection cables and terminal block.
l Removal Procedures
1. Remove the external connection cables and terminal block.
2. Remove the screws that hold the module.
3. Pull out the module forward from the Base unit.
IMPORTANT
Install I/O Module Dummy Covers (Model name: NFDCV01) on open I/O module slots.

A2.9 Wiring
IMPORTANT
Cables with the temperature rating of an ambient temperature plus 10 degrees Celsius or more
must be used.

A2.9.1 Power Supply Wiring

The following describes the power supply wiring for a power supply module that has fin-
ished being installed.
l Wiring Specification and Terminal Preparation

For the wire terminals, use crimp-on terminal lugs with insulation sleeve. Be sure to use ring
tongue terminal and crimping tools of the same brand.
l Applicable Cables
l Recommend Sizes
0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG 20 to 14)
Use ring tongue terminal for M4 terminals, with the outer diameter of the lug tip (outer terminal
Insulation sleeve
internal diameter
Hole diameter
A020901E.ai

diameter length
(mm) (mm)
(mm2) (mm)
0.5 to 1.65
(AWG 20 to 16)
1.04 to 2.63 (AWG
16 to 14)

n Connecting Power Supply

Follow the procedures below to connect the power supply cable.
1. Detach the protective cover for the terminals on the power supply module as follows:
• Push the locking tab (circled area in figure) up to unlock it.
• Pull gently to remove the cover.
2. Connect the power cable to the terminals labeled 4 (+) and 5 (-). If field power supply is
necessary, connect a cable to terminals according to the silk screen-printed diagram labeled
FLD ENA. Tighten the terminal screws (Phillips head M4) at a torque of 1.2 Nm.
3. Connect the grounding cable to the terminal labeled 3 ( ).
4. Replace the protective cover on the power supply connection terminal after wiring is com-
plete.
IMPORTANT
• It is recommended to install a switch or circuit breaker on the power wiring so that the power
can be turned on and off individually during maintenance.
• It is also recommended to install a noise filter to improve power supply quality.
A020902E.ai
Figure Locking Tab of Protective Terminal Cover

A2.9.2 Wiring the Ground

Grounding must be applied to the grounding system which is defined by the rules and
standards of the country or the region.
IMPORTANT
Ground only the specified, dedicated grounding terminal.
FCN-RTU needs to be grounded to prevent electric shocks and effects of foreign noise.
l Applicable Cables
l Recommend Sizes
2 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 14 to 13)
Round crimping terminal M4: External dimensions must be within 8.5 mm with insulation covers.
l Cable Connection
Connect the ground cable to the FG terminal (M4 screws) on the bottom left of the base module.
Secure the M4 screws at a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm.
Connect the ground

cable to the unit
A020903E.ai
Figure Grounding FCN-RTU Base Module
IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition :Apr. 28, 2016-00

A2.9.3 Connecting the Signal Cable

SEE
ALSO For details, see A1.16.3, “Connecting the Signal Cable.”

The signal cable can be connected in the following ways:
n Network
Connect the network cable to the connector in the front of the CPU module. Use cables that com-
ply with the 100BASE-TX standard.
IMPORTANT
When not using the Network Interface, leave the connector cover for dust protection on to pre-
vent any damage to the connector.
n RS-232 Communication Cable of CPU Module
l Cable Connection
If the RS-232 communication ports of the CPU module are used, prepare the RJ45 connector
cables.
SEE
ALSO For the pin assignments, refer to the table “Pin Assignments of SERIAL Port (RS-232)” and the figure “Front View
of RJ45 Connector (RS-232)” in “A2.4 CPU Module (NFCP050).”
n RS-422/RS-485 Communication Cable of CPU Module
l Cable Connection
If the RS-422/RS-485 communication port of the CPU module is used, prepare the RJ45 connec-
tor cables.
SEE
ALSO For the pin assignments, refer to the table “Pin Assignments of SERIAL Port (RS-422/RS-485)” and the figure
“Front View of RJ45 Connector (RS-422/RS-485)” in “A2.4 CPU Module (NFCP050).”

<A3. Autonomous Controller FCJ> A3-1
A3. Autonomous Controller FCJ

This section describes the hardware of the Autonomous Controller FCJ.
The FCJ is an all-in-one type controller that has an internal I/O interface installed in the
unit.
A3.1 Structure and Names of Each Component

Unit
n Front
Operation status display LED
HRDY
RDY
CTRL
Analog input Analog output pressure clamp terminal

pressure clamp
terminal
Pressure clamp terminals

for Foundation Fieldbus
HRDY networks
RDY
CTRL
Digital input pressure clamp terminal Digital output pressure clamp terminal
A030101E.ai
Figure FCJ (Front)
IM 34P02Q01-01E 13th Edition : Feb.06,2009-00

n Right
System card Reset switch
RESET
SYSTEM Shutdown switch
Serial port 2 CARD
SERIAL
2
SHUT
DOWN Control network interface 2
Control network interface 1

Serial port 1 NETWORK RJ45 Modular Connector
1 2
Communication Status LED
LINK
1
ACT
Pressure clamp terminal for

Power Supply
A030102E.ai
Figure FCJ (Side)
n Specification
l General
Table FCJ Specification (General)
Item Specification
Model NFJT100-S10 NFJT100-H10
Power supply 24 V DC ±10%
Current dissipation 800 mA 1000 mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) 213.8 x 156 x 95 mm
AI 6
AO 2
DI 16
DO 16
Control network Ethernet (duplexed configuration possible)
Foundation Fieldbus Not supported. 2 ports
Mounting Panel-or DIN rail-mounted

l CPU
Table FCJ Specification (CPU)
Item Specification
Processor MMX-Pentium 166 MHz
Main 128 MB with ECC (*1)
Memory
System card 1 slot
Serial Port 2 RS-232-C ports: D-sub 9 pins, male (*3)
Communication method Full duplex
Synchronization Asynchronous
0.3, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, or
Baud rate
115.2 kbps
2 Ethernet ports: 100/10 Mbps, 100BASE-TX or
Network interface
10BASE-T, RJ45 modular jacks
RAS features Watchdog timer, temperature monitor, etc.
Battery 2700 mAH lithium battery
3 LEDs for CPU status indication,
Display
2 LEDs for LAN status indication
Switches Reset, shutdown
*2: 1 MB for S3 (Style 3) or later, 512 KB for S1 (Style 1) or S2 (Style 2).
By default factory setting, flow controls are disabled.
l Analog Input
Table FCJ Specification (Analog Input)
Item Specification
Input points 6
Input signals 1 to 5 V differential, non-isolated
Maximum absolute input voltage ± 7.5 V
Input During power-on 1 MΩ or more
resistance During power-off 340 kΩ or more
Allowable signal source resistance 500 Ω or less
± 0.3% of full scale when all DI/Os are off
Accuracy
± 0.4% of full scale when all DI/Os are on
Maximum temperature drift ± 0.01%/°C (Max)
External connections M2.5 pressure-clamp terminals
IM 34P02Q01-01E 16th Edition : Mar. 04,2011-00

l Analog Outputs
Table FCJ Specification (Analog Outputs)
Item Specification
Output points 2
Output signals 4 to 20 mA DC, non-isolated
Allowable load resistance 0 to 750
± 0.5% of full scale when all DI/Os are off
Accuracy
± 0.6% of full scale when all DI/Os are on
Temperature drift ± 0.01%/C
D/A resolution 11 bits/4-20 mA
Step response time 40 ms
• HOLD (holds the current level when the fallback action
is triggered).
Output fallback (*2)
• SETV (sets the output to the preset level when the
fallback action is triggered).
Output ripple 50 mVp-p (with 250 Ω load)
Output open detection Provided
*2: Whether to enable output fallback actions is to be selected for each module. When enabling them, select HOLD or SETV for
each channel.
l Digital Inputs
Table FCJ Specification (Digital Inputs)
Item Specification
16 voltage signals(*1), a shared common terminal for all
Input points
points
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Input “on” voltage 18 V to 26.4 V DC
Input “off” voltage 5.0 V DC or less
Input current 4.1 mA/point ± 20% (at rated voltage input)
Instantaneous allowable maximum input voltage 30 V DC
Isolation Point-to-point non-isolated, field-to-circuit isolated
Withstanding voltage Input signals-to-system: 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Minimum “on” detection time 20 ms (for pushbutton [momentary] input)
Maximum on-off cycle 25 Hz (for pushbutton [momentary] input)
Functions: Status inputs On/off status detection
Pushbutton inputs Rise/fall edge counting
*1: A voltage-free contact cannot be connected directly.

l Digital Outputs
Table FCJ Specification (Digital Outputs)
Item Specification
Output points 16, a shared common terminal for all points
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Rated external power supply (*1) 24 V DC, 50 mA
External power supply voltage range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum “on” voltage 2 V DC
Maximum output-off leak current 0.1 mA
Output type Current sink
Maximum load (*2) 100 mA/point, 26.4 V
Input signals to system isolated. (Point-to-point non-
Isolation
isolated)
Withstanding voltage Input signals-to-system: 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Output response time 3 ms or less
Functions:Status outputs On/off status outputs
HOLD: Holds the current states when the fallback
action is triggered.
Output fallback (*3) (*4) OFF: Resets all the output channels to off when the
fallback action is triggered.
*1: Needs an external 24 V DC power supply.
*3: Fallback detection time is 4 seconds.
l Foundation Fieldbus Communication

Item Specification
Interface Foundation Fieldbus (Low speed Voltage Mode)
Number of FCJ ports 2 ports/FCJ
Number of Fieldbus function blocks Up to 50 blocks per FCJ (*1)
I/O points 48 points/port
Maximum number of fieldbus device 16 units/port
Transmission speed 31.25 kbps
Function LAS(Link Active Scheduler) function
Bus connections (external connections) Pressure-clamp terminals (*2)
LED indicator -
Surge absorver -
Terminator - (*3)
*1: The total number of Fieldbus function blocks when all parts of FCJ be used.
*2: The power supply for the fieldbus must be prepared separately.
*3: The terminators for both ends must be prepared separately.

n Terminals/LED/Switches
l Terminals
2 RD Receiving data
5 SG Signal ground
6 DR Data set ready
9 - Not used
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
Table Network Port (RJ45 Type Modular Jack)

4 Not used -
5 Not used -
7 Not used -
8 Not used -
IM 34P02Q01-01E 17th Edition : Jun. 29,2012-00

l LEDs
SEE
ALSO The displays of the operation status display LEDs are different depending on the status, such as during startup.
For details on the CPU operation status display LEDs, see B1.5, “Operation Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous
Controllers.”
Table RJ45 Module Connector LEDs

ACT Orange Lights when the transmission/reception is on.
l Reset Switch
This switch is used to restart the CPU.
l Shutdown Switch
This switch is used to terminate the CPU operation safely.
l FCN/FCJ System Card

This is used to install FCN/FCJ system cards.
SEE
ALSO For details on FCN/FCJ system cards, see A1.4.1, “FCN/FCJ System Card.”
IMPORTANT
Turn on the power of the FCN/FCJ after installing the FCN/FCJ system card.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 14th Edition : Aug.28,2009-00

A3.2 Installation
This section describes the installation of an FCJ. Perform FCJ installation following the
steps below.
1. FCJ Installation
2. Install grounding cable and power supply cable
3. Connect signal cables
A3.2.1 FCJ Installation Specifications

The conditions of the installation location must be appropriate for stable operation of the
system. The table below shows the conditions required for installation location (and some
conditions for transportation and storage) of an FCJ.
Table FCJ Installation Environment Specifications

Item Specification Related standard
Operation 0 ° to 60 °C(*1)
Ambient
temperature Transportation/
-40 ° to 85 °C(*2)
storage
Operation 5 to 95% RH (no condensation)
Ambient humidity Transportation/
5 to 95% RH (no condensation)
storage
Operation Within ± 10 °C/h JEIDA29 class B
Rate of change in
temperature Transportation/
Within ± 20 °C/h
storage
Dust 0.3 mg/m3 Grounding bus
Protection class IP20 IEC529
ANSI/ISA S71.04, Class G2 (standard)
Resistance to corrosive gases ANSI/ISA S71.04
(ANSI/ISA S71.04, Class G3, option)
0.15 mm P-P (5 to 58 Hz)
Resistance to vibration IEC68-2-6
1 G (58 to 150 Hz)
15 G, 11 ms (during power-off, for sine half-
Resistance to shock IEC68-2-27
waves in XYZ-directions)
Altitude 2000 m or less
Magnetic field 30 A/m (AC) or less, 400 A/m (DC) or less
Noise
Electrostatic 4 kV or less contact discharge, 8 kV or less
discharge aerial discharge
Apply the grounding system which is defined
Grounding by the rules and standards of the country or
the region.
Installation Panel installation, Din rail installation
*1: When only one port is used for the control network; 0° to 55°C when both ports are used for the control network.
*2: The time may be lost if the temperature falls below -10°C.

IMPORTANT
hinder the air-cooling capabilities of the unit. When installing the FCJ in a cabinet, note that
the temperature specification is not in respect to the ambient temperature of the cabinet.
• Avoid exposing the FCJ to direct sunlight.
and ammonia.
• For vibration at the installation location, see also “FCJ Vibration Criteria” within this Chapter.
• For radio device noise to the FCJ, see “Radio Device Noise to FCJ” within this Chapter.
n FCJ Vibration Criteria

Ensure that if the frequency of vibration at the installation location is 58 Hz or less, the total
amplitude is maintained less than 0.15 mm. If the vibration frequency is greater than 58 Hz, find a
location that will meet the following condition:
Acceleration (m/s2) = 2π2 x A x F 2 3 10-3 < 9.8 (=1G)
where
F: Frequency (Hz)
mm
0.2
0.15
Total amplitude
0.1
Allowable range
0.05
0
10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150Hz
Vibration frequency
A030202E.ai

n Radio Device Noise to the FCJ

The following shows general requirements when using a radio device such as transceivers;
however, as a general rule, close the cabinet door when using a radio device:

A3.3 FCJ Power Supply and Grounding

Proper power equipment requirements must be met for stable system operation.
A3.3.1 FCJ Power Supply

Power is supplied to the pressure clamp terminal on the right side of the unit. Connect power
supply that meets the specification requirements to the specified pressure clamp terminals on the
right side of the FCJ.
l Inrush Current
An input current much larger than normal will flow when the power supply is turned on. Refer
to the specification of Inrush Current (Table). Make sure that the supplied power and protection
devices can withstand this inrush current.
Table FCJ Inrush Current Specification
Item Specification Remark
Inrush current 18 A At 24 V DC
SEE
ALSO For wiring procedures for the FCJ, see A3.5, “Wiring.”
WARNING
• A power failure may break down the file system when the file is written in the FCN/FCJ
system card by the Java application. (While the control application is operating, a power
failure will not break down the FCN/FCJ system card.)
IMPORTANT
Since the FCJ has no power switch, it is recommended to install a power switch or a breaker on
the external power supply line.

A3.3.2 Power Supply for Digital Outputs

To drive digital output circuits, connect a 24 V DC power supply directly to the respective
terminals.
Table Power Supply Specifications for Digital Outputs of FCJ
Item Specification Remark
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Input voltage range 24 V DC ± 10%
Input current 25 mA (MAX) See note
Note: This indicates the maximum current consumption of FCJ’s DO circuits and does not include the external load current. The actual
current flow may differ depending on the number of DO points used. Nonetheless, this will be approximately 1.6 mA multiplied by
the number of DO points used.
A3.3.3 Grounding
For stable operation of the FCJ, stable grounding is required. As shown in “Systematic Drawing
of FCJ Power Supply/Grounding” appearing on the next page, the minus terminal of power
supply shall be grounded with the flame(functional) ground(FG) of FCJ.
In order to stably ground the FCJ, insulate the FCJ from the cabinet using insulation bushings,
together with the board or DIN rail on which the FCJ is installed. Then, ground and wire the FCJ.
Grounding must be applied to the grounding system which is defined by the rules and standards
of the country or the region.When a grounding cable is to be connected to the FCJ body, use
the FCJ-fixing screw located at the lower left of the FCJ. Do not share the FCJ ground with other
devices.
l Applicable Cables
l Wire Size
2 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 14 to 13)
l Terminal Treatment
Ring tongue terminal for M3: With insulation covers.

l Connecting a Grounding Cable
Ground the FCJ by connecting the grounding cable to the unit with the lower left corner screw
marked .
Connect the
grounding cable
to the FCJ body.
A030303E.ai
Figure Grounding the FCJ
+ FCJ
AC
-
The metal areas

AC/DC Power Supply of theFCJ
FG
Grounding bar
Cabinet
A030304E.ai
Figure Example of Power Supply and Grounding the FCJ

A3.4 Installing the FCJ

The FCJ is designed to be installed to a DIN rail or to a general-purpose control panel.
n Installation Orientation
The FCJ is designed to be cooled by natural air. Install an FCJ so that the ventilation air flows
upward from its bottom to its top as shown below.
Up
Air flow
100 mm or more
100 mm or more
Air flow
Down
A030401E.ai
Figure Installation Orientation of FCJ
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to turn off the power before installing or removing the FCJ.
• To prevent the cooling air current from being blocked, be sure to place the unit at least
100 mm away from other devices.
• Secure a space on the right side of the FCJ for installing or removing the system card.
SEE
ALSO For the size of the system card, refer to A1.4.1 “FCN/FCJ System Card” in this document.
TIP
To push the system card ejection button, use a tool which is 4 millimeters or less in diameter (such a tip is hard
enough to resist from bending).

n Panel Installation Procedures

Follow the procedures below to install the FCJ to a panel.
1. Refer to the dimension diagram and create two holes to screw tapped M4 screws to a depth
of 8 mm.
2. Install the supplied studs (quantity 2) to the panel.
3. Secure the unit at two locations using the supplied M4 screws.
4. Insulate the FCJ from the cabinet using insulation bushings, and then install the FCJ to the
cabinet.
210 mm
198 mm
156 mm
83.9mm.
A030402E.ai
Figure FCJ Panel Installation Dimension Diagram

Supplied studs
Supplied M4 screws
A030403E.ai
Figure FCJ Panel Installation
Insulation
bushings
Board
Insulation bushing
A030404E.ai
Figure Example of FCJ Mounted on Panel
n Precaution of Installing DIN Rails to Panel

There is the possibility that DIN rail may be deformed due to the controller’s weight and cable’s
tension.
Please screw DIN rail to the panel in at least two positions where attachments on the back side
(supplied DIN rail attachments) are placed.

n Installing to DIN Rails

Follow the procedures below to install the FCJ to DIN rails.
1. Snap the supplied DIN Rail Attachment to the DIN rail. (See figure below) Attach one on
each side.
2. Attach the FCJ by aligning the screws of the attachment to the installation holes on the left
and right of the FCJ unit.
3. Tighten the screws and secure the FCJ to the DIN rail.
Pay attention not to drop nuts.
Supplied DIN rail

attachment
[1] Hook the nail on the attachment
Upside [2]
to the bottom of the DIN rail.
[2] Hook the top nail by pulling the
attachment upwards.
[3] Bring it down slightly while hooking
DIN rail
both nails of the installed jig.
Downside [3]
The downside has the deeper

notch than the upside.
[1]
A030405E.ai
Figure Installing the Attachment to the DIN Rail
Insulation bushings
DIN Rail
Insulation bushing
A030406E.ai
Figure Installing the FCJ to the Attachment on the DIN Rail
WARNING
Attach the supplied DIN Rail Attachment correctly; if attached upside down, it might get out of
place.
TIP
Use a DIN rail that complies with the DIN 46277.
Install FCJ to DIN rails upright as shown above.

A030407E.ai
Figure Example of an FCJ Attached to a DIN Rail

A3.5 Wiring
This section describes the power cable and signal cable that is connected to the FCJ.
IMPORTANT
Cables with the temperature rating of an ambient temperature plus 10 degrees Celsius or more
must be used.
A3.5.1 Connection Terminals

All terminals for the power supply cable and signal cable connected to the FCJ are
pressure clamp terminals. The locations of each terminal are shown below.
Analog input terminals Analog output terminals (plus Foundation Fieldbus terminals)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1
Terminal name + 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Terminal name + - + - + - + - + - + - - + - + - + - + - + -
FBUS1+
FBUS1+
FBUS2+
FBUS2+
OUT1+
OUT2+
FBUS1-
FBUS1-
FBUS2-
FBUS2-
OUT1-
OUT2-
IN1+
IN2+
IN3+
IN4+
IN5+
IN6+
IN1-
IN2-
IN3-
IN4-
IN5-
IN6-
Signal name Signal name
Power supply
-
+
+24V
Digital input terminals Digital output terminals

Signal name IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 Not used Signal name OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 +24V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +24V
Terminal name Terminal name
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 COM COM 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Signal name IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 COM Signal name COM OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
A030501E.ai
Figure Pressure Clamp Terminals

A3.5.2 Cables for Pressure Clamp Terminals
Cable
Core wire Length of exposed wire
A030502E.ai
Figure Cable
l Applicable Cables
• Control cables (vinyl insulated vinyl sheath cable) (CVV); JIS C3401
l Recommended Cable Size for Power Cable

• Without sleeve: 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG 18 to 14)
• With sleeve: 0.75 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 18 to 16)
l Recommended Cable Size for Signal Cable

• Without sleeve: 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG 20 to 14)
• With sleeve: 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 20 to 16)
l Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals (When Not Using Sleeves)

Table Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals without Sleeve
Cable Cable Size Insulation stripping Length Remark
Signal Cable 0.5 mm to 2 mm (AWG20 to 14)
2 2
6 mm
Power Cable 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG18 to 14) 7 mm

l Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals (When Using Sleeves)
Figure Sleeve for Pressure Clamp Terminals and Applicable Cables
Sleeve with insulation cover Sleeve with no insulation cover
d1 d2 d1 d2
L2 L1
L1
A030504E.ai
Table Sleeve for Pressure Clamp Terminals and Applicable Cables (for Power Cable )
0.5 mm 2
0.75 mm 2
1.0 mm 2
7 mm 12 mm 6 mm 1.4 mm 3.0 mm H1/12 7 mm 6 mm 1.4 mm 2.5 mm H1/6
1.25 to1.5 mm2 7 mm 12 mm 6 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm H1.5/12 S 7 mm 7 mm 1.7 mm 2.8 mm H1.5/7
2 mm 2
7 mm 12 mm 6 mm 2.2 mm 4.2 mm H2.5/12 DS 7 mm 7 mm 2.2 mm 3.4 mm H2.5/7
Table Sleeve for Pressure Clamp Terminals and Applicable Cables (for Signal Cable)
0.5 mm 2
0.75 mm 2
1.0 mm2 6 mm 12 mm 6 mm 1.4 mm 3.0 mm H1/12 6 mm 6 mm 1.4 mm 2.5 mm H1/6
IMPORTANT
• Since the FCJ has no power switch, install a switch or a breaker on the external power
supply line.
• Use the same manufacturer for sleeves and tools.
• Use sleeve tools that match the wire thickness.
• Insert the wire to be connected completely into the pressure clamp terminal and attach it
securely.
• It recommended to use drivers that comply with the DIN 5264B standard (flat blade screw
driver with tip thickness 0.6 mm, axis radius 3.5 mm) when connecting cables.
• The tightening torque for the power supply cables is 0.5 Nm.
• The tightening torque for the signal cables is 0.5 Nm.
• Securely connect the cable to cable clamps, etc. so that the weight of the cable applied to
the terminal is minimized.
• Strip the cable for a length so that the core wire slightly extends from the metal tube of the
sleeve. If this causes the length of the metal tube of the sleeve to be slightly shorter than the
stripping length, this is no problem.

A3.5.3 Connecting the Power Supply

Connect the + and - wires to the supplied power supply 2-pin connector type pressure
clamp terminal (Widemuller brand: BLZ5.08/2) as shown in the figure below. Connect this
terminal section to the power supply connector on the side of the unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not reverse the + and - wires of the power supply.
-
+
A030505E.ai
Figure FCJ Power Supply Wiring

A3.5.4 Field Signal Connection

Connect the field signals by taking the following precautions.
IMPORTANT
• Always separate the power supply cables and the signal cables, and avoid running them
parallel to each other.
• It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables to prevent inductive noise for analog
I/O signals. It is effective to use twisted-pair cables with pitch that is 50 mm or less.
• The shield must be grounded on the FCJ side only. A separate grounding bar must be
used to ground the shield wire. Be sure that the grounding bar takes its ground at the same
electric level as the ground for the FCJ.
• It is recommended to use shielded cables for digital I/O signals.
l Terminal Numbers and Example of External Connections for Digital Input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 COM
1 9 2 10 16
24V DC
A030506E.ai
Figure FCJ Digital Input Terminal Numbers and External Connections
l Terminal Numbers and Example of External Connections for Digital Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +24V
COM 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 9 2 10 16
24V DC
Indicates load
A030507E.ai
Figure Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Digital Output of FCJ

l Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Analog Inputs
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
A030508E.ai
Figure Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Analog Inputs of FCJ
l Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Analog Outputs

CH 1 CH 2
1 1 2 2
+ - + -
A030509E.ai
Figure Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Analog Outputs of FCJ
l Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Foundation Feildbus

CH 1 CH 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
+ - + - + - + -
A030510E.ai
Figure Terminal Numbers and External Connections for Foundation Feildbus of FCJ

n Control Network
Connect the control network cable to the connector on the side of the FCJ module. Use cables
that comply with the 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T standard. When using the control network in
single, connect the cable to the Network Interface 1.
IMPORTANT
When not using the Network Interface 2, leave the connector cover for dust protection on to
prevent any damage to the connector.
n RS-232-C Communication Cable
l Cable Connection
If RS-232-C communication cables are connected to an FCJ, connect the cables that conform to
the respective connector types. Then, fasten the cables using screws.
IMPORTANT
FCJ’s serial ports are D-SUB 9 pins (male). Connectors are fastened using inch screw threads
(No. 4-40 UNC).

Blank Page
B-i
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ Guide
PART-B Software
IMPORTANT
• The term “FCN” refers to the module consisting type autonomous controllers..
module.
module.

Blank Page
<B1. Overview> B1-1
B1. Overview
This part of the manual describes the following details of the FCN/FCJ autonomous
controllers:
• Function
• Setup
• Engineering procedure
IMPORTANT
In this manual, the term “FCN/FCJ” refers to FCN, FCN-RTU, and FCJ autonomous controllers.
The term “FCN and FCJ” refers to FCN (excluding the FCN-RTU) and FCJ autonomous control-
lers.

<B1. Overview> B1-2
B1.1 Functional Overview

The FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers have the following features:
• The FCN autonomous controllers are modular type controllers, where CPU modules,
I/O modules, and others can be added.
• FCN-RTU autonomous controllers are modular type controllers comprising of low
power consumption CPU modules (with built-in I/Os), wide voltage range power
supply modules, and short base modules. I/O modules can be added in accordance
with the application.
• The FCJ autonomous controllers are all-in-one type controllers with a built-in I/O
interface.
• The autonomous controllers support RAS (Reliability, Availability, Serviceability,
hereinafter referred to as RAS) functions (e.g., CPU self-diagnosis, temperature
monitoring, and I/O status monitoring).
• The FCN autonomous controllers can be equipped with dual-redundant CPU, power
supply, SB bus (FCN internal communication bus on backboard) modules, and be
connected to a dual-redundant control network. On-line insertion/extraction of all the
modules is also supported.
• The CPU module of FCN-RTU autonomous controller includes a serial interface (RS-
232 and RS-422/RS-485) and I/O interface (analog I/O, digital I/O, and pulse input).
• The FCJ autonomous controllers can be connected to a dual-redundant control
network.
• The autonomous controllers support five types of control languages conforming to
the international standard IEC 61131-3 for describing engineering tasks. Using these
languages according to the purpose, it is possible to develop control applications
such as feedback control and sequence control.
• Control applications can be treated as building blocks; it is possible to efficiently
build quality systems that are highly reusable.
• Building complicated control applications is made easy by using application
portfolios, which are collections of previously designed applications organized into
convenient packages.
• It is possible to run Java applications, thereby allowing implementation of
applications such as file transfer via ftp and E-mail transmission.
With Infowell, applications such as web browsers or logging can be utilized without
programming. (FCN-100/FCN-RTU/FCJ)
• An autonomous controller can communicate with another autonomous controller or
other devices, allowing them to operate by linking.
• Versatile Data Server Software (hereinafter referred to as VDS) allows building a
system with full operation and monitoring functions.
• An FCN/FCJ OPC server for Windows can be used for accessing the data of an
autonomous controller FCN/FCJ from an OPC (OLE for Process Control) client on a
PC.

<B1. Overview> B1-3
B1.2 Configuration
This section describes various system configurations where the FCN/FCJ autonomous
controllers are included, configuration of the FCN/FCJ development environment, and
configuration of the software inside the FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers.
B1.2.1 System Configuration

The FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers are field-installed controllers; they can be used to
build a system suited for field operation. In general, three types of system configuration
are possible:
1. A system where a single FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is installed, controlling one
or more devices in the field
2. A system where multiple FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers are connected via a
control network and operate by linking (An FCN/FCJ autonomous controller can be
connected to up to 15 other FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers).
3. A system where one or more FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers operate by linking
with VDS systems, FCN/FCJ OPC server or FAST/TOOLS (up to four VDS systems,
FCN/FCJ OPC servers or FAST/TOOLS can be connected).
Moreover, an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller can be connected to a PLC (*1) via an
application portfolio.
*1: In case of FCN-RTU R2.20.01, PLC communication only supports the Modbus Communication Portfolio and the DNP3 Com-
munication Portfolio.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the network configuration of the STARDOM system, refer to “STARDOM Network
Configuration Guide (TI 34P02K25-01E).”
FCN
Field device Field device

B010201E.ai
Figure A System where a Single FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controller is Installed

<B1. Overview> B1-4
Control network (Ethernet)
Data
communication
Data Data
communication communication
FCJ FCN
Communication with up to 15 FCN/FCJ

autonomous controllers is possible
FCN
B010202E.ai
Figure A System where Multiple FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers Operate by Linking
Up to four VDS systems (, FCN/FCJ

OPC servers and FAST/TOOLS in total)
FCN FCJ
B010203E.ai
Figure A System where FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers Operate by Linking with a VDS System
General-purpose PC
OPC client
Up to four FCN/FCJ OPC servers (, VDS

FCN/FCJ OPC server
systems and FAST/TOOLS in total)
Control network
(Ethernet)
FCN/FCJ
B010217E.ai
Figure Example of the System: FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers operate linking with FCN/FCJ OPC
Servers

<B1. Overview> B1-5
SCADA Engineering PC
Ethernet
Serial
GPRS, PSTN, etc.
B010220E.ai
Figure System where FCN-RTU Controllers Operate by Linking with SCADA System

Data communication
Data communication
FCJ FCN PLC Up to 32 PLCs

B010204E.ai
Figure A System where FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers Operate by Linking with a PLC

<B1. Overview> B1-6
B1.2.2 Configuration of FCN/FCJ Development Environment

<Maintenance Tool>
• Resource Configurator
PC • Web browser for Maintenance Page
<Development Tool>
• Logic Designer
• FCN/FCJ Java Application Development Kit
FCN FCJ FCN-RTU

B010205E.ai
Figure FCN/FCJ Development Environment
An FCN/FCJ system can be developed/maintained via a general-purpose PC connected to a

control network (Ethernet). The following tools are available for the development and mainte-
nance:
• Web browser
• Logic Designer
Resource Configurator is a tool for performing the basic settings, such as IP addresses, device
labels, I/O modules, and licenses, of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers.
Maintenance Page is displayed on Web browser accessing Webserver on FCN/FCJ controllers.
Parameter such as controller Timezone can be set on Maintenance Page.
Logic Designer is a tool for creating/debugging control applications that run on a FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller. This tool allows creating a control application and downloading it to the
FCN/FCJ autonomous controller.
The FCN/FCJ Java Application Development Kit is software for development Java software ap-
plications.
These tools are used when developing FCN/FCJ systems.
SEE
ALSO See B1.4, “Development Environment Setup” for the installation procedure of the development/maintenance
tools.

<B1. Overview> B1-7
B1.2.3 FCN/FCJ Software Configuration

FCN/FCJ
Real time OS
Control Java
application application
Control Engine JavaVM
I/O driver
B010206E.ai
Figure FCN/FCJ Software Configuration
As shown above, an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller operates with the following software
configuration on its real time OS:
• Control application (created by Logic Designer)
• Control Engine (runtime environment for running the control application)
• Java application (FCN100/FCN-RTU/FCJ)
• Java Virtual Machine (runtime environment for running the Java applications)
(FCN-100/FCN-RTU/FCJ)
• I/O driver
The applications that should be created by the user are the “control application” and “Java
application.”

<B1. Overview> B1-8
B1.2.4 Hardware Configuration of FCN/FCJ CPU Modules

The hardware of CPU module within FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is configured in
basically the same way. Within CPU module, the CPU operates by accessing the memory,
various I/O modules, and the FCN/FCJ system card or on-board flash memory for FCN-
500 and FCN-RTU.
FCN-100 and FCJ employs system card to store information. System card can be inserted
into or removed from FCN-100 and FCJ autonomous controller while the power is off.
FCN-500 and FCN-RTU employs on-board flash memory to store information. On-board
flash memory can not be removed.
The stored information including:
• Real time OS/I/O driver
• Details of various settings
• Control application
• Control Engine
• Java application (FCN-100/FCN-RTU/FCJ)
• Java Virtual Machine (FCN-100/FCN-RTU/FCJ)
The memory is composed of volatile and nonvolatile memory. The information stored
in the volatile memory is cleared when the power is turned off. The nonvolatile memory
retains the information using an internal battery.
FCN/FCJ
Memory
Volatile CPU
memory
Nonvolatile
memory
FCN/FCJ system card

Various I/O or
On-board Flash Memory
B010207E.ai
Figure Hardware Configuration Overview of the CPU Module within an FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controller

<B1. Overview> B1-9
Various kinds of information are read into the volatile memory from the FCN/FCJ system card or
the On-board Flash memory FCN-500/FCN-RTU when the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is
started up, allowing individual programs to be run.
The retained data and RAS information are stored in the nonvolatile memory (this will be
explained in detail later).
FCN/FCJ
FCN/FCJ system card or
Volatile memory On-board Flash memory (FCN-RTU)
OS or OS or
Control Engine Control Engine This is hard-coded into the
Load FCN/FCJ system card, and
cannot be changed.
Control application Control application

Load This is created and downloaded
by using Logic Designer.
Setting information Information This is specified using Resource

• Network Load • Network Configurator or a Web browser.
• I/O module definition, • I/O module definition,
etc. etc.
License
This is specified using Resource
Nonvolatile memory • Basic software license Configurator.
• APPF
In case of FCN-RTU autonomous
Information controller, fixed licenses are
• Retained data pre-registered on CPU module.
• RAS information Licenses cannot be added and
registered later on.
B010208E.ai
Figure FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controller Operation at Startup

<B1. Overview> B1-10
B1.2.5 Making FCN Hardware Dual-Redundant

FCN (except FCN-RTU) autonomous controller can have dual-redundant power supply
module, CPU module, and SB bus module. When a pair of modules is made dual-
redundant, both of the modules in the pair operate in parallel; if one of them fails, the
other module can continue to perform the function. Moreover, each of the dual-redundant
modules can be replaced while the controller is in the online status.
Some examples of hardware configuration using dual-redundancy are shown below.
l Implementation Examples
A control unit is configured to be dual-redundant:
I I I I I I
OOOOOO
PWM PWM CPU CPU
MMMMMM
Unit:1
Slot: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B010209E.ai
Figure Example of Dual-Redundant Configuration of Control Unit
IMPORTANT
Hardware configuration of FCN-RTU is single only. Dual-redundant power supply modules and
CPU modules are not allowed.

One control unit and two expansion units are configured to be dual-redundant (two CPU
modules, two SB bus modules, and two power supply modules):
I I I I N N
F F
OOOO
PWM PWM CPU CPU S S
MMMM B B
Unit:1
Slot: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I I I I I I I I N N
F F
PWM PWM OOOOOOOO
S S
MMMMMMMM B B
Unit:2
Slot: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I I I I I I I I N N
F F
PWM PWM OOOOOOOO
S S
MMMMMMMM B B
Unit:3
Slot: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Abbreviation Module
CPU CPU module
IOM I/O module
NFSB SB bus repeat module
B010210E.ai
Figure Example of Dual-Redundant Configuration of Control Unit and Expansion Units

B1.2.6 FCN/FCJ Control Network

FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers can communicate with VDS systems, FCN/FCJ OPC
server for Windows, other FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers, and PLCs via a control
network. Moreover, FCN (except FCN-RTU) and FCJ Control Network can be made dual-
redundant.
The following table lists devices that FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers can connect to at
the same time.
Connection destination Maximum Connections Remarks

VDS
Total of VDSs, FCN/FCJ OPC servers
FCN/FCJ OPC server 4
and FAST/TOOLS
FAST/TOOLS
Number of FCNs/FCJs as connection
FCN/FCJ 15
destinations (*1)
Number of various PLCs such as FA-M3s
PLC 32
or MELSECs (*1)(*2)
*1: Number when assigning the destinations one channel each.
*2: Each of the following communication POUs occupies one channel.
- SD_FCXPE_OPEN (Ethernet Communication Function Block)
- SD_CMELSECE_OPEN (POU of MELSEC Communication Portfolio)
- SD_CFAM3E_OPEN (POU of FA-M3 Communication Portfolio)
- SD_CMDBSE_BC_OPEN (POU of Modbus Communication Portfolio)
IMPORTANT
When configuring the network for the STARDOM system, consider issues such as security and
performance.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the network configuration for the STARDOM system, refer to “STARDOM Network
Configuration Guide (TI 34P02K25-01E)” and “STARDOM IT Security (IM 34P02Q93-01E).”
Up to a total of four VDS systems,

FCN/FCJ OPC server and FAST/TOOLS
Up to four systems
FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
B010211E.ai
Figure Connection between FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers and VDS Systems (and/or FCN/FCJ OPC
server for Windows)
IMPORTANT
Single only one network interface is available on FCN-RTU, dual-redundant and separated con-
trol network can not be configurable.

Data communication
Data communication
FCJ
FCN
Communication with up to 15 FCN/FCJ

autonomous controllers is possible
FCN
B010212E.ai
Figure Connection between Several FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers
Data communication
Data communication
Communication with up
to 32 PLCs is possible
ML-bus
FCN or FCJ FA-M3 PLC made by
autonomous controller other manufacturer
B010213E.ai
Figure Connection between FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers and PLCs
n Making Control Network Dual-Redundant (except FCN-RTU)

Real time operation and high reliability are important requirements for a control network to
which one or more FCN and FCJ autonomous controllers and VDS systems are connected. As
a consequence, the autonomous controller thus supports functions for operating with a dual-
redundant network. By making the communication pathway between individual nodes dual-
redundant, it is possible to continue the communication by switching to the other communication
pathway immediately and automatically, in case an error occurs in one of the communication
pathways. This allows minimizing the influence of accidents on the system.
VDS
Dual-redundant control network (Ethernet)
FCJ FCJ
B010214J.ai
Figure Example of Dual-Redundant FCN and FCJ Autonomous Controller and VDS Control Network

n Two-line Control Network System (except FCN-RTU)

Two Ethernet ports are mounted on FCN and FCJ. Each port can be connected to the separate
control network, thereby traffic on each control network decreases.
In this case, however, the control network cannot be duplexed.
VDS
Control network: upper level (Ethernet)
FCN and FCJ
Control network: lower level (Ethernet)
ML-bus
FA-M3 Other manufacturer’s PLC
B010218E.ai
Figure Separated Control Network System
TIP
FCN/FCJ can not work as a router.

n Dual-Redundant and Multi-line Control Network (only FCN-500 with

NFCP502)
Four Ethernet ports are mounted on FCN-500 with CPU module NFCP502. Two Ethernet ports
supports functions for operating with a dual-redundant network. Other port can be connected to
the separate control network.
VDS
Dual-redundant control network (Ethernet)
FCN-500(NFCP502)
ML-bus
ML-bus
B010221E.ai
Figure Separated Control Network System
TIP
An application program is needed to achieve low level control network redundancy communication using port-3
and port-4.

B1.2.7 Connection to Display Unit

FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers can be connected to display units.
By using the FA-M3 emulation function of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller or the
Modbus Communication Portfolio, a display unit can be operated in the same way as with
a Yokogawa FA-M3 controller.
FCN-500
RS-232-C FCJ FCN-RTU
FCN-100
Display unit
B010216E.ai
Figure Connection between FCN/FCJ autonomous Controller and Display Unit
n Connection via FA-M3 Emulation Function

The following devices can be accessed via the FA-M3 emulation function.
Table List of Available Devices

Device type Available device
Innnn internal relay I0001 to I32767
Dnnnn data register D0001 to D32767
Bnnnnn file register B00001 to B32767
SEE
ALSO For details about the FA-M3 emulation functions of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller, see the Help function in
Logic Designer (Help → Help on FB/FU → FA-M3 Emulation (Serial Communication) Function Block).
IMPORTANT
• To use the FA-M3 emulation function, it is necessary to incorporate a control logic program
that starts the emulation function.
• The FA-M3 emulation function can be used only with serial port on FCN or FCN-RTU CPU
module or on FCJ.
It cannot be used with the serial communication modules NFLR111/NFLR121.
• When FCN (except FCN-RTU) CPU modules are configured in redandancy, serial ports on
both CPU modules cannot be used.

n Connection via Modbus Communication Portfolio

The following devices can be accessed via the Modbus Communication Portfolio.
Table List of Accessible Devices

Device type Accessible device
Coil 00001 to 09999
Input relay 10001 to 19999
Input register 30001 to 39999
Storage register 40001 to 49999
SEE
ALSO For details about the Modbus Communication Portfolio for the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller, see the Help
function in Logic Designer (Help → Modbus Communication Help).
IMPORTANT
• Using the Modbus Communication Portfolio requires an appropriate license.
• To connect to a display unit via the Modbus Communication Portfolio, it is necessary to
incorporate a control logic program that starts the slave and server functions.
• The Modbus Communication Portfolio can be used with a serial port on FCN or FCN-RTU
CPU module or on FCJ, or with the NFLR111 serial communication module.
• When FCN(except FCN-RTU) CPU modules are configured in redundancy, serial ports on
both CPU modules cannot be used.

B1.2.8 Connecting FCN/FCJ OPC Server for Windows

An FCN/FCJ OPC server for Windows is OPC server that complies with OPC (OLE for
Process Control) DA2.0. The FCN/FCJ OPC server provides data of an autonomous
controller FCN/FCJ to clients via the OPC interface.
This feature allows various kinds of SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition)
supporting OPC clients, VC++, VB or VBA to easily access data on the FCN/FCJ.
l Functional Configuration
General-purpose PC VC++ application
SCADA
VB/VBA application
OPC DA2.0
Automation Interface
OPC DA2.0 Custom Interface
FCN/FCJ OPC server for Windows
FCN-500 FCJ FCN-RTU

FCN-100
B010219E.ai
Figure Functional Configuration

B1.3 Procedure for Building Systems

An FCN/FCJ system is basically built according to the following sequence. The following
diagram also indicates the document that contains the detailed explanations of each step.
Step 1 Basic System Design

Design the system and estimate the hardware and software
requirements.
Step 2 Detailed System Design

Examine the assignment of functions and input/output interfaces
based on the system design.
See PART-A Hardware in

Step 3 Hardware Setup this manual.
Set up the hardware, including installation of the FCN/FCJ

autonomous controllers and connection of wires.
See the software setup instruction

manual for the FCN/FCJ autonomous
Step 4 Development Environment Setup controllers supplied with the
DVD-ROM.
Set up the development/maintenance tools for the FCN/FCJ
autonomous controllers on the PC.
See B1.3.1, “Initial Settings of

FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers” in
Step 5 Initial Settings of FCN/FCJ this manual to get an overview of this.
See B2, See Help in Resource
Autonomous Controllers Configurator for details.
Set the necessary information for the FCN/FCJ autonomous
controllers, for instance the IP address.
See B1.3.2, “Creation of Control
Applications” in this manual for the
overview. See Help in Logic Designer
Step 6 Creation of Control Applications for the detail.
Create the necessary control applications and debug them.
See the help of the ‘FCN/FCJ Java

Application Development Kit’ for the
Step 7 Java application creation Java application developement.
Develop the Java applications and debug them.
Step 8 Tuning
Tune the system to achieve the desired performance.
Step 9 Actual Operation and Maintenance

Use the system for the actual application and maintain it
accordingly.
B010301E.ai
Figure Procedure for Building System

B1.3.1 Initial Settings of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers

Once the system design and initial settings of the hardware are completed, perform the
initial settings of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers in the system.
The initial settings of an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller can be achieved in the following
sequence.
n Step 1 Setting Network Information

When FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers are shipped from the factory, the information related
to networking (IP address and net mask) has not been set. This information must be set using
Resource Configurator before the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is used.
The following information must be set:
• IP address
• Net mask
• Subnet mask
• Gateway
• Time zone
IMPORTANT
• The time zone is set to GMT by default. Make sure to change the time zone according to the
area where the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is used.
• Please set the same subnet mask for the FCN / FCJ with PC for Resource Configurator.
Otherwise IP address can not set.
n Step 2 Reflecting the Setting

Once the network information is set, restart the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller. The FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller starts up with the new setting information.
n Step 3 Connecting to the FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controller

In Resource Configurator, specify the IP address specified above and establish a connection
to the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller. This allows performing further setting of the FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller from Resource Configurator.
n Step 4 Basic Settings with Resource Configurator

Set the following information using Resource Configurator:
• License (In case of FCN-RTU, License Setting is not necessary)
• CPU module
• I/O module
TIP
FCN-RTU licenses are bundled with CPU modules, license can not be added on FCN-RTU later on. Licenses
registered on FCN-RTU can be viewed using Resource Configurator.

n Step 5 Downloading Setting Information

Once the license (except FCN-RTU), CPU module, and I/O module settings are completed, the
setting information is downloaded to the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller.
n Step 6 Connecting via Web Browser

Specify the IP address of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller in the Web browser; it can now
connect to the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller.
It is necessary to place the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller in the maintenance status in order
to perform the settings from the Web browser. Reboot the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller in the
maintenance status.
SEE
ALSO • See B2.2, “Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers” for how to connect to the FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller via a Web browser.
• See B2.4.5, “Reboot” for how to reboot the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller in the maintenance status.
n Step 7 Setting via Web Browser

It is possible to perform various advanced settings of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller via the
Web browser.
The main items that can be set via the Web browser include:
• Host name
• IP address
• Startup of DNS client
• Time zone
• User account
IMPORTANT
Please change the user name and password of the administrator account for the security.
SEE
ALSO See B2.4, “Maintenance Menu” for more information about the settings that can be made via a Web browser.
n Step 8 Restarting in Online Status

Once the settings above are completed, restart the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller in the online
status.

B1.3.2 Creation of Control Applications

The control applications executed by FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers are created by
Logic Designer. Perform the initial settings according to the following sequence. These
settings are performed using Resource Configurator.
SEE
ALSO See the “Programming Guide” in the online help of Logic Designer for the detailed information on how to create a
control application.
n Step 1 Preparation of Control Application Development Environment

Prepare the necessary equipment for the development environment. The main equipment
includes:
• General-purpose PC
• Software media (DVD-ROM)
• License of Logic Designer
• FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
• Network environment for connecting the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller and the general-
purpose PC
Once the development environment outlined above is prepared, Logic Designer can be installed
on the general-purpose PC.
The next and subsequent steps are performed using Logic Designer.
n Step 2 Project
A control application is handled as a “project.”
The control application is developed by creating a new project and carrying out programming and
various setting tasks using Logic Designer.
A project basically consists of the following components. Create and set these components in
order to create the control application.
Table Main Components of Project
Component Summary
A logic POU is a program that the user creates using an appropriate
Logic POU
development language.
Task A task is the executable (instantiated) form of the logic POU.
A library is a collection of POUs (program organization unit) used when
Library creating a logic POU. A library can be a standard or optional package
(application portfolio), or a user created library.
A area that contains specific data is referred to as a parameter.
Parameter A parameter can be a local parameter, a global parameter, or a device
label variable.
n Step 3 Creating Tasks

Create tasks. When creating a task, specify an execution interval.
TIP
A device label variable cannot be defined if a task is not created.

n Step 4 Definition of Device Label Variables

A device label is a label assigned to each channel of an I/O module. Define a device label
parameter in order to access the corresponding device label from the control application
program.
SEE
ALSO See B1.10.1, “Device Labels and Device Label Variables” for the explanations about device labels and device
label variables.
n Step 5 Creation of Logic POU

A logic POU is created by combining POUs (program organization units). POUs are provided in
libraries.
POUs can be combined using the five types of development languages that are provided. They
can be used according to the specific purpose.
n Step 6 Task Assignment of Logic POU

Assign (instantiate) the created logic POU to tasks.
n Step 7 Compile and Download

Compile the created tasks, converting them to a format that can be downloaded to the FCN/
FCJ autonomous controller. Download the created control application to the target FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller.
n Step 8 Debug
Debug the control application so that it runs correctly.
The main methods for debugging include:
• Online display of layout and online display of values
• Setting break points
• Watch window
• Logic Analyzer
• Software wiring
n Step 9 Documentation
Print out the created control application as a document.

B1.3.3 Precautions on the Creation of Control Applications
n Common Precautions
• In the Target Setting dialog box, uncheck “The task aborts when the execution time of a task
exceeds the watch dog time”
• Recommend to set the task watchdog time to a value greater than the task interval
• Use patch POUs only for debugging
n Precautions for Duplex CPU Configurations (except FCN-RTU)

• Do not access the same global variable if a control application consists of two or more tasks.
To exchange data between multiple tasks, use the Inter-FCN/FCJ Communication Function
Block.
• Java function is not available.
• Do not use the serial ports of the CPU module.
• Specify at least one device label variable to a control task.
• For control logic, specify only cyclic tasks. Do not use system task and default task.
• Do not use the RAS Information global variable of SYSTEM Definition in control logic.
• Do not use the I/O disconnection function. When using the I/O disconnection function at the
debugging stage, use it with single CPU configuration. When APC is executed during I/O
disconnection, APC stops with error and system alarm is generated.
• Do not use patch POUs.
• Processing time for the synchronization in between the control CPU and the stand-by
CPU needs to be considered. Duplex CPU performance can be confirmed on the target
hardware.
• Do not use POUs (PAS_GETTIME and PAS_GETTIME2) that refer to the absolute time
in logic for control computations or I/O module output because the absolute time can differ
between the two CPUs. If control computations are performed with reference to the absolute
time, there may be a discrepancy between the two computation results. Use a timer function
block (TOF, TON or TP) when executing time-based processing.

B1.4 Development Environment Setup

Install the tools necessary for the development/maintenance of the FCN/FCJ autonomous
controllers on a PC. The programs are available on DVD-ROM.
In addition to the tools listed in the table below, Internet Explorer is required. Install the
Internet Explorer according to the appropriate installation procedure.
Table Tools/Packages for FCN/FCJ System Development

Tool/Package DVD-ROM name License
Resource Configurator NT203AJ Not required
Logic Designer NT203AJ Required
FCN/FCJ Simulator NT203AJ Required
PAS Portfolio NT203AJ (*1)
Other application portfolios NT205AJ (*2)
*1: The license is not required when installing software on a PC, but is required when it is run on an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
(NPAS Input/Output Data Processing POUs can be used without the license).
*2: The specification varies according to the application portfolio. Check with the corresponding specification.
These tools/programs can be installed on a PC with the following operating environment.
l Operating Environment
Table Operating Environment of Development Tools/Package Software
Item Specification
PC PC/AT compatible PC
1 GHz or higher 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64)
Windows 7 (32-bit)
CPU processor
Windows 7 (64-bit) 1 GHz or higher 64-bit (x64) processor
Memory 2 GB or more
Hard disk Hard disk Free space of 20 GB or more
Display 1024 x 768, True Color
DVD-ROM drive Used only at the installation, must run under the OS listed below.
Ethernet Must run under the OS listed below.
OS Windows 7 Professional SP1 (32-bit/64-bit)
IMPORTANT
• If Logic Designer and FCN/FCJ Simulator are installed on a PC, it is necessary to purchase
the license separately from the DVD-ROM.
• A license is not required when installing Resource Configurator on a PC.
• A license is not required when installing PAS Portfolio on a PC. However, the license is
required in order to run PAS Portfolio on an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller.

B1.4.1 Installation
When the FCN/FCJ software DVD-ROM is placed in the drive, (if the “AutoPlay” window
appears, click “Run setup.exe”) the installation menu starts automatically.
Install the required software from the installation menu.
SEE
ALSO For details, see “1. Software” in “STARDOM FCN/FCJ Installation (IM 34P02Q91-01E).”

B1.5 Operation Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous

Controllers
The operation status of a FCN/FCJ autonomous controller changes as shown in the figure
below. Each status is indicated by the LED display of the CPU module.
Power off H R C
Power off status
Power on
Reset/Reboot
Boot mode selection

(transition using the shutdown
H R C switch)
Self-diagnostic
Test Mode Status
Completed Status
(*5)
H R C H R C H R C
Maintenance mode IP address setting Online mode

selection status selection status selection status
(*1) •Transition to the loading
status if no operation
continues for three
seconds in the boot
H R C selection status.
IP address setting
status
H R C
Loading status
Control side
(*2) H R C
Control side H R C H R C Control side
(task execution)
H R C Control side H R C Standby side

(task stop)
Standby side H R C
(*4)
H R C Control side
AC running status
Load operation (task irregular stop)
completed status H R C Standby side
H R C Control side
(task execution)
H R C H R C Built-in IO
Fail (*5) H R C Control
(task stop)
side
Maintenance status Online status

H R C Control side
(task irregular stop)
(*3)
Shutdown/Reboot H R C Standby side
operation
Power off OK status H R C
Off H R C
On
Flashing (on for one second and then off for one second) CTRL
Flashing (on for 100 ms and then off for 100 ms) RDY
Flashing on Red (on for one second and then off for one second) HRDY B010501J.ai
Figure Operation Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers
*1: The status changes to the IP address setting status if the shutdown switch of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is pressed
once when the IP address has not been set or while in the boot mode selection status (three seconds) even if the IP address has
been set.
*2: Only an FCN autonomous controller with dual-redundant CPU module can go into the APC running status.
*3: The status changes to the APC running status if the “APC command” is executed.
*4: The status of the LED displays on the CPU modules on the control and standby sides do not change at once in the APC running
status. As shown in the table below, the status of the LED display on the CPU module on the standby side changes during
operations. It indicates the status of the APC processing.
*5: Only for FCN-RTU

Table CPU Module LED Display Status during APC Running Status
LED display of CPU modules

APC processing status
Control side CPU module Standby side CPU module
1. Copying a file APC running status (*1) Loading status
2. Copying the memory APC running status (*2)
*1: The control application runs continuously.
*2: The control application pauses temporarily.
l Boot Mode Selection Status

Boot mode selection has the following three statuses. If the shutdown switch is pressed during a
boot mode selection status, selection of the transition of statuses is progressive.
• Online mode selection status (default)
• IP address setting selection status
• Maintenance mode selection status
If the shutdown switch is not operated for three seconds, the selected status is activated.
However, if an IP address has not been set, the status remains in the “IP address setting
selection status.”
l Test Mode Status

This is a status notifying abnormality; for example system is not installed. This status is only
applied to FCN-RTU.
l IP Address Setting Status

This is a status where the IP address of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller can be set. Once
the IP address has been set, the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller switches to the loading status.
l Loading Status
This is a status where the information stored in the FCN/FCJ system card is loaded into the
memory.
l Load Operation Completed Status

This is a status where the loading is completed and the OS is started. Depending on the
execution mode, the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller switches to either the online or the
maintenance status.
l Online Status
This is the normal operation status (the control application and other functions can be executed).
• Task execution: This is in the state where the task is executing.
• Task stop: This is in the state stopped from loading on purpose, or the state where there is
no boot project and it has stopped.
• Task irregular stop: This is in the state where the task stopped for the exception.

l Maintenance Status
This is a status where the minimum OS functions are performed. The control application is
stopped, allowing maintenance operations such as advanced configurations and backup/
restoration of files to be carried out.
l APC Running Status

APC (All Program Copy) is a status where the information stored in the control side CPU module
is being copied to the standby side CPU module in an FCN system with dual-redundant CPU
module.
l Power Off OK Status

This is a status where it is allowed to turn the controller’s power off.
(The on/off status of the LED display on the CPU module is the same in both the power off status
and the power off OK status; check the LED of the power supply module to identify in which
status the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is in.)

B1.6 Resource Configurator

Resource Configurator is a tool that performs the basic settings of FCN/FCJ autonomous
controllers.
B1.6.1 Functional Overview of Resource Configurator

Resource Configurator mainly provides functions for performing the following settings
and displaying the following information:
l Network Setting
This function allows performing settings related to the network of the controller (IP address,
submask, default gateway).
When FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers are shipped from the factory, this information has not
been set. This information must be set using this function before the FCN/FCJ autonomous
controller is used.
l License Setting (except FCN-RTU)

This function allows registering execution licenses of the basic software of the FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller.
l CPU Module Setting

This function allows performing settings related to the CPU module. Settings related to dual-
redundancy can also be performed.
l I/O Module Setting

This function allows performing settings related to I/O modules. It is possible to acquire the
configuration of the I/O modules installed on the controller and perform settings for each I/O
module.
l RAS Information Display

This function allows displaying the RAS (Reliability, Availability, Serviceability information of the
l APC Command Transmission

This function allows enabling the standby side CPU (APC command) when the CPU module of
the FCN autonomous controller is made dual-redundant.

B1.6.2 Starting Resource Configurator

Once Resource Configurator is properly installed on a general-purpose PC, it is registered
on the Start menu of Windows.
Start Resource Configurator by selecting [All Programs] - [YOKOGAWA FCN-FCJ] -
[Resource Configurator].
SEE
ALSO See B1.4.1, “Installation” for how to install Resource Configurator.
B1.6.3 Operation of Resource Configurator

See Help of Resource Configurator for the details on functions and operations of
Resource Configurator.
B1.6.4 Resource Configuration Editor

Resource Configuration Editor is a tool for configure CPU modules and I/O modules of
the FCN/FCJ offline (in the condition not connected to the FCN/FCJ).
n Installation
When Resource Configurator is installed, Resource Configuration Editor is also installed.
n Target Files
The following files can be imported/exported by Resource Configuration Editor.
l Import Files
• Configuration files of the FCN/FCJ exported by Resource Configurator.
• Backup images of the FCN/FCJ system.
l Export Files
• XML format configuration files
• CSV format configuration files
n Working Procedure
Follow the working procedure below on Resource Configuration Editor.
l Offline Status
When Resource Configuration Editor brings itself offline, follow this sequence:
1. Create or import a configuration file
2. Modify the configuration
3. Export the configuration file

l Online Status
When Resource Configuration Editor brings itself online, follow this sequence:
4. Import a configuration file
5. Download the configuration information to the FCN/FCJ
General-purpose PC
Online status Offline status
Configuration file Resource

Resource Import Import
(XML or CSV Configuration
Configurator Export Export
format) Editor
Upload when connected
Create
rt
po
Im
Download
FCN/FCJ system
backup images
up
ck

Ba
FCN/FCJ
B010701E.ai
Figure Resource Configuration Editor and Resource Configurator
n Online Help
Resource Configuration Editor comes with online help function.
See the online help for the details of functions and operations.
IMPORTANT
Do not turn off the power to the FCN/FCJ controller while downloading of Resource Configurator.
The FCN/FCJ system card may be damaged if the power is turned off during the download
operation.
It will take up to three minutes to complete the download operation.

B1.7 Logic Designer

Logic Designer is a software package running on a general-purpose PC. It is used to
create control applications for FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers.
B1.7.1 Functional Overview

Logic Designer has the following functions:
• A control application can be created in control languages conforming to international
standard IEC 61131-3.
• Five types of languages, including function block diagram, ladder, and SFC
programming, are supported. They can be selected according to the specific
purpose.
• A control logic application can be constructed from modules (hereinafter referred to
as POU); the control application can thus be designed in a hierarchical manner.
• It supports various application portfolios, which are collections of POUs for various
control purposes.
• It provides editors for each development language.
• It is equipped with a powerful debug function.
• The user interface such as toolbars and short-cut keys can be customized.
B1.7.2 Starting Logic Designer

If Logic Designer is correctly installed on a general-purpose PC, it is registered in the
Windows start menu.
Start Logic Designer by selecting [All Programs] - [YOKOGAWA FCN-FCJ] - [Logic
Designer].
B1.7.3 Operation of Logic Designer

See the Help function in Logic Designer for detailed explanations about functions and
operations of Logic Designer.

B1.8 FCN/FCJ Simulator

FCN/FCJ Simulator is a software product that runs on a PC and simulates control
applications running on a single FCN/FCJ. FCN/FCJ Simulator facilitates the debugging of
control applications, thus improving development efficiency.
B1.8.1 Function Specifications

FCN/FCJ Simulator can be used for the following:
• FCN/FCJ control applications created with a Logic Designer can be debugged with an FCN/
FCJ Simulator.
Software wiring function can be used in simulation.
• VDS can be debugged by accessing FCN/FCJ Simulator data
• Java applications running on the FCN/FCJ in conjunction with control applications can be
debugged on a PC.
FCN/FCJ Simulator can be operated on the same PC as a Logic Designer or VDS. FCN/FCJ
Simulator can also be operated on a different PC. One FCN/FCJ can be simulated per PC.
VDS/ASTMAC
PC Logic designer
Data acquisition
Logic designer
Simulation
PC
debug debug
FCN/FCJ Simulator FCN/FCJ Simulator
F01E.ai F02E.ai
Figure FCN/FCJ Simulator (Example 1) Figure FCN/FCJ Simulator (Example 2)
VDS/ASTMAC PC
Logic designer
Da Sim
debug
ta ula
ac tio
qu n
Ethernet
isi
tio
n
FCN/FCJ Simulator
PC
F03E.ai
Figure FCN/FCJ Simulator (Example 3)

n APPFs that can be operated in FCN/FCJ Simulator:

• PAS Portfolio
• SAMA Portfolio (FCN-100, FCJ)
• General- purpose Portfolio (FCN-100, FCJ)
• Boiler Control Portfolio License (FCN-100, FCJ)
• Boiler Auxiliary Control Portfolio License (FCN-100, FCJ)
n Functions that Cannot Be Used in FCN/FCJ Simulator

FCN/FCJ Simulator does not allow you to use the following functions:
• FCN/FCJ I/O modules
FCN/FCJ IO modules always remain separated from the simulator.
• Configuration functions through a Web browser
• CPU duplication related functions
• Network duplication related functions
n POU and APPF that Cannot Be Used in FCN/FCJ Simulator

POUs for communications among POUs and FCN/FCJ Application Portfolios (hereinafter
referred to as APPF) do not execute communication with other FCN/FCJ or foreign devices in
FCN/FCJ Simulator. If it is executed in FCN/FCJ Simulator, will result in an error.
l Standard POUs (all POUs for communications) that result in errors in FCN/FCJ
Simulator are:
• FCN/FCJ Simulator inter-communications function blocks
• FA-M3 Emulator (serial) function blocks
• Ethernet communications function blocks
• RS communications function blocks
l Major APPFs that do not function on FCN/FCJ Simulator:

• FA-M3 Communication Portfolio
• MELSEC-A Communication Portfolio
• SYSMAC Communication Portfolio
• Modbus Communication Portfolio
• DNP3 Communication Portfolio
• Power Monitor Communication Portfolio
• Temperature Controller Communication Portfolio

n Others
• A Java execution environment is needed on the PC in order to execute Java applications.
FCN/FCJ Java Application Development Kit R2.10.01 or higher is needed.
• The FCN/FCJ Simulator processing speed depends on the specification of the PC. FCN/
FCJ
Simulator may provide a processing speed higher than the FCN/FCJ.
In this case, be sure to confirm the execution speed of control applications on the FCN/FCJ.

B1.8.2 Starting FCN/FCJ Simulator

If FCN/FCJ Simulator is correctly installed on a general-purpose PC, it is registered in the
Windows start menu.
Start FCN/FCJ Simulator by selecting [All Programs] - [YOKOGAWA FCN-FCJ] - [FCN/FCJ
Simulator].
B1.8.3 Operation of FCN/FCJ Simulator

See the Help function in FCN/FCJ Simulator for detailed explanations about functions and
operations of FCN/FCJ Simulator.

B1.9 FCN-RTU Ethernet Power Saving Function

B1.9.1 Ethernet Operating Status
Ethernet operation is classified into three statuses.
Table Ethernet Operating Statuses

Operating status Description
Active status • Normal operating status
• Power supply to the Ethernet controller is stopped, and power consumption for this
status is lower than for the sleep status.
Power OFF status
• Transition can be made by a user operation (NETWORK ON/OFF Switch and Control
Function Block).
The figure shows the LAN status display LED of the CPU module, and the NETWORK ON/OFF
switch for starting and stopping the Ethernet function. Also see the Status Transition Diagram.
NFCP050-S00 S1
HRDYRDY CTRL
RESET
SHUT
DOWN
SERIAL
RS-422/
4 RS-485
CN1 CN2
3 RS-232
2 RS-232
1 RS-232
NETWORK
ON/OFF
ON/OFF (DI/O) Switch
(AI/O)
LED1
LAN status
LED2
NETWORK
B010901E.ai
Figure NETWORK ON/OFF Switch and LAN Status LED
PowerON Status Auto Power off

PowerOFF Status
LED1 LED1
NETWORK ON/OFF
LED2 Switch OFF LED2
Active Power OFF

Status Status
NETWORK ON/OFF
Switch ON
ON or blink LED1: NETWORK ON/OFF

LED2: LINK & ACT status
OFF
B010902E.ai
Figure Status Transition Diagram

B1.9.2 Transition Methods

The following describes the transition to the Power OFF status and the return to the Ac-
tive status. Transition to the Power OFF status can be made by the following three user
operations.
n Transition by the NETWORK ON/OFF Switch

The Ethernet function can be switched between Start and Stop by pressing NETWORK ON/OFF
switch.
• Pressing the switch in the Power ON status stops the power supply to the Ethernet function
(Power OFF status).
• Pressing the switch in the Power OFF status enables the Ethernet function (Power ON sta-
tus).
n Transition by the LAN Control Function Block

To implement the equivalent function to switch NETWORK ON/OFF, use following function
blocks that provided in the FCN/FCJ basic function (SD_FIELD_PF).
l Operating status switching

• SD_FIELD_LANCTRL
Makes the transition from Power ON status to Power OFF status to save power.
Makes the transition from Power OFF status to Power ON status to enable communication.
l Operating status acquisition

• SD_FIELD_LANGETSTS
Operating status (Power ON status and Power OFF status)
Link status (Link up and Link down)
Auto Power OFF status, setpoint, and remaining time (*1)
*1: For more information about Auto Power OFF, see the next section.
For details, see FCN/FCJ Basic Function Blocks in the online Help.

n Transition by Auto Power OFF

If FCN-RTU autonomous controller is online and does not receive any data via Ethernet during
the specified monitoring period, FCN-RTU autonomous controller automatically transits to the
Power OFF status.
This is useful, for example, when you forget to set NETWORK OFF after temporarily using Ether-
net.
The setting is configured from “CPU module settings” in Resource Configurator. The controller
needs to be restarted after downloading the setting.
Setting content Operation
Disable Disables the Auto Power OFF function (default)
Enable Enables the Auto Power OFF function
Transition Time(min) Specifies the monitoring period (in minutes) (only available when enabled)
TIP
Supplementary Notes
1. Auto Power OFF function is only available in the online mode. This function does not work in the mainte-
nance and IP address setting modes.
2. Received data includes all frames (unicast, multicast, and broadcast). When any of the frames is received
during the monitoring period, controller does not transit to Power OFF status.
The following figure shows the Auto Power OFF operation.

When the monitoring period 3 minutes
PowerON
Status
PowerOFF
Status
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
time(min)
Receive Data
The monitoring timer is Transitions to the OFF There is no

reset as a frame is receiveing status as no frame has status transition in the
after 2 minutes and 50 been received for 3 minutes. Power Off status even
seconds have elapsed. if a frame is received.
B010903E.ai
Figure Auto Power OFF Operation

B1.9.3 Operations when Starting and Shutting Down the

System
n Operation when Starting the System

When the system is started, the status becomes Power ON. If power saving required in an envi-
ronment where Ethernet is not always used, it is recommend to enable Auto Power OFF function.
Note that when Disable is set, ethernet remains in the Active status and power is consumed,
unless setting Power OFF status using the NETWORK ON/OFF switch operation or the LAN
control function block.
n Operation when Shutting Down the System

When the system shutdown operation is performed, the Ethernet becomes the Power OFF status
and power is saved.

B1.10 I/O Processing

This section describes the concept of input/output processing for connecting the
functions of the hardware (input/output terminals) and software (control application)
along with the timing at which the input/output data is updated.
B1.10.1 Device Labels and Device Label Variables

To specify the I/O terminal channel that performs the I/O processing for an FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller, it is necessary to specify a device label and device label variables
for the I/O terminal channel. The concept of assigning device labels and device label
variables is explained below.
l Device Label
A device label is a name assigned to each physical terminal channel of an I/O module. Device
labels can be set and changed by Resource Configurator.
TIP
A device label is a character string of up to 16 characters consisting of alphabetic characters, numbers, and “_”
(underscore).
As an initial value, a preset name is assigned to a device label, which can be used as is without changing. The
initial value is as shown below:
For FCN, the name is “x_uu_ss_cc” (x: type of signal, uu: unit number, ss: slot number, cc: channel number).
For FCJ, the name is “x_d_cc” (x: type of signal, d: device type, cc: channel number).
x: type of signal (I: input signal Q: output signal)
d: device type (A: analog I/O D: digital output).
l Device Label Variables

A device label variable is a name used to refer to a logical I/O terminal channel. It is specified
when creating the control application. Device label variables are specified by Logic Designer.
l Connecting Device Labels and Device Label Variables

A device label and a device label variable that share the same name are connected. The
connection is made when the control application is executed.
Since the control application does not need to be connected to the physical I/O terminal channel
until at the execution, it is possible to develop the control application and create the I/O definition
independently of each other.

FCN/FCJ CPU module

Control logic
Control application definition
POU Device label

Set using Logic Designer variables
LBL_IN1 LBL_OUT1 Connected at the execution

Set using Resource Configurator
Device labels
Unit:1 I/O module Unit:1
Slot:1 Slot:2
Channel:1 Channel:1
Definition of
implementation
position
B011001E.ai
Figure Relationship between Device Labels and Device Label Variables

B1.10.2 Timing of I/O Data Update

Within the CPU module, the processing is synchronized with the execution of the control
application in the order shown below:
1. Data input from the I/O module
2. Execution of the control application
3. Data output to the I/O module
In an I/O module, on the other hand, the I/O processing is performed asynchronously with
the CPU module of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller. As a result, depending on the
timing, the I/O processing may be up to one sampling period out of synchronization.
For this reason, it is necessary to take the data sampling period of the I/O module into
consideration when creating a control application.
FCN/FCJ CPU module
Control application
PO U
Input data Output data
This processing
is performed
synchronously
with the control
I/O module application.
Input data Output data

The I/O module
performs I/O
processing
asynchronously
with the CPU
module.
Field device
B011002E.ai
Figure Timing of I/O Data Update

B1.10.3 Disconnecting I/O Modules

The I/O module disconnection function within a CPU module allows performing
processing after cutting the connection with an I/O module by software. This function is
used in connection with the software wiring function.
To use the I/O module disconnection function, it is necessary to manipulate the interface
flags.
SEE
ALSO See B1.13, “System Flags/Interface Flags” for the explanation about the interface flags.
TIP
To provide simulation input when the I/O module disconnection function is used, the software wiring processing
portfolio should be used to specify the value of the device label variable for the input. This is the only way to
provide simulation input.

B1.10.4 Time Synchronization Function

FCNs/FCJs enable time synchronization among equipment supporting SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol). FCN and FCJ can operate as an SNTP server or as an SNTP
client.
FCN-RTU only supports client function.
n Function Specifications
Table Time Synchronization Function
Function
Item
Server Function Client Function
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) (*1)
Communication Protocol
UDP port: 123
FCN-500: Not required (*9)
License Not required
FCN-100, FCJ: Required (*2)
Unicast Mode (*3)  
Broadcast Mode (*4) — 
Recommended: 32 connections or
Number of Connections 4 servers
less (*5)
Depend on the accuracy of the
Accuracy of Time ± 500 ms (*8)
FCN/FCJ’s internal timer (*6)
Acquisition of time from a server at
Time Compensation Method — intervals of 100 seconds (Unicast
Mode) (*7)
• FCN-RTU only supports client function.
Others • Redundant networks can also be supported.
• Redundant CPUs can also be supported.
*1: The server function and the client function can be executed simultaneously.
*2: A Time Synchronization Server Portfolio License is required. Refer to Application Portfolios for FCN/FCJ (GS 34P02P20-01E) for
details.
*3: An SNTP client periodically interrogates an SNTP server for the time.
*4: An SNTP server periodically notifies an SNTP client of the time.
*5: There is no limit to the number of clients to be connected. However, loads on FCNs/FCJs should be taken into account when
clients are connected.
*6: An SNTP client is notified of the time, which may have an error of -17.5 to +12 seconds/day in the FCN/FCJ’s internal timer. The
time of linked equipment is synchronized. Highly accurate time cannot be provided.
*7: The following adjustments are to be performed depending on time differences. (The time differences below are default values.
Time differences are configurable.)
500 ms or less: No adjustment
Less than 5 seconds:Smooth adjustments (The time is adjusted smoothly so that it does not skip.)
5 seconds or more: Immediate setting (The specified time is set immediately.)
*8: The accuracy of time varies depending on how the time compensation method is configured.
*9: The setting of SNTP server is required by Resource Configurator for FCN-500.

l Time Synchronization Function (Broadcast Mode)
The time synchronization function (broadcast mode) allows the SNTP server to periodically notify
all units in the same subnet of the current time.
Upon receiving the current time, SNTP clients perform time synchronization.
SNTP server
Current time
Ethernet
SNTP clients
B011003E.ai
Figure Time Synchronization Function (Broadcast Mode)
TIP
The broadcast mode has the following limitations:
• Time cannot be synchronized with units in different subnets.
• Since the round trip time (time required for server/client communications) cannot be taken into account,
accuracy of time may deteriorate if a low-speed communication link is used or if communication load is
high.
• It is not possible to install more than one server in the same subnet.
l Time Synchronization Function (Unicast Mode)

The time synchronization function (unicast mode) allows an SNTP client to send a request for
time to the SNTP server.
In response, the SNTP server notifies the SNTP client of the current time. Upon receiving the
current time, the SNTP client performs time synchronization.
SNTP server
Request for time Request for time
Current time
SNTP client
B011004E.ai
Figure Time Synchronization Function (Unicast Mode)
TIP
The unicast mode does not have the limitations that the broadcast mode has. In the unicast mode, therefore, the
time synchronization function can provide better accuracy.
It is recommended that the unicast mode be used for time synchronization of FCNs/FCJs.

n Time Adjustment Method

The time adjustment method of FCNs/FCJs provides the following three patterns depending on
time differences.
• No adjustment (if a time difference is 500 ms or less (*1))
• Smooth adjustment (if a time difference is 500 ms or more and less than 5 seconds (*1))
• Immediate setting (if a time difference is 5 seconds or more (*1))
*1: The above parameters for time differences are default values. These parameters are configurable.
l Smooth adjustment
The smooth adjustment allows intervals of a periodic timer to be adjusted by 0.5% for time
adjustment.
If an SNTP client is delayed, time is advanced by bringing intervals of the periodic timer forward
by 0.5%.
If the SNTP is faster, time is delayed by bringing intervals of the periodic timer backward by 0.5%.
If a parameter for time differences is a default value in smooth adjustment, time adjustment of
500 ms can be performed for 100 seconds.
l Immediate setting
If the difference between the time of the SNTP server and the time of an SNTP client is 5 seconds
or more, the time of the SNTP client is designated as the time of the SNTP server.
Thus, the time of the SNTP client will not be continuous.

B1.11 License
Licenses are required in order to develop and run applications on FCN/FCJ autonomous
controllers. Some are required for general-purpose PC, and others are required for FCN/
FCJ autonomous controllers.
n Development Environment License

The following licenses are required for the FCN/FCJ development environment:
• Logic Designer (provided as a key code)
• FCN/FCJ Simulator (provided as an ID module and a license ID)
• FCN/FCJ Java Application Development Kit (provided as a key code)
n Execution License
l FCN-500 Execution License
Licenses for FCN-500 runtime environment are bundled with CPU module.
Bundled licenses vary depending on CPU module model (suffix code). See the following table.
Table Software for FCN-500
Suffix Code of model
NFCP501/NFCP502 Specification
Software
-S□□ -W□□ (GS No. to refer to)
Standard type Extended type
FCN/FCJ Basic Software   GS 34P02Q03-01E
Software License for Duplexed Field Network Module   GS 34P02Q51-02E
PAS Portfolio -  GS 34P02P20-01E
Time Synchronization Server Portfolio   GS 34P02Q03-01E
FA-M3 Communication Portfolio   GS 34P02P20-01E
Application MELSEC Communication Portfolio   GS 34P02P20-01E

Portfolio SYSMAC Communication Portfolio   GS 34P02P20-01E
Modbus Communication Portfolio   GS 34P02P21-01E
DNP3 (Communication Portfolio)   GS 34P02P22-01E
Gas Flow Calculation Portfolio -  GS 34P02P31-01E
IMPORTANT
In case of FCN-500 autonomous controller, runtime licenses are bundled with CPU
module.
Licenses cannot be added or changed later on.

l FCN-100 and FCJ Execution License
The following licenses are required for FCN-100, FCJ:
• FCN/FCJ basic software license (requisite for FCN-100, FCJ autonomous controllers. Pro-
vided on the FCN/FCJ system card.)
• Execution license for each portfolio (NPAS Input/Output Data Processing POUs can be
used without the license): If application portfolios are used, the corresponding licenses are
required (provided as a license file).
Use Resource Configurator to set the licenses for FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers.
l FCN-RTU Execution License

Licenses for FCN-RTU runtime environment are bundled with CPU module.
Bundled licenses vary depending on CPU module model (suffix code). See the following table.
Table Software for FCN-RTU
Suffix Code of model NFCP050
-S0□ -S1□ -S2□ Specification
Software
(GS No. to refer to)
Standard Extended Flow Metering
type type type
FCN/FCJ Basic Software for Single CPU (With Java function)    GS 34P02Q01-01E
PAS Portfolio    GS 34P02P20-01E
FA-M3 Communication Portfolio  GS 34P02P20-01E
MELSEC Communication Portfolio  GS 34P02P20-01E
Modbus Communication Portfolio    GS 34P02P21-01E
Application
DNP3 (Communication Portfolio)    GS 34P02P22-01E
Portfolio
Web Application Portfolio(InfoWell) -  - GS 34P02P51-01E
Graphic Portfolio(InfoWell) -  - GS 34P02P52-01E
Logging Portfolio(InfoWell) -   GS 34P02P53-01E
Gas Flow Calculation Portfolio -   GS 34P02P31-01E
IMPORTANT
In case of FCN-RTU autonomous controller, runtime licenses are bundled with CPU
module.
Licenses cannot be added or changed later on.
SEE
ALSO See D1, “License” for an overview of the licenses.

B1.12 Messages
FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers can display messages on VDS systems if errors occur.
The following messages can be generated by FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers:
• System alarms
• System events
• Process alarms
• Process events
VDS
Display with Message

Viewer, etc.
layed
Control bus (Ethernet)

to be disp
Message
FCN/FCJ autonomous controller

B011201E.ai
Figure Messages Generated by FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers
SEE
ALSO Refer to the VDS Engineering (IM 34P02D02-01E) for the explanation about the messages.

B1.13 System Flags/Interface Flags

System flags and interface flags are software information set within an FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller, and have the following two functions in general:
• Make information within the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller available to the
surrounding equipment
Normally these flags are read only flags that indicate the operation status and RAS
information.
• Interface with functions within the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
These flags are normally read/write-enabled. The I/O disconnection switch and
retained data save switch have this function, for example.
All the system flags and interface flags are mapped to parameters (global parameters) in a
control application, accessible from functions of Logic Designer and VDS.
The logical addresses of all the flags are fixed and treated as application data.
Some of the system flags and interface flags are read only, others are read/write-enabled.
SEE
ALSO See the Help function of Logic Designer for the detailed explanations about parameter names and address
positions of the system flags and interface flags.
Table Flag Categories

Category name Attribute Address Remark
System information ReadOnly 0 to 999 Operation status of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller, etc.
Task information ReadOnly 1000 to 1999 Information related to the control application
Interface flag Read/Write 4000 to 4999 I/O disconnection flags, retained data save flags, etc.
Extended system Version information of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller,
ReadOnly 5000 to 5999
information project information (project name, date/time), etc.
6000 to 8999 RAS information (CPU and OS related)
RAS information ReadOnly
9000 to 9999 RAS information (I/O related)
• VDS
• Logic Designer
PC/AT
compatible PC
Control bus (Ethernet)
Refer/Set
FCN/FCJ
System flags/
Interface flags
Refer/Set
Control
application
B011301E.ai
Figure System Flags/Interface Flags

B1.13.1 Functions of Interface Flags

It is possible to use various functions related to the interface flags by manipulating them
from VDS and Logic Designer.
n I/O Module Disconnection Switch

This flag allows disconnecting an I/O module so that the software wiring function can be used.
If this flag is set to True, the input and output from the field device are disabled.
Table I/O Module Disconnection Switch
Initial
Parameter name Type Attribute Address Description
value
I/O module disconnection switch of
GS_NFIO_DISCONNF BOOL R/W %MX3.4000.0 0
the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
IMPORTANT
Do not set this switch to TRUE when the FCN controller has a dual-redundant CPU configuration.
Setting the switch to TRUE and starting an APC (All Program Copy) command will result in an
error. If I/O modules need to be disconnected for debugging or any other reason, change the
FCN controller to a single CPU configuration.
n Retained Data Save Switch

This switch saves the retained data resident in the memory to FCN/FCJ system card (FCN-100,
FCJ) or On-board Flash Memory (FCN-500, FCN-RTU).
If the retained data save switch is set to True, the retained data in the memory is copied to FCN/
FCJ system card (FCN-100, FCJ) or On-board Flash Memory (FCN-500, FCN-RTU). When all
the information has been copied, this switch is automatically set to False.
Set this switch to False in order to cancel the saving of the retained data.
TIP
The progress of the retained data saving operation is displayed in “GS_RETAIN_SV_PG” in percent.
Table Retained Data Save Switch

Initial
value
Retained data save switch
GS_RETAIN_SV_SW BOOL R/W %MX3.4006.0 0 TRUE: Start saving
FALSE: Cancel saving
Progress of saving retained data
GS_RETAIN_SV_PG INT R/W %MW3.4008 0
(0 to 100%)

n Retained Data Restore Switch

This switch restores the retained data saved in FCN/FCJ system card (FCN-100, FCJ) or On-
board Flash Memory (FCN-500, FCN-RTU) to the memory.
The retained data is automatically restored by the system. If the retained data is required,
the system sets the restore switch to True (the user is not permitted to manipulate this switch
directly).
If the restore switch is set to True, the retained data saved in FCN/FCJ system card (FCN-100,
FCJ) or On-board Flash Memory (FCN-500, FCN-RTU) is copied to the memory. When all the
information has been copied, the restore switch is automatically set to False.
Set this switch to False in order to cancel the restoration of the retained data.
TIP
The progress of the retained data restoration operation is displayed in “GS_RETAIN_RST_PG” in percent.
Table Retained Data Restore Switch

Initial
value
Retained data restore switch
GS_RETAIN_RST_SW BOOL R/W %MX3.4007.0 0 TRUE: Start restoration
FALSE: Cancel restoration
Progress of restoration of the re-
GS_RETAIN_RST_PG INT R/W %MW3.4010 0
tained data(0 to 100%)
n Windup Counter of PAS Portfolio
l Initial Value of PAS POU Windup Counter

The initial value of the PAS POU windup counter should be determined according to the windup
time required by the control application of the FCN/FCJ. The relation between the windup time
and the initial value of the PAS POU windup counter is as shown below:
Windup time = task scan period x the initial value of the PAS POU windup counter
If there are several tasks and the scan period varies by the task, the windup time is determined
by the scan period of the task with the longest scan period and the initial value of the PAS POU
windup counter.
TIP
Windup is the initialization processing performed from the time when a control application of an FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller starts being executed until the time when the status changes to the normal operation
status.
Since the internal parameters are not ready immediately after a task is started, the output value of the PAS POU
will not be reliable. For this reason, the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller performs the windup operation in order
to suppress the output from the PAS POU until the initialization processing of the internal parameters has been
completed.
Table Windup Counter of PAS Portfolio

Initial
value
GS_PASPOU_WUP
INT R/W %MW3.4012 30 Windup counter of PAS Portfolio
_COUNTER_INIT

B1.14 Online Help

Each tool has its own online help function.
See the online help function for the detailed explanations about functions and operations.

Blank Page
<B2. Advanced Settings Using Web Browser> B2-1
B2. Advanced Settings Using Web

Browser
Use a Web browser in order to perform advanced information settings and operations
related to FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers. This section describes the advanced
settings of FCN/FCJ autonomous controllers that can be made using a Web browser.

B2.1 Screen Organization

The FCN/FCJ autonomous controller maintenance homepage is organized as shown in
the figure below.
STARDOM FCx Maintenance Page Maintenance homepage
FCx Maintenance Menu Maintenance menu
System Setting File

Edit System Setting Files Edit system setting files
Display System Setting Files Display system setting files
Initialize System Setting Files Initialize system setting files
JEROS Basic Setting File JEROS basic setting file

User Account File User account setting file
Duolet Enviroment Setting File Duolet environment setting file
Duolet Loader Configuration File Duolet loader configuration file
E-Mail Configuration File E-mail configuration file
HOSTS File Host name setting file
DNS Setting File DNS setting file
SNTP Setting File SNTP setting file
IP Routing File IP routing setting file
PPP Setting File PPP setting file
SLIP Setting File SLIP setting file
COM1 Port Setting File COM1 port communication condition setting
COM2 Port Setting File COM2 port communication condition setting
COM3 Port Setting File COM3 port communication condition setting (*1)
COM4 Port Setting File COM4 port communication condition setting (*1)
Kernel Log Setting File Kernel log setting file
Web Files Naming File Web files naming file
MIME Type Setting File MIME type setting file
System Operation
Reboot FCX Reboot
Set Date and Time Set date and time
Save Retain Data Save Retain Data
Log File Menu Log file menu
System Log System log file
Kernel Log Kernel log file
All Files All log files
Display Resource Configuration Display resource configuration
Display CPU Status Display CPU status (*2)
Download the Backup Tools Download the backup tools
B020101E.ai
*1: The communication condition setting of the COM3 and COM4 ports is available only for FCN-RTU autonomous controllers.
*2: The CPU operating status display is not available for FCN-RTU autonomous controller.
Figure Organization of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controller Maintenance Homepage

B2.2 Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous

Controllers
Use the following procedure to connect to an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller using a
Web browser. The “Maintenance Menu” screen will be displayed in the browser when the
connection is properly established.
B2.2.1 Setting up Web Browser

Set up the Web browser.
Table Web Browser
Web browser Version
Internet Explorer 11.0
IMPORTANT
Since the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is normally connected to the local network, it is
necessary to set the Web browser so that it does not use a proxy server. See the Help function of
the Web browser for more information.
B2.2.2 Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers

Specify the following URL in the Web browser to access the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller.
http://<host name or IP address>/MNT
A user name and password of the administrator account are required in order to open the
maintenance homepage. Specify the user name and password set for the controller in question.
SEE
ALSO See B2.4, “Maintenance Menu” for more information about the administrator account.
Enter Network Password
Please type your user name and password.
Site: 192.168.1.54
Realm FCX
User Name
Password
Save this password in your password list
OK Cancel
D020202E.ai
Figure Enter Network Password Dialog Box

B2.3 Maintenance Homepage

Once the Web browser is connected to the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller, the
maintenance homepage shown below is displayed. The attributes of the FCN/FCJ
autonomous controller shown below are displayed in this page.
• Host name
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• MAC address (BUS1)
• FCN/FCJ type
• Hardware serial number
• System card serial number (only FCN-100, FCJ)
• RS422/485 Duplex (only for FCN-RTU)
• RS422/485 Termination (only for FCN-RTU)
• OS Version
• BootROM version
• JEROS version
• Memory capacity
• SRAM capacity
• Flash Memory (Total)
• Flash Memory (Free)
• Date and time
• Timezone
• Operation status (Maintenance or Online)

STARDOM FCX Maintenance page (FCX:192.168.1.54) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
Back Search Favorites History
Address http://192.168.1.54/mnt Go Links
Host name : FCX

IP Address : 192.168.1.54
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.00
MAC Address : 00-00-64-82-70-8d
TYPE : STARDOM(FCN-1)
: NFCP100-S00 S1U-H000F00-
H/W Serial No : 02BC15001M
SysCard Serial No : CD1G0001
OS Revision : R1.60.01(BuildNo 25)
BootROM Revision : R1.60.01(BuildNo 25)
JEROS Revision : JRS:R2.04.11
Main Memory(TOTAL) : 33529856 byte
SRAM(TOTAL) : 524288 byte
Flash Memory(TOTAL) : 31950848 byte
Flash Memory(FREE) : 20606976 byte
Date and Time : 2001/11/19 03:41:12

Timezone : JST::-540::
Status : Online
Done Internet
Go to the Maintenance Menu Page

B020301E.ai
Figure Maintenance Homepage (example of FCN)
STARDOM FCX Maintenance page (FCX:192.168.1.54) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
Address http://192.168.1.54/mnt Go Links
Host name : FCX

IP Address : 192.168.1.43
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
MAC Address : 00-00-64-8f-90-08
TYPE : STARDOM(FCN-RTU)
: NFCP050-S00 S1U-H000F00-
H/W Serial No : C2JJ01004H
RS422/485 Duplex : HARF
Terminator :RX:ON TX:ON
OS Revision : R2.10.01(BuildNo 73)
BootROM Revision : R2.10.01(BuildNo 73)
JEROS Revision : JRS:R2.05.01
Main Memory(TOTAL) : 67006464 byte
SRAM(TOTAL) : 1048576 byte
Flash Memory(TOTAL) : 63307776 byte
Flash Memory(FREE) : 49364992 byte
Date and Time : 2008/07/01 18:33:01

Timezone : JST::-540::
Status : Online
Done Internet
Go to the Maintenance Menu Page

B020302E.ai
Figure Maintenance Homepage (example of FCN-RTU)

B2.4 Maintenance Menu

Select Maintenance Menu in the maintenance homepage to display the Maintenance Menu
page.
FCX Maintenance page (FCX:192.168.1.54) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
Address http://192.168.1.54/MNT/mntmenu.htm Go Links
Hostname : FCX IP Address: 192.168.1.101
- System Setting File

Edit
Display
Initialize
- System Operation
Reboot
Set Date and Time
Save Retain Data
Display Log File
Display Resource Configuration Only displayed
for FCN and FCJ
Display CPU Status
Download the Backup Tools
Done Internet
B020402E.ai
Figure Maintenance Menu
The following functions can be called from this window.

Note that there are some limits on the range of operations depending on the status of the
Table Operations that can be Carried Out from Maintenance Menu

Operation status
Operation item
Maintenance status Online status
Common operations
Connecting to the WWW server  (*1) (*2)  (*1) (*2)
Starting/exiting maintenance operation
Changing the content of system setting files
Edition  (*1) –
Initialization
Displaying system setting files
Displaying system setting files  (*1)  (*3)
Displaying kernel/system log files
Setting date and time  (*1)  (*4)
Rebooting/shutting down  (*1)  (*4)
Save retain data –  (*4)
Others
Displaying I/O configuration  (*1)  (*3)
Displaying CPU status (*5)
 : Operation allowed
–: Operation prohibited
*1: It is necessary to enter a user name and password of the administrator account that have access to the /JEROS directory when
the operation is carried out if “Maintenance Security” of the JEROS basic setting file is set to “YES.”
*2: It is necessary to enter a user name and password of the administrator account that have access to the /JEROS/SYS/MNT/
HTML, where the HTML files are located, when the operation is carried out.
*3: It is necessary to enter a user name and password of the administrator account that have access to the file you want to display.
*4: It is necessary to enter a user name and password of the administrator account that have access to the /JEROS directory when
the operation is carried out.
*5: Only displayed for FCN and FCJ autonomous controllers.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 20th Edition : May 29,2015--00

IMPORTANT
To perform maintenance of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller, it is necessary to specify a user
name and password of the administrator account that have the appropriate access rights for
each operation.
The default account “stardom user” are as follows:
User name: stardom
Password: YOKOGAWA
It is dangerous to keep Administrator account and password as default. It is strongly
recommended to change them.
n Administrator Account
Accounts are defined in DUOUSERS file. For each account, one line shall be set with following
format.
<Account name>, <password>, <login directory>, <flag>
Account which has “/JEROS” as login directory, it becomes “Administrator account”. Administra-
tor account has an authority of following configuration work.
- Web maintenance page
- Resource Configurator
TIP
Password string is encrypted at file saving. Original password string is not shown when open it
again, please do not forget the password.
l Characters of the password

The password is a character string of the length within 40 character more than 8 character which
consists of ASCII character except for the space character. When establishing a password
besides this, a password doesn’t become effective, and you can’t log in by its user name and a
password.
If establishing a password within 7 character, following error message is displayed on the web
screen. Please confirm that this error has not gone out.
/duo_action/editSubmit : The length of passwords should be at least 8 characters long and
no more than 40 characters.
l Administrator account Registration

1. Register new user name and password in the maintenance mode.
Copy the line of stardom user, and rewrite the user name and the password by new user
name and new password. Don’t delete the line of stardom user yet.
2. Confirm that you can log in by new user name and new password in the online mode.
If there was incompleteness in a new password, you can’t log in to the maintenance home-
page of FCN/FCJ. Please be sure to confirm that you can log in by the new user name and
a password.
3. Delete stardom user in the maintenance mode.
4. Reboot the FCN/FCJ, it will be the online mode.

B2.4.1 System Setting Files

The system setting files of an FCN/FCJ autonomous controller are stored in FCN/FCJ system
card (FCN-100, FCJ) or On-board Flash Memory (FCN-500, FCN-RTU), and the controller
operates according to the data in these files.
It is thus possible to control the operation of the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller by editing these
files.
The system setting files can be edited and displayed. Moreover, it is possible to return them to
the factory default setting.
There are the following system setting files.
Table System Setting Files
Setting file Description
JEROS Basic Setting File Definitions related to the operation of the entire system
User Account File User registration of the FTP/WWW server functions
Duolet Environment Setting File Settings of the Duolet runtime environment
Duolet Loader Configuration File Contains Duolet loader configuration
E-Mail Configuration File Settings of the e-mail transmission/reception functions
HOSTS File Registration of IP address and host name
DNS Setting File DNS settings (only available for the Java runtime environment)
SNTP Setting File Settings of the time synchronization function
IP Routing File Network routing information
PPP Setting File PPP settings
SLIP Setting File SLIP settings
COM1 Port Setting File Settings of default communication conditions of COM1 port
COM2 Port Setting File Settings of default communication conditions of COM2 port
COM3 Port Setting File Settings of default communication conditions of COM3 port (*1)
COM4 Port Setting File Settings of default communication conditions of COM4 port (*1)
Kernel Log Setting File Log settings of the operating system
Web Files Naming File Settings of alias names for files of the WWW server
MIME Type Setting File Registration of the MIME type of files of the WWW server
*1: The communication condition setting of COM3 and COM4 ports is not available for FCN and FCJ autonomous controllers.
SEE
ALSO See the Help function of each setting screen for how to set the various system setting files.
IMPORTANT
The contents of the PPP setting file may not be displayed properly. This problem occurs because
the extension of the PPP setting file (DUOPPP.CNF) is assigned to an application called
SpeedDial by default in Windows.
This problem can be avoided by performing the following setting on the general-purpose PC
where the Web browser is started up.
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Select [Tools] - [Folder Options] from the men. Delete the “CNF” extension item from the File
Types tab.

B2.4.2 Editing System Setting Files

The system setting files can be edited in the following manner. See the Help function of each file
for the explanation of setting items and related matters.
1. Select [Edit] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Select the file you want to edit.
3. Click the [OK] button.
4. The setting file is displayed.
5. See the Help function and change the setting values.
FCX Maintenance Page (FCX13:192.168.1.13) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
Address http://fcx/MNT/MNTMENU.HTM Go
(1) Click [Edit] on the

Hostname: FCX13 IP Address: 192.168.1.13
Maintenance Menu.
Edit FCX Maintenance Page (FCX13:192.168.1.13) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
Display
Initialize
- System Operation
Reboot
Set Date and Time
Host Name: FCX13
Display Log File IP Address: 192.168.1.13 Maintenance Menu
Display Resource Configuration

(1) Select a file for editing
File Description Path

OK FCX Maintenance Page (FCX13:192.168.1.13) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
JEROS Basic Setting File Contains system basic settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUONUS.PRP
User Account File Contains user accounts for FTP and WWW servers /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOUSERS
Duolet Enviroment Setting File Contains Duolet Environment Settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/JADE.PRP
E-Mail Configuration File Contains E-mail configuration /JEROS/CONF/JADE/DEVMAIL.PRP

Done Local intranet
HOSTS File Contains IP address and hostname /JEROS/CONF/SYS/HOSTS
Host Name: FCX13 IP Address: 192.168.1.13 Back Maintenance Menu
DNS Setting File Contains DNS settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DNS.PRP
(1) Click the text area below, then the text can be edited using keyboard.
SNTP Setting File Contains SNTP settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/SNTP.PRP
File Name:/JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOMl.PRP
Contains IP routing information /JEROS/CONF/SYS/GATEWAYS
##########################################################################################
(2) Select the file you want to edit. #
PPP Setting File Contains PPP settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOPPP.CNF
# COM1 Port Setting File: DUOCOM1.PRP
COM1 Port Setting File # Contains dedault settings for COM1 port /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM1.PRP
# 2001/06/30 (c) Copyright Yokogawa Electric Corporation
COM2 Port Setting File # Contains default settings for COM2 port /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM2.PRP
##########################################################################################
/JEROS/CONF/SYS/JRLOG.PRP
Kernel Log Setting File Contains Kernel log settings
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Web Files Naming File Contains
# Example naming of web files
(PPP) /JEROS/CONF/SYS/FNAMES.TBL
#
MIME Type Setting File Contains MIME Type Settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/MIMETYPE.TBL
# Baudrate -115200
# Fifomode =YES
# InitialDTRState =ON
Absolute path:
(3) Click the [OK] button. # SendFlowControlMode =CTS
# ReceiveFlowControlMode =RTS
(2) Click [OK] button, the selected file displays.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
#--Send Data-----------------------------------------------------------------
OK
# Baudrate =nnnnn
# (nnnnn=300,1200,2400,4800,9600,14400,19200,28800,38400,57600,115200)
Maintenance Menu # Baud Rate (Default:9600bps)
# DataBitLength =n (n=7,8)
(4) Edit the file using the keyboard.
# Data Bits (Default:8bit)
Done # StopBitLength =n (n=1,2) Local intranet B030304J.ai
# Stop Bits (Default: 1bit)
(5) See the Help finction to read
explanations of the setting items. (2) Click [OK] , the modified contents are saved into FCX file.
OK CANCEL Help(japanese) Help(English) Display factory default settings
Back Maintenance Menu
Done Local intranet
(6) Click the [OK] button to

reflect the edited contents
to the controller.
B020404E.ai
Figure Procedure for Editing System Setting Files

B2.4.3 Displaying System Setting Files

It is possible to display the setting information of the currently connected FCN/FCJ autonomous
controller by displaying the system setting files.
1. Select [Display] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Select the file you want to display.
4. The setting file is displayed.

(1) Click [Display] on the
- System Setting File Maintenance Menu.
Edit
Display
Initialize

- System Operation
Reboot Address http://fcx/MNT/MNTMENU.HTM Go
Set Date and Time
Display Log File
Download theHost Name:
Backup FCX13
Tools IP Address: 192.168.1.13 Maintenance Menu
(1) Select the files to be displayed.

OK
File Description Path
JEROS Basic Setting File Contains system basic settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUONUS.PRP
User Account File Contains user accounts for FTP and WWW servers /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOUSERS
Done FCX Maintenance PageLocal(FCX13:192.168.1.13)
intranet - Microsoft Internet Explorer
Duolet Enviroment Setting File Contains Duolet Environment Settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/JADE.PRP
E-Mail Configuration File Contains E-mail configuration /JEROS/CONF/JADE/DEVMAIL.PRP
HOSTS File Contains IP address and hostnames /JEROS/CONF/SYS/HOSTS
(2) Select the file to display.
DNS Setting File Contains DNS settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DNS.PRP
SNTP Setting File Contains SNTP settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/SNTP.PRP

IIP Routing File Contains IP routing information /JEROS/CONF/SYS/GATEWAYS
PPP Setting File ===Contains PPP settings

/JEROS/CONF/SYSDUOCOM1.PRP /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOPPP.CNF
(2001/11/19 12:04:44) ===
COM1 Port Setting File Contains dedault settings for COM1 port /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM1.PRP
##########################################################################################
COM2 Port Setting File # Contains default settings for COM2 port /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM2.PRP
# COM1 Port Setting File: DUOCOM1.PRP
Kernel Log Setting File # Contains Kernel log settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/JRLOG.PRP
# 2001/06/30 (c) Copyright Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Web Files Naming File # Contains naming of web files /JEROS/CONF/SYS/FNAMES.TBL
##########################################################################################
MIME Type Setting File Contains MIME Type Settings /JEROS/CONF/SYS/MIMETYPE.TBL
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Example (PPP)
#
Absolute path: # Baudrate =115200
# Fifomode =YES
# InitialDTRState =ON
All files All files listed above
# SendFlowControlMode =CTS
# ReceiveFlowControlMode =RTS
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Click [OK] button to display the selected files.
#--Send Data-----------------------------------------------------------------
To display files in online mode, the user # names
Baudrate =nnnnn
and corresponding passwords for accessing the files are required.
# (nnnnn=300,1200,2400,4800,9600,14400,19200,28800,38400,57600,115200)
OK
# Baud Rate (Default:9600bps)
# DataBitLength =n (n=7,8)
Done Local intranet
# Data Bits (Default:8bit)
# StopBitLength =n (n=1,2)
# Stop Bits (Default: 1bit)
# Parity =xxxx (xxxx= NONE,ODD, EVEN)
(3) Click the [OK] button. # (Default :NONE)
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Baudrate =9600
DataBitLength =8
StopBitLength =1
Parity =NONE
#--Buffer------------------------------------------------------------------
# SendBufferSize =nnnnn (nnnnn= 1024 - 102400)
# Transmit Buffer Size (Default : 10240byte)
# ReceiveBufferSize =nnnnn (nnnnn= 1024 - 102400)
# Receive Buffer Size (Default : 10240byte)
# Fifomode =xxx (xxx = YES or NO)
# NS16550 Chin FTFO Enabled (Default : NO)
Done Local intranet
B020405E.ai
Figure Procedure for Displaying System Setting Files

B2.4.4 Initializing System Setting Files

It is possible to return the setting information of the currently connected FCN/FCJ autonomous
controller to the factory default setting by initializing the system setting files.
1. Select [Initialize] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Select the file you want to initialize.
4. A confirmation screen is displayed; click the [OK] button.
(1) Click [Initialize] on the
Maintenance Menu.

Edit File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
Display Address http://fcx/MNT/MNTMENU.HTM Go

Initialize
- System Operation
Reboot Host Name: FCX13 IP Address: 192.168.1.13 Maintenance Menu
Set Date and Time
(1) Select a file(or multiple files) to be initialized to factory default.
Display Log File
Download the Backup Tools File Path Update
JEROS Basic Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUONUS.PRP 2002/01/26 13:08:10
OK /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOUSERS 2001/11/19 12:04:50

User Account File
Duolet Enviroment Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/JADE.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:54
(2) Select the files to initialize E-Mail Configuration File /JEROS/CONF/JADE/DEVMAIL.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:42
(it is possible HOSTS

to select
File several files).
/JEROS/CONF/SYS/HOSTS 2001/11/19 12:04:52
Done Local intranet
DNS Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DNS.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:44
SNTP Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/SNTP.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:58
IIP Routing File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/GATEWAYS 2001/11/19 12:04:52
PPP Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOPPP.CNF 2001/11/19 12:04:48

COM1 Port Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM1.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:44
COM2 Port Setting File

Address /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM2.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:46 Go
http://fcx/MNT/MNTMENU.HTM
Kernel Log Setting File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/JRLOG.PRP 2001/11/19 12:04:56
Web Files Naming File /JEROS/CONF/SYS/FNAMES.TBL 2001/11/19 12:04:50
(3) Click the [OK] button. /JEROS/CONF/SYS/MIMETYPE.TBL

Host Name: FCX13
MIME Type Setting File 2001/11/19
IP Address: 192.168.1.13 12:04:56
Are you sure you want to reset the selected files to factory default setting?
All filesAll files listed above
STARDOM(FCN) Maintenance Page (FCX13 : 192.168.1.13) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
OK
File Editto factory
(2) Click [OK] button, the selected file(or files) are initialized View default.
Favorites Tools Help
OK Back Maintenance Menu
Maintenance Menu Done Local intranet

Done Local intranet
/duo_action/initializeConfFile : Copy(n=10) /JEROS/SYS/MNT/ORG/SYS/DUOCOM1.PRP to /JEROS/CONF/SYS/DUOCOM1.PRP completed.
/duo_action/initializeConfFile : Completed.
(4) Click the [OK] button.
Done Local intranet
B020406E.ai
Figure Procedure for Initializing System Setting Files

B2.4.5 Reboot
It is possible to reboot or shut down the controller while it is in the online or maintenance status.
Follow the procedure below to reboot the controller.
1. Select [Reboot] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Select the mode in which the controller should be rebooted.
4. The controller is rebooted in the specified mode.
The controller can be rebooted in the following modes.
Table Rebooting Modes
Rebooting mode Function
Reboot (Online Mode) (*1) The controller is rebooted and started in the online status.
Reboot (Maintenance Mode) The controller is rebooted and started in the maintenance status.
Reboot (IP Address Setting Mode) The controller is rebooted and started in the IP address setting status.
Shutdown The controller is shut down.
*1: The FCN/FCJ condition after rebooting is same by power OFF/ON.
(1) Select mode
Reboot (Online Mode)

Reboot (Maintenance Mode)
Reboot (IP Address Setting Mode)
Shutdown
OK
Maintenace Menu
Done Local intranet
B020408E.ai
Figure Reboot Menu

B2.4.6 Setting Date and Time

It is possible to set the date and time of the currently connected FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
while it is in the online or maintenance status.
Follow the procedure below to set the date and time of the controller.
1. Select [Set Date and Time] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Specify the date and time.
Hostname: FCN01 IP Address: 10.20.0.130 Maintenance Menu
Date and Time : 2001/10/31 11:46:00
(1) Edit the following date and time settings
2001 Year 10 Month 31 Date 11 Hour 46 Minute 00 Second
(2) Click [OK] button to update FCX date and time settings.
Varies with browser security settings, a dialog box may display for confirmation.
To access /duo_action/mnt in online mode, the user names and corresponding passwords are required.
OK
Rerurn to Maintenace Menu
Done Local intranet
B020409E.ai
Figure Set Date and Time
IMPORTANT
The date and time are normally set automatically for all the stations on the control network,
synchronized by the time synchronization function. It is thus not necessary to set the date and
time by this function. This function should only be used when the time synchronization function is
not used.
SEE
ALSO To use the time synchronization function, it is necessary to edit the “SNTP Setting File” included as the “system
setting file.” See “Help” in the editor of “SNTP Setting File” included as the “system setting file” for details.

B2.4.7 Saving Retain Data

It is possible to refer to the date and time when the existing retain data was saved and save the
current retain data. Saving the current retain data is possible when projects (control applications)
have already been loaded and the FCN/FCJ autonomous controller is in the online status.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for saving the retained data, see “D3. Backup/Restoration of all data (R3.30 or later).”

B2.4.8 Displaying Log Files

It is possible to display the log files of the currently connected FCN/FCJ autonomous controller
while it is in the online or maintenance status.
Follow the procedure below to display the log files of the controller.
1. Select [Display Log File] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Place check marks for the log files you want to display.
The following logs can be displayed:

• System log: A log file sent from a Java application (only FCN-100, FCN-RTU, FCJ)
• Kernel log: A log file sent from the driver, control engine, and various cassettes.
SEE
ALSO The kernel log is displayed using internal code. In order for the user to understand this, it is necessary to display it
as a VDS message.
See the Help function for the detailed explanation about the kernel log.
You may see a message that affects the control application behavior is included in the “SystemLog.”
Check the message content in the HELP, refer to C5. “Operation of the control application”
Hostname: FCX01 IP Address: 192.168.1.33 Rerurn to Maintenace Menu
Select log file:
Log File Path Date
System Log /RAMDISK/JDLOGCURTXT -------------------
Kernel Log /RAMDISK/JRLOGCURTXT 2001/06/11 09:58:46
All Files System and Kernel Log
OK Help (Japanese) Help (English)
Rerurn to Maintenace Menu
Done Local intranet
B020411E.ai
Figure Log File Menu

B2.4.9 Displaying Resource Configuration

Select [Display Resource Configuration] on the Maintenance Menu to display the screen
shown below. In this screen, the following information is displayed.
• Setting information of the CPU module
• Configuration and setting information of I/O modules
• Setting information of each channel of the I/O modules
Setting information of the CPU module
Redundancy of SBBUS YES

Retain Data Hardware Backup YES
Use of Java VM NO
LAN Redundancy NO
IP Address(Control Side Part2)
IP Address(Standby Side Part1) 0.0.0.0
IP Address(Standby Side Part2)
APC Auto Start YES
MODULE LIST
Unit Slot Module Type Signal Num of Fall Fall Back Filter Burn
Function
No No Type Channel Back Action OUT
1 1 CPU CPU - - - -
1 to 5 VDC Input for 8
1 4 NFAB841 AI+AO 8+8 YES - - -
Channels, 4 to 20 mA Output
for 8 Channels, Non-Isolated
1 5 NFDV851 ? - HOLD 2 -
Configuration information of I/O modules
CHANNEL LIST (UNIT=1 SLOT=4) Return To Module List
Channel Device Signal Parameter

No Tag Type
1 I_A_01 AI
2 I_A_02 AI
3 I_A_03 AI
4 I_A_04 AI
Done Local intranet
Setting information of each channel of the I/O modules
B020412E.ai
Figure Resource Configuration Display (example of FCN)

Setting information of FCN-RTU CPU module
General
SB-Bus Redundncy NO
Hardware Backup for Retained Data YES
Use Java Program YES
I/O Module Auto-Load YES
Network
Auto LAN Power OFF YES
Transition Time (min) 5
B020415E.ai
Figure CPUM Configuration Display in Resource Configuration (example of FCN-RTU)

B2.4.10 Displaying CPU status (only FCN-500, FCN-100, FCJ)

Select [Display CPU Status] on the Maintenance Menu to display the screen shown below. In this
screen, the following information is displayed.
• Status of the CPU
• Information of the CPU
• Setting information of All Program Copy
Address http://sdfcp42/MNT/cpustate.htm Go Links
CPU Status
Hostname: FCX IP Address: 192.168.1.42 Maintenance Menu Status of the CPU
???CPU Status
LEFT RIGHT
CPU Status CTRL STANDBY
Information of the CPU
Duplex Status DUPLEX
? CPU Information
LEFT RIGHT
TYPE NFCP100-S00- S3U-H110F01- NFCP100-S00- S3U-H110F01-
H/W Serial No 02BC15001M 02BC15002M
SysCard Serial No CD1G0001 CD1G0002 Setting information of
OS Revision R1.60.01 (BuildNo xx) R1.60.01 (BuildNo xx) All Program Copy
APC Settings
Auto Start ENABLE
APC Mode FAST
Help (Japanese) Help (English)
Maintenance Menu
Local Intranet
B020413E.ai
Figure CPU status Display

B2.4.11 Downloading Backup Tools

It is possible to download tools for backing up and restoring the system setting files of the FCN/
FCJ autonomous controller.
Follow the procedure below to download the backup tools.
1. Click [Download the Backup Tools] on the Maintenance Menu.
2. Click the [Save] button.
3. Specify the folder in which the file is to be stored and click the [OK] button.
SEE
ALSO See C1.2, “Backup and Restore Operations” for how to use the backup tools.

Blank Page
<B3. Online Download> B3-1
B3. Online Download

The Online Download Function makes it possible to change a control application without
stopping the control operation on the FCN/FCJ.
This chapter describes Online Download.
B3.1 Outline of Online Download Function

The followings show the changes covered by Online Download and changes not covered
by Online Download.
l Changes to a control application covered by Online Download

Online Download is valid in the following changes.
• Change of the logical POU (change of local variable definitions, change of code, etc.)
• Change of the physical hardware configuration (addition/deletion of configurations, addition/
deletion of resources, etc.)
• Change of resource definitions (change of device label variable definitions, change of global
variable definitions, etc.)
• Change of the user library to which the program refers
• Change of data type definitions
l Changes to a control application not covered by Online Download

Online Download is not valid in the following changes.
• Addition/deletion of tasks
• Change of the task type (CYCLIC/SYSTEM/DEFAULT)
• Change of task settings (task cycle, watchdog time, priority, stack size, SPG)
• Change of the Power Monitor Communication portfolio, Temperature Controller
Communication portfolio, and eCUBE related functions

B3.2 Operation Environment

The Online Download Function can be used in the following conditions.
l FCN/FCJ hardware environment

The following table summarizes the FCN/FCJ hardware environment.
Table FCN/FCJ hardware environment
FCN/FCJ hardware Environment
CPU single Style 1 or later
FCN-500
CPU redundant system Both module and Style 1 or later
CPU single Style 3 or later
FCN-100
CPU redundant system Both module and Style 3 or later (*1)
FCN-RTU Style 1 or later
FCJ FCJ entity Style 3 or later
*1: Online Download cannot be used when one of the two CPUs in a redundant CPU configuration is Style 2 or earlier.
l Software environment
The following table summarizes the FCN/FCJ software environment.
Table FCN/FCJ software environment
FCN/FCJ software Environment
FCN/FCJ Basic Software R2.10.01 or later
Logic Designer R2.10.01 or later
Not restricted (It is recommended to use the same revision as Logic
Resource Configurator
Designer.)
R2.10.01 or later (Note, however, that Online Download cannot be used
Application Partfolio for the Power Monitor Communication portfolio, Temperature Controller
Communication portfolio and eCUBE.)

l Control application (project) environment
The following table summarizes the control application (project) environment.
Table FCN-500 Control application (project) environment
Control application (project) (*1) Environment
PLC type IPC_40 or later (created with Logic Designer R4.01.01 or later)
Processor type FCX_B (created with Logic Designer R4.01.01 or later)
*1: A control application which was created by the former Logic Designer is able to run after rebuilding or change a resource.
Table FCN-100 and FCJ Control application (project) environment

Control application (project) Environment
PLC type IPC_40 or later (created with Logic Designer R1.70.01 or later)
Processor type FCX/FCX_A (created with Logic Designer R1.70.01 or later)
Table FCN-RTU Control application (project) environment

Control application (project) Environment
PLC type SH04_40 or later (created with Logic Designer R2.10.01 or later)
Processor type FCX/FCX_A (created with Logic Designer R2.10.01 or later)
IMPORTANT
The Online Download Function does not work on the control application created by Logic
Designer R1.60.01 or earlier.
In this case, the projects of the control application must be updated using Logic Designer
R1.70.01 or later, and must be downloaded once offline.
In case of FCN-RTU autonomous controller, the projects of the control application must be
updated using Logic Designer R2.10.01 or later. The PLC type must be changed to SH04_40
and compiled, and then downloaded offline.
For details on how to update the control application, refer to the Logic Designer Online Help.
l System message display in Online Download by VDS

System messages for the execution result of Online Download are displayed on VDS R5.30.10
or later.
IMPORTANT
When VDS/ASTMAC R5.30.01 is in use, apply the service pack to update VDS/ASTMAC to
R5.30.10 or later. To obtain the service pack, contact your local dealer, or inquire at “Contact Us”
at the following website:
http://stardom.biz

B3.3 Details of Online Download Function

The following describes Online Download compatibility for each function and changes.
n Changes to basic functions of control application

The following explains whether Online Download is possible or not for each change of the control
application by Logic Designer.
l Comments
Table Comment-related changes
Online Download
Description of Change Remark
possible/impossible
Comment in a data type definition Possible When only comments are changed
(including addition/deletion of description
Logical POU definition worksheets) and Online Download is executed,
Possible
(description worksheet) the execution of Online Download is skipped
Description of local variable (*1).
Possible
definitions
Comment in a logical POU code Possible
“Physical hardware” of project tree
Possible
(description worksheet)
Configuration node of project sheet
Possible
Resource node of project tree
Possible
Task mode of project tree
Possible
Description of global variable
Possible
definitions
Comment for device label variable
Possible
definitions
Comment for soft wiring definitions Possible
*1: The message “Download Changes is not necessary! The project has not been changed!” is displayed in the message area of
Logic Designer.
l Firmware library
Table Firmware library-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Execution of Online Download is skipped when
Library insertion Possible the POUs contained in the inserted library
are not used in the project, or when POUs
contained in the library to be deleted are not
Library deletion Possible
used in the project (*1).
*1: As there are essentially no changes to the project content, execution of Online Download is skipped. In this case, the message
“Download Changes is not necessary! The project has not been changed!” is displayed in the message area of Logic Designer.

l User library
Table User library-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Execution of Online Download is skipped when
Library insertion Possible the POUs contained in the inserted library
are not used in the project, or when POUs
Library deletion Possible contained in the library to be deleted are not
used in the project (*1).
When a user library that is referenced by a
project has been changed, the change can be
Library change (update) Possible
applied to the control application using Online
Download.
*1: As there are essentially no changes to the project content, execution of Online Download is skipped. In this case, the message
“Download Changes is not necessary! The project has not been changed!” is displayed in the message area of Logic Designer.
l Data type definitions

Table Data type definition-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Addition of data type definition Possible Online Download is executed even when an
added/deleted data type definition is
Deletion of data type definition Possible not used in the project.
When a data type definition has been changed,
Change of data type definition Possible the values of the variable for that data type are
initialized.

l Local/global variable definitions
Table Local/global variable definition-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Addition of variable Possible The value of the variable is initialized.
Deletion of variable Possible
Enabling of variable Possible The value of the variable is initialized.
Disabling of variable Possible
This is handled as deletion → addition of
Change of variable name Possible the variable, and the value of the variable is
initialized.
Change of data type Possible The value of the variable is initialized.
Change of data kind Possible
The value of variables with address assigned
Change of address Possible
are not covered by Online Download (*1).
The change initial value is applied when the
Change of initial value Possible variable is next initialized, and is not applied
during execution of Online Download.
The current value of the variable is held even if
Change of “Retain” attribute Possible
the “Retain” attribute is switched.
Change of “PDD” attribute Possible
Change of “OPC” attribute Possible
*1: When a variable is used with an address assigned, the layout of the memory area (the alignment of variables in memory area) is
managed by the user, and so the system does not change the value of directly represented and located variables.
TIP
Variables with explicit assignment of a logical address (directly represented and located
variables) are not covered by Online Download.
• The value of variables are not initialized by Online Download processing.
• Even when an address is newly assigned to a variable with no assigned address, the value of the variable
is not copied.
• When the address assignment of a directly represented and located variable is deleted, the value of the
variable is copied (retained).

l Logical POU
Table Logical POU-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Addition/deletion of logical POUs in a user
Addition of logical POU Possible library referenced by the project is also
possible.
Deletion of logical POU Possible
This is handled as deletion → addition of
Change of logical POU name Possible
logical POU definitions.
Addition of POU instance Possible
Deletion of POU instance Possible
This is handled as deletion → addition of POU
instances. The values of the local variables
Change of POU instance name Possible of POU instances before the name change
are not inherited in the local variable of POU
instances after the change.
Change of I/O parameter data Possible
Change of variable definitions Possible See “● Local/global variable definitions.”
Change of code Possible Caution is required in changing SFC code (*1).
*1: When the code of a logical POU is described in SFC, caution is required in changing SFC code using Online Download to
prevent active steps from being deleted.
SEE
Also When SFC code is to be changed by Online Download, processing for Online Download must be inserted in
advance to prevent active steps from being deleted. For details, be sure to refer to the Online Help for Logic
Designer.
l Configuration
Table Configuration-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Addition of configuration Possible
Deletion of configuration Possible
Change of PLC type Impossible

l Resources
Table Resource-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Addition of resources Possible
Deletion of resources Possible
When the processor type must be changed,
Change of processor type Impossible
create a new resource (*1).
Only “Host name/IP address” can be changed.
Change of target settings Possible Other settings on the Target Setting dialog box
cannot be changed.
Change of global variable definitions Possible See “● Local/global variable definitions.”
Caution is required when changing the task
Change of device label variable assignment of a device label variable.
Possible
definitions For details, see “B3.4 Precautions in Use of
Online Download.”
Change of soft wiring definitions Possible
Change of FF block view definitions Possible
*1: When the processor type is changed, caution is required as the device label variable definitions, soft wiring definitions, and the
FF block view definitions are initialized.
l Tasks
Table Task-related changes
Online Download
possible/impossible
Addition of tasks Impossible
Deletion of tasks Impossible
Change of task type Impossible
Change of CYCLIC time Impossible
Change of watchdog time Impossible
Change of priority Impossible
Change of stack side Impossible
Change of SPG Impossible
Addition of program POU instance Possible
Deletion of program POU instance Possible
Change of program POU instance Possible
This is handled as deletion → addition of a
Change of program POU type program POU instance. For this reason,
Possible
(logical POU type) program POU instances after a change are all
operated from the initial status.

n Communication POU changes

The following describes changes of communication POU covered by Online Download.
l Changes covered by Online Download

The following shows the changes for communication POU that are covered by Online Download.
• Addition/deletion of a communication partner
• Change of communication partner or communication parameter (IP address, port number,
etc.)
• Addition/deletion of a data communication POU (POU executing data transmission and
reception) instance
• Change of parameters for a data communication POU instance (change of communication
device address, communication data storage variable area, etc.)
n NPAS POU/PAS POU changes

The following describes whether Online Download is possible or not for each changes of NPAS
POU/PAS POU.
Table NPAS POU/PAS POU changes (1/2)
Online Download
possible/impossible
Wind-up processing is performed after Online
Addition of POU instances Possible Download as the added POU instances starts
operation in the initial status.
Deletion of POU instances Possible
Change of POU instance name Possible This is handled as deletion → addition of

a POU instance. For this reason, the POU
instance starts operation in the initial status
Change of POU type Possible after Online Download.
This means defining a new connection (input
processing POU, etc.) for a control input that
was not connected. The operation of the NPAS
POU/PAS POU instances changes according
New connection to control input Possible to whether the range of the control input is
changed as a result of the new connection.
See “Change to connection to control input
(no range change)” and “Change to connection
to control input (with range change)” below.
This means changing the connection to the
Change to connection to control control input. When there is no change to the
Possible
input (no range change) range of the control input as a result of the
change to the connection, control continues.
This means changing the connection to the
control input. When there is a change to the
range of the control input as a result of the
Change to connection to control change to the connection, automatic operation
Possible
input (with range change) is stopped (MAN fallback). For some numerical
operation POUs (e.g., PAS_DLAY), the data
for internal calculation (accumulated data) is
initialized.

Table NPAS POU/PAS POU changes (2/2)
Online Download
possible/impossible
This means deleting the connection to the
Deletion of connection to control control input. Control input becomes open,
Possible
input and control continues by the input value (PV)
before the connection was deleted.
New connection to input other than
Possible Control continues.
control input
Change of connection to input other
than control input
Deletion of connection to input other
than control input
This refers to defining a new connection
(output processing POU, etc.) for a control
New connection to a control output
Possible output that was not connected. After the
destination
output value (MV) is tracked by IMAN, control
operation is resumed.
This means changing a connection to a control
Change of connection to a control
output. When there is no change to the range
output destination Possible
of the output destination as a result of the
(no range change)
change to the connection, control continues.
This means changing a connection to a control
Change of connection to a control output. When there is a change to the range of
output destination Possible the output destination as a result of the change
(with range change) to the connection, automatic operation is
stopped (MAN fallback).
Deletion of connection to a control
output destination
New connection to output other than
control output
Change of connection to output
other than control output
Deletion of connection to output
other than control output
Control continues.
However, in the case of the PAS POU instance,
Change of engineering parameters Possible
the engineering parameter setting POU must
also be changed.

B3.4 Precautions in Use of Online Download

This section briefly outlines precautions in use of Online Download.
IMPORTANT
Please refer to the Online Help of Logic Designer for details.
n Delay in user tasks

The following describes the delay in user tasks during Online Download.
l Behavior of user tasks during execution of Online Download

When Online Download is executed, the newly changed control application (new project) is
loaded to memory area separated from the control application (old project) that is currently
running on FCN/FCJ, and the control application to be executed is switched from the old project
to the new project.
This switching processing involves first stopping processing of all user tasks, copying the states
(values of each variable) of the old project to the new project, and then executing the new project.
l Delay in execution of user tasks

As user tasks stop while the states of the old project are being copied during Online Download, a
delay occurs in execution of user tasks.
For this reason, when a user application (e.g. totalizing processing), that is influenced by a delay
in the execution time of user tasks, is used to perform Online Download, that influenced must be
corrected.
The following POUs and global variable are provided for detecting the user task execution delay
time and for detecting execution of Online Download. Use these POUs and global variable to
correct this influence:
• Delay Time Acquisition POU (PAS_GET_TASKDELAY)
• Online Download Execution Detection POU (PAS_IS_OLDL_DONE)
• Online Download Execution (global variable GS_RAS_Current OlMntCounter member)
n Error items to be checked during the execution of the control applica-

tion
If it occurs after downloading, division by zero, errors due to string operation or array out-of-
range access, online downloads are no longer enabled.
In this case, online downloads are no longer enabled.
Please stop the application and download the debugged project offline.
Errors are confirmed on FCN/FCJ system alarm message during operation and message win-
dow on Logic Designer during programming and debugging.
SEE
ALSO For more information, refer to C5. “Operation of the control application”

n Changes to device label variable task assignments

When the task assignment of the device label variable has been changed, this change is
processed as deletion → addition of the device label variable.
For this reason, the value and status of the target device label variable will be initialized when
Online Download is executed.
n Communication function
The following describes precautions in using Online Download for communication functions.
l POU for initiating communication (OPEN POU)

In the FCN/FCJ communication function, a communication task that runs in background is
started separately from user tasks for the control application.
To start this communication task, use the POU CONNECT in Inter-FCN/FCJ communication, and
the POU that contains the text string “OPEN” in other functions.
These POUs for starting communication task are called “OPEN POU.”
During Online Download, all communication is temporarily stopped and resumed by OPEN POU.
For this reason, OPEN POU must be executed at each scan when the Online Download Function
is used.
l Behavior at Online Download

The communication function behaves as follows during execution of Online Download.
• The communication task stops until execution of OPEN POU after execution of Online
Download. It takes time to resume communication when the scan cycle of OPEN POU is
long.
• Even when there are no changes relating to a communication POU (e.g. when an
application other than communication processing has been corrected), and Online
Download is executed, all communication POUs enter an Online Download state, and
communication tasks stop temporarily.
• If OPEN POU is not executed for “maximum task scan cycle + 1 second or more”
after Online Download, the target OPEN POU is judged to have been deleted, and the
communication task terminates.
• As the deletion processing time of OPEN POU is dependent on the maximum task scan
cycle, time “maximum task scan cycle or longer” is required till starting the newly added
communication task.
• When OPEN POU communication-related settings (IP address, serial communication
port number, etc.) have been changed, OPEN POU is processed as a deletion → addition
process.
n NPAS POU/PAS POU

With NPAS POUs/PAS POUs, multiple POU instances collaborate to form a single control loop.
For this reason, during Online Download, not only corrected POU instances but also changes to
the input values of POU instances at the connection destination must be taken into consideration.
With some NPAS POUs/PAS POUs, caution is also required regarding the fact that “output
destination” states are input from “read-back inputs (such as input to the “RB_IN terminal”).”

l Change of the connection to an input terminal (with range change)
The following operation is performed when the range of input data to the NPAS POU/PAS POU
instance is changed as a result of changing the connection to an input terminal:
• POUs during automatic operation (AUT/CAS mode) enter a MAN fallback state, and
automatic operation is stopped.
• With some numerical operation POUs (NPAS_DLAY/PAS_DLAY, NPAS_LDLAG/
PAS_LDLAG, NPAS_AVE_M/PAS_AVE_M, NPAS_AVE_C/PAS_AVE_C), the data for
internal operation (accumulated data) is initialized.
• As the values of access parameters whose range is dependent on changed access
parameters (e.g. HH/LL/PH/PL for PV, and MH/ML for MV), engineering units are retained
for NPAS POU, and standardized data values (0 to 100%) are retained for PAS POU.
• When NPAS POU is being used, each of the access parameter values may become out-of-
scale as a result of the range being changed.
• Caution is required when PAS POU is being used, and values are currently set to access
parameters from other control logic. In the case of PAS POU, setting values must also be
changed when the range has been changed as they are set as standardized data (0 to
100%).
l Change to regulatory control POU

The regular control loop is used with a connection between the input data processing POU,
regulatory control POU and output data processing POU. However, output to the process might
change suddenly when the regulatory control POU of an existing control loop is changed, and
when the output data processing POU of the same loop is not changed.
To avoid this, be sure to add a new output data processing POU when the regulatory control POU
is changed (in actual fact, deleted → added). Tracking process among regulatory control POU,
output data processing POU and the process output is performed.
For this reason, when changing control operation POUs of an existing control loop, be sure to
either change the output data processing POU as well, or once delete and download the output
data processing POU, and then add a new output data processing POU.
l Setting of engineering parameter during use of PAS POU

PAS POU uses the engineering parameter setting POU. In case of P1.60 or earlier prototype, the
engineering parameters are set to PAS POU from this POU only when the program starts up.
For this reason, when engineering parameters are changed by Online Download, also change
the engineering parameter setting POU.
l Correction of totalized value of user task execution delay time

When a delay occurs in user tasks during Online Download, generally the totalized value is
influenced. However, on with NPAS POU/PAS POU R1.70.01 or later, this delay is corrected
dynamically by detection of the execution delay time. For this reason, when using NPAS POU/
PAS POU, there is no need to take the user task execution delay time into consideration.
SEE
Also For details on influence caused to NPAS POU/PAS POU during Online Download and how to remedy this
influence, be sure to refer to both the Online Help of Logic Designer and NPAS POU/PAS POU.

n About assignment to a variable parameter setting of string data type

If assign a string constant parameter settings for the variable string data type, please take care
not to exceed (in bytes) the maximum number of characters.
Double-byte character is 2 bytes per character conversion.
If downloaded the project file that contains the string handling of the assignment exceeds the
maximum number of characters, when the problem has been executed, the string is an arithmetic
error occurs.
If assign a string at regular intervals, so errors occur in succession string operations, will be the
state cannot use the online download.
Once stop the control application, fix the problem point and run the download of the offline.
Maximum numbers of characters (in bytes) of NPASPOU parameters, see the “data type” in the
“Engineering parameters”, “Access parameters” and “I / O parameters” in NPASPOU online help.
Or, see the comments that display in the screen when you specify a variable in the “Variable
Properties”. The following are examples.
Examples of data type.
STRING(32) or STRING32 --- characters up to 32 bytes.
STRING(8) or STRING8 --- characters up to 8 bytes.
Examples of parameters
Engineering parameter COMMENT of NPAS_PID is data type STRING (32), characters up
to 32 bytes.
Engineering parameter _SUM_UNIT of NPAS_PID is data type STRING (8), characters up
to 8 bytes.
B030401E.ai
Figure Display of Variable Properties

B3.5 Online Download Procedure

This section describes the Online Download procedure.
l How to change the control application

Control applications are changed on Logic Designer in the usual procedure.
Make sure that the changes are covered by Online Download.
After you have changed the control application, make/re-compile the project by the regular
procedure.
l Online Download execution procedure

Make sure that no errors occurred in making/re-compiling the project, and then select the
“Download” button in the project control dialog box.
The Download dialog box will be displayed. Click the “Download Changes” button to start Online
Download.
B030501E.ai
Figure Download dialog box
TIP
When a change not covered by Online Download has been made, an error will occur when Online Download is
executed. If this happens, either execute the regular offline download, or restore the change that is not covered
by Online Download, and then execute Online Download.

Blank Page
C-i
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ Guide
PART-C Operation and Maintenance
IMPORTANT
module.
module.

Blank Page
<C1. Operation of the FCN/FCJ> C1-1
C1. Operation of the FCN/FCJ

IMPORTANT
In this manual, the term “FCN/FCJ” refers to FCN, FCN-RTU, and FCJ autonomous controllers.
The term “FCN and FCJ” refers to FCN (excluding FCN-RTU) and FCJ autonomous controllers.
C1.1 FCN/FCJ Power On and Off Procedures and

Operation
Follow the procedures below to power on/off, and reboot the FCN/FCJ. And also, follow
the same procedures in case of on-line insertion/extraction of the CPU module. Use the
LED on the CPU module to check the operation status of the FCN/FCJ.
SEE
ALSO For the operation status of the FCN/FCJ, see B1.5 “ Operation Status of FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.”
C1.1.1 Power On Procedure

The FCN/FCJ will boot automatically after it is powered up. However, depending on the
operation mode of the FCN/FCJ, it will start up in the following conditions:
l When an IP Address is not Assigned

The FCN/FCJ will start up in the IP Address Setting mode. It will wait until IP address is assigned.
l When an IP Address is Assigned

The FCN/FCJ will start up in Online mode or Maintenance mode.
IMPORTANT
In case of FCN and FCJ, insert FCN/FCJ system card before turning on the power.

C1.1.2 Power Off Procedure

In order to turn off the power of FCN/FCJ, it is recommended to follow the shutdown pro-
cedure for safety. And also, the LED display of the CPU module does not light during over
ten seconds after power on. Do not turn off the power in case of this status because this
status is not Power off OK status.
After power off, it is necessary to press the reset switch or turn on the power again in
order to restart the FCN/FCJ.
WARNING
Do not perform the following operations during 30 seconds after power on.
• Power off
• On-line extraction of the CPU module
• Press of the reset switch of the CPU module
TIP
Power can be turned off without shutting down when FCN-100 and FCJ in the online status are not writing the
files inside the FCN/FCJ system card.
With fail-safe file system employed in FCN-500 and FCN-RTU in the online status, the file system is protected
even if shutting down while accessing to the file.
The FCN/FCJ mainly writes file in the following situations:
• When the system setting files are being repaired.
• When the system setting files are being backed up or restored.
• When a project is being loaded by Logic Designer.
• When the setting values are being loaded by Resource Configurator.
• When the retained data is being saved or restored.
• When InfoWell Logger is working.
• When Java applications are creating the file.
• When downloading file into FCN/FCJ by FTP.
It is recommended to perform the shutdown processing under normal operation.
l Shutdown Switch
When the shutdown switch is pressed, the status will change to the power down enabled status.
For duplex CPU modules, when the shutdown switch is pressed in the control side, both the
Control and Standby units will change to the power down enabled status. When the shutdown
switch on the Standby unit, only the Standby unit will change to the power down enabled status.
The time taken required to shutdown depends on the status of the FCN/FCJ.
• When the IP address is set, it immediately enters the power down enabled status.
• In maintenance status, it will enter the power down enabled status two seconds later.
• In online status, it will enter the power down enabled status after all tasks have been shut
down. However, if the shutdown processing cannot be completed, it will enter the power
down enabled status after the time specified by the Shut Down Wait Time in the JEROS
Basic Setting file has been exceeded. (Default is 30 seconds)

l Web Browser
Opening the FCN/FCJ Maintenance menu using the Web browser and selecting “Shutdown”
from the “Reboot” menu will enter the unit into the power down enabled status. For duplex CPU
modules, both the control and standby units will enter the power down enabled status.
SEE
ALSO For the operation procedure of the Web browser, see B2.4, “Maintenance Menu.”
C1.1.3 Reboot
The following procedure can be used to reboot the FCN/FCJ.
l Reset Switch
Press the reset switch when the FCN/FCJ is in the power down enabled status.
l Web Browser
Open the FCN/FCJ Maintenance menu using the Web browser and select “Reboot” from the
“Reboot” menu to perform reboot.
SEE
ALSO For the operation procedure of the Web browser, see B2.4, “Maintenance Menu.”
C1.1.4 Operation during Power Failure

Power Failure is detected when the power supply to the system stops for a duration lon-
ger than the time set in Insensitive momentary power-failure time.
Please refer to GS on Insensitive momentary power-failure time for power supply module.
When FCN/FCJ detects power failure, FCN/FCJ operation stops.
l Operation after Power is Recovered

When power is recovered, FCN/FCJ will be restarted. (The restart processing is the same as
during normal power up.)
WARNING
• Between power failure and recovery time, control will be stopped for duration longer than
the power failure
• In case of FCN and FCJ, power failure may damage the file system when Java applica-
tion is writing to the file in FCN/FCJ system card. System can may not start normally if file
system is damaged (Power failure while control application is running, power failure will not
damage FCN/FCJ system card)
• To avoid file system damage, it is recommended to use an Uninterruptable Power Supply
(UPS) for the power supply

TIP
With fail-safe file system employed in FCN-500 and FCN-RTU, the file system is protected even if power fails
while accessing to the file. However, the contents written when power fail happens are not guaranteed, In this
case, contents are rolled back to the state before file is accessed.
To avoid file system damage, it is recommended to use an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) for the power
supply.
C1.2 Backup and Restore Operations

It is recommended to backup the system setting files in case of FCN/FCJ system card (or
FCN-500/FCN-RTU On-board flash memory) failure or system malfunctions.
In case of FCN-500 and FCN-RTU, the contents of the backup can be restored to the new
CPU module (On-board flash memory) that was replaced.
In case of FCN-100 and FCJ, the contents of the backup can be restored to a new FCN/FCJ
system card or to FCN/FCJ system card used in another FCN/FCJ.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for backup/restoration, see “D3. Backup/Restore of all data (R3.30 or later).”

<C2. Duplex CPU Module (FCN-500)> C2-1
C2. Duplex CPU Module (FCN-500)
C2.1 Operation using Duplex CPU Modules

This section describes the operation when duplex CPU modules (model NFCP501/
NFCP502) are used in the FCN.
• The Control CPU and the Standby CPU will run the same software concurrently. The
control application will synchronize data between the Control and Standby CPUs
using input and output of I/O.
The I/O input will synchronize the data read by the Control side to the Standby side.
The output of I/O is performed by the Control side. When this happens, it is verified
that the output value between the Control side and the Standby side are equal
• When a discrepancy is detected in the I/O output between the Control and Standby
CPUs, it is assumed that the Control CPU holds the correct data (The discrepancy is
output to log)
• When the control CPU goes down, the standby CPU takes control right
instantaneously, enabling to continue the operations without any influence of the
CPU switchover (*1)
• FCNs that are duplexed will take approximately 110 seconds to start up due to the
equivalence processing of files and memory
• Automatic startup of APC (All Program Copy: equalization processing) is possible if
a duplexed configuration is made by adding a CPU module to a controller which is
operating with a single-CPU configuration. During APC, the control cycle increases 1
to 2 seconds for 1 cycle only. It is also possible to execute the “APC command” from
Resource Configurator and start APC manually
• Communication of the control network will stop 1 to 3 seconds when the control right
is being transferred
*1: If an error that cannot be immediately detected occurs, it may take up to two seconds to perform the switchover.

C2.2 Control Right of Duplex CPU Modules

When duplex CPU modules are used, the CPU module that was in control previously will
become the Control CPU when powered up, as long as both CPUs are operational. When
both CPUs are in initialization status, the CPU on the left side will become the Control
side. This is performed by maintaining the control right information in the battery backup
memory within the CPU module. Each CPU module will perform self-diagnosis based on
this information and a wait time will be placed.
During self-diagnosis, if an error is detected in the CPU module that was previously the control
side, the standby side CPU module will take the control right and start up as a single CPU
system. When only one CPU module is installed and powered up, and then the other CPU
module is installed, it is unknown as to which CPU will have the control right.
Table CPU Module Startup Wait Time
Previous control Wait time (seconds)

Priority
right information Left CPU Right CPU
Single 2 0 2
Control side 1 4 6
Standby side 0 8 10
The following table, “Transfer of Control Right Information,” shows the transition of the control
right information (priority) in order to determine which CPU module has the control right. When
a CPU module is down due to power OFF or error occurrence, the control right information prior
to the failure will be maintained in the battery backed-up memory. When an error or unexpected
power shutoff occurs in one CPU module, and power is restored, the CPU module that previously
had the control right will become the controlling side, according to the rule of the control right
information shown below. However, to replace a CPU module offline, it is necessary to initialize
(0) the control right information of the CPU module to be replaced.
SEE
ALSO For the initialization procedure of control right information, see C2.5, “Initializing the Control Right Information.”
Table Transfer of Control Right Information

Control Right
Information
Condition Description
Left-side Right-side
CPU CPU
Initial CPU startup in
1 0 The left-side CPU takes control right.
dual-redundant configuration
Right-side CPU down is detected and the left-
side CPU becomes single (2). When the power
Right-side CPU down 2 0
is turned off/on in this state, the left-side CPU
becomes the Control side.
The recovery of the right-side CPU is detected and
Right-side CPU recovery 1 0
the left-side CPU becomes the Control side (1).
1 remains in the SRAM of the left-side CPU, but
the right-side CPU detects the switchover of the
Left-side CPU down 1 2 control right and becomes single (2).
When the power is turned off/on in this state, the
right-side CPU becomes the Control side.
The recovery of the left-side CPU is detected, and
the right-side CPU becomes the Control side (1),
Left-side CPU recovery 0 1
and the left-side CPU becomes the Standby side
(0).

C2.3 All Program Copy (APC)

The process of copying the memory contents of the Control side CPU using the Standby
side CPU (synchronization with the Control side CPU) is referred to as APC.
APC execution can be performed in one of two ways shown below, depending on the
startup timing of the Standby side CPU.
• Startup-time APC
• APC for Control Execution
n Startup-time APC
Startup-time APC is performed when the control-side CPU and the standby side CPU are
launched at the same time, in other words, when the power is turned on under a dual-redundant
configuration.
APC processing is automatically performed while the system is being launched. The control
application starts up upon completion of APC.
Control side Standby side

CPU START CPU START
Boot processing Boot processing
Waits for the APC preparation

Startup of tasks
on the Control side
IEC 61131-3 File synchronization

Startup engine initiates Memory synchronization
(Loads project)
APC processing APC processing
Synchronization starts
Control Start
(Warm Start)
C020301E.ai
Figure Startup-time APC

n APC for Control Execution

APC for control execution is performed when the standby-side CPU is launched while the control-
side CPU is running (e.g., the role of the CPUs is replaced online).
Table Combination of dual-redundant CPUs and APC operation
APC Control operation while

Automatic APC startup setting
operation speed APC is executed
An extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the control

High Possible
period occurs once.
l APC Operation (High-speed APC)

Manual startup or automatic startup can be selected for the APC for control execution. The
automatic startup setting can be enabled or disabled using Resource Configurator. The default
setting is “Disable.”
Table APC operation
APC startup setting APC startup method APC operation
The standby-side CPU is on hold until the
Manual startup After the replacement of the user performs the startup of APC. As soon
(automatic startup setting: standby-side CPU, Resource as Resource Configurator instructs the
Disable) Configurator is used for startup. control side CPU to perform APC, APC
processing starts.
Upon connection of a LAN cable to the
After the replacement of the standby-side CPU, APC processing
Automatic startup
standby-side CPU, APC starts up automatically starts. The CPU module
(automatic startup setting:
automatically upon connection to replacement procedure can be simplified,
Enable)
a LAN cable. and automatic system recovery is possible
in times of temporary CPU fault.

Control side Siandby side

CPU START CPU START
Control start
Boot processing
(Warm Start)
Control
execution
in progress Automatic / manual
APC Command
No
APC Waits for APC
permission
granted and Standby permission
APC Request from Control side
received
Yes
File synchronization
Memory synchronization
Execution of
synchronization starts
Recovery processing
C020302E.ai
Figure APC for Control Execution
The standby-side CPU waits until Resource Configurator executes the APC instruction under the
manual startup setting or a LAN cable is connected under the automatic startup setting. During
this waiting period, the standby-side CPU still waits even if the control-side CPU goes down.
If the control CPU is reset, the standby-side CPU performs startup-time APC (the CPU that
performs this reset will act as the control side).
When changing the standby-side CPU to the control-side CPU or using the standby-side CPU
under a single configuration to restart the system, turn on the shutdown switch of the standby-
side CPU to set the system to the “Power Turn-off Ready Status.” Then turn on the reset switch.
High-speed APC is performed. During the performance, an extension in the control period by 1 to
2 seconds occurs once.

[Execution of automatic APC startup]
The dual-redundant CPU configuration is automatically restored when automatic APC startup is
executed in the following situations:
• During the operation of the FCN, one of its CPUs under a dual-redundant configuration
experiences a temporary fault and goes down (i.e., a fault on the standby-side CPU
or switching of the control right due to fault of the control-side CPU), and the FCN is
immediately restored.
• While the FCN is operating with one CPU under the dual-redundant CPU configuration, a
new standby-side CPU is mounted in a slot, or the standby-side CPU already mounted is
reset.
[Operation of automatic APC startup during temporary CPU fault]

Under the automatic APC startup setting, the system is automatically restored when a CPU
experiences a temporary fault, in which case, the following operations are performed:
• When a fault occurs to a CPU for the first time, it is regarded as a temporary fault, and the
CPU is restarted.
• When a corrected CPU experiences a fault again within one week of the last fault being
corrected, it is regarded as a permanent failure, and the operation of the CPU is halted
(restart not executed).
• When a corrected CPU operates normally for more than one week after the last fault being
corrected but then experiences a fault again, it is regarded as a temporary fault, and the
CPU is restarted.
IMPORTANT
During APC execution, an extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the control period occurs only once.
When the automatic APC startup setting is enabled, APC can be executed in a timing not
intended by the operator (e.g., the situations of automatic APC execution described in “Operation
of automatic APC startup during temporary CPU fault” above). The automatic startup setting
should be enabled only for plants where APC processing can be set to occur at any time.

C2.4 Replacing CPU Modules

The following describes the procedure for replacing a duplex CPU module:
1. Remove the control network cable and other cables from the failed CPU module
2. Remove the failed CPU module from the Base module
3. Secure the new CPU module to the Base module using screws
4. Check whether the mounted new CPU module is in load complete status (HRDY LED:
turned on, RDY LED: flashing quickly, CTRL LED: turned off). If it is not, reset the new
CPU module and check again whether it is in the aforementioned status
5. See Resource Configurator or the maintenance homepage to check the items in
“Check Items before Executing APC”
6. Perform cable connection for the control network. During the performance, the
control network 1 or the control network 2 must be able to communicate with the
control-side CPU module. If communication is not possible, APC operation fails, and
the new CPU goes down
7. When “Automatic APC startup” is enabled, APC is automatically executed by the
operation in the procedure 7. See the indication on the LED of the control-side CPU
module to check whether APC has been started up (HRDY LED: flashing quickly,
RDY LED: turned on, CTRL LED: turned on). Also see the indication on the LED of
the standby-side CPU module to check whether APC has been completed (HRDY
LED: turned on, RDY LED: turned on, CTRL LED: turned off). When “Automatic
APC startup” is disabled, execute the “APC (All Program Copy) instruction” using
IMPORTANT
During APC execution, the control cycle length increases 1 to 2 seconds for 1 cycle only. In
addition, as indicated above, when APC automatic startup has been set, APC may be executed
at a timing not intended by the operator in cases in which temporary CPU problems exist, etc.
Accordingly, the APC automatic startup setting should only be conducted with applications for
which there will be no problem regardless of the timing at which APC processing occurs.
l Check Items before Executing APC

Before executing APC, be sure to check the following items:
• Model type of the CPU module
To check the style number of the standby-side CPU, refer to its model name by one of the
following:
A marking on the upper or lateral side of the CPU module.
Maintenance homepage

• Automatic APC startup setting (enable/disable)
The automatic APC startup setting can be referred to in Resource Configurator or on the
maintenance homepage.
When the automatic APC startup setting is enabled, APC is automatically performed upon
the CPU module mounting. During the performance, an extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the
control period occurs once. Since the performance of automatic APC could affect control
operation, be sure to check the setting before executing APC.
Even if the setting to enable the automatic APC startup setting has been performed, that
setting could have been invalidated, and “Disabled” could be indicated. The APC operation
speed setting required for the automatic APC startup setting is not available for all CPU style
combinations.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for initializing the control right information, see C2.5, “Initializing the Control Right Information.”
IMPORTANT
• When duplexing the CPU of an FCN with the single configuration CPU, you must specify
“CPU x 2” in “Duplex setting of CPU modules” of the base module before installing the CPU
module.
• When duplexing a CPU module, the basic software of the same version should be used.
TIP
For more information on settings of a base module, refer to A1.2 “Base Module.”

C2.5 Initializing the Control Right Information

By performing the following procedure to initialize the control right information on the
maintenance CPU module, the CPU module replacement work can be simplified. This
also ensures safe operation without transferring the control right. If initialization is not
performed, it is unknown as to which unit will become the Control side.
l Initialization by Memory Volatilization

Remove battery for five minutes or more from CPU module for replacement. Then SRAM
memory will vaporize and control right information will be initialized.
Attach battery to CPU module later.
l Initialization using the Shutdown Switch

Turn on the power or press the reset switch while the shutdown switch is pressed. Verify that the
unit has entered “Clear Control Right” mode (HRDY LED flashes slowly, other LED’s are off) (It
will take approximately 5 seconds.) If the unit doesn’t enter this mode, perform the above step
again.
l Initialization performed by Setting the Standby Side CPU

Perform online connection of the CPU module to the FCN being operated in single configuration.
The startup processing of the connected CPU will be performed. Verify that the unit has entered
“Load Complete Status” (HRDY LED is lit, RDY LED is blinking quickly, and the CTRL LED is
off.) If the unit doesn’t enter this status, press the reset switch to initiate the startup processing
again. The CPU module that enters the “Load Complete Status” has the control right information
initialized. Press the shutdown switch and to enter the power down enabled status, and remove
the CPU.
IMPORTANT
It is recommended to replace the duplex CPU module online.
When the online replacement is not accepted, initilize the CPU module in some of the ways
above.

C2.6 Precautions
l CPU Module Combination
Use a couple of the same type and same suffix code of CPU modules.
A paring of NFCP501 and NFCP502 is not allowed for duplex CPU.
Use CPU modules in the following style combinations:
Style 1 - Style 1
l System Software Version

Use the same system software version for both CPU modules. If the versions differ,
incompatibilities may occur during the equivalence processing between the CPUs. This is the
reason that the software version is checked when the Standby side CPU requests memory
synchronization (APC) to the Control side CPU. If the software versions do not match, the
Standby side CPU shuts down and a system alarm is generated.
l Configuration
The settings to FCN such as IP addresses can only be performed in the Control side CPU. “IP
Address Setting Status” and “Maintenance Status” do not exist on the Standby side CPU. The
configuration information on the Standby side CPU is synchronized during APC execution.
l Equalization Processing
When the Standby side CPU starts up, the APC processing is performed to synchronize the
status of the Control side CPU module to the Standby side CPU. APC is performed in the two
steps shown below. During this processing, configuration or download to the FCN from Resource
Configurator must not be performed. These requests will generate errors. The system alarm
message will be generated when the execution of the following processing have started or
ended.
1. Configuration file synchronization
2. Synchronization of volatile memory and non-volatile memory
The control operations will be locked completely.
After “1.” is complete, control operation will be restarted, and the system settings file that
stores information such as the IP address will be copied to the Standby side CPU. The
synchronized files are the minimum system configuration files only.
IMPORTANT
The Standby side CPU will start synchronization when “1.” is complete, but will be Ready
(functions are a duplex system) only when “2.” is complete. Therefore, the system will operate as
a single system until “2.” is completed. When the Control side CPU down in this state, the entire
system will be down (both sides are down.)
TIP
During equalization, communication is performed between the control CPU and the standby CPU. Even when
FCN is not connected to a control network, connect the control CPU and the standby CPU by a network cable
when equalization is performed.

l Transferring the Control Right
1. When an error occurs on the Control side CPU
The control right will be transferred to the standby side CPU and control is continued.
However, if communication is performed through control networks with VDS or other FCN/
FCJ, etc., the control network communication will be interrupted for an instant by the switch
processing.
2. When an error occurs on the Standby side CPU
The Control side CPU will become single status and continue operation.
TIP
When an error is detected in the control network, the control right will not be transferred. For example, removing
the network cable on the Control side CPU will not transfer the control right.
l Cautions for High-speed APC

While high-speed APC is being executed, the functions below are affected:
• Network dual-redundancy function
While APC is being executed, a node fail alarm is triggered, but it is cleared as soon as APC
is completed.
• Control function
While APC is being executed, an extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the control period occurs
once. During the execution, the following effects occur:
Function Effect
Input processing None (*1)
Control computation Control computation for PID and the like is delayed.
Output processing Outputting of pulse width and time-proportional ON/OFF is delayed.
*1: Use R1.60.01 or later of the PAS portfolio.

The integrated values of the analog input and the pulse input increase with the use of R1.50 or earlier of the PAS portfolio. That
increase is added to the delay.
• Communication portfolios
While APC is being executed, communication processing stops. Upon completion of
APC, a communication error can be detected. In that case, perform error processing (e.g.,
retransmission) by the relevant application.
• Tools
Cautions for the tools of the FCN/FCJ during APC processing are as follows:
Tool Cautions
If download is performed during APC execution, an error occurs. In that case,
redo the download after the completion of APC.
If project load and/or boot project load is performed during APC execution, an
error occurs. In that case, redo the load operation after the completion of APC.
Logic Designer
When executing APC, close the project control dialog. APC processing cannot
be executed while that dialog is open.
If the retain data save operation is performed during APC execution, save
Retain Data Save
processing is executed upon completion of APC.

Blank Page
C3. Duplex CPU Module (FCN-100)
C3.1 Operation using Duplex CPU Modules

This section describes the operation when duplex CPU modules (model NFCP100) are
used in the FCN.
• The Control CPU and the Standby CPU will run the same software concurrently. The
control application will synchronize data between the Control and Standby CPUs
using input and output of I/O.
The I/O input will synchronize the data read by the Control side to the Standby side.
The output of I/O is performed by the Control side. When this happens, it is verified
that the output value between the Control side and the Standby side are equal
• When a discrepancy is detected in the I/O output between the Control and Standby
CPUs, it is assumed that the Control CPU holds the correct data (The discrepancy is
output to log)
• When the control CPU goes down, the standby CPU takes control right
instantaneously, enabling to continue the operations without any influence of the
CPU switchover (*1)
• FCNs that are duplexed will take approximately 110 seconds to start up due to the
equivalence processing of files and memory
• Automatic startup of APC (All Program Copy: equalization processing) is possible if
a duplexed configuration is made by adding a CPU module to a controller which is
operating with a single-CPU configuration. During APC, the control cycle increases 1
to 2 seconds for 1 cycle only (*2). It is also possible to execute the “APC command”
from Resource Configurator and start APC manually
• Communication of the control network will stop 1 to 3 seconds when the control right
is being transferred
*1: If an error that cannot be immediately detected occurs, it may take up to two seconds to perform the switchover.
*2: If one of the two CPUs in dual-redundant configuration is not style-3 CPUs, the APC command cannot be started automatically.
In this case, control stops when the APC command is running and the I/O modules operate in the same way as they do when the
Fallback optin is selected.

C3.2 Control Right of Duplex CPU Modules

When duplex CPU modules are used, the CPU module that was in control previously will
become the Control CPU when powered up, as long as both CPUs are operational. When
both CPUs are in initialization status, the CPU on the left side will become the Control
side. This is performed by maintaining the control right information in the battery backup
memory within the CPU module. Each CPU module will perform self-diagnosis based on
this information and a wait time will be placed.
During self-diagnosis, if an error is detected in the CPU module that was previously the control
side, the standby side CPU module will take the control right and start up as a single CPU
system. When only one CPU module is installed and powered up, and then the other CPU
module is installed, it is unknown as to which CPU will have the control right.
Table CPU Module Startup Wait Time
Previous control Wait time (seconds)

Priority
right information Left CPU Right CPU
Single 2 0 2
Control side 1 4 6
Standby side 0 8 10
The following table, “Transfer of Control Right Information,” shows the transition of the control
right information (priority) in order to determine which CPU module has the control right. When
a CPU module is down due to power OFF or error occurrence, the control right information prior
to the failure will be maintained in the battery backed-up memory. When an error or unexpected
power shutoff occurs in one CPU module, and power is restored, the CPU module that previously
had the control right will become the controlling side, according to the rule of the control right
information shown below. However, to replace a CPU module offline, it is necessary to initialize
(0) the control right information of the CPU module to be replaced.
SEE
ALSO For the initialization procedure of control right information, see C3.6, “Initializing the Control Right Information.”
Table Transfer of Control Right Information

Control Right
Information
Condition Description
Left-side Right-side
CPU CPU
Initial CPU startup in
1 0 The left-side CPU takes control right.
dual-redundant configuration
Right-side CPU down is detected and the left-
side CPU becomes single (2). When the power
Right-side CPU down 2 0
is turned off/on in this state, the left-side CPU
becomes the Control side.
The recovery of the right-side CPU is detected and
Right-side CPU recovery 1 0
the left-side CPU becomes the Control side (1).
1 remains in the SRAM of the left-side CPU, but
the right-side CPU detects the switchover of the
Left-side CPU down 1 2 control right and becomes single (2).
When the power is turned off/on in this state, the
right-side CPU becomes the Control side.
The recovery of the left-side CPU is detected, and
the right-side CPU becomes the Control side (1),
Left-side CPU recovery 0 1
and the left-side CPU becomes the Standby side
(0).

C3.3 All Program Copy (APC)

The process of copying the memory contents of the Control side CPU using the Standby
side CPU (synchronization with the Control side CPU) is referred to as APC.
APC execution can be performed in one of two ways shown below, depending on the
startup timing of the Standby side CPU.
• Startup-time APC
• APC for Control Execution
n Startup-time APC
Startup-time APC is performed when the control-side CPU and the standby side CPU are
launched at the same time, in other words, when the power is turned on under a dual-redundant
configuration.
APC processing is automatically performed while the system is being launched. The control
application starts up upon completion of APC.
Control side Standby side

CPU START CPU START
Boot processing Boot processing
Waits for the APC preparation

Startup of tasks
on the Control side
IEC 61131-3 File synchronization

Startup engine initiates Memory synchronization
(Loads project)
Synchronization starts
Control Start
(Warm Start)
C020301E.ai
Figure Startup-time APC

n APC for Control Execution

APC for control execution is performed when the standby-side CPU is launched while the control-
side CPU is running (e.g., the role of the CPUs is replaced online).
The operation speed of APC for control execution in the Style 3 - Style 3 combination is different
from that in other combinations of dual-redundant CPUs.
APC
Combination of Automatic APC Control operation while
operation
dual-redundunt CPUs startup setting APC is executed
speed
An extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the control
Style 3 - Style 3 High Possible
period occurs once.
Other than The control operation is on-hold temporarily.
Low Not possible
Style 3 - Style 3 The I/O operation is set to fallback.
l APC Operation in Style 3 - Style 3 CPU Combination (High-speed APC)

When the combination of the CPUs is Style 3 - Style 3, manual startup or automatic startup can
be selected for the APC for control execution. The automatic startup setting can be enabled or
disabled using Resource Configurator. The default setting is “Disable.”
Table APC operation
APC startup setting APC startup method APC operation
The standby-side CPU is on hold until the
Manual startup After the replacement of the user performs the startup of APC. As soon
(automatic startup setting: standby-side CPU, Resource as Resource Configurator instructs the
Disable) Configurator is used for startup. control side CPU to perform APC, APC
processing starts.
Upon connection of a LAN cable to the
After the replacement of the standby-side CPU, APC processing
Automatic startup
standby-side CPU, APC starts up automatically starts. The CPU module
(automatic startup setting:
automatically upon connection to replacement procedure can be simplified,
Enable)
a LAN cable. and automatic system recovery is possible
in times of temporary CPU fault.


CPU START CPU START
Control start
Boot processing
(Warm Start)
Control
execution
in progress Automatic / manual
APC Command
No
APC Waits for APC
permission
received
Yes
Execution of
Recovery processing
C020302E.ai
Figure APC for Control Execution (dual-redundant CPUs in Style 3 - Style 3 combination)
The standby-side CPU waits until Resource Configurator executes the APC instruction under the
manual startup setting or a LAN cable is connected under the automatic startup setting. During
High-speed APC is performed when the CPU combination is Style 3 - Style 3. During the
performance, an extension in the control period by 1 to 2 seconds occurs once.

[Execution of automatic APC startup]
The dual-redundant CPU configuration is automatically restored when automatic APC startup is
executed in the following situations:
• During the operation of the FCN, one of its CPUs under a dual-redundant configuration
experiences a temporary fault and goes down (i.e., a fault on the standby-side CPU
or switching of the control right due to fault of the control-side CPU), and the FCN is
immediately restored.
• While the FCN is operating with one CPU under the dual-redundant CPU configuration, a
new standby-side CPU is mounted in a slot, or the standby-side CPU already mounted is
reset.
[Operation of automatic APC startup during temporary CPU fault]

Under the automatic APC startup setting, the system is automatically restored when a CPU
experiences a temporary fault, in which case, the following operations are performed:
• When a fault occurs to a CPU for the first time, it is regarded as a temporary fault, and the
CPU is restarted.
• When a corrected CPU experiences a fault again within one week of the last fault being
corrected, it is regarded as a permanent failure, and the operation of the CPU is halted
(restart not executed).
• When a corrected CPU operates normally for more than one week after the last fault being
corrected but then experiences a fault again, it is regarded as a temporary fault, and the
CPU is restarted.
IMPORTANT
During APC execution, an extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the control period occurs only once.
When the automatic APC startup setting is enabled, APC can be executed in a timing not
intended by the operator (e.g., the situations of automatic APC execution described in “Operation
of automatic APC startup during temporary CPU fault” above). The automatic startup setting
should be enabled only for plants where APC processing can be set to occur at any time.

l APC Operation in CPU Combinations Other than Style 3 - Style 3 (Low-speed
APC)
When the combination of dual-redundant CPUs is Style 3 - Style 2, Style 2 - Style 2, or Style 1
- Style 1, APC can only be executed manually using Resource Configurator.

CPU START CPU START
Control start
Boot processing
(Warm Start)
Control
execution
in progress Manual
APC Command
No
APC Waits for APC
permission
received
Yes
Execution of
Recovery processing
C020303E.ai
Figure APC for Control Execution (dual-redundant CPUs in a combination other than Style 3 - Style 3 )
The standby-side CPU waits until Resource Configurator executes the APC instruction. During
When the combination of dual-redundant CPUs is other than Style 3 - Style 3, low-speed APC is
performed. While APC is executed, there is a time period where control operation is temporarily
on-hold. After a lapse of the specified time (4 seconds), fallback is performed for I/O modules
whose fallback setting is enabled. For control instruments connected to process outputs, MAN
fallback is performed after APC operation is completed and the on-hold status is cleared.

C3.4 Replacing CPU Modules

The following describes the procedure for replacing a duplex CPU module:
1. Remove the control network cable and other cables from the failed CPU module
2. Remove the failed CPU module from the Base module
3. Remove the FCN/FCJ system card from the failed CPU module that was removed.
Install this FCN/FCJ system card into the new CPU module to be installed
4. Secure the new CPU module to the Base module using screws
5. Check whether the mounted new CPU module is in load complete status (HRDY LED:
turned on, RDY LED: flashing quickly, CTRL LED: turned off). If it is not, reset the new
CPU module and check again whether it is in the aforementioned status
6. See Resource Configurator or the maintenance homepage to check the items in
“Check Items before Executing APC”
7. Perform cable connection for the control network. During the performance, the
control network 1 or the control network 2 must be able to communicate with the
control-side CPU module. If communication is not possible, APC operation fails, and
the new CPU goes down
8. When “Automatic APC startup” is enabled, APC is automatically executed by the
operation in the procedure 7. See the indication on the LED of the control-side CPU
module to check whether APC has been started up (HRDY LED: flashing quickly,
RDY LED: turned on, CTRL LED: turned on). Also see the indication on the LED of
the standby-side CPU module to check whether APC has been completed (HRDY
LED: turned on, RDY LED: turned on, CTRL LED: turned off). When “Automatic
APC startup” is disabled, execute the “APC (All Program Copy) instruction” using
IMPORTANT
During APC execution, the control cycle length increases 1 to 2 seconds for 1 cycle only. In
addition, as indicated above, when APC automatic startup has been set, APC may be executed
at a timing not intended by the operator in cases in which temporary CPU problems exist, etc.
Accordingly, the APC automatic startup setting should only be conducted with applications for
which there will be no problem regardless of the timing at which APC processing occurs.
l Check Items before Executing APC

Before executing APC, be sure to check the following items:
• Model type of the CPU module
To check the style number of the standby-side CPU, refer to its model name by one of the
following:
A marking on the upper or lateral side of the CPU module.
Maintenance homepage

The settings of APC operation speed (high/low) and automatic startup differ depending on
the CPU style combination. Refer to the table below for available settings:

APC operation Control operation while APC is
CPU style combination Automatic APC startup
speed executed
Style 1 - Style 1 (*1)
The control operation is on-hold
Style 2 - Style 2 Low Not available temporarily.
The I/O operation is set to fallback. (*3)
Style 2 - Style 3 (*2)
Control scan becomes 1 to 2 seconds
Style 3 - Style 3 High Available
longer for one scan.
*1: For dual-redundant configuration by the CPU of Style 1, both CPUs must be Style S1.
*2: This combination functions within Style S2. When either CPU is replaced with a CPU of Style S2, APC can be executed only after
power OFF/ON or reboot.
*3: When the fallback operation is enabled, directly connected instruments such as PID will be MAN status automatically.
• APC operation speed (high/low)

High-speed APC can be executed in only one combination of CPU modules, but only low-
speed APC is available for the other combinations. When low-speed APC is performed,
control operation is on hold temporarily, so that operation is largely affected.
The APC operation speed setting (high/low) can be referred to in Resource Configurator
or on the maintenance homepage. Before executing APC, check the CPU module’s model
type and the operation speed set for APC.
• Automatic APC startup setting (enable/disable)
The automatic APC startup setting can be referred to in Resource Configurator or on the
maintenance homepage.
When the automatic APC startup setting is enabled, APC is automatically performed upon
the CPU module mounting. During the performance, an extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the
control period occurs once. Since the performance of automatic APC could affect control
operation, be sure to check the setting before executing APC.
Even if the setting to enable the automatic APC startup setting has been performed, that
setting could have been invalidated, and “Disabled” could be indicated. The APC operation
speed setting required for the automatic APC startup setting is not available for all CPU style
combinations.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for initializing the control right information, see C3.6, “Initializing the Control Right Information.”
IMPORTANT
• When duplexing the CPU of an FCN with the single configuration CPU, you must specify
“CPU x 2” in “Duplex setting of CPU modules” of the base module before installing the CPU
module.
• When duplexing a CPU module, the basic software of the same version should be used.
TIP
For more information on settings of a base module, refer to A1.2 “Base Module.”

C3.5 Replacing FCN/FCJ System Cards

This section describes the procedure for replacing the FCN/FCJ system card of the
standby side CPU module while control is being executed when the FCN uses duplex CPU
modules.
Replacing the FCN/FCJ system card requires the System Card for FCN/FCJ Spare Parts.
Before the replacement, download the license file reissued from the license management
system.
SEE
ALSO - For more information about the FCN/FCJ Software License Support Contract, refer to “The FCN/FCJ
Software License Support Contract (Bull 43D02L22-03E).”
- For precautions of replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, refer to “C3.7 Precautions” in this document.
1. Disconnect the wires (control network, etc.) of the standby side CPU module.
2. Remove the standby side CPU module from the base module.
3. In the Resource Configurator, import the duplex CPU license file that corresponds to the
new FCN/FCJ system card and download it to the control side CPU module.
After downloading, “The changes of CPU module will take effect after restarting controller”
appears, but there is no need to reboot if only the serial number for the FCN/FCJ system
card of the standby side CPU has been changed in the license file.
4. Replace the FCN/FCJ system card of the removed standby side CPU module.
5. Fasten the standby side CPU module in place in the base module with screws.
6. Follow the procedure from Step 5 of “C3.4 Replacing CPU Modules” and execute the APC.
IMPORTANT
Do not install or remove an FCN/FCJ system card while the power is turned on.

C3.6 Initializing the Control Right Information

By performing the following procedure to initialize the control right information on the
maintenance CPU module, the CPU module replacement work can be simplified. This
also ensures safe operation without transferring the control right. If initialization is not
performed, it is unknown as to which unit will become the Control side.
l Initialization by Memory Volatilization

Remove battery for five minutes or more from CPU module for replacement. Then SRAM
memory will vaporize and control right information will be initialized.
Attach battery to CPU module later.
l Initialization using the Shutdown Switch

Turn on the power or press the reset switch while the shutdown switch is pressed. Verify that the
unit has entered “Clear Control Right” mode (HRDY LED flashes slowly, other LED’s are off) (It
will take approximately 5 seconds.) If the unit doesn’t enter this mode, perform the above step
again.
l Initialization performed by Setting the Standby Side CPU

Perform online connection of the CPU module to the FCN being operated in single configuration.
The startup processing of the connected CPU will be performed. Verify that the unit has entered
“Load Complete Status” (HRDY LED is lit, RDY LED is blinking quickly, and the CTRL LED is
off.) If the unit doesn’t enter this status, press the reset switch to initiate the startup processing
again. The CPU module that enters the “Load Complete Status” has the control right information
initialized. Press the shutdown switch and to enter the power down enabled status, and remove
the CPU.
IMPORTANT
It is recommended to replace the duplex CPU module online.
When the online replacement is not accepted, initilize the CPU module in some of the ways
above.

C3.7 Precautions
l CPU Module Combination
Use a couple of the same type of CPU modues.
A paring of NFCP100 and NFCP501/NFCP502 is not allowed for duplex CPU.
l FCN/FCJ System Card Combination

Use a couple of the same type of the FCN/FCJ system cards.
The following table shows the allowed combinations of software licenses and spare parts.
Table Model Combinations of Software Licenses and Spare Parts
Software Licenses Spare Parts
NT712AJ-LM01E NT225AA-01
l System Software Version

Use the same system software version for both CPU modules. If the versions differ,
incompatibilities may occur during the equivalence processing between the CPUs. This is the
reason that the software version is checked when the Standby side CPU requests memory
synchronization (APC) to the Control side CPU. If the software versions do not match, the
Standby side CPU shuts down and a system alarm is generated.
l Style of CPU Module

Use NFCP100 CPU modules in the following style combinations:
Style 1 - Style 1
Style 2 - Style 2
Style 2 - Style 3
Style 3 - Style 3
In other combinations (e.g., Style 1 - Style 2), APC processing cannot be executed.
In that case, the standby-side CPU goes down, and a system alarm is output.
IMPORTANT
For a duplex CPU configuration, the Online Download Function is enabled only when two style-3
CPU modules are used in combination.
Make sure the following precautions when using style-2 and style-3 CPU modules in
combination.
• If the style-3 CPU module is started in the single mode and the style-2 CPU module is
connected to the standby side of the base module while the controller is running, the APC
command cannot be executed. In this case, the APC command aborts due to incompatible
between the SRAM sizes, and a system alarm is issued.
However Style-2 and style-3 CPU modules can be used in combination in a duplex mode,

if they are first connected to the base module and then started up. When the two CPU
modules are started up in this way, it is also possible to recover them to duplex mode in
case one CPU module fails. In this case, it is possible to recover them to duplex mode with
APC after changing CPU. (In this case, either a style-2 or style-3 CPU module can be used
as a replacement for the failed CPU module.)
• Be sure to save the retain data before turning off the CPU modules when:
- a dual-redundant CPU configuration by using two style-3 CPU modules in combination, or
- the controller is first started up with a single-CPU configuration using a style-3 CPU
module and then turned off, and restarted with a dual-redundant CPU configuration using
style-2 and style-3 CPU modules in combination.
If the retain data is not saved, the data may be lost when the controller is restarted.
l Configuration
The settings to FCN such as IP addresses can only be performed in the Control side CPU. “IP
Address Setting Status” and “Maintenance Status” do not exist on the Standby side CPU. The
configuration information on the Standby side CPU is synchronized during APC execution.
l Equalization Processing
When the Standby side CPU starts up, the APC processing is performed to synchronize the
status of the Control side CPU module to the Standby side CPU. APC is performed in the two
steps shown below. During this processing, configuration or download to the FCN from Resource
Configurator must not be performed. These requests will generate errors. The system alarm
message will be generated when the execution of the following processing have started or
ended.
1. Configuration file synchronization
2. Synchronization of volatile memory and non-volatile memory
The control operations will be locked completely.
After “1.” is complete, control operation will be restarted, and the system settings file
that stores information such as the IP address will be copied to the Standby side CPU.
The synchronized files are the minimum system configuration files only. Note that user-
generated data such as JAVA applications will not be synchronized.
IMPORTANT
The Standby side CPU will start synchronization when “1.” is complete, but will be Ready
(functions are a duplex system) only when “2.” is complete. Therefore, the system will operate as
a single system until “2.” is completed. When the Control side CPU down in this state, the entire
system will be down (both sides are down.)
TIP
During equalization, communication is performed between the control CPU and the standby CPU. Even when
FCN is not connected to a control network, connect the control CPU and the standby CPU by a network cable
when equalization is performed.

l Transferring the Control Right
1. When an error occurs on the Control side CPU
The control right will be transferred to the standby side CPU and control is continued.
However, if communication is performed through control networks with VDS or other FCN/
FCJ, etc., the control network communication will be interrupted for an instant by the switch
processing.
2. When an error occurs on the Standby side CPU
The Control side CPU will become single status and continue operation.
TIP
When an error is detected in the control network, the control right will not be transferred. For example, removing
the network cable on the Control side CPU will not transfer the control right.
l Cautions for High-speed APC

While high-speed APC is being executed, the functions below are affected:
• Network dual-redundancy function
While APC is being executed, a node fail alarm is triggered, but it is cleared as soon as APC
is completed.
• Control function
While APC is being executed, an extension of 1 to 2 seconds in the control period occurs
once. During the execution, the following effects occur:
Function Effect
Input processing None (*1)
Control computation Control computation for PID and the like is delayed.
Output processing Outputting of pulse width and time-proportional ON/OFF is delayed.
*1: Use R1.60.01 or later of the PAS portfolio.

The integrated values of the analog input and the pulse input increase with the use of R1.50 or earlier of the PAS portfolio. That
increase is added to the delay.
• Communication portfolios
While APC is being executed, communication processing stops. Upon completion of
APC, a communication error can be detected. In that case, perform error processing (e.g.,
retransmission) by the relevant application.
• Tools
Cautions for the tools of the FCN/FCJ during APC processing are as follows:
Tool Cautions
If download is performed during APC execution, an error occurs. In that case,
redo the download after the completion of APC.
If project load and/or boot project load is performed during APC execution, an
error occurs. In that case, redo the load operation after the completion of APC.
Logic Designer
When executing APC, close the project control dialog. APC processing cannot
be executed while that dialog is open.
If the retain data save operation is performed during APC execution, save
Retain Data Save
processing is executed upon completion of APC.

<C4. I/O Module Operation> C4-1
C4. I/O Module Operation

The followings describe the operation of I/O modules installed in the base module of FCN.
C4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the operation specification of I/O modules when there are errors
in system functions, and the operation specification of I/O modules when it recovers from
the errors.
The following is a summary of error statuses and operation specifications.
Table I/O Module Operation when a Module Malfunctions

I/O module in main nest I/O module in expansion nest
Error
When malfunctions During recovery When malfunctions During recovery
Output fallback Recovery operation Output fallback Recovery operation
CPU module
operation from higher level errors operation from higher level errors
Control unit power Output fallback Recovery operation
- Restart operation
supply operation from higher level errors
Expansion unit power
Undetected Continued operation - Restart operation
supply
Output fallback Recovery operation Output fallback Recovery operation
SB bus
operation from higher level errors operation from higher level errors
SB bus repeat module Output fallback Recovery operation
Undetected Continued operation
Undetected operation from higher level errors
I/O module - Restart operation - Restart operation
Recovery operation Recovery operation
APC in progress - (*1) - (*1)
from higher level errors from higher level errors
*1: Output fallback operation while low-speed APC

C4.2 Operation When an I/O Module Malfunctions

C4.2.1 Output Fallback Operation
When an error is generated on higher-level system functions such as CPU module errors
and power shutoff, this function allows the output levels of the output module to maintain
the current value or forces the value to be changed to user-defined values. The “Line
Access Loss Time” to detect errors is fixed to 4 seconds by the system.
The output signal operations during fallback taking analog output as an example are
shown below.
When CPU Error Time < Line Access Loss Time
Line Access Loss Time

Normal
CPU module status
Abnormal
I/O module output signal
When CPU Error Time ≥ Line Access Loss Time
Line Access Loss Time

Normal
CPU module status
Abnormal
I/O module output signal Output Fallback Operation
Fallback output specification value

C030201E.ai
Figure Output Fallback Operation
Using Resource Configurator, perform settings for output fallback operations.

The following settings can be made:
<Analog output module>
• Fallback output processing: Enabled/Disabled (Specified for each I/O module)
• Fallback output operation: Maintain current status/User-defined output values (Specified for
each point)
<Digital output module>
• Fallback output operation: Maintain current status/OFF/None (Specified for each I/O
module)
<Pulse width output module>
• Fallback output operation: Turn off after outputting all pulse signals / Immediately turn off
/None (Can be specified on an I/O module basis)

C4.2.2 Operations of Other Functions When an I/O Module

Malfunctions
l Output Point Operation
Performs operations defined in Output Fallback operations, except in the case of situations
where output is not possible, such as power failure.
l Control Logic Operation

Data status BAD is set to I/O data.
The PAS POU will fallback to MAN.
Also, output signals directly to the PAS POU will be IMAN status.

C4.3 Recovery Operations from Error Status

C4.3.1 Recovery Operations from CPU Errors
The following shows the operation for each I/O module at the recovery from error status CPU can
not access I/O modules , for example , SB bus error , control task stop. (*1)
Standard analog input Load new data
Measured temperature input Load new data
% input Load new data
Pulse column input Maintains RV Value (Pulse count values)
Reset to 0 after recovery is made from power failure
Status input Load new data
Push-button input Load new data (Input prior to error recovery is invalid)
Standard analog output Reads back the I/O module output value and performs
tracking
Status output Reads back the I/O module output value and performs
tracking
Pulse width output Setting output to OFF

* 1: CPU error, it is the state where the CPU is not accessing the I / O card. Examples , SB bus anomaly, the control task was
stopped. It may the control task is stopped due to error of the control application.
For more information, refer to C5. “Operation of the control application”
TIP
• The operation “Tracking” or “Setting output to OFF” based on output processing takes place only when this
operation is used in combination with output-processing NPAS POUs.
• If an application is processing output signals, pulse width output operation depends on that application.
C4.3.2 Restart Operation

The output status immediately after the output module recovers from an error status, the
following status will be maintained until the control logic output is commenced.
• Current output (4 to 20 mA): Output 1.25 mA (-17.19%)
• Voltage output (1 to 5 V): Output 0.31 V (-17.19%)
• Contact output: Reset to 0
• Pulse width output : Setting output to OFF

<C5. Operation of the Control Application> C5-1
C5. Operation of the Control Application

Control application continues to run in the setting interval .
However, the table below error occurs, the control task is Stopped.
• CTRL LED of the CPU is flashing quickly.
• For dual CPU, don’t switching operation of the CPU.
• It becomes the I / O fallback.
• System alarm occurs. We can confirm from the message screen of the VDS alarm.
Table Operation of the Control Application Error
Error Action
Division by zero occurs (integer variables) The task will stop.
Data exceeds the range of the array or structure The task will stop when the check box
“Array boundary check” on the extend-
ed setting in the target setting dialog is
checked.
Please check the array boundary.
If you do not check, the memory con-
tents next to the array may be broken.
An error occurs in a string operation The task will continue. If string process-
EX1: Input more than 32 bytes a characters as STRING(32) type data ing continues, multiple error messages
EX2: Input more than 80 bytes a characters as STRING type data(*1) are displayed.
The execution of the task is not completed within the watchdog time The task will stop when the check box
“The task aborts when the execution
time of task exceeds a watch dog
time.” in the target setting dialog is
checked.
A stack is overflowed The task will stop when the check box
“Stack check” on the extended setting
in the target setting dialog is checked.
*1: STRING type is usually up to 80 bytes.

Blank Page
<C6. Operation of FCN-RTU I/O> C6-1
C6. Operation of FCN-RTU I/O

The followings describe the operation of FCN-RTU CPU module with built-in I/Os and I/O
modules installed in slots 3 to 5 (hereinafter referred to as I/O modules).
C6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the operation specifications of FCN-RTU CPU module built-in I/Os
and I/O modules when system functions malfunction and the failures are recovered. See
the table below.
Table Behavior for CPU Module Built-in I/Os and I/O Modules Fail
CPU Module Built-in I/Os I/O Modules (*1)
Error
When Fails When Recovered When Fails When Recovered
Recover operation Recover operation
Output fallback Output fallback
CPU Module from higher level from higher level
operation operation
errors errors
Control Unit
– Restart operation – Restart operation
Power Supply
Recover operation Recover operation
SB Bus from higher level from higher level
operation operation
errors errors
CPU Module
– Restart operation Undetected Continued Operation
Built-in I/Os
I/O Modules Undetected Continued Operation – Restart operation
*1: The I/O module behavior is the same as the mentioned in the “I/O module in main nest” described in Table “I/O Module Operation
when an I/O Module Malfunctions” of Section C4.1 “Overview.”
The behavior of FCN-RTU CPU module built-in I/O when failed and recovered are the same as
the FCN extended I/O module, except for the reset switch and rebooting from the Maintenance
homepage shown in the table below. For the output fallback behavior and other behaviors, refer
to C3 “I/O Module Operation.”
Table Behavior for Each Operation when Performed
CPU Module Built-in I/Os I/O Modules
Operation
Hardware normal Hardware error (*1) Hardware normal Hardware error
RESET Switch Restart operation Continued Operation
Rebooting from
Maintenance Restart operation Continued Operation
operation operation
Homepage
*1: When FCN-RTU CPU module built-in I/O module fails, the operation status display LED RDY changes to the red flashing status.

Blank Page
<C7. Maintaining Hardware> C7-1
C7. Maintaining Hardware

This chapter describes maintenance (inspection, hardware replacement, etc.) in order to
operate the system continuously.
The following figure shows the configuration of FCN/FCJ controllers. Refer to the Table
“Configuration Units of Controllers” and the descriptions in the subsequent sections.
Module Power
Power supply and CPU module Supply
can be duplexed. Module
CPU
Module Integrated configuration of
I/O
power supply and CPU
FCN-RTU FCJ
Module
Base
Baseboard
FCN-500
FCN-100 C050001E.ai
Figure Configuration of FCN/FCJ Controllers
Table Configuration Units of Controllers
Controller Types Configuration Units Remarks
FCN-500 • Module unit • On-board flash memory (Not removable)

FCN-100 • Module unit • Removable FCN/FCJ system card
• On-board flash memory (Not removable)
FCN-RTU • Module unit
• Built-in I/O of the CPU module
• Main unit (integrated configuration of power
• The base board allows removing the I/O
FCJ supply and CPU)
terminal from the main unit
• Base board

C7.1 Periodic Inspection

The periodic inspection items consist of the minimum inspection items to check for
operation malfunctions. Using the system under the optimal conditions will allow stable
operation.
Table Daily Inspection Items

Inspection item Inspection content Judgment criteria
Is the voltage deviation measured at the power supply Depends on the specifications for
Power supply
terminal within specifications? each power supply module
Is the voltage deviation measured at the I/O terminal Depends on the specifications for
I/O power supply
block within specifications? each I/O module
Is the ambient temperature (temperature within panel)
0 to 55 °C (*1)
normal?
Environment
Is the ambient humidity (humidity within panel) normal? 5 to 95% RH (No condensation)
It is free of dust or debris? No dust or debris.
Is each module installed properly? No looseness.
Are the connectors for cables inserted properly and
No looseness
Installation securely attached?
Are any of the external wiring screws loose? No looseness
Are any external wiring cable severed? No external anomaly.
Does the LED for each module indicate proper Depends on the specifications for
LED Display
operation status? each module.
RAS information Does the RAS information indicate proper operation? (*2)
*1: FCJ can operate between 0 to 60 °C only when the control network is in single mode.
FCN-500(Extended Temperature range option) can operate between -20 to 70°C
FCN-RTU can operate between -40 to 70°C only when I/O module is not installed.
*2: Verify the contents of RAS information.
SEE
ALSO For the details of RAS information, refer to the help of Resource Configurator.
n Tools Needed for Inspection

• Screwdriver, flathead screwdriver
• Tester or digital voltmeter
• Thermometer
• Humidity measurement device

C7.2 Maintenance and Replacement Operations

This section describes the precautions and replacement procedure for maintenance and
replacement operations.
C7.2.1 Precautions for Operation

This section describes the precautions when performing FCN maintenance and replace-
ment operations.
l Precautions regarding Static Electricity

• Always store or carry maintenance parts contained in static-free bags. (When FCN/FCJ are
shipped from the factory, they are contained in static-free bags with static electricity warning
labels.)
• When performing maintenance, use a grounded wrist strap with a 1MΩ grounding resist-
ance. Be sure to ground the wrist strap.
• When performing operations on a table, be sure to perform operation on an anti-static sheet
that is properly grounded with 1MΩ of grounding resistance. Be sure to wear wrist straps
when performing operations. Avoid placing plastic items that may conduct electricity.
• Avoid touching maintenance parts without using conductive sheets or wrist straps.
C050201E.ai
Figure Example when Handling Modules
CAUTION
Precautions regarding Electric Shock
• Always turn off the power supply of the equipment that will be handled when exchanging
power modules.
• Turn off the field-side power supply when wiring 100 V AC or 200 V AC signal wires.
• Beware of the electric shock since hazardous voltage may be given to the PI terminal of
AEGP1D (Terminal Board for NFGP813)
Precautions regarding Explosions
• Maintenance operations cannot be performed while power is supplied unless it is verified
that there are no explosive gases in the environment.

C7.2.2 Replacing FCN Modules

The following describes the procedure to replace FCN modules.
The FCN-500 and FCN-100 can use duplex CPU modules, Power Supply modules, and SB Bus
Repeat modules. Duplex modules can have hardware replaced while online.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for replacing duplex CPU modules, see C2.4, “Replacing CPU Modules (FCN-500), C3.4,
“Replacing CPU Modules (FCN-100) .”
l Replacing Power Supply Modules

Follow the procedure below to replace Power Supply modules.
Duplex Power Supply modules can be replaced without stopping the system (The replacement
procedure is the same as single configuration).
1. Shut off the power supply to the power supply module that is being replaced
2. Remove the power supply cable and line filter grounding cable from the terminal block
3. Remove the target Power Supply module from the Base module
4. In reverse order of above, install the Power Supply module, power supply cable, and line
filter grounding cable
5. Turn on the power supply
l Replacing Single NFCP501/NFCP502 CPU Modules

Follow the procedure below to replace single-CPU modules.
1. Save retain data to the on-board Flash Memory
2. Backup system files using backup command
3. If the target CPU is on, turn it off by using the shutdown switch
4. Turn off the power supply as required (If a CPU module is replaced without cutting off the
power supply, the I/O module will operate in accordance with the fallback instructions)
5. Remove the control network cable
6. Remove the CPU module from the Base module
7. Install the new CPU module to the Base module and attach the control network
9. Turn on FCN-500 and start on maintenance mode
10. Restore backup files using Restore command
11. Reboot FCN-500 on online mode
WARNING
After hardware failure, data stored on the on-board Flash Memory can not be retrieved.
It is recommended to backup retain data and system files. For the backup and restore
procedure, refer to C1.2 Backup and Restore Operations.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for replacing duplex CPU modules, see C2.4, “Replacing CPU Modules.”

l Replacing Single NFCP100 CPU Modules
Follow the procedure below to replace single-CPU modules.
1. If the target CPU is on, turn it off by using the shutdown switch
2. Turn off the power supply as required (If a CPU module is replaced without cutting off the
power supply, the I/O module will operate in accordance with the fallback instructions)
5. Remove the FCN/FCJ system card from the CPU module that was removed
6. Insert the FCN/FCJ system card that was removed into the new CPU module
7. Install the CPU module to the Base module and attach the control network
IMPORTANT
• Before replacing the CPU module, back up the data (retained data, etc.) using the backup
tools (FCXTOOL.EXE ).
• Always turn on the FCN/FCJ power after the FCN/FCJ system card has been installed.
Do not insert or remove the FCN/FCJ system card while the power is on.
• If a CPU module is replaced, the retained data will be lost. In the case of a single CPU, sav-
ing the retained data to an FCN/FCJ system card enables the retained data to be used to
restart the system.
SEE
ALSO For the procedure for replacing duplex CPU modules, see C3.4, “Replacing CPU Modules.”
l Replacing NFCP050 CPU Module

Follow the procedure below to replace CPU modules.
1. Save retain data to the on-board Flash Memory
2. Backup system files using backup command
3. If the target CPU is on, use the shutdown switch to turn it off
4. Turn off the power
6. If CPU module built-in I/O is connected, remove the MIL connector cable
8. Install the new CPU module in the Base module and connect the control network
9. If CPU module built-in I/O was connected, re-connect the MIL connector cable that was
removed
10. Turn on FCN-RTU and start on maintenance mode
11. Restore backup files using Restore command
12. Reboot FCN-RTU on online mode

WARNING
After hardware failure, data stored on the on-board Flash Memory can not be retrieved.
It is recommended to backup retain data and system files. For the backup and restore
procedure, refer to C1.2 Backup and Restore Operations.
l Replacing I/O Modules

Follow the procedure below to replace an I/O module online.
1. Remove the pressure clamp terminal block or MIL connector cable
2. Remove the malfunctioning I/O module
3. Adjust the new I/O module’s hardware settings to the removed I/O module’s
4. Install the new I/O module
5. Install the Pressure clamp terminal block or MIL connector cable that was removed
6. Using Resource Configurator, download the I/O module settings information (This step is
not normally necessary. It needs to be performed, however, if “Enable I/O Module Auto-
Load” is not set in Resource Configurator)
IMPORTANT
If the new I/O module is an analog voltage output module, which is NFAV542 or NFAV544, re-
move the I/O module once and then install it again after downloading.
SEE
ALSO For hardware settings, see “n Setting Elements” of A1.6, “I/O modules.”
l Replacing Bus Repeat Modules

Follow the procedure below to replace an SB Bus Repeat module.
1. Remove the target SB Bus Repeat Module
2. Remove the T-joint from the SB Bus Repeat module. Leave the cable connected
3. Attach the T-joint to the new SB Bus Repeat module
4. Install the SB Bus Repeat module to the Base module
IMPORTANT
The SB Bus Repeat module should be replaced with the SB Bus extension cable connected to
the T-joint. (This excludes situations when replacing the SB Bus cable to the T-joint itself.)
The other SB Bus Repeat modules connected via the SB bus will be able to operate without be-
ing affected.

C7.2.3 Disabling FCN-RTU Ethernet Power Saving Function

FCN-RTU can be operated with less power consumption by using the Ethernet power sav-
ing function. However, the power saving function needs to be disabled when the engineer-
ing tools and Maintenance page are used for maintenance. For details on the Ethernet
power saving function, see B1.9 “FCN-RTU Ethernet Power Saving Function.”
n Recovering from Power OFF Status

When LED1 in the CPU module, refer to the following figure, is off, the network is in the Power
OFF status in which the Ethernet function cannot be used. To use the Ethernet function, press
the NETWORK ON/OFF switch once. When the Ethernet power saving function is disabled,
LED1 turns on.
NFCP050-S00 S1
HRDYRDY CTRL
RESET
SHUT
DOWN
SERIAL
RS-422/
4 RS-485
CN1 CN2
3 RS-232
2 RS-232
1 RS-232
NETWORK
ON/OFF
ON/OFF (DI/O) Switch
(AI/O)
LED1
LAN status
LED2
NETWORK
C050202E.ai
Figure NETWORK ON/OFF Switch and LAN Status Display LED
TIP
To change FCN-RTU in the power saving status again after finishing maintenance, press the NETWORK ON/
OFF switch once. When the Ethernet power saving function is enabled, LED1 turns off.

C7.2.4 Replacing a Malfunctioning FCJ

Follow the procedure below to replace an FCJ controller.
1. Turn off the power of the FCJ.
2. Remove the power supply cable and control network cable.
3. Remove the FCN/FCJ system card.
4. Remove the four screws that secure the main unit to the FCJ Base board.
5. Remove the main unit from the Base board.
6. Install a new main unit in reverse directions used to remove the main unit.
TIP
The FCJ is designed so that the main unit and base board can be separated so that the main FCJ unit can be
replaced without having to redo the field wires.
4. Main unit screws (4 locations)
HRDY
RDY
CTL 3. Remove the system card
2. Remove the power supply cable
5. Remove the main unit
C050203E.ai
Figure Replacing the FCJ Main Unit
IMPORTANT
• Do not drop the main unit when mounting or removing the FCJ main unit.
• If an FCJ is replaced, the retained data will be lost. Saving the retained data to an FCN/FCJ
system card enables the retained data to be used when restart the system.

C7.3 Parts with Limited Lifespan

This section describes parts that have limited lifespan.
Parts with limited lifespan are those parts that decrease in performance and reliability
over time, resulting in loss of function or ultimately to breakdown. For FCN/FCJ, parts
with limit lifespan are defined as “parts that are estimated to have function loss and
malfunction due to wear within 10 years when the temperature of the air intake from the
bottom of the module is 45 °C on the average.”
C7.3.1 FCN CPU Module/FCJ Batteries

The FCN CPU module/FCJ have Li batteries installed for use to maintain data when the power is
off and for the RTC (Real-time clock).
The battery for the CPU module of the FCN-500 can be replaced in the online state or the offline
state. The battery for the CPU module of the FCN-100/FCJ can be replaced in only the offline
state. When replacing a battery in the offline state, retaining data and RTC (real time clock) are
initialized, so preservation of retaining data and readjustment of a date and the time are needed.
The recommended replacement period varies depending on the operating environment and
status (operation time and ambient temperature).
Table Limited Lifespan Component (Battery)
Controller Types Product name Part number
FCN-500 Battery S9049FE
FCN-100
FCN-RTU Battery S9883FA
FCJ
n Recommended Replacement Period

The battery lifespan greatly depends on ambient temperature. The following shows the ambient
temperatures and recommended replacement periods of the battery.
A label on which battery replacement dates may be written is supplied with the unit. As a guide,
write the year and month when the unit should be replaced next time on the label and affix it to an
easily visible location.
Table FCN-500 Ambient Temperatures and Recommended Replacement Periods of the Battery
Ambient temperature (*1) Replacement period
25 °C 10 years
40 °C 10 years
55 °C 6 years
70 °C 3 years
*1: The ambient temperature is the average temperature in which the unit is used.
Table FCN-100 and FCJ Ambient Temperatures and Recommended Replacement Periods of the
Battery
25 °C 10 years
35 °C 6 years
45 °C 4 years

Table FCN-RTU Ambient Temperatures and Recommended Replacement Periods of the Battery
-40 °C 10 years
25 °C 10 years
35 °C 8 years
45 °C 4.5 years
55 °C 3 years
70 °C 2 years
’ .
BATTERY ’ .
LIFE ’ .
C050301E.ai
Figure Battery Replacement Period Label
IMPORTANT
• Even when the average ambient temperature is below 25 °C, the battery should be replaced
after 10 years.
• When the unit is used over the recommended exchange period, the battery may leak.
• If the battery leaks, a strong odor may be produced and the metal parts may be corroded.
• Replace batteries that have leaked as soon as possible.
• Replacing the battery clears the data storage memory and clock setting. Before requesting
a battery replacement, back up the data (retained data, etc.) using a software tool. Set the
clock in the Maintenance window after replacing battery.
SEE
ALSO See B1.13.1, “Functions of Interface Flags” for the data backup procedure.

n Replacing the FCN-500 CPU Module’s Battery

In the CPU module for the FCN-500, the battery can be replaced in the online state. If the battery
is replaced on the offline state, the date and time in the CPU module will be volatile.
TIP
If the battery is replaced on the offline state, the date and time in the CPU module will be volatile.
l Preparation
Prepare the new battery.
l Replacement
The battery for the CPU module of the FCN can be replaced as follows:
1. Remove the CPU cover while pressing the lower part of the CPU cover.
CPU cover
C060331E.ai
Figure Removing CPU Cover
2. Press and hold the top and bottom of the latch of the battery case, pull out before each bat-
tery case.
Latch
Battery case
Latch
C060332E.ai
Figure Removing Battery Case

3. With a cable near the connector, pull out the cable from the connector.
Connector C060333E.ai
Figure Pulling the cable
4. Follow the procedure in reverse to install the replacement battery. The battery connector ap-
pears as shown below. When being installed, the connector protrusion is on the left side.
C060334E.ai
Figure Installing the Connector
5. Install a replacement battery case to the CPU module. Make sure that the latch on the top
and bottom of the battery case is caught.
Put the battery cable to the hook portion of the cover.
C060335E.ai C060336E.ai
Figure Installing the Battery Case
6. Install the CPU cover.

TIP
• The single CPU module with the exhausted battery starts up in the maintenance mode after power failure
and recovery.
In this case, replace the battery following the above-mentioned procedure.
The retained data is automatically restored just as it was saved last. Set the control parameters and other
parameters if necessary.
• In the duptex CPU configuration of FCN, after power failure and recovery, the CPU moduie with the well-
charged battery starts up with the control right, and the other CPU module with the exhausted battery starts
up as the standby-side CPU artid logs the message that the battery is exhausted. After checking the log,
replace the battery along the above-mentioned step 1 and 2.
If both have the exhausted battery, the control-side CPU starts up in the maintenance mode and the
standby-side CPU in the APC waiting status. Take precautions against this control action stopping status.
Replace the batteries and reboot the CPU modules along the procedure. In urgent case, after setting the
date and time, the CPU modules can be rebooted in the online mode without replacing the batteries. After
this, however, replace the batteries as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT
Do not short circuit the wire when replacing the battery.
Short-circuiting the battery can result in the battery getting damage through generating heat or
leaking.

n Replacing the FCN-100 CPU Module’s Battery in Single CPU Configu-

ration
l Preparation
Prepare the new battery and the materials shown in “B2.2 Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous
Controllers.”
TIP
Save the current retained data in the online status by opening the FCN/FCJ Maintenance menu using the Web
browser. The retained data is automaticalty restored by the FCN reboot in the replacement procedure 10.
SEE
ALSO See B2.4.7, “Saving Retain Data” on saving retained data.
l Replacement
The battery for the CPU module of the FCN can be replaced as follows:
1. Remove the control network cable and other cables from the CPU module
3. Verify that the battery is connected via cable on the back side of the CPU module
Connector
Battery
C050302E.ai
Figure CPU Module Backside

4. Pull the upper area of the battery and then remove the bottom area of the battery
Battery being pulled out Battery pulled out

C050303E.ai
Figure Removing Battery
5. Pull the connector down to remove it
C050304E.ai
Figure Connector being Pulled

6. Follow the procedure in reverse to install the replacement battery. The battery connector ap-
pears as shown below. When being installed, the connector protrusion is on the left side
Connector Facing Socket Connector being Installed Connector Installed

C050305E.ai
Figure Installing Connector
7. Attach the CPU module to the Base module

8. Attach the control network cable and other cables
9. After the CPU module starts up in the maintenance mode, set the date and time by opening
the FCN/FCJ Maintenance menu using the Web browser
10. Reboot the CPU module to change to the online mode by opening the FCN/FCJ Mainte-
nance menu using the Web browser
SEE
ALSO • See B2.4.6, “Setting Date and Time” on setting the date and time
• See B2.4.5, “Reboot” on the reboot in the online status
TIP
The single CPU module with the exhausted battery starts up in the maintenance mode after power failure and
recovery.
In this case, replace the battery following the above-mentioned procedure 1 through 10.
The retained data is automatically restored just as it was saved last. Set the control parameters and other param-
eters if necessary.
IMPORTANT
Short-circuiting the battery can result in the battery getting damage through generating heat or
leaking.

n Replacing the FCN-100 CPU Module’s Battery in Duplex CPU Configu-

ration
Duplex CPU modules can be replaced without stopping the system. The procedure consists of
battery replacement (standby-side CPU module), APC (All Program Copy), control right transfer
and battery replacement (the other CPU module).
l Preparation
Confirm whether the CPU style combination has any constraints shown in “C3.7 Precautions.”
Prepare the new battery. When APC manual startup is required, set up an environment for Re-
source Configurator.
l Step 1: Battery Replacement (Standby-Side CPU Module)

1. Remove the control network cable and other cables from the standby-side CPU module
2. Remove the standby-side CPU module form the Base module
3. Follow the replacement procedure 3 through 8 of “Replacing the FCN-100 CPU Module’s
Battery in Single CPU configuration”
l Step 2: APC (All Program Copy)

1. When “Automatic APC startup” is disabled, execute the “APC (All Program Copy) instruc-
tion” using Resource Configurator. When “Automatic APC startup” is enabled, APC auto-
matically starts by attaching the control network cable
2. Check whether APC has been completed by seeing the indication on the LED (HRDY
turned on, RDY turned on, CTRL turned off) of the standby-side CPU module
l Step 3: Control Right Transfer

Push the reset switch of the control-side CPU module to transfer the control right to the battery
replaced CPU module without stopping the control operation.
IMPORTANT
Do not push the shutdown switch of the control-side CPU module, or the system stops the control
operation and shuts itsetf down.
SEE
ALSO For operation status and front LED (HRDY, RDY, CTRL) status of CPU modules, see B1.5, “Operation Status of
FCN/FCJ Autonomous Controllers.”

Display LED (from left)
HRDY
RDY
NFCP100-S00 S1 CTRL
HRDY RDY CTRL
Reset switch
RESET SYSTEM
MEDIA
SHUT
DOWN
NETWORK
SERIAL
C050306E.ai
Figure Reset Switch of CPU Module
l Step 4: Battery Replacement (The Other CPU Module)

The other CPU module (battery replacement unfinished) becomes the standby-side CPU module
by control right transfer of step 3. Follow the above-mentioned step 1 and 2.
TIP
In the duptex CPU configuration of FCN, after power failure and recovery, the CPU moduie with the well-charged
battery starts up with the control right, and the other CPU module with the exhausted battery starts up as the
standby-side CPU artid logs the message that the battery is exhausted. After checking the log, replace the battery
along the above-mentioned step 1 and 2.
If both have the exhausted battery, the control-side CPU starts up in the maintenance mode and the standby-side
CPU in the APC waiting status. Take precautions against this control action stopping status. Replace the batteries
and reboot the CPU modules along the procedure. In urgent case, after setting the date and time, the CPU mod-
ules can be rebooted in the online mode without replacing the batteries. After this, however, replace the batteries
as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT
Short-circuiting the battery can result in the battery getting damaged through generating heat or
leaking.

n Replacing the FCJ Battery
l Preparation
Prepare the new battery and the materials shown in “B2.2 Connecting to FCN/FCJ Autonomous
Controllers.”
TIP
Save the current retained data in the online status by opening the FCN/FCJ Maintenance menu using the Web
browser. The retained data is automaticalIy restored by the FCJ reboot in the replacement procedure 12.
SEE
ALSO See B2.4.7, “Saving Retain Data” on saving retained data.
l Replacement
Follow the procedure below to replace an FCJ’s battery.
1. Turn off the FCJ power
2. Remove the FCJ power supply cable and control network cable
3. Remove the four screws that secure the main unit to the FCJ Base board
4. Remove the FCJ main unit from the FCJ Base board
5. Verify that the battery is connected via cable on the back side of the FCJ module
Connector
Battery
C050307E.ai
Figure FCJ Backside

6. Pull out the battery. Remove the connector by pulling the cable and connector forward
Battery Pulled Out Connector being Removed

C050308E.ai
Figure Removing Battery
7. Follow the procedure in reverse to install the replacement battery.

The battery and connector appears are shown below.
When being installed, the connector protrusion is on the left side.
Connector Facing Socket Connector being Installed Connector Installed

C050305E.ai
Figure Installing Connector
TIP
For the FCJ, the pins are facing forward. The connector must be inserted from the front to the back. The protru-
sion of the connector is on the left side.
C050309E.ai
Figure Connector Attachment Area

8. Follow the procedure in reverse to install the FCJ main unit
9. Attach the control network cable and other cables
10. Power on FCJ
11. After the FCJ starts up in the maintenance mode, set the date and time by opening the FCN/
FCJ Maintenance menu using the Web browser
12. Reboot the FCJ to change to the online mode by opening the FCN/FCJ Maintenance menu
using the Web browser
SEE
ALSO • See B2.4.6, “Setting Date and Time” on setting the date and time
• See B2.4.5, “Reboot” on the reboot in the online status
TIP
The FCJ with the exhausted battery starts up in the maintenance mode after power failure and recovery.
In this case, replace the battery following the above-mentioned procedure 1 through 12.
The retained data is automatically restored just as it was saved Iast. Set the cantrol parameters and other param-
eters if necessary.
IMPORTANT
Short-circuiting the battery can result in the battery getting damaged throuth generating heat or
leaking.

n Handling Precautions Regarding the Battery

This device uses a lithium battery. The lithium battery is structurally sealed by glass seal and
laser welding, and lithium and thionyl chloride are charged inside. Therefore, improper handling
may cause the battery to leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite, resulting in injury or dam-
age to the equipment. To prevent these problems, be sure to observe the following precautions.
WARNING
• Never charge the battery.
If the battery is charged, the electrolyte inside the battery may bubble or the internal pres-
sure may rise due to generated gas. When this happens, the battery may leak electrolyte,
generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Do not use this battery except for the specified purpose.
The terminal structure or other aspect of the battery may be incompatible with the equip-
ment, resulting in poor contact or nonconforming voltage. When this happens, the battery
may leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Do not put the battery into fire, or heat, disassemble or modify the battery.
The glass seal, vent (safety valve) or other part of the battery may be damaged, causing the
battery to leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Do not connect the positive and negative electrodes of the battery in reverse.
Abnormal reaction may occur due to accidental charging or short-circuiting, causing the bat-
tery to leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Electrolyte is harmful to the human eyes. If electrolyte has gotten into the eye, do not rub
but rinse the eye thoroughly under clean running water and then immediately seek medical
attention.
• If electrolyte has been licked, immediately rinse the mouth and consult the doctor.
• Do not connect the positive and negative electrodes of the battery using a wire, etc., or
transport or store the battery with a metal necklace, hairpin, etc.
The battery will be shorted and excessive current may flow, causing the battery to leak elec-
trolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• If the battery is found leaking electrolyte or releasing odor, immediately dispose of the bat-
tery. Failure to do so may result in corroded metal due to the leaked electrolyte.
• Do not solder the battery directly.
The glass seal, vent (safety valve) or other part of the battery may be damaged by heat,
causing the battery to leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Do not remove or damage the exterior label of the battery (heat shrinkable tube).
The battery may be shorted and leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Do not drop or throw the battery or otherwise apply strong impact.
The battery may leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.
• Do not deform the battery.
The glass seal or vent (safety valve) of the battery may be damaged, causing the battery to
leak electrolyte, generate heat, burst or ignite.

IMPORTANT
• Use a lithium battery designed exclusively for use with FCN/FCJ.
• Do not charge, short or disassemble the battery or remove the electrodes.
• Do not increase the battery temperature beyond 100 °C through heating or burning.
• Do not wet the battery with water.
• Do not use or leave the battery in a high-temperature environment, such as a place exposed
to the direct sun or inside a car parked under the hot summer sun.
Doing so may cause the battery to leak electrolyte, generate heat or burst.
• Do not wet the battery with liquid such as water. Doing so may cause the battery to generate
heat.
n How to dispose the batteries included in this product

Dispose of the lithium battery in accordance with domestic law and regulation.
l How to dispose the batteries in the EU

This is an explanation about the EU Battery Directive. This directive is only valid in the EU.
Batteries are included in this product. When you remove batteries from this product and dispose
them, discard them in accordance with domestic law concerning disposal.
Take a right action on waste batteries, because the collection system in the EU on waste batter-
ies are regulated.
Battery type: Thionyl Chloride Lithium battery
Note: The symbol marked on the battery means the battery shall be separately collected as ordained in the
EU Battery Directive.

C7.3.2 FCN Power Supply Module

The lifespan of the electric field condenser used in the power supply module is 8 years provided
that the temperature of the air intake from the bottom of the module is 45 °C on the average. The
power supply module will be required to be replaced periodically.
C7.3.3 FCN I/O Module (NFDR541)

The relay used in NFDR541 of the I/O module has a limited lifespan that is affected by the
number of times used and load conditions.
The exchange period must be determined according to the table below.
TIP
The relay cannot be replaced by itself. The entire module must be replaced.
Table Relay Lifespan

Mechanical lifespan 20,000,000 times
220 V AC: 2 A 250,000 times
100 V AC: 2 A 370,000 times
Resistance
24 V DC: 2 A 270,000 times
load
48 V DC: 1.0 A 200,000 times
Relay
110 V DC: 0.4 A 250,000 times
lifespan Electric lifespan
220 V AC: 1 A 220,000 times
100 V AC: 2 A 160,000 times
Inductive
24 V DC: 0.6 A 300,000 times
load
48 V DC: 0.3 A 230,000 times
110 V DC: 0.1 A 350,000 times
[x 10,000 times] [x 10,000 times]

500 500
11 AC indu loa
20
20 0 V duc
24
0
0
11
0 AC tiv
11 in
VA
VA
0 VD
V
100 VD 100
C ista e l
C
C
Opening and Closing Lifespan
Opening and Closing Lifespan
re
48
C re
re
11
sis
re si
s
VD
0
si st
ta
an
VD
st
C
48
nc ad
nc oa
50 50
c
e
an ce
re
tiv
C
e
e
VD
ce
si
lo
lo
40 40
ind
lo
s
ad
d
ad
lo
ta
C
uc
ad
nc
30 30
in
d
tiv
e
du
lo 24
e
ct
20 20
ad V
loa
ive
d
lo
ad
10 10
C
in
du
ct
ive
5 5
lo
ad
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 [A] 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 [A]
Isolated current (ln) Isolated current (ln)
C050310E.ai
Figure DC Load Lifespan Curve and AC Load Lifespan Curve of the Electric Lifespan

D-i
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ Guide
PART-D Other Features and Settings
IMPORTANT
module.
module.

Blank Page
<D1. License> D1-1
D1. License
This section provides an overview of the STARDOM software license (hereinafter referred
to as license.)
D1.1 Types of Licenses

The STARDOM software license is comprised of the following types:
Table License type

License type FCN-100 and FCJ FCN-500 and FCN-RTU
• Logic Designer
Key Code(*1) • FCN/FCJ OPC Server for Windows
PC License • FCN/FCJ Java Application Development Kit License
License ID(*2) • FCN/FCJ Simulator
The License is bundled with the
• FCN/FCJ Basic Software License
Controller License License ID(*2) CPU module (specified at the time of
• Various Application Portfolio
purchase). (*3)
*1: This is a license that is required when installing the software. It will be validated during the installation process by entering the key
code issued by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
*2: This is a license that is required to run the software. It will be verified every time the software is executed. Use the dedicated tool
to register the execution rights using the License ID issued by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
*3: FCN-500 and FCN-RTU controller licenses are bundled with the CPU module so the license cannot be added and changed.
D1.2 License Issuance Procedure

Follow the procedure below to obtain licenses. In case of FCN-500 and FCN-RTU, the con-
troller license is bundled with the CPU module so license issuance is not required.
1. Purchase a STARDOM software license and obtain an Order ID sheet.
2. Complete user registration on the Web browser. User registration is required for the first
time only.
3. Issue the license by entering the Order ID and password written on the Order ID sheet on
the Web browser. (There are two types of licensing: Key Code and License ID)
4. This license must be set to the STARDOM using tools when installing the software. (License
setting procedure differs depending on the software type.)
D1.3 Key Code

A key code is a code required to verify that the user is the genuine license holder when
installing the software. It is provided using ASCII character strings.
For STARDOM, a key code is issued by purchasing a license that is separate from the
DVD-ROM where the software is stored.

<D1. License> D1-2
D1.4 License ID
A license ID is a code comprised of ASCII strings that is required to register the license
when the software is executed.
The license file is provided by a text file (*.txt) that contains one or more license IDs.
The execution license of STARDOM is validated by registering the license ID using a dedicated
tool to a set registration location. The following chart describes the software that requires a
execution license, the license ID registration location, and license registration tool.
Table License Registration Locations and License Registration Tools
Software that requires a Registration
License registration tool
execution license location
Autonomous controller basic Controller
software System card
Controller
Application portfolio Resource Configurator
System card
FCN/FCJ Simulator ID module FCN/FCJ Simulator Utility
For STARDOM, a key code is issued by purchasing a license that is separate from the DVD-
ROM where the software is stored.
IM 34P02Q01-01E 15th Edition : Jun.30,2010-00

<D1. License> D1-3
D1.5 Issuing a License

The STARDOM license is issued using the following procedure. For details the various
operations for the License Issuance system, refer to the online help that is provided. This
section provides the basic flow of operation to issue a license.
n Order ID Sheet
When a STARDOM software license is purchased, an Order ID sheet paper will be provided.
On this order sheet, a list of purchased licenses and the order ID and password that is the key to
connecting to the License Issuance system will be printed.
n License Issuance System

The STARDOM License Issuance system uses Web environments. Start a Web browser such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer on a computer connected to the Internet and enter the URL printed on
the Order ID sheet. The first window of the License Issuance system will be displayed.
n Login
User registration must first be performed in order to use the License Issuance system. Set
the User ID and password that were issued during user registration into the initial window to
validate the user (login). If user registration is not completed, use the following guest account to
temporarily login.
User ID: guest
Password: stardom_license
n User Registration
When the guest account is used, the user registration menu window will be displayed. Select
[New Registration].
In the User Registration, there are input fields for relevant information. Input the required items
and click on the [Register] button.
When registration is accepted, the customer ID will be issued automatically. (A password must be
set by the user.)
n Specifying an Order and Issuing a License

When the user is validated, the license issuance menu window will be displayed. Select “Issue
License” to display the window to specify the order. Enter the type of license to be issued and the
Order ID and password printed on the Order ID sheet.
SEE
ALSO The operating procedure will differ depending on the type of license. For details, refer to the manual by clicking
the [Manual] button.
n License
When license issuance is completed, a “Key Code” or a “License File” can be obtained.
Use this license and each license registration tool to perform setup.
SEE
ALSO For setting procedures of the FCN/FCJ licensing, refer to the help of Resource Configurator.

Blank Page
<D2. Setting the IP Address> D2-1
D2. Setting the IP Address

This section describes the procedure for setting IP address to the FCN/FCJ or VDS
connected to the STARDOM control network.
SEE
ALSO For IP address setting procedures of the FCN/FCJ, refer to the help of Resource Configurator.
TIP
Read this chapter only if you need to configure VDS.
D2.1 Creating the Hosts File

The correspondence of IP addresses and host names for the devices connected to the
control network is maintained by the Hosts file.
l For VDS
For Windows 7, the Hosts file is in the following folder.
\Windows\System32\drivers\etc
Use an text editor such as Memo Pad to enter the host names and IP addresses for all nodes
that will be connected to the control network. For STARDOM devices (VDS, FCN/FCJ), enter
comments in the comment column so they can be identified.
The following is an input example of a Hosts file.
Input example:
192.168.0.1 FCN01 #Stardom FCN
192.168.0.2 FCN02 #Stardom FCN
192.168.0.65 PLC01 #PLC
192.168.0.101 VDS01 #Stardom VDS
192.168.0.121 EWS01 #Config PC
l For FCN/FCJ
The FCN/FCJ, the Hosts file is in the following folder.
\JEROS\CONF\SYS\
After the IP addresses are set to the FCN/FCJ, use the Web browser to edit the Hosts file.
SEE
ALSO For the setting procedure using the Web browser, see B2.4.2, “Editing System Setting Files.”
l Usage
The Hosts file is used for host name resolution during communication.

D2.2 IP Address Assignment Rules

The IP address assignment rule varies by the network configuration.
There are three network configurations as shown below:
1. Control unit single configuration
2. Control unit duplexed configuration
3. Configuration consisting of control network connected with other networks
In case of FCN-RTU, however, only a control network single configuration is available.
TIP
When setting an IP address to the FCN/FCJ for the first time, the configuration is “control network single
configuration.” Change the setting as necessary on Resource Configurator according to your system.
SEE
ALSO For IP address setting procedures on Resource Configurator, refer to the help of Resource Configurator.
n Network Address (Net ID) and Host Address (Host ID)

It is necessary to understand IP address configuration to have a good grasp of IP address
assignment rules. The following lines explain the network address (hereinafter, Net ID) and the
host address (hereinafter, Host ID) that constitute the IP address.
A Net ID is a logical AND between the IP address and the subnet mask.
A Host ID is a logical AND between the IP address and the complement of the subnet mask
(one’s complement).
The following example shows the calculation of the Net ID and the Host ID:
l IP Address is in Class A
Subnet mask 255 . 0 . 0 . 0
IP address 10 . 1 . 2 . 101
Net ID Host ID
D020201E.ai
l IP Address is in Class B
Subnet mask 255 . 255 . 0 . 0
IP address 172 . 16 . 1 . 101
Net ID Host ID
D020202E.ai
l When IP Address is in Class C

Subnet mask 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
IP address 192 . 168 . 3 . 101
Net ID Host ID
D020203E.ai

l When Subnet Mask is extended from Standards for Each Class
Dot notation Hexadecimal notation
IP address 172.17.6.1 0xac110601
Subnet mask 255.255.252.0 0xfffffc00 -
Complement of subnet mask (NOT) - - 0x000003ff
↓ AND operation ↓ AND operation
Result 0xac110400(=N) 0x00000201(=I)
D2.2.1 Control Network Single Configuration

In this configuration, the FCN/FCJ is connected to the control network of single configuration.
Use IP addresses of class A to class C.
The IP address of the FCN/FCJ is configured according to the rules as described below:
l FCN/FCJ (Single CPU Configuration)

• When specifying the IP address (Net ID=N, Host ID=H) on Resource Configurator, the IP
address is assigned to the Network Interface 1.
• The IP address is not assigned to the Network Interface 2.
Table IP Address Assignment Rules (Single CPU Configuration)

CPU Network interface Net ID Host ID Remarks
Port 1 N H Specified IP address
Single CPU
Port 2 None None
l FCN (Duplex CPU Configuration)

• When specifying the IP address (Net ID=N, Host ID=H) on Resource Configurator, the IP
address is assigned to the Network Interface 1 of the control side CPU.
• To the Network Interface 1 of the standby side CPU, the IP address specified on Resource
Configurator is assigned, with its most significant bit of the Host ID set to ON; if the net mask
is “255.255.255.0,” the value adding 128 to the Host ID is assigned.
• The IP address of the Network Interface 1 on the standby side CPU can be changed on
Resource Configurator.
• The IP address cannot be assigned to the Network Interface 2 of the control side CPU and
the standby side CPU.
Table IP Address Assignment Rules (Duplex CPU Configuration)

IP address
CPU Network interface Remarks
Net ID Host ID
Port 1 N H Specified IP address
Control side CPU
Port 2 None None
Most significant bit of the Host ID
H+X
is set to ON
Port 1 N
Standby side CPU Any value can be specified on
Y
Port 2 None None

IMPORTANT
When specifying the IP address of the control side CPU, the IP address of the standby side CPU
is automatically configured. Note that the duplicate IP address should not exist on the same
network.
Table Example of IP Address Assignment (Duplex CPU Configuration)

CPU Network interface IP address Subnet mask Remarks
Port 1 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0
Control side CPU
Port 2 None None
When the subnet mask is as
Port 1 192.168.3.130 255.255.255.0 shown in the left cell, add 128
Standby side CPU to the Host ID (initial value)
Port 2 None None
VDS
192.168.3.101
192.168.3.0/Mask=255.255.255.0
192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.130

Control Standby
FCN/FCJ side CPU side CPU
(single CPU)
FCN (duplex CPU)
D020208E.ai
Figure Example of Network Configuration (Control Network Single Configuration)
IM 34P02Q01-01E 2nd Edition : Aug.28,2002-00

D2.2.2 Control Network Duplexed Configuration

In this section, how to configured duplexed control network is described.
On Resource Configurator, specify one IP address (Net ID=N, Host ID=H) to the FCN/FCJ. This
IP address is referred to as virtual IP address (hereinafter, VIP).
The physical IP address (hereinafter, PIP) corresponding to each network interface of the FCN/
FCJ is automatically assigned based on VIP.
Therefore, when the control network is duplexed, up to 5 IP addresses are used per FCN/FCJ.
VIP can be configured as follows:
• Configure VIP within the range A.B.x.1 to A.B.x.126.
x is a multiple of 3 within the range 0 to 252 (including 0).
• Set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
PIP is automatically calculated from VIP as shown in the table below:

Table Rules for PIP Assignment from VIP (Control Network Duplexed Configuration) (System R1.85 or
Later)
Network IP address
CPU Abbreviation Remarks
interface Net ID Host ID
VIP - - VIP N H
FCN (control side Port 1 Control PIP-A N+1 H
CPU) or FCJ Port 2 Control PIP-B N+2 H Automatically
PIP calculated based
FCN (standby side Port 1 Standby PIP-A N+1 H+128 on VIP
CPU) Port 2 Standby PIP-B N+2 H+128
Table Rules for PIP Assignment from VIP (Control Network Duplexed Configuration) (System R1.80 or
Earlier)
Network IP address
VIP - - VIP N H
FCN (left side CPU) or Port 1 Left PIP-A N+1 H
FCJ Port 2 Left PIP-B N+2 H Automatically
Port 1 Right PIP-A N+1 H+128 on VIP
FCN (right side CPU)
Port 2 Right PIP-B N+2 H+128
TIP
• It is recommended to use a class C IP address.
• It is recommended to determine the range of IP address assignment according to the device, e.g., the IP
address of the FCN/FCJ starts from 192.168.x.1.
• The rules for PIP assignment differ depending on whether the system is R1.80 or earlier or R1.85 or later.

Table Example of PIP Assignment from VIP (Control Network Duplexed Configuration) (System R1.85
or Later)
Network
CPU Abbreviation IP address Remarks
interface
Specified on
VIP - - VIP 192.168.3.2 Resource
Configurator
FCN (control side Port 1 Control PIP-A 192.168.4.2
CPU) Port 2 Control PIP-B 192.168.5.2 Automatically
FCN (standby side Port 1 Standby PIP-A 192.168.4.130 on VIP
CPU) Port 2 Standby PIP-B 192.168.5.130
Table Example of PIP Assignment from VIP (Control Network Duplexed Configuration) (System R1.80
or Earlier)
Network
CPU Abbreviation IP address Remarks
interface
Specified on
VIP - - VIP 192.168.3.2 Resource
Configurator
Port 1 Left PIP-A 192.168.4.2
FCN (left CPU)
Port 2 Left PIP-B 192.168.5.2 Automatically
Port 1 Right PIP-A 192.168.4.130 on VIP
FCN (right CPU)
Port 2 Right PIP-B 192.168.5.130
VIP:192.168.3.101
VDS
192.168.4.101 192.168.5.101
Control network (Ethernet) PIP:B192.168.5.0
Mask=255.255.255.0
192.168.5.1 192.168.5.2 192.168.5.130
PIP:A192.168.4.0
Mask=255.255.255.0
192.168.4.1 192.168.4.2 192.168.4.130
Control Standby
(single CPU)
FCN (duplex CPU)
VIP:192.168.3.1 VIP:192.168.3.2
D020211E.ai
Figure Example of Network Configuration (Control Network Duplexed Configuration)

D2.2.3 Configuration consisting of Control Network (Single)

connected with Other Networks
The following describes the independent use of two network ports of the FCN and FCJ.
In this configuration, the Network Interface 1 is connected to the control network (single) and the
Network Interface 2 is connected to other networks (e.g., the network for PLCs).
On Resource Configurator, specify the IP address of the Network Interface 1 (Net ID=N1, Host
ID=H11) and the IP address of the Network Interface 2 (Net ID=N2, Host ID=H12) of the FCN/
FCJ (single CPU configuration, or the control side CPU).
When using FCN (duplex CPU configuration), specify the IP address of the Network Interface
1 (Net ID=N1, Host ID=H21) and the IP address of the Network Interface 2 (Net ID=N2, Host
ID=H22).
TIP
As only one network port is available for FCN-RTU (model NFCP050), the method described in this section can-
not be applied.
Table IP Address Assignment Rules (Single CPU Configuration)

IP address
Net ID Host ID
Port 1 N1 H11
Single CPU Specified IP address
Port 2 N2 H12
Table IP Address Assignment Rules (Duplex CPU Configuration)

IP address
Net ID Host ID
Control side Port 1 N1 H11
Specified IP address
CPU Port 2 N2 H12
Port 1 N1 H21 To the initial value of the Host ID of the
Standby side standby side CPU, the Host ID of the
CPU Port 2 N2 H22 control side CPU with its most significant
bit set to ON is specified.

CPU Network interface IP address Subnet mask Remarks
Control side Port 1 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0
CPU Port 2 172.18.3.2 255.255.0.0
Standby side Port 1 192.168.3.130 255.255.255.0
CPU Port 2 172.18.131.2 255.255.0.0

192.168.3.101
VDS
Control network (Ethernet) 192.168.3.0 Mask=255.255.255.0
192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.130

Control Standby
(single CPU)
FCN (Duplex CPU)
172.17.3.1 172.18.3.1 172.18.131.2
PLC Network 1 PLC Network 2
172.17.0.0 172.18.0.0
Mask=255.255.0.0 Mask=255.255.0.0
PLC1 PLC2 PLC3 PLC4
172.17.1.1 172.17.1.2 172.18.1.1 172.18.1.2
D020215E.ai
Figure Example of Network Configuration (Connecting Control Network with Other Networks)
IM 34P02Q01-01E 2nd Edition : Aug.28,2002-00

D2.2.4 Configuration consisting of Control Network

(Duplexed) connected with Other Networks
The following describes the independent use of four network ports of the FCN-500 with
NFCP502 CPU module.
In this configuration, the Network Interface 1 and 2 are connected to the control network (du-
plexed) and the Network Interface 3 and 4 are connected to other networks (e.g., the network for
PLCs).
On Resource Configurator, specify one IP address of the Network Interface 1 (Net ID=N, Host
ID=H) to the FCN. This IP address is referred to as virtual IP address (hereinafter, VIP). The
physical IP address (hereinafter, PIP) corresponding to each network interface of the FCN is
automatically assigned based on VIP.
Furthermore, specify the IP address of the Network Interface 3 (Net ID=N3, Host ID=H13) and
the IP address of the Network Interface 4 (Net ID=N4, Host ID=H14) of the FCN (single CPU con-
figuration, or the control side CPU). When using FCN (duplex CPU configuration), specify the IP
address of the Network Interface 3 (Net ID=N3, Host ID=H23) and the IP address of the Network
Interface 4 (Net ID=N4, Host ID=H24).
Table IP Address Assignment Rules (Control Network Duplexed Configuration)
Network IP address
VIP - - VIP N H
Port 1 Control PIP-A N+1 H Automatically calculated based
PIP
Single CPU or Port 2 Control PIP-B N+2 H on VIP
- Control side CPU Port 3 - N3 H13
Specified IP address
- Port 4 - N4 H14
Port 1 Standby PIP-A N+1 H+128 Automatically calculated based
PIP
Port 2 Standby PIP-B N+2 H+128 on VIP
Standby side CPU Port 3 To the initial value of the Host

- - N3 H23 ID of the standby side CPU,
the Host ID of the control side
- Port 4 - N4 H24 CPU with its most significant
bit set to ON is specified.

Network
CPU IP address Subnet mask Remarks
interface
VIP - - 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0
Port 1 192.168.4.2 255.255.255.0 Automatically calculated based
PIP
Port 2 192.168.5.2 255.255.255.0 on VIP
Single CPU or
- Control side CPU Port 3 172.17.3.2 255.255.0.0
- Port 4 172.18.3.2 255.255.0.0
Port 1 192.168.4.130 255.255.255.0 Automatically calculated based
PIP
Port 2 192.168.5.130 255.255.255.0 on VIP
Standby side
- CPU Port 3 172.17.131.2 255.255.0.0
- Port 4 172.18.131.2 255.255.0.0

VIP:192.168.3.101
VDS
192.168.4.101 192.168.5.101
Control network (Ethernet) PIP:B192.168.5.0
Mask=255.255.255.0
192.168.5.2 192.168.5.130
PIP:A192.168.4.0
Mask=255.255.255.0
192.168.4.2 192.168.4.130
Control Standby
side CPU side CPU VIP:192.168.3.2
FCN (duplex CPU)
PLC Network 1 172.17.3.1 172.17.131.2

172.17.0.0
Mask=255.255.0.0
PLC3 PLC4
172.17.1.1 172.17.1.2
PLC Network 2 172.18.3.1 172.18.131.2

172.18.0.0
Mask=255.255.0.0
PLC3 PLC4
172.18.1.1 172.18.1.2
D020216E.ai
Figure Example of Network Configuration (Control Network Duplexed and Other Networks)

D2.3 VDS IP Address Setting Procedure

Set the IP address from the Windows 7 Control Panel to the PC where VDS will be installed
(VDS Data Server, VDS HMI Server, VDS HMI client)
Set the IP address based on the same policies as FCN/FCJ for the VDS server that will be
connected to the control network. When duplexing the network, install multiple network
interface cards and set the IP address following the procedure below. Do not assign
duplicate IP addresses.
For procedure to install the driver for the network interface card, follow the procedure in
the manual of the network interface card.
D2.3.1 IP Address Setting Procedure (When the Control

Network is used as Single)
The following describes the network setting procedure when VDS is using the control
network as a single.
n For Windows 7
1. Logon using an account that has Administrative rights.
Click the [Control Panel] - “View network status and tasks” - “Change adapter settings” from
the start menu.
2. Double-click the “Local Area Connection” in the appearing window.
“Local Area Connection Status” dialog is displayed.
3. Click the [Properties].
“Local Area Connection Properties” dialog is displayed.
Local Area Connection Properties
Networking
Connect using:
Broadcom NetLink (TM) Gigabit Ethernet
Configure...
This connection users the following items:
Client for Microsoft Networks
QoS Packet Scheduler
File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv4)
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
Link-Layer Topology Discovery Mapper I/O Driver
Link-Layer Topology Discovery Responder
Install... Uninstall Properties
Description
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The default
wide area network protocol that provides communication
across diverse interconnected networks.
OK Cancel
D020309E.ai
Figure Local Area Connection Properties Screen

4. Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4),” and click the “Properties.”
“Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” dialog is displayed.
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
General Alternate Configuration
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports

this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator
for the appropriate IP settings.
Obtain an IP address automatically
Use the following IP address:
IP address: . . .
Subnet mask: . . .
Default gateway: . . .
Obtain DNS server address automatically

Use the following DNS server address:
Preferred DNS server: . . .
Aletrnate DNS server: . . .
Validate settings upon exit Advanced...
OK Cancel
D020310E.ai
Figure Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Screen

5. Select [Use the following IP address:] and set the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway as shown below.
Set the default gateway and DNS server if necessary. In the following example,
IP Address: 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
are set.
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
General
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports

this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator
for the appropriate IP settings.
Obtain an IP address automatically
Use the following IP address:
IP address: 192 . 168 . 0 . 101
Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
Default gateway: . . .
Obtain DNS server address automatically

Use the following DNS server address:
Preferred DNS server: . . .
Aletrnate DNS server: . . .
Validate settings upon exit Advanced...
OK Cancel
D020311E.ai
Figure Setting Example of Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Screen
6. Click on [OK] to finish the setup.

D2.3.2 IP Address Setting Procedure (When Duplexing the

Control Network)
This section describes the setting procedure when duplexing the control network using
VDS.
Set the VIP, PIP-A, PIP-B according to the Windows 7 GUI. Set VIP and PIP-A to the
network interface card connected to the primary hub. Set PIP-B to the network interface
card connected to the backup hub.
The following shows the IP address setting procedure:
n For Windows 7
1. Click the [Control Panel] - “View network status and tasks” - “Change adapter settings” from
the start menu.
2. Double-click the “Local Area Connection” in the appearing window.
“Local Area Connection Status” dialog is displayed.
3. Click the [Properties].
“Local Area Connection Properties” dialog is displayed.
4. Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4),” and click the “Properties.”
“Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” dialog is displayed.
Set VIP on the network interface card.

The setting procedure is similar to when using the control network in single
configuration.
5. Click the [Advanced].
“Advanced TCP/IP Settings” dialog is displayed.
Advanced TCP/IP Settings
IP Settings DNS WINS
IP addresses
IP address Subnet mask
192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0
Add... Edit Remove
Default gateways:
Gateway Metric
Add... Edit Remove
Automatic metric
Interface metric:
OK Cancel
D020312E.ai
Figure Advanced TCP/IP Settings Window
6. Click [Add] on IP addresses

“TCP/IP Address” dialog is displayed.
7. Set the IP address and subnet mask and click [Add].
TCP/IP Address
IP address: 192 . 168 . 1 . 101
Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
Add Cancel
D020313E.ai
Figure TCP/IP Address Window
8. Click [OK] to finish the setup.
Set PIP-B on the other network interface card.

9. The setting procedure is similar to when using the control network in single configuration.
Refer to D2.3.1 “IP Address Setting Procedure (When the Control Network is used as Sin-
gle).”

D2.4 IP Address Settings on Other Devices

Perform settings so that the policy of IP address information match.
For details on a setting procedure, refer to the manual for each device used.

D2.5 Settings when Connecting a Router to the

Control Network
In order to establish communication between upper level networks such as control
networks and control type information networks, a router must be placed in between the
networks in order to route the frames. There are many ways to make this possible. One
way is to enable the router functions of the general-purpose PC on which VDS Data Server
is installed. Another way is to install a dedicated router.
l Default Gateway Settings

The default gateway must be set to devices that must communication with upper level networks
connected to the control network side.
For details on the setting procedure of default gateways for the VDS, FCN, and FCJ, see the
items in the IP address setting procedure explained previously.

Blank Page
<D3. Backup/Restore of all data (R3.30 or later)> D3-1
D3. Backup/Restore of all data (R3.30 or

later)
For FCN-500 and FCN-RTU, the regular backup of the CPU module on-board flash memo-
ry image is recommended for the CPU module or other system failures.
・ Chapter D3.1 to D3.3 describes backup, restore and upgrading CPU module using
PC.
・ Chapter D3.4 to D3.6 describes backup, restore and upgrading CPU module with SD
card using PC.
For FCN-100 and FCJ, the regular backup of the FCN/FCJ system card image is recom-
mended for the FCN/FCJ system cards or other system failures.
・ Chapter D3.7 to D3.9 describes backup, restore and upgrading the FCN/FCJ system
card.
TIP
When you use the R3.20 or previous version, please refer to Appendix.1, “Backup / Restore (R3.20 or before).”

D3.1 Backup of all data (FCN-500 and FCN-RTU)

Follow the procedure below to back up.
Step1 Preparation for the CPU module on-board flash memory backup
Download FCN/FCJ From the maintenance menu, download FCN/FCJ Backup Tools.
Backup Tools.
Extracting FCN/FCJ Extracting the downloaded FCN/FCJ Backup Tools.

Backup Tools.
From the Maintenance menu, save the retain data.

Step2 Save retain data. The data stored in the FCN/FCJ memory will saved to the CPU
module on-board flash memory.
Back up the CPU module

Step3 Back up the CPU module on-board flash memory data.
on-board flash memory data.
D030101E.ai
Figure Backup of all data flowchart
IMPORTANT
Logging data is not saved using this backup procedure. For more information on backup, refer to
the user manual of each logging tool.
n Step 1: Preparing for the CPU module on-board flash memory Backup
l Downloading FCN/FCJ Backup Tools

1. Run the Web browser and open the “STARDOM Maintenance Page.”
2. Click [Maintenance Menu].
The FCX Maintenance Menu is displayed.

3. Click [Download the Backup Tools].
The self-extracting compressed file FCN/FCJ Backup Tools (FCXTOOL.exe) is download-
ed.
Click the [Download the Backup Tools]

on “FCX Maintenance Menu.”
D030102E.ai
Figure Downloading FCN/FCJ Backup Tools
SEE
ALSO For more information about “STARDOM Maintenance Page,” refer to ”B2. Advanced Settings Using Web
Browser” in this document.
l Extracting FCN/FCJ Backup Tools

1. Double-click “FCN/FCJ Backup Tools” (FCXTOOL.EXE).
2. Specify a folder for storing extracted files and click the [Install] button.
The FCN/FCJ Backup Tools are extracted.
TIP
For example, if the specified folder for storing extracted files is “C:\temp”, the following files will be created in that
folder:
C:\temp\FcxTool\FcxBackup.exe
C:\temp\FcxTool\FcxRestore.exe
C:\temp\FcxTool\backuplist.txt
C:\temp\FcxTool\backuplist_all.txt

IMPORTANT
When specifying a folder name for storing extracted files, do not include any space character (for
example, “C:\Documents and Settings\Default User\My Documents” is invalid).
If you execute the above command with a folder name containing one or more space characters,
the backup or restore command will be aborted with error during execution.
n Step 2: Saving Retain Data

2. Click “Maintenance Menu.”
3. Click “Save Retain Data.”
The last time and data when the retain data was saved is displayed.
4. Click the [SAVE] button.
The retain data is saved.
TIP
The [SAVE] button is not displayed in the maintenance mode.
Date and time the existing

retain data was saved
Button for saving the data
D030103E.ai
Figure Saving Retain Data

n Step 3: Backing up the CPU module on-board flash memory Data

1. Run the command prompt.
2. In the command prompt window, change the current directory to the folder containing the
extracted FCN/FCJ Backup Tools.
Supposing that the FCN/FCJ Backup Tools have been extracted to the folder
C:\temp, type “cd C:\temp\FcxTool,” and press the [Enter] key.
3. Type “FcxBackup -all <host name or IP address>,” and press the [Enter] key.
The “BACKUP” folder will be created in the current directory.
TIP
- If you want to back up the system configuration file in the FCN/FCJ maintenance mode, switch the “FCX
Maintenance Menu” to the “STARDOM Maintenance Page.”
Backup would fail if you are still on the FCX Maintenance Menu or have exited the web browser with the
FCX Maintenance Menu left open.
If you have exited the web browser with the FCX Maintenance Menu left open, run the web browser again,
open the FCX Maintenance Menu from the FCX Maintenance Page, and return to the STARDOM Mainte-
nance Page before exiting the web browser.
- It will take approximately 15 minutes to back up the data on the CPU module on-board flash memory.
- Addition the “-all” in [FcxBackup] command, backed up file is different. Please add the “-all” always. If you
do not want to add the “-all,” refer to Appendix 1, “Backup / Restore (R3.20 or before).”
Backed up file With “-all” Without “-all”
IEC application  
Configuration (I/O, IP address, etc.)  
Retain save data  
FCN/FCJ Basic software  –
Java application (*1)  –
Logging data (*1) – –
Trend data (*1) – –
Report data (*1) – –
*1: only FCN-RTU.
IMPORTANT
If backup fails, check the following:
- Check the FCN/FCJ host name or IP address.
Use the Ping command to verify.
- Check whether you have executed a command below a directory name containing a space
character.
If a directory name contains a space character, move the command below a directory name
that includes no space character.
- Check the contents of the following backup operation log file, if the above measures do not
solve the problem.
FcxTool\TEMP\FTPLOG.TXT.

D3.2 Restore of all data (FCN-500 and FCN-RTU)

If you are not replacing the CPU module, skip to step 3 of the procedural flowchart shown
below. If you are replacing the CPU module, start with step 1 and follow the instructions
given.
The following steps are not necessary if the CPU module is not to be replaced.
Step1 Replace the CPU module. Power down the FCN/FCJ and replace the CPU module.
Step2 Set up the IP address. Set up the address of the FCN/FCJ using Resource Configurator.
Step3 Restore the CPU module on-board flash memory data (from PC to the CPU module)
Switch to maintenance mode. Switch the FCN/FCJ to maintenance mode.
Restore the CPU module

Restore the CPU module on-board flash memory data.
D030201E.ai
Figure Restore of all data flowchart
n Step 1: Replacing the CPU module

Power down the FCN-500 and FCN-RTU and replace the CPU module.
TIP
- If you are not replacing the CPU module, you can skip this step (for replacing the CPU module).
n Step 2: Setting the IP Address of FCN-500 and FCN-RTU

Set up the IP address of the FCN-500 and FCN-RTU using Resource Configurator.
TIP
If you are not replacing the CPU module, you can skip this step (for setting the IP address of FCN-500 and FCN-
RTU).
- For details on how to set the IP address of the FCN/FCJ, see the online help of Resource Configurator.

n Step 3: Restoring the CPU module on-board flash memory Data
l Switching to maintenance mode

2. Select “Maintenance Menu.”
3. Select “Reboot.”
The Reboot Menu is displayed.
4. Select “Reboot (Maintenance Mode)” and click the [OK] button.
The FCN/FCJ reboots in maintenance mode.
l Restoring the CPU module on-board flash memory Data

3. Type “FcxRestore <host name or IP address>,” and press the [Enter] key.
TIP
- If you want to perform restoration from a PC (“restoration PC”) that is not the one (“backup PC”) with which
you have performed backup, you must first copy all files under the “Backup” folder of the backup PC into
the folder of the restoration PC containing the extracted FCN/FCJ Backup Tools, before proceeding with the
first step listed above (for running the command prompt).
IMPORTANT
The CPU module used to restore the system will be the release of the original system.
If you want to new release/revision , upgrading the CPU module verision.

TIP
Procedure of restoring in the CPU duplex configuration
- If the CPU modules should be restored to the same version as backing up, restore to the control side CPU
module.
- If the CPU modules should be restored to the different version as backing up, restore the following proce-
dure.
1. Shutsdown the control side CPU module.
2. Push the RESET switch of the standby side CPU module.
It is started at online state.
3. Switch the standby side CPU module to maintenance mode.
4. Restore to the standby side CPU module.
5. Shutdown the standby side CPU module.
6. Push the RESET switch of the control side CPU module.
7. Switch the control side CPU module to maintenance mode.
9. Reset the standby side CPU module.
It is restarted.
The APC function is not executed, because the control side CPU module is the maintenance mode.
10. Restart the control side CPU module to the online mode.
Control side CPU module is restarted and automatically execute the APC.

D3.3 Upgrading CPU Module Version (FCN-500

and FCN-RTU)
For FCN-500 and FCN-RTU, if you want to upgrade the CPU Module to the latest version,
upgrade the CPU module on-board flash memory version.
Prior to upgrade the CPU module version, it is recommended to execute “D3.1 Back up of
all data (FCN-500 and FCN-RTU)”.
n Upgrading the CPU Module Version
IMPORTANT
About 10 Megabytes of free flash memory space is required to perform version upgrade or down-
grade of the CPU module on-board flash memory.
For available memory space, check the “Flash Memory (FREE)” value displayed on the “STAR-
DOM Maintenance Page.” If free memory space is insufficient, delete unnecessary files.
SEE
ALSO For details on how to upgrade or downgrade the CPU module on-board flash memory version, see the release
note of the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package.
l Obtaining FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package

1 Insert the system DVD-ROM for the new release/revision in the DVD drive.
2. Select “DVD Contents.”
3. Double-click the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package.
- Pkg_NFCP500.exe in the Pkg_NFCP500 folder for FCN-500;
- Pkg_FCNRTU.exe in the Pkg_FCNRTU folder for FCN-RTU.
4. Specify a folder for saving extracted files, and click the [Install] button.
The FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package is extracted.
TIP
For example, if the specified folder for storing extracted files is “C:\temp,” the following files will be created in that
folder:
C:\temp\NFCP500\FcxRevup.exe (for FCN-500) or
C:\temp\FCNRTU\FcxRevup.exe (for FCN-RTU)
l Switching to Maintenance Mode

The FCN/FCJ boots up in maintenance mode.

l Upgrading the FCN/FCJ System Card Version
extracted FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package.
Supposing that the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package has been extracted to the folder C:\
temp, type “cd C:\temp\NFCP500” for FCN-500,
type “cd C:\temp\FCNRTU” for FCN-RTU.
and press the [Enter] key.
3. Type “FcxRevup <host name or IP address>,” and press the [Enter] key.
TIP
Version upgrade takes about 5 minutes for FCN-500 or 10 to 20 minutes for FCN-RTU to complete.
TIP
Procedure of upgrading in the CPU duplex configuration
4. Upgrade to the standby side CPU module.
It is restarted.

D3.4 Backup of all data to SD card (FCN-500)

For FCN-500, the CPU module on-board flash memory image can be backed up with SD
card not using PC.
Step1 Back up on-board flash memory data (to SD card)
Save retain data. The data stored in the main memory will saved to on-board flash memory.
Back up
Back up the on-board flash memory data to SD card.
D030301E.ai
IMPORTANT
The image of one CPU is backed up on one SD card. In order to back up two or more CPUs, SD
card for the number is required.
Display LED
(HRDY, RDY, CTRL)
RESET switch HRDY RDY CTRL HRDY RDY CTRL
CPU cover
SHUTDOWN switch SERIAL SERIAL
RESET
EXEC LED SHUT
DOWN
0 FUNC
EXEC switch
EXEC BATTERY
SD
NETWORK NETWORK
SD card slot 2 2
SD
SD LED
SD LED
LED
1 1
CN1
D030302E.ai
Figure Front panel in CPU module

n Preamble: Inserting and Removing SD Card
l Mounting the SD card

The SD card must be “mounted” by the module to be ready for use. When the SD card is properly
inserted in the SD card slo, it is automatically recognized and mounted by the module and be-
comes ready for backup and restore opereation.
If the SD card is improperly inserted in the slot due to incorrect orientation, invalid card format or
some other reason, it will not be mounted successfully. You can check whether the SD card is
mounted by checking the SD LED (lit if mounted) located on the front panel of the module.
l Inserting and removing the SD card

1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot located on the front panel of the module with the cor-
rect orientation and push it in until it clicks into place.
2. Confirm that the SD LED located on the front face of the module is lit.
l Precautions when removing the SD card

Always unmount the SD card before removing it from the module. Removing a mounted SD card
without first unmounting it may damage its files or file system.
The SD card in the slot is unmounted if the SD LED is not lit. If it is unmounted, you can safely
remove it even if the module is switched on because the CPU module cannot access it.
l Unmounting and removing the SD card

1. Unmount the SD card which is mounted in the memory card slot.
2. Confirm that the SD LED located on the front panel of the module is not lit.
3. Press the SD card to release it and then remove it from the module card slot.
WARNING
Always unmount the SD card before removing it from the module. Removing a mounted SD card
without first unmounting it may damage its files or file system.

n SD card authentication function

In order to avoid Bakkup/restore operations using the SD card by an unauthorized user, there
is a password authentication of the SD card. SD card password authentication, the correct user
name, even if you insert the SD card other than the SD card that you set a password for the CPU,
CPU is a feature that you do not access the SD card.
To use this feature, you need to setting the SD card and setting the CPU module.
l Setting the CPU module

Check the “Enable password authentication” of resources configurator, and restart the FCN-500.
l Setting the SD card

Using the FcxSDCardSet command included in the basic software package (Pkg_NFCP500.
exe), and set the user name and password on the SD card.
Insert the SD card into the PC’s SD card slot, at the command prompt that was run with admin-
istrative privileges, “C:\temp\NFCP500> FcxSDCardSet -d <drive letter:> -u <user name> -p
<password>” enter, and press [Enter] key.
<Drive letter:>: specify the drive name of the SD card slot and “:”.
<User name> and <password>: specify the user name of the administrator for the account of the
FCN-500 and a password.

n Step 1: Backing up CPU module on-board flash memory
1. Open the CPU cover.
2. To select “Backup” mode, turn the FUNC switch to the corresponding position 3.
3. Insert a SD card into the SD card slot on the CPU module.
Confirm that the SD LED is lit.
4. Push the EXEC switch.
EXEC LED is blinked. FCN-500 saves a file.
5. Confirm that the EXEC LED is not lit.
Backup is completed.
In duplex CPU module, execute backup by the CPU module on the control side.
6. To select “Unmount” mode”, turn the FUNC switch to the corresponding position 1.
Confirm that the SD LED of the module is not lit.
Press the SD card to release it and then remove it from the module card slot.
7. To select “No operation” mode, turn the FUNC switch to the corresponding position 0.
8. Close the CPU cover.
WARNING
The backup data saved before on SD card is deleted.
TIP
- It will take approximately 15 minutes to back up the data on the CPU module on-board flash memory.
- Files to be backed up is the same as if you had specified “-all” in “FcxBackup” command.
Backed up file Backup
IEC application 
Configuration (I/O, IP address, etc.) 
Retain save data 
FCN/FCJ Basic software 

D3.5 Restore of all data from SD card (FCN-500)

If you are not replacing the CPU module, skip to step 3 of the procedural flowchart shown
below. If you are replacing the CPU module, start with step 1 and follow the instructions
given.
The following steps are not necessary if the CPU module is not to be replaced.
Step1 Replace the CPU module. Power down the FCN-500 and replace the CPU module.
Step2 Set up the IP address. Set up the address of the FCN-500 using Resource Configurator.
Step1 Restore the CPU module on-board flash memory data (from SD card)
Switch to maintenance mode. Switch the FCN-500 to maintenance mode.
Restore the CPU module

Restore the CPU module on-board flash memory data from SD card.
D030401E.ai
n Step 1: Replacing the CPU module

Power down the FCN-500 and replace the CPU module.
TIP
- If you are not replacing the CPU module, you can skip this step (for replacing the CPU module).
n Step 2: Setting the IP Address of FCN-500

Set up the IP address of the FCN-500 using Resource Configurator.
TIP
If you are not replacing the CPU module, you can skip this step (for setting the IP address of FCN-500).
- For details on how to set the IP address of the FCN-500, see the online help of Resource Configurator.

n Step 3: Restoring CPU module on-board flash memory Data

2. To select “Restore” mode, turn the FUNC switch to the corresponding position 6.
3. Insert a SD card into the SD card slot on the CPU module.
EXEC LED is blinked. FCN-500 changes in maintenance mode (LED goes out temporarily),
and restoration of a file starts.
FCN-500 is completed restoration.
Press the memory card to release it and then remove it from the module card slot.
8. Push the RESET switch.
FCN-500 is rebooted.
9. Cose the CPU cover.
IMPORTANT
The CPU module used to restore the system will be the release of the original system.
If you want to new release/revision , upgrading the CPU module verision.
TIP
- If the CPU modules should be restored to the same version as backing up, restore to the control side CPU
module.
- If the CPU modules should be restored to the different version as backing up, restore the following proce-
dure.
It is restarted.

D3.6 Upgrading CPU Module Version from SD

card (FCN-500)
If you want to upgrade the FCN/FCJ basic software to the latest version, upgrade the FCN/
FCJ basic software on CPU module on-board flash memory version.
Prior to upgrade the CPU module version, it is recommended to execute “D3.4 Back up of
all data to SD card (FCN-500)”.
WARNING
The backup data saved on the SD card is deleted by upgrading. If the backup is needed, it is
recommended to use other SD card.
n Upgrading FCN/FCJ Basic Software Version on CPU module

SEE
ALSO For details on how to upgrade or downgrade the CPU module on-board flash memory version, see the release
note of the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package.
l Obtaining FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package (on PC)

- Pkg_NFCP500.exe in the Pkg_NFCP500 folder.
TIP
folder:
C:\temp\NFCP500
l Preparation of the a SD card (on PC)

1. Insert a SD card into the SD card drive on the PC.
2. Create STARDOM folder to the TOP folder on SD card.
3. Copy the FCN500 whole folder to the STARDOM folder.
4. Unmount and remove a SD card.

l Upgrading the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Version on NFCP501/NFCP502 on-
board flash memory
2. To select “Upgrage” mode, turn the FUNC switch to the corresponding position 7.
3. Insert a SD card into the SD memory card slot on the CPU module.
EXEC LED is blinked. FCN-500 changes in maintenance mode (LED goes out temporarily),
and upgrade the FCN/FCJ basic software.
FCN-500 is completed upgrade.
Press the SD card to release it and then remove it from the SD card slot.
8. Close the CPU cover.
TIP
Version upgrade takes about 5 minutes for FCN-500 to complete.
TIP
It is restarted.

D3.7 Backup of all data (FCN-100 and FCJ)

Step1 Preparation for FCN/FCJ system card backup
Backup Tools.
Extracting FCN/FCJ Extracting the downloaded FCN/FCJ Backup Tools.

Backup Tools.

Step2 Save retain data. The data stored in the FCN/FCJ memory will saved to the FCN/FCJ
system card.
Back up FCN/FCJ
Step3 Back up the FCN/FCJ system card data.
system card data.
D030701E.ai
IMPORTANT
n Step 1: Preparing for FCN/FCJ System Card Backup

2. Click [Maintenance Menu].

3. Click [Download the Backup Tools].
The self-extracting compressed file FCN/FCJ Backup Tools (FCXTOOL.exe) is download-
ed.
Click the [Download the Backup Tools]

D030102E.ai
SEE
ALSO For more information about “STARDOM Maintenance Page,” refer to ”B2. Advanced Settings Using Web Brows-
er” in this document.

TIP
folder:
C:\temp\FcxTool\backuplist_all.txt

IMPORTANT

2. Click “Maintenance Menu.”
3. Click “Save Retain Data.”
The last time and data when the retain data was saved is displayed.
TIP

retain data was saved
D030103E.ai

n Step 3: Backing up FCN/FCJ System Card Data

3. Type “FcxBackup-all <host name or IP address>,” and press the [Enter] key.
TIP
- If you want to back up the system configuration file in the FCN/FCJ maintenance mode, switch the “FCX
- It will take approximately 15 minutes to back up the data on the FCN/FCJ system card.
- Addition the “-all” in [FcxBackup] command, backed up file is different. Please add the “-all” always. If you
do not want to add the “-all,” refer to Appendix 1, “Backup / Restore (R3.20 or before).”
Backed up file With “-all” Without “-all”
IEC application  
Configuration (I/O, IP address, etc.)  
Retain save data  
FCN/FCJ Basic software  –
Java application  –
Logging data – –
Trend data – –
Report data – –
IMPORTANT
- Check the FCN/FCJ host name or IP address.
- Check whether you have executed a command below a directory name containing a space
character.
- Check the contents of the following backup operation log file, if the above measures do not
solve the problem.

D3.8 Restore of all data (FCN-100 and FCJ)

For FCN-100 and FCJ, if you are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, skip to step 3
of the procedural flowchart shown below. If you are replacing the FCN/FCJ system card,
start with step 1 and follow the instructions given.
The following steps are not necessary if the FCN/FCJ system card is not to be replaced.
Step1 Replace the FCN/FCJ system card. Power down the FCN/FCJ and replace the FCN/FCJ system card.
Step2 Set up FNC-FCJ IP address. Set up the address of the FCN/FCJ using Resource Configurator.
Step3 Restore FCN/FCJ system card data (from PC to FCN/FCJ system card)
Restore FCN/FCJ
Restore the FCN/FCJ system card data.
system card data.
Download a license file from the STADOM License lssuance Sysrem, and register the
Step4 Register the license. license using Resource Configurator.
D030801E.ai
n Step 1: Replacing FCN/FCJ System Card

Power down the FCN/FCJ and replace the FCN/FCJ system card.
TIP
- If you are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, you can skip this step (for replacing the FCN/FCJ sys-
tem card).
n Step 2: Setting the IP Address of FCN-100 and FCJ

Set up the FCN/FCJ IP address of the FCN-100 and FCJ using Resource Configurator.
TIP
If you are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, you can skip this step (for setting the IP address of FCN-100
and FCJ).
- For details on how to set the IP address of the FCN/FCJ, see the online help of Resource Configurator.

n Step 3: Restoring FCN/FCJ System Card Data

l Restoring FCN/FCJ System Card Data

TIP
- If you want to perform restoration from a PC (“restoration PC”) that is not the one (“backup PC”) with which
- If you want to restore backed up system configuration files to a different FCN/FCJ system card, perform
restoration and then overwrite the restored license file using Resource Configurator so that the license file
matches the FCN/FCJ system card. Otherwise the FCN/FCJ would not run due to license mismatch.
IMPORTANT
The card used to restore the system will be the release of the original system.
If you want to new release/revision , upgrading the FCN/FCJ system card verision.

n Step 4: License Registration

1. Use the License Management System to have the license reissued.
TIP
If you replace an old FCN/FCJ system card with a new one, you must have the license reissued using the
License Management System (step 1). This is because the serial number of the old system card and that of the
new system card are different.
If you are using the same system card, you can skip this step.
2. Download the license file from the License Management System.

3. Register the license using Resource Configurator.
SEE
ALSO - For details on how to register a user using the STARDOM License Management System, click “this pdf file,
READ_FIRST_EN.pdf (140KB)” of “If you are using this system for the first time, please read this pdf file,
READ_FIRST_EN.pdf (140KB)” on the login page.
- For details on how to use the STARDOM License Management System, click the [Manual] button on the
menu page after login to read the Help information.
- For details on how to register a license, see the online help of Resource Configurator.
TIP
- If FCN/FCJ system cards should be restored to the same version as backing up, restore to FCN/FCJ sys-
tem card of the control side CPU module.
- If FCN/FCJ system cards should be restored to the different version as backing up, restore the following
procedure.
4. Restore to FCN/FCJ system card of the standby side CPU module.
8. Restore to FCN/FCJ sysem card of the standby side CPU module.
It is restarted.

D3.9 Upgrading FCN/FCJ System Card Version

(FCN-100 and FCJ)
If you want to upgrade the FCN/FCJ system card to the latest version, upgrade the FCN/
FCJ system card version.
Prior to upgrade FCN/FCJ system card version, it is recommended to execute “D3.7 back
up of all data (FCN-100 and FCJ)”.
n Upgrading FCN/FCJ System Card Version
IMPORTANT
grade of the FCN/FCJ system card.
SEE
ALSO For details on how to upgrade or downgrade the FCN/FCJ system card version, see the release note of the FCN/
FCJ Basic Software Package.

- Pkg_FCX.exe in the Pkg_FCX folder for FCN-100 and FCJ
TIP
folder:
C:\temp\FCX\FcxRevup.exe (for FCN-100 and FCJ)

The FCN-100 and FCJ boots up in maintenance mode.

Supposing that the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package has been extracted to the folder C:\
temp, type “cd C:\temp\FCX”, and press the [Enter] key.
TIP
Version upgrade takes about 5 minutes for FCN-100 and FCJ to complete.
TIP
4. Upgrade to FCN/FCJ system card of the standby side CPU module.
8. Upgrade to FCN/FCJ system card of the standby side CPU module.
It is restarted.

Blank Page
<Appendix 1. Backup/Restore (R3.20 or before)> App.1-1
Appendix 1. Backup/Restore (R3.20 or

before)
Appendix 1.1 Backup

To protect against failure of the FCN/FCJ system card and other system failures, it is rec-
ommended to back up the FCN/FCJ system card data regularly.
Step1 Save retain data. The data stored in the FCN/FCJ memory will saved to the FCN/FCJ
system card.
Step2 FCN/FCJ system card backup (from FCN/FCJ system card to PC)
Backup Tools.
Extract FCN/FCJ Extract the downloaded FCN/FCJ Backup Tools.

Backup Tools.
Back up FCN/FCJ Back up the FCN/FCJ system card data.

system card data.
AP0101E.ai
Figure Backup Flowchart
IMPORTANT


1. Run any Web browser and open the “STARDOM Maintenance Page.”
3. Select “Save Retain Data.”
The time stamp of the existing retain data is displayed.
TIP
FCX Maintenance Page (FCN01:192.168.1.13) - Microsoft Internet Explorer
Address http://fcn/MNT/RETAIN.HTM Go

Hostname: FCN01 IP Address: 192.168.1.13 Maintenance Menu retain data was saved
Last Save Date : 2005/05/27 19:32:56
Click [SAVE] button to save retain data.

SAVE
Maintenace Menu
Done Local intranet

AP0102E.ai
SEE
ALSO For the Web browser operation procedure, see B2.4 “Maintenance Menu.”

 Step 2: Backing up FCN/FCJ System Card Data

2. Select [Maintenance Menu].
3. Select [Download the Backup Tools].
The compressed file for the FCN/FCJ Backup Tools (FCXTOOL.EXE) is downloaded.
Address http://192.168.1.54/MNT/mntmenu.htm Go Links
Hostname : FCX IP Address: 192.168.1.101

Edit
Display
Initialize
- System Operation
Reboot Click the [Download the Backup Tools]
Set Date and Time
Save Retain Data
Display Log File
Display CPU Status
Done Internet
AP0103E.ai

TIP
folder:
IMPORTANT
l Backing up FCN/FCJ System Card Data

Supposing that the FCN/FCJ Backup Tools have been extracted to the folder C:\temp, type
“cd C:\temp\FcxTool,” and press the [Enter] key.
3. Type “FcxBackup <host name or IP address>,” and press the [Enter] key.
TIP
• If you want to back up the system configuration file in the FCN/FCJ maintenance mode, switch the “FCX
• It will take approximately 5 minutes to back up the data on the FCN/FCJ system card.
IMPORTANT
• Check the FCN/FCJ host name or IP address.
• Check whether you have executed a command below a directory name containing a space
character.
• Check the contents of the following backup operation log file if the above measures do not
solve the problem.

Appendix 1.2 Restore

The procedure for restoring FCN/FCJ system card data depends on the following condi-
tions:
• You are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card at restoration
• You are replacing the FCN/FCJ system card at restoration:
- the backed up and restored system cards are of the same release/revision
- the backed up and restored system cards are not of the same release/revision
If you are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, skip to step 4 of the procedural flowchart
shown below.
If you are replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, start with step 1 and follow the instructions given.
The following steps are not necessary if the FCN/FCJ system card is not to be replaced.
Step1 Replace the FCN/FCJ system card. Power down the FCN/FCJ and replace the FCN/FCJ system card.
Step2 Set up FNC-FCJ IP address. Set up the address of the FCN/FCJ using Resource Configurator.
The following steps are not necessary if the backed up and restored system cards are of the same release/revision.
Step3 Upgrade or downgrade the FCN/FCJ system card (so that the replaced and new system cards are of
the same version (release and revision)).
Obtain the FCN/FCJ basic Obtain the FCN/FCV basic software packge for the new release and revision.
softwave package.
Upgrade or dowrgrade the

Uprade or downgrade the FCN/FCJ system card version.
FCN/FCJ system card version.
Step4 Restore FCN/FCJ system card data (from PC to FCN/FCJ system card)
Restore FCN/FCJ
Restore the FCN/FCJ system card data.
system card data.
The following steps are not necessary if the release/revision of the FCN/FCJ system card need not be changed.
Step5 Upgrade FCN/FCJ system card. Upgrade FCN/FCJ system card version.
Download a license file from the STADOM License lssuance Sysrem, and register the license
Step6 Register the license. using Resource Configurator.
AP0104E.ai
Figure Restoration Flowchart

 Step 1: Replacing FCN/FCJ System Card

Power down the FCN/FCJ and replace the FCN/FCJ system card.
TIP
• If you are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, you can skip this step (for replacing the FCN/FCJ sys-
tem card).
• For the FCN-RTU, skip this step as it has no FCN/FCJ system card.
 Step 2: Setting IP Address of FCN/FCJ

Set up the FCN/FCJ IP address of the FCN/FCJ using Resource Configurator.
TIP
• f you are not replacing the FCN/FCJ system card, you can skip this step (for setting the FCN/FCJ IP ad-
dress).
• For the FCN-RTU, skip this step as it has no FCN/FCJ system card and thus there is no need of FCN/FCJ
IP address setup.
SEE
ALSO For details on how to set the IP address of the FCN/FCJ, see the online help of Resource Configurator.
 Step 3: Upgrading or Downgrading FCN/FCJ System Card Version

The replaced and new system cards must have the same release and revision.
TIP
If the replaced and new system cards have the same release and revision, you can skip this step (for upgrading
or downgrading the FCN/FCJ system card version).
IMPORTANT
grade of the FCN/FCJ system card.
SEE
ALSO For details on how to upgrade or downgrade the FCN/FCJ system card version, see the release note of the FCN/
FCJ Basic Software Package.

• Pkg_FCX.exe in the Pkg_FCX folder for FCN/FCJ;
• Pkg_FCNRTU.exe in the Pkg_FCNRTU folder for FCN-RTU.
TIP
folder:
C:\temp\FCX\FcxRevup.exe (for FCN/FCJ), or
C:\temp\FCNRTU\FcxRevup.exe (for FCN-RTU)

The FCN/FCJ boots up in maintenance mode.

Supposing that the FCN/FCJ Basic Software Package has been extracted to the folder
C:\temp, type “cd C:\temp\FCX” for FCN/FCJ, or “cd C:\temp\FCNRTU” for FCN-RTU, and
press the [Enter] key.
TIP
Version upgrade takes about 5 minutes for FCN/FCJ or 10 to 20 minutes for FCN-RTU to complete.

 Step 4: Restoring FCN/FCJ System Card Data

l Restoring FCN/FCJ System Card Data

Supposing that the FCN/FCJ Backup Tools have been extracted to the folder C:\temp, type
“cd C:\temp\FcxTool”, and press the [Enter] key.
TIP
• If you want to perform restoration from a PC (“restoration PC”) that is not the one (“backup PC”) with which
• If you want to restore backed up system configuration files to a different FCN/FCJ system card, perform
restoration and then overwrite the restored license file using Resource Configurator so that the license file
matches the FCN/FCJ system card. Otherwise the FCN/FCJ would not run due to license mismatch.

 Step 5: Upgrading FCN/FCJ System Card Version

If you want to upgrade the FCN/FCJ system card to the latest version, upgrade the FCN/FCJ
system card version.
TIP
If there is no need to update the FCN/FCJ system card to the latest version, you can skip this step (for upgrading
the FCN/FCJ system card version).
SEE
ALSO For details on the version upgrade of the FCN/FCJ system card, see “n Step 3: Upgrading or Downgrading
FCN/FCJ System Card” above.
 Step 6: License Registration

1. Use the License Management System to have the license reissued.
TIP
If you replace an old FCN/FCJ system card with a new one, you must have the license reissued using the
License Management System (step 1). This is because the serial number of the old system card and that of the
new system card are different.
If you are using the same system card, you can skip this step.
2. Download the license file from the License Management System.

3. Register the license using Resource Configurator.
TIP
For FCN-RTU, you can skip this step (for license registration).
SEE
ALSO • For details on how to register a user using the STARDOM License Management System, click “this pdf file,
READ_FIRST_EN.pdf (140KB)” of “If you are using this system for the first time, please read this pdf file,
READ_FIRST_EN.pdf (140KB)” on the login page.
• For details on how to use the STARDOM License Management System, click the [Manual] button on the
menu page after login to read the Help information.
• For details on how to register a license, see the online help of Resource Configurator.

Blank Page
i
Revision Information
l Title : STARDOM FCN/FCJ Guide
l Manual No. : IM 34P02Q01-01E
Apr. 2002/1st Edition/R1.03 or later

First published.
Aug. 2002/2nd Edition/R1.11 or later

• The main memory of the CPU module of the FCN and the CPU part of the FCJ were changed to 128MB.
• Descriptions regarding to Foundation Fieldbus functions are added.
• Errors were corrected.
Dec. 2002/3rd Edition/R1.20 or later

• Correspondence to standards for hazardous location equipment.
July. 2003/4th Edition/R1.30 or later

• I/O modules (NFLR111, NFLR121, NFAI143, and NFAI543) were added.
• The FCN/FCJ Simulator function was added.
• The time synchronization function was added.
Jan. 2004/5th Edition/R1.40 or later

• I/O modules (NFAV144, NFAV544) were added.
Oct. 2004/6th Edition/R1.50 or later

Apr. 2005/7th Edition/R1.60 or later

• Change the maintenance homepage.
• Change APC operation.
Aug. 2005/8th Edition/R1.70 or later

• The online download function was added.
• Change the maintenance homepage.
Feb. 2006/9th Edition/R1.80 or later

• Correspondence to standards (Type n) for hazardous location equipment.
• I/O module (NFDV532) was added.

• Standard numbers for explosion-proof standards (type n) were changed.
• “C2.5 Replacing FCN/FCJ System Cards” was added.
Jun. 2007/11th Edition/R1.90 or later

• Correspondence to CSA standards for hazardous location equipment.
• SLIP was supported.
May 2008/12th Edition/R2.01 or later

• Support for Windows Vista.
• Update of compliant standards.

ii
Feb. 2009/13th Edition/R2.10 or later
• FCN-RTU modules (NFCP050, NFBU050, NFPW426) were added.
• Support for Windows XP SP3.

• Addition of base module NFBU050 for FCN.
• Update of complient standards.
• Addition of “n Installing DIN Rails to Control Panels.”
• Update of PLC maximum connections.
• Deletion of patch license.

• Update of software medium.
• Support for Windows Vista SP2.
• Update of temperature specifications.
• Addition of “Replacing the FCN CPU Module’s Battery in Duplex CPU Configuration.”
Mar. 2011/16th Edition/R3.10 or later

• I/O modules (NFAF135) were added.
• Correspondence to FCN-RTU (NFCP050) style S2.
• Support for Windows 7.

• Addition of communication modules (NFLC121, NFLP121).
• Addition of how to dispose the batteries in the EU.
• Addition of backup/restore procedure.

• Addition of notes of when downloading in the resource configurator.
• Addition of about assignment to a variable parameter setting of string data type.
• Addition of error items to be checked during the execution of the control application.
• Addition of backup/restore of all data procedure.
• Delete of sleep status for FCN-RTU.

• Support for Windows 7 SP1 (64-bit).
• Windows XP was deleted.
• Addition of about FCN-RTU modules .
• Battery parts number was changed.
May 2015/20th Edition/R3.50 or later

Dec. 2015/21st Edition/R4.01 or later*

• Addition of about FCN-500 modules
* : Denotes the release version of the software corresponding to the contents of the user's manual in
question. The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.

iii
n For Questions and More Information

If you have any questions, you can send an E-mail to the following address.
E-mail:stardom_info@cs.jp.yokogawa.com
n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

Blank Page

Stardom FCN/FCJ Guide: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Stardom FCN/FCJ Guide: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s

n Organization of This Manual

l PART-C Operation and Maintenance

l PART-D Other Features and Settings

Indicates that the main switch is ON.

Indicates that the main switch is OFF.

IM 34P02Q01-01E 19th Edition : Mar.24,2014-00

n Notes on Handling Manuals

n Warning and Disclaimer

l Appearance and Accessories

l Model and Suffix Codes

IM 34P02Q01-01E 1st Edition : Apr.24,2002-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 1st Edition : Apr.24,2002-00

n Cautions for Safely Applying the Device

Table Compliant Standards

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

l Requirements for Installation

l Wiring Power Cable

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

l Cards, Cables, Connectors

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

Copyright and Trademark Notices

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28,2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition

PART-A Hardware................................................................... A-i

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

PART-B Software.................................................................... B-i

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

PART-C Operation and Maintenance.................................... C-i

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

PART-D Other Features and Settings................................... D-i

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28, 2016-00

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr.28,2016-00

A1. Autonomous Controller FCN-500,

A1.1 Structure and Names of Each Component Unit

Control unit SB bus repeat module

extension unit T-joint

Figure Component Units of the Autonomous Controller FCN-500, FCN-100

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28, 2016-00

n Maximum Number of I/O Modules

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28, 2016-00

Ethernet NFSB Ethernet

Unit:1 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Unit:1 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Unit:2 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Unit:2 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Unit:3 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Unit:3 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

[Base module (NFBU050)]

IOM I/O module

NFSB SB bus repeat module

Figure Installation Example of Autonomous Control FCN-500, FCN-100 Modules

IM 34P02Q01-01E 21st Edition : Apr. 28, 2016-00

Figure External View for FCN-500, FCN-100 (When Using NFBU200)

l When Attaching to DIN Rail

Figure External View for FCN-500, FCN-100 (When Using NFBU200)